Jak widać, nie działa readout, jak i samo odchylanie po osi X, nie widać co z osia Y, wiec być może coś nie tak z zasilaniem, sprawdź linie zasilające czy są OK. Odłącz ten wentylator. Zapytaj również Kolego co odłączał podczas wymiany. Dodano po 21 : Tu masz serwisówkę.
TEK SERVICE
MANUAL
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
PORTABLE
OSCILLOSCOPE
SERVICE
I WARNING
(
THE FOLLOWING SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS ARE
FOR USE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. TO
AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, DO NOT PERFORM ANY
SERVICING OTHER THAN THAT CONTAINED IN
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS UNLESS YOU ARE
QUALIFIED TO DO SO. REFER TO OPERATORS
SAFETY SUMMARY AND SERVICE SAFETY SUMMARY PRIOR TO PERFORMING ANY SERVICE.
Please Check for
CHANGE INFORMATlON
at the Rear of This Manual
First Printing DEC 1987
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
Scans
Arfek Media
1042 Plummer Cir. SW
Rochester, MN 55902
" High resolution scans of obsolete technical manuals "
If your looking for a quality scanned technical manual in PDF format please visit
our WEB site at www.artekmedia.com or drop us an email at
ma~ilals@arlekmedia.com we will be happy to email you a current list of the
and
manuals we have available.
If you don't see the manual you need on the tist drop us a tine anyway we may
still be able to point you to other sources. If you have an existing manual you
would like scanned please write for details, This can often be done very
reasonably in consideration for adding your manual to our library.
Typically the scans in our manuals are done as follows;
I)
Typed text pages are typically scanned in black and white at 300 dpi.
2) Photo pages are typically scanned in gray scale mode at 600 dpi
3 ) Schematic diagram pages are typiwlly scanned in btack and white at 600
dpi unless the original manual had colored high lighting (as is the case for
some 70's vintage TeMronix manuals).
If you purchased this manual from us (typically through our Ebay name of
ArtekMedia) thank you very much. If you received this from a well-meaning
" friend " for free we would appreciate your treating this much like you would
" share ware " . By that we mean a donation of at least $5-10 per manual is
appreciated i recognition o the time (a manual can take as much as 40 hours to
n
f
reproduce, book, link etc.), energy and qualrty of effort that went into preserving
c can be
this manual. Donations via PayPal go to: r n-a n u a l s ~ ~ i ~ l ~ or o r n
mailed to us the address above.
-.
T anks
Dave 8 Lynn Henderson
Artek Media
-
7
-
Copyright O 1987 Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Contents of this
publication may not be reproduced in any form without the written
permission of Tektronix, Inc.
Products of Tektronix, Inc. and its subsidiaries are covered by U.S. and
foreign patents issued and pending.
TEKTRONIX, TEK, SCOPE-MOBILE, and
of Tektronix, Inc.
are registered trademarks
Printed in U.S.A. Specification and price change privileges are reserved.
Each instrument has a serial number on a panel insert, tag, or stamped on the
chassis. The first number or letter designates the country of manufacture.
The last five digits of the serial number are assigned sequentially and are
unique to each instrument.Those manufacturedin the United States have six
unique digits. The country of manufacture is identified as follows:
BOO0000 Tektronix, lnc., Beaverton, Oregon, U.S.A.
H O O O TEKTRONIX, INC., Hong Kong
KOO
G I 00000 Tektronix Guernsey, Ltd., Channel Islands
E200000 Tektronix United Kingdom, Ltd., Marlow
J300000 SonyrTektronix, Japan
H700000 Tektronix Holland, NV, Heerenveen,
The Netherlands
2246A Service
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
Page
.................. v i
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
........... viii
............. ix
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
VERTICAL INPUTS
(Diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
VERTICAL PREAMPS AND
OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
(Diagram 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM
(Diagram 3) ................ 3-4
DISPLAY AND TRIGGER LOGIC
AND PROCESSOR INTERFACE
(Diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
A AND B SWEEPS AND
DELAY COMPARATORS
(Diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER (Diagram 6) . . . . . . 3-6
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJUST,
AND CONTROL MUX
(Diagram 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR
(Diagram 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
READOUT SYSTEM
(Diagram 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
SWITCH BOARD AND INTERFACE
(Diagram 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
ADC AND DAC SYSTEM
(Diagram 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DAC SUBSYSTEM
(Diagram 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
POWER SUPPLY
(Diagram 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DETAILED DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . 3-8
VERTICAL INPUTS
(Diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.
LIST OF TABLES
OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY
SERVICING SAFETY SUMMARY
Section 1
SPECIFICATION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
STANDARD ACCESSORIES . . . . 1-1
RECOMMENDED RECALIBRATION
SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 1
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS . . 1-1
Section 2
PREPARATION FOR USE
SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
LINE VOLTAGE AND POWER
CORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
LINE FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
INSTRUMENT COOLING . . . . . . . 2-2
START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
DETAILED OPERATING
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Section 3
THEORY OF OPERATION
SECTION ORGANIZATION . . . . . 3-1
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
BLOCK DIAGRAM
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
VERTICAL PREAMP AND OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER (Diagram 2) . . . . . 3-1 1
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM
(Diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 4
2246A Service
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)
Page
Page
DISPLAY AND TRIGGER LOGIC
AND PROCESSOR INTERFACE
(Diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
A AND B SWEEP GENERATORS
AND DELAY COMPARATORS
(Diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
(Diagram 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJUST
AND CONTROL MUX
(Diagram 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR
(Diagram 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
READOUT SYSTEM
(Diagram 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
SWITCH BOARD AND
INTERFACE (Diagram 10) . . . . 3-53
ADC AND DAC SYSTEM
(Diagram 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
DAC SYSTEM
(Diagram 12)
3-54
POWER SUPPLY
(Diagram 13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
MAIN BOARD POWER
DISTRIBUTION
(Diagram 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
PROCESSOR POWER BOARD
DISTRIBUTION (Diagram 15) . . 3-61
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
(Diagram 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
..............
Section 4
PERFORMANCE CHECK PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION ................ 4-1
Test Equipment Required . . . . . 4-1
Performance Check Interval . . . 4-1
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
INDEX TO PERFORMANCE
CHECK PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . 4-4
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACE ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . .
GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VERTICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-6
lnput COUPLING Functional
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CH 1 AND CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CH 3 and CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
CH 1 and CH 2 lnput
COUPLING Trace Shift . . . . . . . 4-7
CH 2 INVERT Trace Shift . . . . . 4-7
CH 1 and CH 2 VAR
VOLTSIDIV Range . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Low-Frequency Linearity
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical
Deflection Accuracy . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Ch 3 and CH 4 Vertical
Deflection Accuracy . . . . . . . . . 4-8
ADD Mode and CH 2 INVERT
Deflection Accuracy . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Vertical POSITION Range
(all channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
CH 1 to CH 2 Signal
Delay Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0
CH 1 to CH 4 Signal
Delay Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0
CH 3 to CH 4 Signal
Delay Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0
CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical
Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 0
CH 3 and CH 4 Vertical
Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1
SCOPE BW (Bandwidth
Limit) Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1
--_
2246A Service
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)
Page
Page
Common-mode Rejection
Ratio
4-1 1
Channel Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1
AC-Coupled Lower -3 dB
Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 2
Vertical ALT and CHOP
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
BEAM FIND Functional
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
A and B Trace
Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 3
TRIGGERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4
500 Hz Trigger
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4
500 kHz Trigger
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 5
25 MHz Trigger
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 5
150 MHz Trigger
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 5
Single Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . 4-1 6
Trigger LEVEL Control
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 6
TV Field Trigger
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 6
TV Line Trigger
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 7
Line Trigger Functional
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 7
HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 8
A and B Sweep Length . . . . . . 4-18
Horizontal POSITION
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 8
VAR SECIDIV Range . . . . . . . . 4-1 8
Magnifier Registration . . . . . . . 4-1 8
A and B Timing Accuracy
and Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 9
A and B Magnified Timing
Accuracy and Linearity . . . . . . 4-20
Delay Time Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Delay Time Accuracy . . . . . . . 4-21
Delay Time Position
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
X-Axis Gain Accuracy . . . . . . 4-21
X-Y Phase Difference . . . . . . 4-21
4-22
X-Axis Bandwidth
MEASUREMENT CURSORS . . . . . 4-23
I t SEC 4 and I+ 1 ISEC 4
Cursor Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
I t PHASE 4 Cursor
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
It VOLTS 4 Cursor
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
/h VOLTS 4 Cursor
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Tracking Cursors Position
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
CH 1ICH 2 VOLTMETER . . . . . . 4-25
DC Volts Accuracy . . . . . . . . . 4-25
DC Volts Normal Mode
Rejection Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
+Peak. -Peak. Peak-to-Peak
Volts Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
25 MHz +Peak. -Peak. and
Peak-to-Peak Volts
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
100 MHz +Peak. -Peak. and
Peak-to-Peak Volts
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Gated Volts Accuracy . . . . . . 4-26
EXTERNAL Z-AXIS. PROBE
ADJUST AND FRONT-PANEL
SETUP FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Check External Z-Axis
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
PROBE ADJUST Output . . . . . 4-28
AUTO SETUP Functional
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
STOREIRECALL SETUP
Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Run MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS
Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
.....................
..........
iii
2246A Service
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)
-
Page
Page
Section 5
INTRODUCTION
. . .. .. . . .
. .... . . . . .. .
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . 5-1
. . . 5-1
PURPOSE . . .
TEST EQUIPMENT
. . . . . . . . 5-1
REQUIRED
LIMITS AND TOLERANCES. . . . 5-1
PARTIAL PROCEDURES . . . . . 5-1
INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS AND
ADJUSTMENT INTERACTION . . 5-1
PREPARATION FOR
ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . 5-3
INDEX TO ADJUSTMENT
. . . . . 5-3
PROCEDURE .
POWER SUPPLY, DISPLAY,
AND Z-AXIS . .
. . . . . . 5-4
INITIAL CONTROL
SETTINGS . . . . . .
. 5-4
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . 5-4
VERTICAL . . . .
. . . 5-7
INITIAL CONTROL
. . . . . 5-7
SETTINGS . .
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
HORIZONTAL . . . . . . . 5-12
INITIAL CONTROL
SETTINGS
. . . . . . . . 5-1 2
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2
MEASUREMENT BANDWIDTH AND
SELF CHARACTERIZATION . . . 5-14
INITIAL CONTROL
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 4
PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 4
.. .. .
....
.............
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
. .. ..
.
. .
.
INSPECTION AND
CLEANING . . . . . .
. ..
6-2
6-2
... . ....
6-2
LUBRICATION
..............
...
PERIODIC READJUSTMENT . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . .
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TROUBLESHOOTING AlDS . . . .
6-4
SEMICONDUCTOR CHECKS
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
. . . . . . ..
TROUBLESHOOTING
EQUIPMENT . . . . . .
6-6
. ..... .. . .
TROUBLESHOOTING
TECHNIQUES.. . . .
6-6
. . .... . . . .
. . .. .. .. . ..
.. . .. ..
. . . ...... . . . .
. .. . ... . . . .
. .
..
. .. .. .. ..
. . .. .. . . .
.. . . .
. .
. . .. . .
. . . .
... . . .. ...
.... . .. ...
INTERNAL TESTING
CAPABILITIES .
. . . . . ... . . . .
SERVICE MODE . . . . . . . . . . .
.
TROUBLESHOOTING MEASUREMENT ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
.
.
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . 6-34
INTRODUCTION
............
MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS . .
. ... . . . .. ..
OBTAINING REPLACEMENT
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.. . .
REPACKAGING FOR
SHIPMENT . . . . . . . . .
. .
MAINTENANCE AlDS
.....
.......
LITHIUM BATTERY (B2501)
..
TRANSISTORS AND
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Section 6
.....
SOLDERING TECHNIQUES . . .
MAINTENANCE
STATIC-SENSITIVE
COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
.
6-10
6-1 1
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
BY DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 9
. .
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . .
.
--
-
2246A Service
TABLE OF CONTENTS (cont)
Page
Section 7
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
INTERNATIONAL POWER
CORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
OPTION 1R RACKMOUNTED
INSTRUMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Page
Section 8
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS
Section 9
DIAGRAMS
Section 10 REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS
CHANGE INFORMATION
2246A Service
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Page
Figure
The 2246A Portable Oscilloscope . . . . . . . x
5-1
Areas of waveform affected by
HF compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Maximum input voltage vs
frequency derating curve for the
CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, or
CH 4 input connectors
5-2
2-5 ns Timing
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
6-1
Dimensional outline drawing,
standard cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Dimensional outline drawing,
rackmount cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
1-3
2-1
5-1 2
Power-on test failure codes
6-1 0
6-2
Main SERVICE MENU
.......
.............
6-1 1
6-3
SERVICE MENU with DIAGNOSE
choice selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 2
6-4
Main board removal
6-5
Delay-line connections to top of
Main board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
9-1
Color codes for resistors
9-2
Semiconductor lead configurations
9-3
Locating components on schematic
diagram and circuit board illustrations
Trigger Logic IC (FLIC, U602)
pin out diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
1-2
...................
Readout interface relative
signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
1-1
9-4a 2246A block diagram-part
1
9-4b 2246A block diagram-part
2
Optional power cords
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Simplified block diagram
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Display Sequencer IC (SLIC, U600)
pin out diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Simplified Sweep circuit
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
A Sweep Start circuit waveforms
. . . . 3-38
Simplified diagram of the DC
Restorer circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Display addresses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Character pixel arrangement
Power Supply block diagram
. . . . . . . 3-52
. . . . . . . 3-56
Preregulator switching waveforms
. . . 3-59
9-5
AlO-Main board
9-6
Hybrid pin identifiers
9-7
A1 2-Potentiometer board
9-8
A8-CRT control board
9-9
A1 6-Processor board
9-1 0 A14-Switch board
9-1 1 A1 5 DAC Subsystem board
9-1 2 A1 8-Power
4-1
Probe compensation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
..............
supply board
9-1 3 A1 0-Main board adjustment locations
6-43
.
--
2246A Service
LIST OF TABLES
Table
1-1
1-2
1-3
Page
. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . 1-1 5
Mechanical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . 1-1 7
Electrical Characteristics
Page
3-25 Front-Panel Multiplexer Channel
Select Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3-46
3-27
3-51
Field and Mixer Attribute Bit
Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . 3-10
Input Coupling control Bit States . . . . 3-1 1
Shift Register 0 Bit Assignment
Display Possibilities
CH 1 and CH 2 Attenuator and Gain
Control Bit States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1
3-4
3-5
3-6
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 2
CH 3 and CH 4 Gain Control Bit . . . . . 3-12
Trigger Selection Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
....
Position Enable Bit Assignment . . . . .
3-26 Measurement Processor Signals
..............
Possible Signal Conditions
to U2416 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH 2 INVERT Control Bit
..........
Accuracy . . . . . . .
4-1
Test Equipment Required
4-2
4-2
Signal-to-Graticule
4-8
3-7
Display Sequencer (U600) Control
Bit Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
4-3
Settings for Timing Accuracy
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
3-8
A Trigger Source Select Bits
. . . . . . . 3-21
4-4
Delay Time Accuracy
3-9
Horizontal Display Mode Select Bits
5-1
Adjustment Interactions
Power Supply Voltage Limits
3-10 Shift Register 1 Control Bit Data
. . 3-21
. . . . 3-22
.............
4-21
............
........
5-2
3-1 1 Trigger Source Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
5-2
3-1 2 Vertical MODE Select
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
6-1
Relative Susceptibility to
Static-Discharge Damage
6-2
External Inspection Checklist
6-3
Internal Inspection Checklist
6-4
3-1 6 Horizontal and Vertical Display
Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Power Supply voltage and
Ripple Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-5
SERVICE MENU Selections
. . . 3-29
. . . 3-30
Delay Mode Selection Control Bits . . . 3-30
Peak Volts Detection Mode Logic . . . 3-30
3-13 Horizontal MODE Select
. . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-1 4 Holdoff Counter Encoding
. . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-1 5 Display Sequencer channel Select
Logic Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
5-5
..........
6-1
........
........
6-3
6-3
6-12
6-6
........
DIAGNOSE ROUTINES . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Control Register Signal-bit Names
6-7
Horizontal Display State Logic
......
6-22
3-19
6-8
Measurement Processor I/O
Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6-9
Measurement Error Troubleshooting
Hints
3-1 7 Trigger Logic IC Addressing Logic
3-20
. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
A Sweep Timing Selections . . . . . . . . 3-36
3-21 Z-Axis Switching Logic
3-22
..........................
6-26
................
6-36
6-1 0 Maintenance Aids
3-23 B Sweep Timing Selections . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3-24 HDO and HD1 Logic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
9-1
6-16
Signal Line Locations
2246A Service
OPERATORS SAFETY SUMMARY
- \
-
The safety information in this summary is for operating personnel, Warnings and cautions will also be found
throughout the manual where they apply.
Terms in this Manual
Grounding the Product
CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices
that could result in damage to the equipment or
other property.
--
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock,
plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before making any connections to the product
input or output terminals. A protective ground connection, by way of the grounding conductor in the
power cord, is essential for safe operation.
WARNING statements identify conditions or practices
that could result in personal injury or loss of life.
Terms as Marked on Equipment
CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as one reads the markings, or
a hazard to property, including the equipment itself,
DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the marking.
-
Danger Arising From Loss of Ground
Upon loss of the ~rotective-groundconnection, all
accessible conductive Parts, including knobs and
controls that may appear to be insulating, can fender an electric shock.
Use the Proper Power Cord
Symbols in this Manual
This symbol indicates where applicable
cautionary or other information is to
be found. For maximum input voltage
see Table 1-1.
Symbols as Marked on Equipment
k
DANGER-High voltage.
.
-
Use only the power cord and connector specified for
your product.
-
Use only a power cord that is in good condition.
For detailed information on power cords and connectars, see Figure 2-2.
-
Use the Proper Fuse
To avoid fire hazard, use only a fuse of the correct
type, voltage rating and current rating as specified in
the parts list for your product.
Protective ground (earth) terminal.
ATTENTION-Refer to manual.
Power Source
This product is intended to operate from a power
source that does not apply more than 250 V rms
between the supply conductors or between either
supply conductor and ground. A protective ground
connection, by way of the grounding conductor in
the power cord, is essential for safe operation.
viii
Do Not Operate in an Explosive
Atmosphere
-
To avoid explosion, do not operate this instrument in
an explosive atmosphere unless it has been specifically certified for such operation.
DO Not Remove Covers or Panels
To avoid personal injury, do not remove the product
covers or panels. Do not operate the product without the covers and panels properly installed.
-
2246A Service
SERVICING SAFETY SUMMARY
FOR QUALlFlED SERVlCE PERSONNEL ONLY
Refer also to the preceding Operators Safety Summary
Do Not Service Alone
Disconnect power before removing protective
panels, soldering, or replacing components.
Do not perform internal service or adjustment of this
product unless another person capable of rendering
first aid and resuscitation is present.
Power Source
Use Care When Servicing With Power On
Dangerous voltages exist at several points in this
product. To avoid personal injury, do not touch exposed connections or components while power is
on.
This product is intended to operate from a power
source that does not apply more than 250 volts rms
between the supply conductors or between either
supply conductor and ground. A protective ground
connection by way of the grounding connector in the
power cord is essential for safe operation.
2246A Service
The 2246A Portable Oscilloscope.
X
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA *
Section 1-2246A
Service
SPECIFICATION
INTRODUCTION
The 2246A is a 100 MHz, four-channel, dual-sweep,
portable oscilloscope for general-purpose use. A
microprocessor-based operating system controls
most of the functions in the instrument, including a
fully integrated menu-driven voltage and time
measurement system with SmartCursors@. Other
features include single-button automatic front-panel
setup and a menu-driven storelrecall setup function. A menu-driven service mode provides for
configuring of certain menu and readout displays,
internal calibration, and servicing diagnostics.
The vertical deflection system has four input channels. Two channels have 11 basic deflection factors
from 2 mV to 5 V per division, and two channels
have two basic deflection factors of 0.1 V and 0.5 V
per division. Basic deflection factors can be
extended with attenuator probes. VOLTSIDIV
readouts are switched to display the correct vertical
scale factors when properly coded probes are connected to the vertical input connectors.
The horizontal deflection system provides single,
dual, or delayed sweeps from 0.5 s to 20 ns per
division (delayed sweep, 5 ms to 20 ns per division).
The trigger system provides stable triggering over
the full bandwidth of the vertical deflection system.
Alphanumeric crt ,readouts of the vertical and horizontal scale factors are displayed at the bottom of
the screen. On-screen vertical and horizontal
cursors provide accurate voltage, time, frequency,
and phase measurements; measurement values are
displayed at the top of the crt.
The measurement
features
include voltage
measurements for +Peak, -Peak, Peak-to-Peak,
and average DC, or positionable cursors for
measuring voltage difference, time difference,
frequency, and phase. SmartCursors@ that visually
track voltage measurements, trigger levels, and
ground can be placed on displayed waveforms.
Delay-time and delta-delay measurements for time,
frequency, and phase are available in ALT and B
Horizontal Modes.
By pressing a single button (AUTO SETUP), the
front-panel controls can be set up to produce a
usable waveform display based on the voltage and
time characteristics of the input signals.
The StorelRecall system lets you store and recall up
to 20 different front-panel setups. Stored setups
can be arranged in sequences as required for
specific applications.
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
The following items are standard
shipped with the 2246A instrument:
accessories
2 Probes, 1OX, 1.5 meter, with accessories
1 Power cord
1 Power cord clamp
1 Operators manual
1 Reference guide
1 CRT filter, blue plastic (installed)
1 Fuse, 2A, 250 V, slow-blow
1 Accessory pouch, ziploc
See Section 8 " Options and Accessories " for part
numbers and further information about standard
accessories and a list of the recommended optional
accessories. For more information on accessories
and ordering assistance, contact your Tektronix
representative or local Tektronix Field Office.
RECOMMENDED RECALIBRATION
SCHEDULE
To ensure accurate measurements, check the performance of this instrument every 2000 hours of
operation, or, if used infrequently, once each year.
Replacement of components in the instrument may
also necessitate readjustment of the affected
circuits.
PERFORMANCE CONDITIONS
The electrical characteristics given in Table 1-1 are
valid when the instrument has been adjusted at an
ambient temperature between +20°C and +30°C,
has had a warm-up period of at least 20 minutes,
and is operating at an ambient temperature between
O°C and +40°C (unless otherwise noted).
Specif ication-2246A Service
Items listed in the Performance Requirements
column are verifiable qualitative or quantitative limits
that define the measurement capabilities of the
instrument.
of MIL-T-28800D, paragraphs 4.5.5.1.3, 4.5.5.1.4,
and 4.5.5.1.2.2 for Type Ill, Class 5 equipment,
except where noted otherwise.
Environmental
characteristics
are
given
in
Table 1-2. This instrument meets the requirements
Physical characteristics of the instrument are listed
in Table 1-3.
--
--
Specif ication-2246A Service
Table 1-1
Electrical Characteristics
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
- CH 1 AND CH 2
Deflection Factor
Range
2 mVldiv to 5 Vldiv in 1-2-5 sequencea
Accuracy (includes
ADD MODE and CH 2
INVERT)
15°C to 35 " C
Within t 2%.
-10°C to 15°C
and 35°C to 55°C
Within 2 3%.a
Variable Range
.
Increases deflection factor by at least 2.5: 1
Frequency Response
(-3 dB bandwidth)
-10°C to 35°C
5 mV1div to 5 Vldiv
Dc to 100 MHz (at the probe tip).
2 mVIdiv
Dc to 90 MHz (at the probe tip).
35°C to 55°C
Dc to 90 MHz (at the probe tip).a
AC Coupled Lower
-3 dB Point
1X Probe
10 Hz or less.
X
1O Probe
1 Hz or less.
Step Response (5-division
step)
Rise Time
-10°C to 35°C
5 mVIdiv to 5 Vldiv
3.5 ns or less (calculated)?
2 mvldiv
3.9 ns or less (calculated) .a
35°C to 55°C
Delay Match (CH I to CH 2)
3.9 ns or less (calculated) ?
Less than 200 ps difference.
a Performance Requirement not checked in manual.
Specif ication-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
Common Mode Rejection
Ratio (CMRR)
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
At least 10:l at 50 MHz for signals of eight
divisions or less with VOLTSIDIV VAR adjusted
for best CMRR at 50 kHz.
Channel Isolation
(attenuation of
deselected channel)
10 MHz
50 dB ( = 316:l)
2 mV1Div to 0.5 VIDiv
100 MHz
34 dB ( = 50:l)
Channel isolation tested with eight-division input signal.
Trace Shift as VAR
VOLTSIDIV is Turned
1 division or less.
Invert Trace Shift
1 division or less.
Trace Shift Between
VOLTSIDIV Switch Positions
0.2 division or less.
Trace Shift Between GND
and DC input Coupling
-10°C to 35°C
Less than 0.5 mV.
35°C to 55OC
Less than 2 m v a
Position Range
At least
+_
11 divisions from graticule center.
lnput Characteristics
Resistance
1 M a +0.15%.a
Capacitance
20 PF $1 p ~ a
Capacitance Match
Between Any Two
VOLTSIDIV Settings
2 0.5 pF.
Maximum Input
Volts
400 V (dc + peak ac) ; 800 V p-p at 10 kHz
or less. " (See Figure 1-1 .)
A
a Performance Requirement not checked in manual.
Specif ication-2246A
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
- CH 3 AND CH 4
Deflection Factor
0.1 V per division and 0.5 V per division?
Range
Accuracy
15°C to 35OC
Within +2%.
-10°C to 55°C
Within
+ 3%.
Frequency Response
(-3 dB bandwidth)
-10°C to 35°C
Dc to 100 MHz (at the probe tip).
35°C to 55°C
Dc to 90 MHz (at the probe tip) . "
Step Response (5-division step)
Rise Time
-10°C to 35°C
3.5 ns or less. "
35°C to 55°C
3.9 ns or less. "
Delay Match (CH 3 to CH 4)
Less than 200 ps difference.
Trace Shift Between
VOLTSIDIV Settings
1 division or less.
Position Range
At least f l 1 divisions from graticule center.
Channel Isolation
(attenuation of
deselected channel)
34 dB or more at 100 MHz.
Channel isolation tested with eight-division
input signal.
lnput Characteristics
Resistance
1 M i l 21 .0%. "
Capacitance
20 pF -+I ~
p
Maximum Input
Volts
400 V (dc + peak ac); 800 V p-p at 10 kHz or lessa
(See Figure 1-1 )
A
'performance Requirement not checked in manual.
.
.
~
Service
Specif ication-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
I
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth Limit
(-3 dB bandwidth)
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
I
1
Low Frequency Linearity
(Relative to
center screen)
- ALL CHANNELS
20 MHz 215%.
Within
+ 5%.
Linearity is measured by positioning a two-division test signal
anywhere on screen and noting the amplitude change.
TRACE SEP Control
Position Range
At least f 4 divisions.
CHOP Mode Clock Rate
625 kHz & lo%. "
Delay Match (CH 1 or CH 2
to CH 3 or CH 4)
I
Less than 200 ps difference.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Sweep Range
A Sweep
0.5 sldiv to 20 nsldiv in a 1-2-5 ~ e q u e n c e . ~
X I 0 magnifier extends maximum sweep speed to 2 nsldiv.
B Sweep
5.0 msldiv to 20 nsldiv in a 1-2-5 sequence?
XI0 magnifier extends maximum sweep speed to 2 nsldiv.
Accuracy
Unmagnified
Magnified
15°C to 35°C
f 2%
-+ 3%
-10°C to 15°C
f 3%
+ 4%
and 35°C to 55°C
Sweep Accuracy applies over the center eight
divisions. Excludes the first 114 division or
25 ns from the start of the magnified sweep
and anything beyond the 100th magnified
division.
a
Performance Requirement not checked in manual.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
--- -
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM (cont)
Sweep Linearity
(relative to center two
displayed divisions)
POSITION Control Range
Normal Displays
t 5%.
Able to move the start of the sweep to the right of the
center vertical graticule; able to move a time mark
corresponding to the end of the tenth division of an
unmagnified sweep to the left of the center graticule.
X-Y Displays
At least 213 divisionsa
X I 0 Magnifier
Expands the normal sweep by ten times around that portion
of the sweep positioned at the center vertical graticule linena
Registration (XI 0 to X1 )
0.5 division or less shift.
Variable Control Range
Continuously variable between calibrated SECIDIV settings.
Extends both the A and B sweep time per division by at least
a factor of 2.5.
Sweep Length
Greater than 10 divisions.
Delay Time
Delay Control Range
Less than 0.1 division to 10 times the A SECIDIV switch
setting. Maximum value does not exceed end of the A sweep.
Jitter
1 part in 20,000, or less, peak-to-peak, during a twosecond time interval.
Delta Time
Delta Control Range
0 to greater than 9.9 divisions to the right of setting of DELAY
control, but maximum value does not exceed end of the A
Sweep.
a Performance Requirement not checked in manual.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
A AND B TRIGGER
Sensitivity-CH 1 through
CH 4: AUTO LEVEL,
NORM AND SINGLE
SEQUENCE
COUPLING
DC
Trigger sensitivity is defined as the minimum peak-to-peak
sine-wave trigger signal amplitude required to show the test
signal with horizontal jitter of less than 3.0% of one period
(p-p viewed over two seconds).
0.35 division from dc to 25 MHz, increasing to 1.0 division at
150 MHz (100 MHz in AUTO LEVEL).
NOISE REJECT
1.4 division from dc to 25 MHz; increasing to 2.2 division at
100 MHz. 0.5 division or less will not trigger.
HF REJECT
0.35 division from dc to 50 kHz; attenuates signals above
upper -3 dB cutoff frequency of 70 kHz.
LF REJECT
0.35 division from 100 kHz to 25 MHz, increasing to 1.O division
at 150 MHz; attenuates signals below the lower -3 dB cutoff
frequency of 50 kHz.
AC
0.35 division from 50 Hz to 25 MHz, increasing to 1.O division
at 150 MHz (100 MHz in AUTO LEVEL) ; attenuates signals
below the lower -3 dB cutoff frequency of 10 Hz.
TV LINE, TV FIELD
0.5 division of composite sync will achieve a stable display.
AUTO LEVEL and AUTO MODE
Trigger Low-Frequency Limit
10 Hz.
LEVEL Control Range
t 20 divisions referred to the appropriate vertical input.
This range is sufficient to allow triggering at any point on a
displayed waveform for all modes except " ADD " . In ADD, the
combined range of the two position controls exceeds the
trigger level range, making it possible (though unlikely) to pull
a signal on screen for display but fail to trigger to it due to
insufficient trigger level range.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
k (0.3% of reading + 10% of one vertical division).
TRIGGER LEVEL
READOUT Accuracy
Increases A Sweep holdoff time by at least a factor of 10.'
HOLDOFF Control Range
FUNCTIONS WITH DIGITAL READOUT
Specifications for functions with digital readout are valid only
when the ambient temperature is within ?lO°C of the
temperature at the time of the last SELF CAL. For maximum
performance, a recent SELF CAL is recommended.
VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS
DC VOLTS
Accuracy
Normal Mode
Rejection Ratio
k (0.5% of reading + 2% of the SECIDIV division + 250 pV).
Greater than 50 dB at 50 or 60 Hz.
PLUS or MINUS Peak
Accuracy-Full Bandwidth
25 Hz to 25 MHz
Greater Than
25 MHz to 100 MHz
2 (2.0% of reading + 15% of one vertical division
+ 1 mV) .
+0.5 dB/-3 dB +1 mV. Follows the trigger system frequency
response curve.
Accuracy-Bandwidth Limited
(25 Hz to 10 MHz)
+ (2 .O% of reading + 10% of one vertical division + 0.3 mV) .
Gated Region Minimum Width
(when gated)
(0.2 division
a~erforrnance
Requirement not checked in manual.
+ 50 ns)
or less.
Specif ication-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
PK-PK VOLTS
Accuracy-Full Bandwidth
+ 0.3
.
25 Hz to 25 MHz
k (2.0% of reading + 15% of one vertical division
Greater Than
25 MHz to 100 MHz
+0.5 dB/-3 dB f 1.5 mV. Follows the trigger system frequency
response curve.
mV)
Accuracy-Bandwidth Limited
25 Hz to 10 MHz
k (2.0% of reading + 10% of one vertical division + 0.5 mV).
Gated Region Minimum Width
(when gated)
(0.2 division
+ 50 ns)
or less.
CURSOR FUNCTIONS
k SEC 4
(manually positioned
cursors)
Accuracy
2 (0.5% of reading + 2% of the SECIDIV setting).
k+ 1ISEC 4 (manually positioned
cursors)
Accuracy
k VOLTS+
Readout calculated from
k SEC 4 cursor positions.
(manually positionec
cursors)
Accuracy
+
- (0.5% of reading + 2% of the VOLTSIDIV setting
frequency display errors).
+ high-
+ (0.5% of reading + 2% of the VOLTS/DIV setting
frequency display errors).
+ high-
h VOLTS 4
(manually positioned cursor)
Accuracy
Specif ication-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
-
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
PHASE 4 (manually
positioned cursors)
k
Accuracy
Readout calculated from
b sEc d
cursor positions.
TRACK MEASUREMENT
Position Accuracy (Cursor
position on waveform
versus digitally displayed
measurement value)
Within
+ 0.05 vertical division.
TRACK TRIG LEVEL
Position Accuracy (Cursor
position on waveform
versus digitally displayed
measurement value)
Within 2 0.05 vertical division.
TRACK GROUND
Position Accuracy (Cursor
position on waveform
versus baseline displayed
with grounded input)
Within
+ 0.05 vertical division.
DELTA TlME FUNCTIONS
DELTA TlME Accuracy
+ (0.5% of reading + 1.O% of one division of the A Sweep).
DELTA 1/TIME Accuracy
Readouts calculated using DELTA TlME difference.
DELTA Phase Accuracy
Readouts calculated using DELTA TlME difference.
Delay Accuracy, A Sweep Trigger
Point to start of B Sweep
+ (0.5% of reading + 5.0% of one division of the A Sweep
+ 25
ns).
Specif ication-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
X-Y OPERATION
Deflection Factors
Same as Vertical deflection system with the
VOLTS/DIV variable controls in calibrated
detent position. "
Accuracy
Y Axis
15°C to 35°C
Within
+ 2%.
-10°C to 15°C
and 35°C to 55°C
Within
+ 3%. a
Within
+ 3%.
Within
+ 3%.a
X Axis
15°C to 35°C
-10°C to 15°C
and 35°C to 55°C
Horizontal (X-Axis) -3 dB Bandwidth
3 MHz or more.
Phase Match (DC Coupled)
f 3 degrees from dc to 50 kHz.
EXTERNAL Z-AXIS INPUT
Active Region Lower Threshold
(intensity decreases above this
voltage)
+1.8 volts or less.
Signal Required to Modulate an A or
B Trace of Normal Intensity
+3.8 volts or less (usable frequency: DC
Maximum Input Voltage
30 V (dc
or less.a
Input Loading
Represents less than one LSTTL load.'
a
-
10 MHz).
External Z-Axis signal does not affect the readout or the
intensified zone intensity.
Performance Requirement not checked in manual.
+ peak ac);
30 V p-p ac at 1 kHz
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-1 (cont)
Electrical Characteristics
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
PROBE ADJUST OUTPUT
Overshoot (rising and falling edge)
0.1% or less.
Output Voltage on PROBE
ADJUST Jack
0.5 V k2% into 1 M a load.
Repetition Rate
1 kHz k25%.
FRONT PANEL SETUP MEMORY
Battery
3.0 V, 1200 mAH, Type BR-213AE2P. ~ i t h i u m ~
WARNING -To avoid personal injury, have battery replaced
only by a qualified service person who understands proper
handling and disposal procedures for Lithium batteries.
Battery Shelf Life
At least five yearsa
Data Retention Time
At least three years, or the remainder of the shelf life,
whichever is less?
POWER SOURCE
Line Voltage Range
90 Vac to 250 v a c a
Line Frequency
48 Hz to 445 Hz. a
Line Fuse
2 A, 250 V, slow blow?
Maximum Power Consumption
100 Watts (155 VA) .a
CRT DISPLAY
Display Area
8 by 10 c m a
Geometry
Vertical
2112 minor (0.1 div) at 8 by 8 cm centered area.
Horizontal
2112 minor (0.1 div) at 8 by 10 cm centered area.
Trace Rotation Range
Adequate to align trace with center horizontal graticule line.
Standard Phosphor
P31 .a
Y-Axis Orthogonality
0.1 division or less, over eight vertical divisions. No adjustment.
Nominal Accelerating Voltage
16.5 kV,a
a Performance Requirement not checked in manual,
Specification-2246A Service
FREQUENCY
6555-21
Figure 1-1. Maximum input voltage vs frequency derating curve for the CH 1, CH 2, CH 3,
or CH 4 input connectors.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-2
Environmental Characteristics
DESCRIPTION
CHARACTERISTICS
STANDARD INSTRUMENT
Environmental Requirements
Instrument meets or exceeds the environmental requirements
of MIL-T-28800D for Type Ill, Class 3, Style D equipmenta
Temperature
Operating
-lO°C to +55OC (+14 " F to +I31 OF).
Non-operating
-51 O to +71O (-60° F to +160°F).
C
C
Tested to MIL-T-28800D paragraphs 4.5.5.1.3 and 4.5.5.1.4,
except in 4.5.5.1.3, steps 4 and 5 (-1 0 O operating test) are
C
C
performed ahead of step 2 (-51 O non-operating test).
Equipment shall remain off upon return to room ambient during
step 6. Excessive condensation shall be removed before
operating during step 7.
Altitude
Operating
To 4,572 m (15,000 ft). Maximum operating temperature
decreases 1°C per 1000 ft above 5000 ft.
Non-Operating
To 15,240 m (50,000 ft).
Humidity (Operating and
Non-operating)
Five cycles (120 hours) referenced to MIL-T-28800D
paragraph 4.5.5.1.2.2, for type Ill, class 3 instruments.
Non-operating and operating at 95%, -0% to +2% relative
humidity. Operating at +30°C and +55OC for all modes of
operation. Non-operating at +30°C to +60°C.
Radiated and conducted Emission
required per VDE 0871
Meets Category B.
Electrostatic Discharge
Conforms to Tektronix Standard 062-2862-00.
Vibration (operating)
15 minutes along each of 3 major axes at a total displacement
of 0.25 inch p-p (4 g at 55 Hz) with frequency varied from
10 Hz to 55 Hz in 1-minute sweeps. Hold from 10 minutes
at 55 Hz in each of the three major axes. All major resonances
must be above 55 Hz.
a Performance not checked in manual.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-2 (cont)
Environmental Characteristics
CHARACTERISTICS
Bench Handling Test
(cabinet on and cabinet off)
Transportation
I
I
MIL-STD-81 OD, Method 516.2, Procedure VI (MIL-T-28800D,
Paragraph 4.5.5.4.3).
Meets the limits of the National Safe Transit Association test
procedure 1A-B-1; excursion of 1 inch p-p at 4.63 Hz (1.Ig)
for 30 minutes on the bottom and 30 minutes on the side
(for a total of 60 minutes).
Packaged Vibration Test
Package Drop Test
DESCRIPTION
I
Meets the limits of the National Safe Transit Association test
procedure 1A-b-2; 10 drops of 36 inches.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-3
Mechanical Characteristics
DESCRIPTION
CHARACTERISTICS
STANDARD INSTRUMENT
Weight
With Front Cover, Accessories,
and Accessories Pouch
(without manual)
8.9 kg (19.6 Ib).
With Power Cord
7.9 kg (17.4 Ib).
Shipping Weight (Domestic)
11.7 kg (25.8 lb).
Overall Dimensions
Height
See Figure 1-2, Dimensional drawing.
With Feet and Accessories
Pouch (empty)
Approx. 176.5 mm (6.95 in).
Without Accessories Pouch
164 mm (6.46 in).
Width (with handle)
362 mm (14.26 in).
Depth
With Front Cover on
445.3 mm (17.53 in).
With Handle Extended
521 mm (20.51 in).
Cooling
Forced air circulation; no air filter.
Finish
Tek Blue, pebble-grain finish painted on aluminum cabinet.
Construction
Aluminum alloy chassis. Plastic-laminate front panel.
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-3 (cont)
Mechanical Characteristics
DESCRIPTION
CHARACTERISTICS
RACKMOUNT INSTRUMENT
Weight
With Power Cord
10.0 kg (22.0 lb).
Shipping Weight
Domestic, includes manual
Overall Dimensions
14.2 kg (31.3 lb).
See Figure 6-3, Dimensional drawing
Height
Overall
168 mm (6.6 in).
Center of mounting rail
to bottom of cabinet
89 mm (3.5 in).
From cabinet top or bottom
to respective front-panel
mounting holes
38 mm (1.5 in).
Between front-panel mounting holes
102 mm (4.0 in).
Width
Overall
483 mm (19.0 in).
Between mounting hole
centers
464 mm (18.3 in).
Between outer edges
of mounting rails
427 mm (16.8 in).
Between handle centers
450 mm (17.7 in).
Depth
Overall
516 mm (20.31 in).
Front panel to rear of
mounting rail (inside)
465 mm (18.3 in).
Front panel to rear of
mounting rail (outside)
472 mm (18.6 in).
Handles
44 mm (1.73 in).
Specification-2246A Service
Table 1-3 (cont)
Mechanical Characteristics
DESCRIPTION
CHARACTERISTICS
Required Clearance dimensions
I
2 178 mm (7 in).
Height
Width
1
2448 mm (17-518 in).
Depth
1
2508 mm (20 in).
Cooling
I
Forced air circulation; no air filter.
Finish
1
Tek Blue, pebble-grain finish painted on aluminum cabinet.
I
Aluminum alloy chassis, front-panel frame, and rear support.
Plastic-laminate front panel. Glass-laminate circuit boards.
Construction
Specif ication-2246A Service
I
A
1
6.44
[164I 6.16
0561
-
U-
1
1
11.64
1 961
2
4
.
20.53
16.45
[4 181
-
C 21
5 1
14.99
~ 318
1
-
-
-
A
-.
'T
14.25
~3621
11.82
[30 01
I
9.12
C 321
2
1
A
12.90
132 81
12.60
132 01
O
/
r
c.
O
;
#
1
d
A
16.99
J
,
,
rn
[4 321
Dimensions are i n inches [mm]
*
Figure 1-2. Dimensional outline drawing, standard cabinet.
6083-02
Specif ication-2246A Service
4
2.0 in
51 mm
CLEARANCE
RECOMMENDED
AT REAR AND
SIDES FOR
COOLING AND
INSTRUMENT
CONNECTIONS
I
I
I
TOP VIEW
I
I
16.8 in
427 mm
'
I
LEFT
S I D E VIEW
1.750 in
44 mm
1
t
1.5 in
38 mm
4.0 n
102 mm
FRONT VIEW
t
1.5 in
-
19.0 in
483 mm
ALL DIMENSIONS ROUNDED
TO NEAREST TENTH
REAR VIEW
6555-25
Figure 1-3. Dimensional outline drawing, rackmount cabinet.
Section 2-2246A
Sewice
PREPARATION FOR USE
SAFETY
This section tells how to prepare for and to proceed
with the initial start-up of the TEKTRONIX 2246A
Oscilloscope.
Refer to the Safety Summary at the front of this
manual for power source, grounding, and other
safety considerations pertaining to the use of the instrument. Before connecting the oscilloscope to a
power source, read this section and the Safety
Summary.
LlNE VOLTAGE AND POWER CORD
The 2246A operates on line voltages from 90 to
250 V with line frequencies ranging from 48 to
440 Hz. No line voltage selecting is necessary. The
detachable power cord may have to be changed to
match the power source outlet (see Figure 2-1).
AS - Standards Association of Australia
BS - British Standards Institution
CEE - International Commission on Rules for the
Approval of Electrical Equipment
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
(2931-21)655520
Figure 2-1. Optional power cords.
LlNE FUSE
The detachable three-wire power cord has a threecontact plug for connection to both the power
source and the protective ground. The power cord is
secured to the rear panel by a securing clamp. The
protective ground contact on the plug connects
(through the power cord protective grounding conductor) to the accessible metal parts of the instrument. For electrical-shock protection, insert this
plug into a power-source
that has a properly
grounded protective-ground contact.
Instruments are shipped with the required power
cord as ordered by the customer (see Figure 2-1).
Contact your Tektronix representative or local
Tektronix Field Office for additional power-cord
information.
The instrument may be damaged if operated
with the wrong type and rating line fuse
installed.
To verify the proper value of the power-input fuse
for the 2246A, use the following procedure.
1. Disconnect the ac-power
instrument.
source from the
2. Press in the fuse-holder cap with a straightbladed screwdriver, then release it with a slight
counterclockwise rotation.
Preparation For Use-2246A
Service
3. Pull cap (containing fuse) out of fuse holder.
4. Check that the fuse is of the type and rating as
specified on the rear panel.
5. If the installed fuse is not of the correct type and
rating, replace it with a proper fuse and reinstall
the fuse-holder cap.
INSTRUMENT COOLING
You must provide adequate airflow into the instrument to prevent possible damage from overheated
components. Before turning on the power, make
sure that ventilation holes on the bottom and right
side of the cabinet are not blocked. After turning the
instrument on, check that air is being exhausted
from the right side ventilation holes.
START-UP
When the power is turned on, the instrument performs a self-diagnostic routine. If the instrument
fails to come on and operate normally, the Trigger
MODE LEDs may be flashing to indicate the circuit
location of a start-up error. Also, under certain conditions, the Tektronix Part Number of the device
where the error exists may be displayed on the
screen. Refer to Troubleshooting in the Maintenance
section of this manual for an explanation of the
start-up error codes.
When the instrument is turned on, a self-cal routine
may run to set the voltage- and timingmeasurement constants. During normal operation,
the power-on self cal happens only if the stored
constants have been lost as the result of a dead
memory back-up battery. The instrument may be
used with no reduction in the measurement accuracy by running the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS routine from the SERVICE MENU after the instrument
has warmed up for at least 20 minutes.
To run the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS routine:
Press the top and bottom menu-item select buttons.
Select INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU, then SELF CAL
MEASUREMENTS. Press RUN to start the routine,
then QUIT to return to the normal oscilloscope
mode.
DETAILED OPERATING INFORMATION
For operating information for specific instrument
functions, refer to the 2246A Operators Manual.
Section 3-2246A
Service
THEORY OF OPERATION
SECTION ORGANIZATION
-
-
This section contains general and detailed descriptions of the 2246A Oscilloscope circuitry. The Block
Diagram Description describes the general operation
of the instrument functional circuits. Each major
circuit is explained in detail in the Detailed Circuit
Description. Schematic and block diagrams show
the circuit components and interconnections between parts of the circuitry. The circuit descriptions
are arranged in the same order as the schematic
diagrams.
The detailed block diagrams and the schematic
diagrams are in the Diagrams section at the rear of
this manual. Smaller functional diagrams are in this
section near the associated text. The schematic
diagram associated with each circuit description is
identified in the text. For best understanding of the
circuit being described, refer to the applicable schematic and functional block diagrams.
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
Digital Logic Conventions
Digital logic circuits perform many functions within
the instrument. Functions and operation of the logic
circuits are represented by logic symbology and
terminology. Most logic functions are described
using the positive-logic convention. Positive logic is
a system where the more positive of two levels is
the TRUE (or 1) state; the more negative level is the
FALSE (or 0) state. In this logic description, the
TRUE state is high, and the FALSE state is low.
Voltages of a high or low state vary among individual
devices. For specific device characteristics of
common parts, refer to the manufacturer's data
book.
Hybrids
The Channel 1 and Channel 2 attenuators and input
buffers are hybrid devices combining thick-film and
semiconductor technologies. These devices are
made with interconnected circuitry on a single
ceramic carrier and have improved performance
characteristics over a more discrete type circuit.
Linear Devices
The operation of individual linear integrated circuit
devices is described in this section using waveforms
or graphic techniques when needed to illustrate their
circuit action.
BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
VERTICAL INPUTS (Diagram 1)
The Block Diagram Description gives an overview of
the schematic circuit functions as illustrated in Figure 3-1. It is provided as an aid in understanding the
overall operation of the 2246A Oscilloscope circuitry
before individual circuits are discussed in detail. The
Simplified Block Diagram illustration shows the basic
interconnections for signal flow and control signals.
Schematic diagram numbers that are referred to in
the text are shown by a diamond symbol in each
block of the figure.
The signals for viewing or for triggering are applied
to the CH 1 through CH 4 vertical input BNC connectors via coaxial cables or probes. Channels 1 and 2
have a choice of AC or DC input coupling or GND.
Channels 3 and 4 have DC input coupling only.
Scaling of the Channel 1 and Channel 2 input signals
has a range of 2 mV per division to 5 V per division
without the use of external attenuators. Channels 3
and 4 are limited to two input attenuator choices:
0.1 V per div and 0.5 V per div.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
-
CH 1 PREAMP I N
ZERO HYST
TO
(32,
4
+
CH 2 PREAMP I N t
CH 3 PREAMP I N t
CH 4 PREAMP I N
+
-
I
FRONT-PANEL POTS
(EXCEPT A INTEN. B INTEN. READOUT)
Figure 3-1. Simplified block diagram.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Scaling of the Channel 1 and Channel 2 signals is
done by a series of switchable attenuators that provide either no attenuation, X I 0 attenuation, or X I 00
attenuation of the input signal. A low-impedance attenuator following an input signal buffer produces
X I , X2, and X5 attenuation steps. Additional control
of input signal scaling is provided by the selectable
gain Vertical Preamplifiers (shown in Diagram 2).
Channel 3 and Channel 4 input signals are buffered
by high input impedance FET amplifiers; no input attenuation of the signal is provided. The gain choices
for Channel 3 and Channel 4 are selected by the
choice of Vertical Preamplifier gain setting only.
The Measurement Processor controls the operation
of much of the switchable circuitry of the 2246A via
a common shift register data line (SR DATA). Data
bits loaded into the attenuator control and gain shift
register (designated SRO) set the magnetic relay
switches for the input coupling and attenuator settings and select the gain settings of the
Preamplifiers.
VERTICAL PREAMPS AND OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER (Diagram 2)
Each vertical channel has identical selectable-gain
Preamplifiers. The calibrated gain for each is
manually set during adjustment. Enabling of the
Preamplifiers to display a channel input signal is controlled by the Readout Processor (U2400, Diagram
9). Preamplifier gain settings are controlled by the
Measurement Processor via control bits loaded into
the attenuator control and gain shift register (Diagram 1) Vertical channel trigger signal outputs are
produced by each of the Preamplifiers for triggering
the sweep from the applied signal.
.
The vertical outputs of each preamplifier are connected to a summing node at the input to the DelayLine Driver. There, the signal current (from the
enabled Preamplifiers) and the no-signal standing
currents (from the disabled Preamplifiers) are added
with the current from the position signal switching
circuit.
The signal current for the enabled channel (vertical
channel signal plus its position offset) or the readout
position current (enabled to the summing node
during text and cursor displays) is applied to the
Delay-Line Driver. There, it is buffered and
compensated to drive the vertical delay line. The
delay line produces enough delay in the signal to
permit the trigger circuitry to start the sweep before
the vertical signal arrives at the crt deflection plates,
and the rising edge of the triggering signal may be
viewed.
-
From the output of the delay line, the signals are
applied to the Vertical Output integrated circuit. The
Vertical Output IC (U701) has provisions for vertical
BEAM FIND, bandwidth limiting, and vertical centering of the readout displays. External filter elements
on the Vertical Output IC produce the bandwidth limiting when switched into the amplifier circuitry. The
output signal from U701 is then applied to the Vertical Output Amplifier where it gets its final boost in
power to drive the vertical crt deflection plates.
An auxiliary Vertical Comparator circuit (U702 and
Q703) is shown in Diagram 2. Its purpose is to
measure the gains and offsets during SELF CAL to
determine the vertical calibration constants needed
for the measurements and tracking cursor displays.
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM (Diagram 3)
The A and B Trigger System provides the circuitry
for trigger source, slope, coupling, and bandwidth
selection; trigger level comparison; tv trigger detection; and dc measurements of the measurement
source signal
Trigger selection signals from the Display Logic IC
(U600, Diagram 4) drive the switching circuitry internal to U421 and U431. The signals select the
correct trigger source, slope, and coupling choice
for the present front-panel control setting. For VERT
MODE triggering with more than one vertical channel
displayed, the trigger source selection changes as
each channel is displayed. When the ADD Vertical
Mode is selected, a special amplifier arrangement in
U421 (for A) or U431 (for B) sums the CH 1 and
CH 2 signals to provide an ADD trigger signal for
display of the ADD waveform.
The Trigger CPLG (coupling) selections are AC, DC,
HF REJ (high-frequency reject), LF REJ (lowfrequency reject), and NOISE REJ. Of these, all but
NOISE REJ coupling are produced by selecting a
filter path with the necessary bandwidth characteristics. NOISE REJ coupling is done in the Trigger
Level Comparator circuit by decreasing the sensitivity of the comparator.
.
Theory of Operation-2246A
When the trigger signal level crosses the comparator threshold set by the Trigger LEVEL and
SLOPE control settings, the comparator output
changes states. That state change is applied to the
Trigger Logic IC (U602, Diagram 4). The Trigger
Logic circuitry then produces the gating that starts
the A or B Sweep as appropriate.
Separate A and B Trigger bandwidth limit circuits
before the Trigger Level Comparators allow the flexibility that is needed for using the B Trigger circuitry
as the measurement signal channel. Even when the
B Trigger signal itself is bandwidth limited, full
bandwidth is used for making measurements.
Signals are measured by using the B Trigger Level
Comparator as a successive-approximation analogto-digital converter to determine the peaks or dc
level of the applied signal. When making a measurement, the B Trigger Level signal is driven in a binary
search by the Measurement Processor (via the DAC
system, Diagram 9) while the output of the B Trigger
Level Comparator is monitored. When the smallest
resolution output of the DAC system causes the
comparator output to change states, the Measurement Processor stops the search and uses the DAC
input value at that point as the measured value of
the applied signal.
Video signal processing to obtain either Field or Line
triggering is done in the TV Trigger Detector. Peak
detectors determine the negative or positive peaks
of the applied video signal. Those levels set the
voltage at the reference input of the video signal
comparator at a level that strips off all the video
information (when the slope selection is correct for
the polarity of the applied signal). The remaining
composite sync signal is applied directly to the trigger system for Line triggering. Field triggering is
obtained by filtering the composite sync to obtain
only the vertical sync pulse.
The operating modes of the Trigger circuitry are
controlled by the Measurement Processor. Auxiliary
Data Shift Register U1103 (the last device in shift
register 1) is serially loaded with control bits from
the S DATA line by the SR1 TTL clock. The state
R
(high or low) of the control bits select the bandwidth
setting of the A and B Triggers, TV LINE or TV FIELD
triggering for the A Trigger system, and either the
TV FIELD signal or the average DC voltage of the
measurement channel for the B Trigger system.
Additional control bits output from the Auxiliary Data
Shift Register are the MAG signal (XI0 Magnification
on or off), X-Y signal (X-Y or Y-T displays), and the
VERT COMP ENABLEsignal (when vertical SELF CAL
is done).
The average dc voltage of a signal being measured
is found by filtering all the ac signal components
Service
from the measurement channel signal. That dc level
is then applied to the B Trigger Level Comparator
where its value is determined by successive approximation as described earlier.
DISPLAY AND TRIGGER LOGIC AND
PROCESSOR INTERFACE (Diagram 4)
Control of the display states and the trigger system
is done by two special devices. The Display Logic IC
(U600, also know as SLlC or slow-logic IC) controls
activities that enable the vertical channels for display
and select the A and B Trigger System operating
states. The Trigger Logic IC (U602, also known as
FLlC or fast-logic IC) monitors the A and B Trigger
signals, the A and B SWP END signals, the DLY END
0 and DLY END 1 signals, and controlling signals
from the Display Logic IC. It outputs the A and B
GATE and the Z-Axis signals that start the sweeps
and unblank the crt at the appropriate times.
Setup data to the internal registers of the two logic
devices is sent from the Measurement Processor
over the MB DATA line. A register is enabled for
loading by the address that is latched on the
ADDRO-ADDR3 lines (from Diagram 8). Data bits are
written to U600 with the SLlC W strobe, and to
R
U602 with the FLlC W strobe. The contents of the
R
internal registers of the Display Logic IC may also be
read by the Measurement Processor using the
SLlC RD strobe.
The Processor Interface portion of Diagram 4 handles the serial communications between the serial
shift registers and the Measurement Processor. This
circuitry is the Measurement Processor's means of
controlling the circuit hardware setups in response
to a front panel control setting. Data controlling the
state of the serial data bit to be loaded into the shift
registers is placed on the ADDRO-ADDR2 bus lines.
That address is decoded to produce either a high or
R
a low that is latched on the S DATA signal line. The
appropriate shift register clock is then generated to
load the latched bit. Each bit is loaded in succession
until all the control bits of a shift register are loaded.
The purpose of shift register (U502) is to permit the
Measurement Processor to read back the outputs of
the shift registers for diagnostic purposes and the
output of the Vertical Comparator during vertical
SELF CAL. The last bit from shift register 0 and shift
O
register 1 ( R FREEZE and BW LIMIT respectively)
and the Vertical Comparator (VERT COMP) state are
loaded in parallel and serially shifted out onto the MB
RETURN line to be read by the Measurement
Processor.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
A AND B SWEEPS AND DELAY
COMPARATORS (Diagram 5)
The A and B Sweep circuitry sets the timing and produces the A and B ramp signals to drive the crt horizontal deflection plates. The Measurement Processor sets the hardware states using control bits
loaded into shift register 1. One register (U302)
holds the bits for selecting the A Sweep timing resistors and capacitors and one register (U303) holds
the B Sweep control bits. The timing resistors are
selected by multiplexers (U307 and U308 for A
Sweep timing; U310 and U311 for B Sweep timing)
that are switched by the states of the control bits;
timing capacitors are selected directly by the control
bits.
The starting level of the sweeps is held steady by a
Baseline Stabilizing circuit, and the sweep ends are
determined by two Sweep-End Comparators. A and
B GATE signals from the Trigger Logic IC (U602,
Diagram 4) control the start of the sweep ramps. A
constant charging current to the timing capacitors
produces a linear voltage rise across the capacitors.
That voltage is buffered by the A and B Sweep
Buffers for application to the Horizontal Output
Amplifier (Diagram 6).
The SEC/DIV VAR control, when out of the calibrated
detent position, changes the charging current delivered to the sweep timing capacitors proportional
to its rotation. Decreasing the current lengthens the
ramp to decrease the sweep speed.
Two comparator circuits are used to check the A
Sweep ramp amplitude against the Reference Delay
and Delta Delay voltages. Both Delay End Comparator outputs are applied to the Trigger Logic IC
(U602, Diagram 4). The Trigger Logic IC monitors
the delays to determine when the B Sweep may
either run (for RUNS AFTER B Trigger Mode) or
accept a B Trigger (for any of the triggered B Sweep
modes).
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
(Diagram 6)
Deflection signals applied to the Horizontal Preamplifier (U802) are the A Sweep Ramp, the B Sweep
Ramp, the horizontal readout, and the X-Axis input
signal for X-Y displays. Mode control signals H O
D
and HD1 (from Display Logic IC U600 to the Horizontal Preamplifier) select the horizontal display
mode (A Sweep only, B Sweep only, Alternate, or
X-Y display). Other control signals to the Horizontal
Preamplifier are the MAG signal (for X I 0 magnification of the sweep), the BEAM FIND signal
(decreases horizontal gain), and the horizontal position signal for positioning the display. The X-Y signal
controlling U301B reduces the range of the Horizontal POSITION signal delivered to the Horizontal
Preamplifier when in the X-Y display mode. .
.---
Five manual adjustments are associated with the
Horizontal Preamplifier. They are the X I 0 and X I
gain, the Readout gain, the X-Axis signal gain, and
Mag Registration. Mag Registration compensates for
offset between X I 0 and X I gains, but it is primarily
used to center the readout displays horizontally.
The active single-ended deflection signal input to
the Horizontal Preamplifier is amplified and converted to a differential output signal. That signal is
further amplified and compensated by the Horizontal
Output Amplifier to drive the horizontal deflection
plates of the crt. The final output amplifier consists
of four MOSFET transistors (Q801, Q802, Q805, and
Q806). Two transistors are used for each deflection
plate (left and right) to divide the power handling
requirements.
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJUST, AND
CONTROL MUX (Diagram 7)
This block of circuitry is divided into several different
functions. The largest division is the Z-Axis and CRT
circuitry. A INTEN, B INTEN, and R INTEN input sigO
nals (from the Dac Subsystem board and the frontpanel controls) are applied to the Z-Axis circuit to
set the associated display intensities. Enabling gates
from the Display Controller (Diagram 4) select the
appropriate Z-Axis input signal for application to the
Z-Axis amplifier as the different display types are
enabled. The amplified Z-Axis signals are then level
shifted to the negative voltage of the crt cathode
(-2.7 kV) in a dc restorer circuit. A similar dc
restorer circuit provides auto focusing (at the fixed
focus level set by the front panel FOCUS control) in
response to the intensity level changes. The intensity and auto focus control voltages are applied to
the crt where they modulate the electron beam flow
that produces the display seen on the screen.
Multiplexer U506, under control of the Measurement
Processor, scans the front panel intensity potentiometers and the probe code lines to check for a
change. Signal selection for routing through the
multiplexer is controlled by the three bits on the
POT5-POT7 bus lines from the Pot Data Latch
(Diagram 11). Output from the multiplexer is routed
to the Front-Panel Multiplexer (U2309, Diagram 11)
and multiplexed with other front-panel control levels.
Outputs from U2309 are routed to the A-to-D
Converter (U2306, Diagram 11) where a digital value
representing their analog voltage level is determined. That value is checked against the previously
__
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
obtained value for a selected potentiometer or
probe code to determine if a change has occurred
and, if so, the amount and direction of the change.
The Measurement Processor uses that information
to generate new control voltages to the circuitry
affected by the change.
The Probe Adjust circuit (U930 and associated
circuitry) produces a square-wave signal which is
output to the front panel PROBE ADJUST jack for
compensating voltage probes and checking the
vertical deflection system of the oscilloscope.
The Volts Cal circuit (U931 and an associated precision voltage divider) provides the accurate dc voltage levels used during vertical SELF CAL to check
the gain and offset of the measurement channels.
The Scale Illumination circuit is made up of three incandescent graticule lamps and current-source
transistors. The SCALE ILLUM potentiometer sets
the bias level on (and thereby the current through)
the transistors.
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR (Diagram 8)
Many of the oscilloscope circuitry functions are
directed by the Measurement Processor (U2501).
The Measurement Processor, under firmware control, monitors the front-panel controls and sets up
the circuitry under its control according to the settings made and the instructions contained in the
System ROM.
The Measurement Processor communicates directly
with the devices on its eight-bit data bus. The
Measurement Processor selects the device to
transfer data to or from by placing the address of
the device on the Measurement Processor Address
Bus. That address is decoded to produce a strobe
that enables the bus device corresponding to the
e enabled
address. Writing to or reading from &
device is controlled by write or read (WR and RD)
pulses from the Measurement Processor. Communication on the data bus is usually limited to high
speed data transfer only (to and from the System
RAM and from the System ROM) and not direct control of any circuit functions.
For controlling most of the circuit operating states,
the Measurement Processor places serial bits on the
bidirectional MB DATA line. Appropriate enabling
strobes and clocks are generated either in its
address decoding circuitry or by the Processor Interface circuitry (Diagram 4) to load the control data
into 24-bit or 32-bit shift registers. The outputs of
these registers control such things as attenuator settings, preamplifier gains, sweep timing, and trigger
operating modes; all circuit operating functions that
either change with front panel settings only or at a
slow rate.
Scanning of the front panel controls and lighting of
the front-panel LEDs that back light the buttons is
under control of the Measurement Processor. These
events occur at long intervals compared to the operating speed of the Measurement Processor. The
front-panel switch closures are read by the
Measurement Processor over a serial communication line (SW BD DATA).
READOUT SYSTEM (Diagram 9)
Readout System
The Readout Processor (U2400) controls the display
of text and cursor readouts as directed by the
Measurement Processor. The ASCll code of each
character (blanks included) in a full screen of
readout (one field) is loaded into the appropriate
memory location of the Character Code RAM
(U2406) by the Measurement Processor. It is then
up to the Readout Processor to control the display
process.
When the Readout Processor addresses the Character Code RAM for display of the loaded characters,
the address of a memory location dictates the place
that the addressed character will appear on the face
of the crt. The ASCll code found at the addressed
location in the Character Code RAM then accesses
the character to be displayed from the Character
Dot Position ROM (U2408). The screen position of an
individual dot within an addressed character is
directed by the character data obtained from the
Character Dot Position ROM.
The data bits specifying the character position on
screen and the dot position within a given character
are converted to analog vertical and horizontal position signals by the readout DACs (U2412 for vertical and U2413 for horizontal). For cursors and
cursor related text, voltages representing the cursor
positions are added in the output mixer circuitry
(U2414, U2415, and U2416) to place the readout
correctly on screen. Vertical position information
needed for the measurement-tracking cursors and
readouts is added in the Vertical Position Switching
circuit (Diagram 2).
The dots are continually refreshed to maintain a
flicker-free readout. When the readout data needs
changing, the Measurement Processor halts the
refreshing and loads the new screen of data into the
Character Codes RAM.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
SWITCH BOARD AND INTERFACE
(Diagram 10)
Most of the front panel switches that can be read by
the Measurement Processor are " soft " switches;
they are not connected directly into the circuit to be
controlled. The f ront-panel control physical parameters of capacitance, leakage resistance, and inductance, therefore, cannot affect the operation of the
controlled circuit. The wiper voltage of the potentiometers is digitized, and that digitized data is used
by the Measurement Processor to set up the
circuitry under its control as dictated by the control
change.
The momentary push-button switches are rapidly
scanned at short intervals by the Measurement
Processor to check if one is being pressed. When a
switch closure is detected, the Measurement
Processor makes the necessary circuit or display
changes as directed by its firmware instructions for
that button and the existing operating states.
Functions are shown to be on by turning on the LED
(light-emitting diode) that back lights the push button or panel label. The Measurement Processor controls the lighting via control registers (U2523 and
U2524) that it reloads with control data to enable the
correct LED with each button or mode change.
ADC AND DAC SYSTEM (Diagram 11)
The ADC and DAC system is the Measurement
Processor's control link to the analog circuitry.
When the Measurement Processor does a scan to
determine the front panel control settings, the DAC
system drives the input to the A-to-D converter
comparator (U2306) in a binary search pattern to
determine the voltage level applied to the other input
of the comparator. The smallest incremental change
in the DAC input data that produces a switch in the
comparator's output identifies the digital value of the
unknown voltage. The output of the comparator (AD
COMP) is applied to the Data Buffer U2515 on
~iagram
8.
--.
DAC SUBSYSTEM (Diagram 12)
This circuit under control of the Measurement
Processor (Diagram 8)' converts digitized frontpanel control voltages to analog levels which are
directed to the individual control circuits. The frontpanel control voltages may be from the front-panel
potentiometers or from the StoreIRecall or Autoset
operations.
Processor U2601 refreshes DIA converter U2602
and directs multiplexers U2604, 2605, and U2303
(Diagram 11) to output front-panel control analog
levels to the control circuitry.
POWER SUPPLY (Diagram 13)
The low and high voltages required to power the
2246A are produced by a high-efficiency, switching
power supply. lnput ac voltage from 90 to 250 volts
and from 48 to 445 Hz is converted to a dc voltage
that powers a preregulator circuit. The preregulator
supplies regulated power to an inverter switching
circuit in the primary of the power transformer
(T2204). The secondary voltages produced at the
secondary windings of the transformer are rectified
and filtered to provide the low voltage power
requirements of the instrument.
High voltage to drive the crt is generated by a multiplier circuit (U2203) that provides the +14 kV postdeflection anode voltage and the -2.7 kV to the
cathode. The 6.2 Vac heater voltage is supplied by a
isolated secondary winding from the power transformer that is referenced to the -2.7 kV cathode
voltage.
DETAILED CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
VERTICAL INPUTS (Diagram 1)
Channel 1 and Channel 2 input circuits on this schematic diagram are arranged identically. Only
Channel 1 circuit numbers are referred to in the
discussion. CH 3 and CH 4 are also arranged
identically to each other and described separately
from CH 1 and CH 2.
Input Coupling
Signals applied to the CH 1 BNC connector are
coupled to the CH 1 attenuator via the CH 1 lnput
Coupling circuit. Relay K100 switches between direct
(DC) and capacitive coupling (AC) of the input signal; K101 switches between connecting the applied
input signal and the VOLT CAL signal to the input of
the attenuator. The VOLT CAL signal line provides
---
Theory of Operation-2246A
either the ground for GND Coupling in normal oscilloscope operation or a test voltage input for characterization during vertical SELF CAL.With the lnput
Coupling set to GND (both AC and DC off), the signal path is bypassed by C113. That capacitor filters
any noise from the VOLT CAL signal line. There is no
precharge of the input coupling capacitor (C112)
when the coupling is in ground (GND). Resistor
(R111) , in series with the BNC input, is a damping
resistor.
The probe coding signal (CHI PRB) is applied to a
multiplexer (U500, Diagram 7) where it is selected to
be digitized in turn with the other probe-code signals
and the front panel potentiometers. The Measurement Processor determines, from the digitized value
of the voltage, the attenuation factor of any attached
coded probe (Tektronix coded probes). The scale
factor of the VOLTSIDIV readout is then switched to
reflect the correct scaling of the displayed signal.
Uncoded probes and coaxial cables are interpreted
as having no attenuation for setting the readout
scale factors.
Service
low-impedance attenuator at the output of the
amplifier. The switchable low-impedance, voltage
divider network of U112 provides 1, 2, and 5 times
attenuation of the output signal for application to the
Vertical Preamplifier.
The input signal is applied to pin 2 (fast-path input)
and pin 4 (slow-path input) of U112 from the 1 M a
divider at the output of the high-impedance attenuator. Internal circuitry of U112 isolates the signal
from loading of the low-impedance attenuator and
provides the slow-path and fast-path signal amplification. The fast amplifier path quickly passes the
fast leading and falling edges of an input signal with
the slow path catching up to complete the signal
transfer. The output of the buffer sees a 300 R input
impedance to the low-impedance attenuator, and
the preamplifier sees a 75 R output impedance at
pin 8 of U112 for all VOLTSIDIV switch settings.
Attenuator and Vertical Mode Control Registers
High-Impedance Attenuator
Switching relays K102 and K103 control the signal
path through the high-impedance attenuator,
AT117. Signal attenuation is done by two 10X
attenuator sections; for 100X attenuation, the two
sections are cascaded. The 1 M R termination resistance at the output of the attenuator is divided into
two parts: 750 k R and 250 k R . An output taken
across the total resistance is applied to the buffer
amplifier fast-path input; another output taken
across the 250 k R section is applied to the slowpath input. Low-frequency compensation for the
hybrid attenuators is adjusted by C10 and C11 (parts
are part of the hybrid circuit on the ceramic carrier);
input C is adjusted using C114.
The switching relays of Channel 1 are driven by transistor array U174. Drive to each of the transistors in
the array to switch the relay states is supplied by the
Measurement Processor (U2501) via U171. That
device is a portion of a shift register formed by
U171, U172 (for channel 2 relays), and U173 (for
Preamplifier gains). The devices are connected in
series to form one long shift register (designated
Shift Register 0). Serial data bits for the entire register string are loaded at pin 2 of U171 from the S
R
DATA line by the S O CLOCK applied to pin 3 of all
R
three devices. See Table 3-1 for data bit assignments. Tables 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, and 3-5 define the bit
states for controlling the switching.
CH 3 and CH 4 lnput Amplifiers
Input Buffer Amplifier and 1X, 2X, 5X Attenuators
lnput Buffer Amplifier U112 (for CH 1) is a hybrid
device. The amplifier portion of the circuitry is a
fast-pathlslow-path buffer having unity voltage gain
that presents a high-resistance, low-capacitance
load to the signal from the high-impedance
attenuator and a low output impedance to the
The CH 3 and CH 4 input buffer amplifiers are identical discrete FET amplifiers. lnput coupling for these
two vertical inputs is always DC; there is no coupling
switch. The 1 MR input is formed by a series voltage
divider that attenuates the input signal by five times
for application to the gate of the input FETs. The
VOLTSIDIV setting (either 0.1 V or 0.5 V) is made in
the Preamplifier stage of the channel. Operation of
CH 3 is described; like components in CH 4 do the
same job.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Table 3-1
Shift Register 0 Bit Assignment
Pin
Controls
Signal
U171
4
5
6
7
14
13
12
11
CH 1 GND
CH 1 AC
CH 1 XI0 1
CH 1 XI0 2
CH 1 X I
NOT USED
CH 1 X5
CH 1 PREAMP 1
KIO1-CH 1 GND Coupling (last bit)
K100-CH 1 AC Coupling
K102-CH 1 X I 0 Attenuator 1
K103-CH 1 X I 0 Attenuator 2
K105-CH 1 X I Buffer Attenuation
No connection
K104-CH 1 X5 Buffer Attenuation
U210-CH 1 Preamplifier Gain
4
5
6
7
14
13
12
11
CH 1 PREAMP 0
CH 2 GND
CH 2 AC
CH 2 X I 0 1
CH 2 XI0 2
CH 2 X I
NOT USED
CH 2 X5
U210-CH 1 Preamplifier Gain
K108-CH 2 GND Coupling
K107-CH 2 AC Coupling
K109-CH 2 XI0 Attenuator 1
K110-CH 2 X I 0 Attenuator 2
K112-CH 2 X I Buffer Attenuation
No connection
K111-CH 2 X5 Buffer Attenuation
4
5
6
7
14
13
11
CH 2 PREAMP 1
CH 2 PREAMP 0
CH 2 INVERT
CH 3 PREAMP 1
CH 4 PREAMP 1
ZERO HYST
RO FREEZE
U220-CH 2 Preamplifier Gain
U220-CH 2 Preamplifier Gain
U220-CH 2 Preamplifier Invert
U230-CH 3 Preamplifier Gain
U240-CH 4 Preamplifier Gain
U431C-B Trigger Comparator Hysteresis
U509C-Controls Readout for SELF CAL
(first bit loaded)
From the gate of Q131A, diode CR131 provides protection from negative overvoltages exceeding about
-8 V. Input C is adjusted by C134 for low-frequency
compensation. High-frequency response is compensated by ~ 1 3 8across load resistor R137. Step
balance is adjusted by R141 in the source lead of
Q131B. The single-ended output of U131A is applied
via R139 (a 75 rCZ resistor) to the CH 3 Preamplifier.
The impedance seen by the other d i f f e r e d input
of the Preamplifier (U230, pin 8, Diagram 2) is
matched by the parallel combination of R158 and
C159 in series with R160.
The probe-coding signal, CH 3 PRBl is read the
Same way as the CH and CH probe-coding signals. The VOLTSIDIV readout for Channel 3 is
switched to correctly match the probe attenuation
factor (when properly coded probes are used).
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
settings and the dc offsets. The output gain of each
Preamplifier is adjusted by varying the commonmode resistance across the output pins (pin 13 to
pin 14) to produce calibrated gain for each of the
vertical channels.
VERTICALS PREAMP AND OUTPUT
AMPLIFIER (Diagram 2)
Vertical Preamplifiers
Each input channel has it own Vertical Preamplifier
(CH 1-U210, CH 2-U220, CH 34230, CH 44240).
The gain setting of the Preamplifier is controlled by
Measurement Processor U2501 via the assigned
control bits from Shift Register 0 (see Table 3-2).
Channel 1 and Channel 2 gains require two control
bits (on pins 1 and 2 of the Preamplifiers) to set
three different gains for 2 mV, 5 mV, and 10 mV
VOLTS/DIV scaling. From 10 mV per division and up,
the gain of the CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Preamplifiers
is set to 10 mV per division. The 1, 2, 5 scaling
sequence for the remaining VOLTSIDIV switch settings is obtained by switching the high- and lowimpedance attenuators. Gain of the CH 3 and CH 4
preamplifiers is controlled by one bit each (on
pin 2), since there are only two scaling settings
(0.1 V and 0.5 V per division) to select (see Table
3-5 for the gain-control bit states).
Each Vertical Preamplifier has a trigger pickoff (pins
17, 18, 19, and 20) for supplying the internal trigger
signal to the A and B Trigger Source Selector Multiplexers. Capacitor coupling from pins 17 and 18 to
pins 19 and 20 provides a fast-path signal into a
duplicate, but level-shifted, slow-path signal line.
The negative side of the differential trigger signal is
terminated in a capacitor to ground (from pin 19) to
provide a balance for the transmission line.
Table 3-2
Input Coupling Control Bit States
The internal circuitry of each Vertical Preamplifier is
matched for the 2 mV, 5 mV, and 10 mV gain
Table 3-3
CH 1 and CH 2 Attenuator and Gain Control Bit States
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Table 3-4
CH 2 INVERT Control Bit
-
-
Normal
INVERT
Table 3-5
CH 3 and CH 4 Gain Control Bit
VOLTSIDIV
PREAMP1
0.5 V
The VOLTSIDIV VAR controls for CH 1 and CH 2
(R2101 and R2103) directly vary the gain of the Vertical Preamplifiers between the calibrated VOLTSIDIV
settings. The Measurement Processor detects
whether the VAR control for a channel is in or out of
its detent position; and, if out, a greater-than
symbol ( & gt; ) is placed in front of the VOLTSIDIV
readout to show that the channel is uncalibrated.
Each Preamplifier produces a standing current of
Output
of the vertical signal from a Preamplifier is controlled
enabling
(CH EN through CH EN) from
Logic IC U600 (shown On Diagram 4)' The
enabling signal that turns on a vertical channel signal
also enables the position signal current for that
channel through the Vertical Position Switching
circuit (either U202 or U201) into the summing node.
about l1 into a common summing
mA
Delay Line Driver
The Delay Line Driver is a differential amplifier that
provides the signal amplification needed to drive the
delay line. The circuit is compensated to produce
the needed circuit response at the output of the
delay line. Both sides of the differential amplifier are
identical and circuit operation of the positive side
components is described.
Transistors Q250 and (2252 are arranged as a feedback amplifier. The parallel combination of R250F
and R250G supplies the feedback from the emitter
of Q252 back to the base of Q250. Diode CR260
provides a one-diode voltage drop in the feedback
loop for proper biasing of the base-to-collector
junction of the input transistor ((2250). Gain of the
amplifier is set by the value of common-mode resistor R270 (there is a small dc voltage gain). If the
Vertical Preamplifier and Vertical Position circuit output currents are exactly 11 mA (no signal and no
offsets) the feedback current is zero. Some standing feedback current will be present if the sum of the
input currents is not exactly 55 mA. A 1 mA current
change of the input base current to Q250 produces
a 41 mV change at the collector of Q252. The nosignal dc output voltage from Q252 is +7.5 V, and
the standing current is about 15 mA. The differential
voltage between the positive and negative side of
the delay line with no signal input is 0 V 50.5 V. The
differential signal voltage input to the delay line is
about 29 mV per graticule division of deflection.
Biasing of the input transistor bases is supplied by
R262 and R264 (for Q250) and R263 and R265 (for
Q251). Two resistors in series are used to provide
the power handling needed (they are low-wattage
precision resistors). The dc voltage at the bases of
Q250 and Q251 is maintained at 7.5 V by a bias
stabilization circuit. Operational amplifier U260 compares the common-mode voltage at the junction of
R254 and R255 to the +7.5 V supply on its pin 3 input. If the base voltage is too low, U260 raises the
common-mode emitter voltage (and thereby the
base voltage) of the two input transistors.
Compensation components peak up the circuit
response to counteract the roll off effects of the
delay line. The three series-rc combinations (C272
and R272, C273 and R273, and C274 and R247)
between the emitters of 0252 and 0253 cornpensate different frequency ranges to correctly shape
the circuit response. The series-rc circuit between
the collectors of Q252 and Q253 (C275 and R275)
damps the gain at high frequencies to prevent oscillation, Impedance matching and input termination of
delay line is done by the parallel-series
the 75
of R278, R279, R280, and R281
.
Vertical Position Switching
The Vertical Position Switching circuit consists of
buffer amplifiers for the four vertical channel position
signals (U203A, B, C, and D) , two solid state switch
arrays (U201 and U202), and a transistor paraphase
amplifier circuit (U280, Q284, and Q285) .
The vertical positioning voltages from the front panel
POSITION controls are applied to the noninverting inputs of the four voltage-follower buffer amplifiers
(U203A through U203D). The inputs and outputs of
the amplifiers are capacitively bypassed to eliminate
noise from the position signals. The buffered output
signals are applied to switching arrays U201 and
U202 for selection at the correct time for positioning
the displayed trace and position-related readouts.
--
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
POSITION VOLTAGE SWITCHES. Selection of the
channel or readout position signals to be supplied to
the paraphase amplifier summing node is controlled
by several sources. The vertical channel enable signals (CH 1 EN through CH 4 EN) from Display Controller U600 (Diagram 4) turn on the appropriate
channel position signal for the enabled Vertical Preamplifier when displaying waveforms. The nominal
position range of the vertical signal is 512 divisions.
When position-dependent readout (labeled cursors
that follow the vertical channel position controls) is
displayed, the RO CH 1 POS EN through RO CH 4
POS EN signals from tri-state latch U2403 (shown on
Diagram 9) enable the appropriate vertical position
signal into the summing node at the input to the
paraphase amplifier. The Readout Position Enable
signal lines are tri-stated (open) during display of
the channel signals so that the Vertical Channel Enable signals have control of the position enable
lines. Also, the Readout Position signals cannot
override the Vertical Channel Enable signal levels to
turn on a Vertical Channel Preamplifier with the series resistors (R212, R222, R232, and R242) in the
signal path. The vertical position of the enabled vertical channel is added to the position of the readout
so that the cursors appear at the correct vertical
position in the display.
When non-position tracking readout is displayed
(i .e., menus and scale-factor readouts), the vertical screen position of the readout is conveyed by
the RO VERT signal only. The RO VERT signal is enabled into the summing node input of the paraphase
amplifier by the RO VERT EN signal for both readout
types (position-tracking or fixed). Extra noise bypassingv
provided by decoupling components ~ 2 0 5 ,
R207, and C268 on the RO VERT signal line reduces
jitter of the readout display.
During vertical SELF CAL, the RO CH 1 POS EN
through RO CH 4 POS EN signals enable the appropriate vertical position signal into the summing node
at the input to the paraphase amplifier without turning on a channel Vertical Preamplifier. The gain and
offset of the voltage followers and position switches
may then be calculated independently from the vertical channel signal. The computed offsets are then
used by the Measurement Processor to correctly
place the position-tracking readouts (cursors) on
the display relative to the vertical position of the
waveform.
The TRACE SEP EN and RO T SEP EN signals operR
ate the same as described for the channel enable
and readout position enable signals. A slight difference between the channel vertical position
signals and the TRACE SEP signal is that TRACE SEP
is attenuated more. The higher value of R206 on pin
13 of U201 reduces the TRACE SEP range to 24
divisions as compared to 212 divisions for the vertical signals.
POSITION PARAPHASE AMPLIFIER. The Position
Paraphase amplifier circuitry is formed by a transistor array (U280) driving two discrete transistors
(Q284 and Q285). The circuit is configured as two
negative-feedback amplifiers that produce a
differential output current from the summed singleended input current. Transistors U280B and U280E
are constant-current sources for their associated
amplifier pairs in the array. The feedback path for
the U280A-U280F amplifier combination is via R286
from the emitter of Q284. The no-signal feedback
current through R286 is 1 mA. Feedback for the
U280C-U280D combination is via R289 from the
emitter of Q285. Feedback current in R289 is
100 FA. Both Q284 and Q285 are high beta transistors requiring little base-drive current. The overall
vertical displacement response from the input (at
the base of U280F) to the output is 200 pA per
division of vertical screen displacement.
The signal applied to the base of U280C is the inverted position signal developed across R290 in the
emitter of Q284. The signal is again inverted by
U280C to drive the base of Q285 in the opposite
direction from the signal at the base of Q284. The
standing dc current (no signal input) output current
into the delay line input summing node is 11 mA, the
same as the output of the vertical preamplifiers.
Vertical centering of the menu and readout displays
within the graticule area is done using VERTICAL
READOUT CENTERING potentiometer R260.
Vertical Output Amplifier
Vertical Output IC U701 runs hot and can
burn you if touched. The metal tab on top of
the device is NOT ground; it is the -5 V
supply to the IC.
Vertical Output IC U701 buffers the signal output of
the delay line and provides the circuitry for the BW
LIMIT and BEAM FIND functions and for the vertical
signal gain adjustment. The inputs to the Vertical
J
Amplifier are terminated in 75 C by external resistors
R706 and R707. External filter components C707,
L701, and L702 produce the bandwidth limiting of
the vertical signal when internally switched into the
output amplifier circuitry of U701.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Manual calibration of the vertical signal display to the
crt graticule is done using VO Gain potentiometer
R703. The components between pins 12 and 22 of
U701 (Q704, R726, R727, and R728) provides gain
correction for the small difference in gain between
full bandwidth and bandwidth-limited operation of
the Vertical Output IC. Correction for a thermal
change between display of the signal and display of
the readout is provided by the RO Jitter adjustment
(R724).
I WARNING
Vertical Output Amplifiers Q701 and Q702
run hot and can burn you if touched.
Vertical Output Amplifiers Q701 and Q702 provide
the signal gain necessary to drive the vertical crt
deflection plates. The deflection plates have a comparatively large capacitance, and to change the
voltage as fast as necessary to deflect the crt
beam, the Vertical Output Amplifiers have to handle
large current demands. A reduction in circuit
capacity is made by reducing the collector
capacitance of the output transistors. The cases of
Q701 and Q702 are NOT the collectors; they are
connected to the transistors' base material; the
case tabs mark the collector leads. In the collector
circuits, T-coils L703 and L704 boost the vertical
bandwidth of the output amplifiers; and R731 and
R732 are damping resistors.
Vertical Comparator
The Vertical Comparator circuit (U702, Q703, and
associated components) allows the Measurement
Processor to determine the gain and offset of the
vertical system up to the input to the Vertical Preamplifier. The circuit is enabled only during the vertical
self characterization routine. Known dc voltage
levels are applied to the attenuator inputs, and U702
compares the voltage from the delay line to the
HORlZ POS signal which is being driven in a binary
search pattern. The output voltage is found by
successively narrowing the search levels until the
smallest change possible from the DAC system
causes the Vertical Comparator output to change
states. Using the measured value to compare
against the known input voltage, the Measurement
Processor determines a Vertical Calibration constant
that must be applied to produce accurate voltage
measurements.
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM (Diagram 3)
Most of the trigger signal switching and trigger level
comparator circuitry is contained on two integrated
circuit devices (U421 and U431). Within the devices
is the logic circuitry that drives the selectable
variables of Trigger SOURCE, Trigger CPLG, and
Trigger SLOPE for both the A and the B Triggers.
Selection of the trigger variables is done by control
bits generated by Display Sequencer U600
(Diagram 4). The remaining portions of the circuitry
shown in Diagram 3 include the A and B Trigger
bandwidth limiting circuitry, the TV Trigger Detector
circuitry, the Auxiliary Control Register (part of Shift
Register I ) , and the DC Filter for the measurement
system. The B Trigger circuitry does double duty in
that measurements for the DC, +PEAK, -PEAK, and
PEAK-to-PEAK values of a signal are done in the
B Trigger channel. Consequently, voltage measurements cannot be done in ALT or B Horizontal Display
Modes when the B Trigger circuitry is in use.
A and B Trigger Source Selectors
Analog switching of the Trigger signal sources is
done by the circuitry in U421A (for the A Trigger)
and U431A (for the B Trigger). The possible Trigger
SOURCE selections are the same for both the A and
the B Trigger system. They are CH 1, CH 2, CH 3,
CH 4, LINE, and VERT. In ALT Vertical MODE, when
VERT is the selected source a trigger is obtained in
succession for each displayed channel. A stably triggered display will be obtained for each channel
signal without regard to frequency relationships
between the applied signals. If ADD Vertical MODE is
selected, a special adder circuit in U421A and
U431A, adds the CH 1 and CH 2 signals to produce
an ADD trigger signal composed of the two inputs.
The LlNE Trigger signal is a sample of the power-line
input voltage. Multiplexer U1106A, in the input path
for the LlNE trigger signal, selects between the LlNE
signal (for oscilloscope operation) and the TB CAL
signal (used for horizontal self characterization).
When a Voltage Measurement is being done, U431A
in the B Trigger circuit acts as the measurement
channel selector and selects either the CH 1 or the
CH 2 input signal to be measured.
A and B Trigger Coupling Selector
Coupling selections for DC, AC, HF REJ, and LF REJ
are done by U421B for the A Trigger and U431B for
the B Trigger. The trigger signal path is through a
filter circuit having the proper bandpass characteristics for the selected trigger coupling. NOISE REJ
coupling is done differently. The two Trigger LEVEL
Comparators (U421C and U431C) have selectable
hysteresis. For NOISE REJ Trigger CPLG, the
Theory of Operation-2246A
hysteresis is increased so that a larger signal
change is required to produce a state change at the
output of the ComParatOrs. Trigger Coupling control
logic is shown in Table 3-6.
Another signal source selectable in the Trigger
Coupling Selectors is the output of the TV Trigger
Detector (TV LlNE or TV FIELD). An applied composite video signal is separated so that the horizontal line or vertical field sync pulse can be used to
Service
trigger the oscilloscope for Television signal display
(see TV Trigger Detector description). Selection
between LlNE or FIELD for the A Trigger source is
done by multiplexer U1104A with its output being
applied i 0 pin 18 of U421B. Pin 18 of U431B in the B
Trigger system has an input of either the TV ~ i n e
sync signal, for TV triggering of the B Sweep, or the
output of the Measurement Signal Low-Pass Filter,
when the DC measurement mode is active.
Table 3-6
Trigger Selection Logic
Front Panel
Coupling
Selection
Description
Latched Bit Values
SLOPE
TS2
TS1
TSO
A Sweep Mode (U421) AUTO LEVEL, AUTO, NORM, or SGL SEQ
DC
0
0
1
0
DC Coupled
NOISE REJ
1
0
1
0
DC Coupled, Noise Reject
HF REJ
0
1
0
1
HF Reject
LF REJ
0
0
1
1
LF Reject
AC
0
1
0
0
AC Coupled
A Sweep Mode (U421) N LlNE or TV FIELD
DC
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
NOISE REJ
1
0
0
0
HF REJ
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
TV Input, Noise Reject
LF REJ
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
AC
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
B Sweep Mode (U431) AUTO LEVEL, RUNS AFTER or NORM
DC
0
0
1
0
DC Coupled
NOISE REJ
1
0
1
0
DC Coupled, Noise Reject
HF REJ
0
1
0
1
HF Reject
LF REJ
0
0
1
1
LF Reject
AC
0
1
0
0
AC Coupled
B Sweep Mode (U432) TV LlNE
DC
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
NOISE REJ
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
HF REJ
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
LF REJ
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
AC
1
0
0
0
TV Input, Noise Reject
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
MEASUREMENT SIGNAL LOW-PASS FILTER. The
average dc level of a signal is obtained for measurement by filtering the measurement channel signal to
remove all but the dc component of the signal. A
active RC filter circuit formed by U1101B, R1154,
R1155, C1154, and C1155 does the filtering with
U1101B buffering the filtered output voltage to
isolate it from loading. The dc level is applied back
to the Trigger Coupling switch (U431B, pin 18) for
input to the B Trigger Comparator (U431C) where
the actual measurement is done (see the B Trigger
Comparator description).
A and B Trigger Bandwidth Limit Circuits
The A Trigger Bandwidth Limit circuit components
(Q440, U441F, CR432, C432, L432, R432, Q444,
and U441E) act to roll off the trigger circuit
bandwidth when BW LlMlT is active (low). The B
Trigger Bandwidth Limit circuit components do the
same job (with some additional compensation components), but can be selected independently of the
SCOPE BW front panel setting (by the Measurement
Processor using the BW FULL B signal). That is
because the B Trigger Channel is used for the
Measurement system, and the circuit bandwidth
must be full for making measurements. The actual
circuit operation for both is the same, and only the A
Trigger Bandwidth limiting action is described.
For full trigger bandwidth, the BW LlMlT signal from
Auxiliary Register U1103 is written high by the
Measurement Processor. That high is inverted to a
low by U441E and U441F and applied to the bases of
Q440 and Q444. The low output turns off Q444 and
disconnects C444 from ground. The purpose of
C444 is to act as part of an LC filter that rolls off the
signal. The low applied to the base of (2440 turns
that transistor on pulling the anode of CR432 up and
forward biasing it. The trigger signal ac path then
bypasses L432 and R432 through CR432 and C432.
The dc component of the trigger signal is still via
L432 and R432.
When the bandwidth is limited, the BW LlMlT signal
is low. That is inverted to a high that turns on Q444
(connecting C444 to ground) and turns off Q440
(reverse biasing CR432). The trigger signal path is
now through L432 and R432 with C444 connected to
ground to roll off the circuit bandwidth.
A Trigger Comparator
The Trigger signal is compared with the A Trigger
LEVEL setting by U421C to determine the signal level
and slope of the trigger signal that produces a
sweep trigger. The comparator slope is set internally
by the switching logic; the Trigger comparison level
-
is set using the front panel Trigger LEVEL control. A
fixed amount of hysteresis in the A Trigger Level
Comparator prevents double triggering on signals
accompanied by normal noise. NOISE REJ coupling
increases the hysteresis by a factor of four to reduce the Comparator's sensitivity to noise if triggering on very noisy signals is required. Once a level
state change occurs, a larger change in the opposite direction is required (because of the circuit hysteresis) to reverse the state change. The differential
output of U421C is applied to the Trigger Logic IC
(U602, Diagram 4) where the gating signals to start
the display sweep are generated.
B Trigger Comparator and Measurement A-to-D
Converter
For B Trigger signal comparison, the B Trigger Level
Comparator (U431C) works the same as the A Trigger Level Comparator. Its differences lay in its use
as the Measurement Channel A-to-D Converter for
making signal voltage measurements. When a
measurement is being done, the ZERO HYST control
bit from Shift Register 0 (U173, Diagram 1) is set
high. This high turns off Q480 and disconnects
U431C pin 28 from ground. The biasing combination
of R476 and R486 between the -5 V supply and
ground reduces the hysteresis of the B Trigger Comparator to zero. A small incremental change in signal level to the comparator will then cause it to
change output states. The B REF TRIG LVL signal on
pin 24 of U431C is driven in a binary search pattern
by the Measurement Processor (via the DAC System) while monitoring for state changes at the output. The smallest incremental input change of the B
REF TRIG LVL that produces an output change then
defines the voltage point being measured (+PEAK,
-PEAK, or DC); When peak-to-peak voltage
measurement is done, the Measurement Processor
merely measures one peak voltage of the signal,
then the other.
The output of the B Trigger Level Comparator is
applied to the B Trigger input of U602 (Diagram 4)
via delay line DL22. The 18 ns delay produced permits the leading edge of the B trigger signal to be
viewed when displaying the B Sweep.
Auxiliary Shift Register
Auxiliary Shift Register U1103 is the last register in
Shift Register 1. Control bits loaded into the register
from the AUX DATA signal line (from U303 pin 9,
Diagram 5) are serially shifted through Sweep Shift
Register U302 and U303 (Diagram 5). Circuit
functions controlled by the bits in U1103 are the
following:
-
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
B TV TRIG EN: Switches between the B TV Trigger
signal and the DC measurement signal voltage
(U1106C).
TV FIELD SEL: Switches the A Trigger between TV
FIELD and TV LINE (U1104A).
MAG: Controls the X I 0 Magnification function of the
Horizontal Output Preamplifier (U802, Diagram 6).
VERT COMP EN : Turns on the Vertical Comparator
(U702, Diagram 2) during voltage self characterization.
TB CAL: Switches the time-base calibration signal
into the B trigger system during horizontal self
characterization (U1106A).
BW FULL B: Switches between full and limited B
Trigger bandwidth.
BW LIMIT : Switches between full and limited A Trigger bandwidth. The BW LIMIT signal has a second
use. As the last bit in Shift Register 1, it is fed back
to the Measurement Processor during diagnostic
checks done on the Shift Registers.
-
X Y : Switches the range of the horizontal position
signal (HORIZ POS) between that needed for Y-T
display and that needed for X-Y display (U301B,
Diagram 6).
selects the correct sync polarity for the applied signal, the middle of the sync tips is at the threshold
level of the comparator. The output of the comparator then switches only on the sync tips of the
applied signal. The peak detectors are complementary in that the positive-peak detector transistors (Q1101, Q1102, and Q1103) and the
negative-peak detector transistors (Q1104, Q1105,
and Q1106) are complementary types (PNP-NPN) .
Both detectors are driven from the same input
signal; the positive peaks of the video signal forward
bias Q1101, and the negative peaks forward bias
Q1104. The operation of the positive peak detector
is described.
The composite video signal is applied to the emitter
of Q1101. A positive-going signal increases the
current through Q1101, causing the collector voltage
to rise. The rising collector voltage biases on Q1102
harder, and C1114 charges up rapidly following the
positive-going signal up to its positive peak. When
the input signal starts negative, Q1101 is turned off
immediately by the charge held on C1114. That
leaves C1114 holding the positive peak voltage of
the input signal. Emitter-follower Q1103 applies that
peak voltage level to U1104B pin 3 via R1117. R1136
to the -7.5 V from pin 3 provides a fixed offset to the
signal level. The negative-peak detector does the
same type of operation on the signal to apply the
negative peak voltage to pin 5 of U1104B.
TV Trigger Detector
When the sync polarity is selected to match the sync
of the applied video signal (by the user with the A
SLOPE switch), the voltage level at the selected
input of U1104B is at the middle of the sync-tip
voltage. If the wrong polarity is selected, triggering
will take place on the video signal. For signal
generator signals, the effect may not be noticeable,
except for a shift of the trigger point; but if composite video signals are being viewed, the display
will be unstable when the wrong polarity is selected.
INPUT AMPLIFIER. The signal at pin 19 of U421A is
applied to pin 3 of U1101A via a low-pass filter
formed by R426, L426, and C426. The filter limits
the bandwidth of the X-AXIS signal to about 5 MHz
for application to the Horizontal Preamplifier (U802,
Diagram 6) and to the TV Trigger Detector circuitry.
Operational amplifier U1101A provides low-pass
gain of the applied composite video signal that
further attenuates the video portion of the signal
relative to the sync pulses. The output signal from
U1101A is applied to the Peak Detectors and the
Sync Comparator.
SYNC COMPARATOR. The incoming composite
video signal is applied to the plus input (pin 3) of the
Video Sync Comparator (U1102A). The Video Sync
Comparator looks at the signal level on pin 2 and
compares it with the incoming video signal level.
When the incoming level crosses the comparison
threshold, the output of U1102A switches state. That
state change occurs at the mid level of the sync
pulses. The output signal of U1102A (TV LINE) is
applied directly to U1104A pin 2 and U1106C pin 1 to
be available for selection for the A and the B Trigger
systems for TV LINE triggering.
PEAK DETECTORS. The peak detectors determine
the positive and negative peaks of the applied composite video signal. Those peaks voltages are
applied across a voltage divider circuit used to set
the comparison level (slice level) to one input of a
comparator, That level is such that, when the user
FIELD SYNC FILTER. The filter circuit composed of
R1132, R1133, C1106, C1107, and U1102B
processes the output of U1102A further to determine when the vertical field sync signal is
present. The time constant of the filter elements is
such that the line sync pulses between vertical fields
Multiplexer (U1106A) normally provides the Line
Trigger signal picked off from the Power Supply
input. For self characterization (SELF CAL) of the
Time Base, the switch outputs the TB CAL signal
obtained from the Measurement Processor (U2501,
Diagram 8).
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
cannot move the voltage on U1102B pin 5 across the
comparison threshold (ground on pin 6).
During the vertical field sync pulse, the frequency of
the serration pulses (line and equalizing) doubles.
The filter capacitors will then be discharged enough
to go below ground and switch the output state of
U1102B. That signal is applied to U1104A pin 1 to be
available as the TV FIELD Sync trigger signal for the
A Trigger system.
SYNC SWITCHING. Solid-state switches U1104A
and U1106C provide switching between the TV FIELD
and the TV LINE signal for the A Trigger and between
TV LINE from A SOURCE and the average DC level of
the measurement channel for the B Trigger. The
switching states are controlled by the Measurement
Processor via the TV FIELD SEL and the B TV TRIG
EN control signals from the Auxiliary Control Register
(U1103)
The readout interface circuit responds to the
readout request and readout blanking inputs, and
generates a blanking signal (BLANK, pin 18) to control the Z-Axis Amplifier enabling signals from U602.
The chop blanking signal also gets routed through
this circuit.
Pin Description
The following is a description of Display Sequencer
U600 pin functions (see Figure 3-2 for pin
numbers).
.
DISPLAY AND TRIGGER LOGIC AND
PROCESSOR INTERFACE (Diagram 4)
4
*
-
C 1 EN
H
C 2 EN
H
17
oscRsT
-
18
19
4
20
TO
H
BLANK
- SOUT
*
" ss
40
4
-
D
I
S
P
A
Y
s
E
(
3
u
N
c
ME
G
(SLIC)
-
35
*
34
33
,
ATS I .
& gt;
c
32
F
31
A SLOPE
-
30
ATS 0
*
29
BTS 2
-
28
c
*
27
BTS 0
c
26
8 SLOPE
R
& gt;
36
ZEN
BTS 1
t
37
C 4 EN
H
ATS 2
39
38
C 3 EN
H
*
4
The chop clock circuit generates a phase-dithered
chop clock and blanking signal, derived from an
external frequency source. With 10 MHz applied, the
chop rate can be 1.25 MHz or 625 kHz, with a
blanking time of about 200 ns (625 kHz is used in the
2246A).
-
-
The Display Sequencer contains a readlwrite
memory for storing the display states to be
sequenced through and logic for sequencing the A
and B Sweep displays and trigger sources. The
sequencer also provides control signals that are
needed to do waveform measurements.
An internal trigger holdoff timer provides a pulse with
programmable width that is triggered on at the end
of A Sweep (or at the end of B Sweep). The pulse
width may be set from 1 ps to greater than 0.5 s,
depending on the internal counter divide ratio, and
the holdoff oscillator frequency at pin 15.
" 00
-
The Display Sequencer or SLIC (slow-logic integrated circuit, U600) performs most of the slow
logic functions required to run the display functions.
This integrated circuit contains a microprocessor interface, the display sequencer logic circuitry, the
trigger holdoff timer, the chop clock, and an interface to the on-screen readout control logic.
The microprocessor interface of U600 provides the
capability to serially load the internal control
register, write the internal read/write memory, do
some limited real-time control over a few sequencer
functions, and monitor status information.
1
c T
C
2
LFC
3
c W
R
4
c A0
5
c A1
6
c A2
7
A3
8
c R
D
9
c 010
10
TDI
11
c RR
O
12
c RB
O
13
c B GATE
14
t n A GATE
15
OSCOUT
16
F
25
0s
b
24
HO
D
H 1
D
/
TS .
TEST
*
23
22
*
21
4
Figure 3-2. Display Sequencer IC (SLIC, U600)
pin out diagram.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
7
DIO: Data 1 pin. This pin is tied to the Meas0
urement Processor MB DATA line. Data to
be clocked into the control register is presented here, and status data can be read
out on this pin when the
input is low (tristate output). See Table 3-7.
TDI: Trigger data input pin. When A3=A2=1,
(when
RD is low).
data
- on this pin is sent to the Dl0 pin
-
RD: Read enable input (active low). Bringing
this pin low causes internal status data (selected with A3-AO) to be presented on the
Dl0 pin for transfer to the Measurement
Processor.
-
WR: Write enable input (active low). A
negative-going pulse on this pin performs
actions described in the Table 3-7.
SOUT: Strobe output pin (active low). When
A3, A2, A1 , and A0 = 1 111, SOUT goes low
when the W pin is pulled low. Otherwise,
R
SOUT is always high.
LFC: Low-frequency clock input. A signal
derived from the calibrator circuit is used for
skewing the chop-clock phase.
-
ROR: Readout request input (active low). A
low causes the CH 1 EN, CH 2 EN, CH 3 EN,
CH 4 EN, HD1, HDO,-TS outputs to all go
and
low, and allows the ROB input to have complete control of the BLANK output. If ROB is
low when ROR goes low, then the internal
timing will be such that the BLANK output will
go high quickly enough to blank the display
before switching transients can be shown on
screen (see the detailed description of the
readout interface).
-: Readout blank input (active low). DurROB
ing readout active time (ROR=low), the ROB
input is inverted and sent to the BLANK
output.
OSC OUT: The external holdoff oscillator
output drives this pin. A falling edge causes
the internal holdoff counter to increment.
OSC RST: Oscillator reset output. Internal
logic causes this output to go high to discharge the external holdoff oscillator timing
capacitor at the end of holdoff (see detailed
description of the holdoff timer operation).
A3, A2, A l , AO: Address inputs. The
ADDRO-ADDR3 selection bits are latched
from the Measurement Processor address
bus by U2512, Diagram 8.
CH 1 EN: Channel 1 enable output (active
high)
A GATE: A Sweep Gate input (active low).
CH 2 EN: Channel 2 enable output (active
high)
B GATE: B Sweep Gate input (active low).
CH 3 EN: Channel 3 enable output (active
high).
TC: Timing clock input.
CH 4 EN: Channel 4 enable output (active
high).
.
.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
.
Table 3-7
Display Sequencer (U600) Control Bit Assignments
RD LO
WR
A3
A2
A1
A0
0
0
0
0
Control Reg. msb
Dl0 clocked into Control Reg. (a)
0
0
0
1
RAM comparator
RAM written from Control Reg.
0
0
1
0
EOSS flag
RAM address incremented (b)
0
0
1
1
EOS signal (c)
RESET is strobed (d)
0
1
0
0
A Gate Detect flag
MRESET is strobed (e)
0
1
0
1
B Gate Detect flag
RAM load mode enabled (f)
0
1
1
0
A Gate Detect flag
A/B GATE-detected flags reset
0
1
1
1
B Gate Detect flag
Set A slope output (g)
1
0
0
0
(h)
Forces B1/B2 Source/Slope/Delay (i)
1
0
0
1
(h)
Forces B Slope output (j)
1
0
1
0
(h)
Sets BLANK output HI (k)
1
0
1
1
Sets THO output HI (k)
1
1
0
0
(h)
TDI data
1
1
0
1
TDI data
(see description of TEST input)
1
1
1
0
TDI data
Sets norm B Source/Slope/Delay (I)
1
1
1
1
TDI data
SOUT pin gets strobed
Dl0 when
Action when
Strobed
(see description of TEST input)
Notes:
(a) Data is clocked into the control register on the rising edge of
m.
(b) RAM load mode must be enabled; the address increments on the rising edge of WR.
( c ) EOS (end of sequence) goes high for the last state of any display sequence. EOS is read out for test purposes.
(d) The THO output should be set high when RESET is strobed for proper initialization. This does the following:
a. it initializes the display sequencer back t o the first display state (RAM address 000). in ALT VERT Mode, ail vertical enable, horizontal enable, and trig source outputs are initialized. In CHOP VERT Mode, the horizontal enable
and trig source outputs are Initialized, but the vertical enable outputs continue t o cycle at the chop clock rate.
b. It resets the EOSS (end of single sequence) flag.
c . It resets the trigger holdoff timer.
(e) Used for initialization, during testing of the device.
(f) A rising edge on WR with DiO = 1 enables the RAM load mode; a rising edge on WR with D l 0 = 0 disables the RAM load
mode.
rn
(g) A rising edge on
with DiO = 1 sets the A Slope output high; a rising edge on
output low.
(h) Used for device testing only.
with D l 0 = 0 sets the A Slope
rn
(i) A rising edge on
with D l 0 = 1 forces the B1 Trigger Source, the B1 Slope, and sets the DS output high; a rising
edge on WR with D l 0 = 0 forces the 82 Trigger Source, the B2 Slope, and sets the DS output low.
(j) A rising edge on WR with D l 0 = 1 forces the B SLOPE output high; a rising edge on WR with D l 0 = 0 forces the B
SLOPE output low. This forcing function takes precedence over the force B1lB2 S o u r c e / S l o p e / ~ a yfeature described in note (I) above. This forcing function Is canceled by applying a negative strobe t o the WR input with the
address = 1110.
(k) A rising edge on WR with D l 0 = 1 sets the output high; a rising edge on WR with D l 0 = 0 allows the output to behave
normally. (I) A negative pulse on b% with address = 11 10 will cancel the effects of (i) above and allow the B Source, B
Slope, and DS outputs t o behave normally.
Theory of Operation-2246A
ATS 2, ATS 1, ATS 0: A Trigger Source
Select outputs. These bits either correspond
to three bits of the control register, or they
track with the vertical channel enable outputs (in ALT Vertical Mode with VERT MODE
trigger selected). These outputs change
state on the rising edge of the THO output,
or when RESET is strobed while THO is high.
The encoding scheme is shown in Table 3-8.
Service
Table 3-9
Horizontal Display Mode Select Bits
HD1
HDO
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
SOURCE
Readout displayed
A Sweep displayed
B Sweep displayed
X-Y mode
Table 3-8
A Trigger Source Select Bits
ATS 2
ATS 1
ATS 0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
SOURCE
CH 1
CH 2
CH 1 + CH 2
CH 3
CH 4
Line
A SLOPE: A Trigger slope output.
BTS 2, BTS 1, BTS 0: B Trigger Source
Select outputs. These bits correspond to
either one of two sets of three bits in the
control register, or they can track with the
vertical channel enable outputs (in ALT
Vertical MODE). These outputs normally
change state on the rising edge of the THO
output, or when RESET is strobed while THO
is high. If B1 or 82 Source/Slope/Delay is
being forced, the outputs will correspond
directly with one of the two three-bit sets in
the control register. The encoding scheme
matches that used for the A trigger source
select bits shown in Table 3-8.
DS: Delay select output. This output
normally changes state on the rising edge of
the THO output, or when RESET is strobed
while THO is high. It may also be forced by
the Measurement Processor via the
processor interface. DS high selects the first
delay (B1) , and DS low selects the second
delay (82).
TS: Trace separation output. This output
changes state on the rising edge of the THO
output, or when RESET is strobed while THO
is high. TS goes high to enable trace separation; TS goes low during a readout request
cycle.
- Z-Axis
ZEN:
enable output (active low). This
output goes low when the ZAP control bit is
set high, or when the selected B trigger
source channel (as presented on the BTS 2,
BTS 1, and BTS 0 output pins) is the same
as the channel being enabled for display.
MGE : Measurement gate enable output
(active low). This output behaves the same
way as ZEN, except in chop vertical mode,
in which MGE stays in a low state. Also, the
ZAP control bit has no effect on MGE.
B SLOPE: B Trigger Slope output. This output is set to either one of two bits in the control register. This output normally changes
state on the rising edge of the THO output,
or when RESET is strobed while THO is high.
It may also be forced high or low by the
Measurement Processor via the processor
interface.
THO: Trigger holdoff output (active high).
Outputs the variable holdoff pulse. In single
sequence mode, this output will go high
after the last A Sweep of the sequence and
stay high until RESET is strobed. This output
may also be forced high via the Measurement Processor interface.
HD1, HDO: Horizontal display enable outputs. These outputs normally change state
on the rising edge of the THO output, or
when RESET is strobed while THO is high.
The encoding scheme is shown in Table 3-9.
BLANK: This output is controlled from three
sources. At theend of a readout request
cycle (when ROR goes high), the BLANK
output will be asserted for four to six timing
clock periods (to hide vertical source
switching transients). Chop blanking pulses
can be routed to this output (however, when
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
W is
R
low, chop blanking is automatically
inhibited). Lastly, this output may be forced
high via the Measurement Processor
interface.
counter to 000. See the Display Sequencer
detailed description to find out what the RAM
outputs do.
-: Test mode enable input (active low).
TEST
TEST is held high and not used in normal
operation. This pin is pulled high to force
normal operation, but may be pulled low to
enable the test mode. Enabling test mode
does the following:
1. Disables single sequence and B Ends A
modes, no matter what code is in the
control register.
Table 3-10
Shift Register 1 Control Bit Data
Control Signal Name(s)
Bit Nr
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2. Reconfigures the trigger holdoff timer to
make it more easily testable (see control
register description for control bits
H4-HO) .
8
3. A3, A2, A1 , A0 = 1100 allows a negativegoing pulse on W to reset only the
R
cont;ol register.
11
AS2
AS1
AS0
ZAP
B1S2
B1S1
B1SO
B1SLOPE
4. A3, A2, A1 , A0 = 1101 allows a negativegoing pulse on W to preset control
R
register bits B1-B6.
15
l4
Control Register Description
The Display Sequencer internal control register is a
26-bit, serial-shift register that receives control-bit
data from the Measurement Processor. Table 3-1 0
lists the control signal name@) associated with each
register bit. Bit number 1 receives the data from the
Dl0 pin (via the Processo~nterface)after one lowto-high transition on the W input pin (A3 = A2 = A1
R
= A0 = 0). Bit number 26 receives thisAata after 25
more low-to-high transitions on the W input. Bit
R
number 26 is the most-significant bit position of the
internal shift register.
RDS-RDO: Data inputs to the internal RAM.
The RAM address comes from a three-bit,
binary up-counter. To write data into the
RAM, the first six bits are loaded into the,
control register with the RAM data word.
With A3, A2, A l , A L = 0001, a negativegoing pulse on the W input will write the
R
data into RAM. To set the RAM address, the
RAM load mode must be enabled. In RAM
load
- mode, a low-to-high transition on the
W input (with A3, A2, A l , A0 = 0010) will
R
increment the RAM address by one. There
are eight consecutive RAM locations
(addresses 000 to 111); the address
counter will increment to 111, then wrap
around to 000. Strobing RESET resets the
I
1
RD5
RD4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RO
D
AC3
AC2
AC1
BC3
BC2
BC1
BCO
B2SO
VMO
HMI
HMO
DD
SSE
B ENDS A
H4
H3
H2
HI
H
O
FSEL
CBEN
The RD5-RDO bits also go to the inputs of an
internal RAM comparator. The RAM outputs
are sensed by the other comparator input. If
the two inputs match, the comparator output
will be high. The RAM comparator output can
be read by the Measurement Processor
through the processor interface.
AC3-AC1: The A Trigger CPLG select bits.
BC3-BCO are the B Trigger CPLG and SLOPE
select bits. To write these bits into the trigger coupling circuits, the Measurement
Processor loads the control register as follows: Bits 1, 2, and 3 are set to AC3, AC2,
-
-
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
and AC1 respectively, and the A SLOPE output is set to ACO. Bits 5, 6, 7, and 8 are set
to BC3, BC2, BC1, and BCO respectively.
The RAM load mode is enabled, the force
B1/B2 feature is disabled, and THO is
strobed once (or RESET is strobed once
while THO is high). At this point, output pins
ATS2, ATS1, ATSO, and A SLOPE are set to
AC3, AC2, AC1, and ACO respectively; and
output pins BTS2, BTSI , BTSO, and B SLOPE
are set to BC3, BC2, BC1, and BCO respectively. The Measurement Processor then
strobes the latches in the Trigger Coupling
Select Logic circuits to make the trigger
coupling selections. The RAM load mode is
then disabled to resume normal Display
Sequencer operation.
AS2, AS1, ASO: A Trigger SOURCE select
bits. See Table 3-1 1 for the bit encoding of
the control signals when not loading the RAM
or coupling circuits.
For any binary code except 111; AS2, AS1,
and AS0 are presented on output pins ATS2,
ATS1, and ATSO respectively after a THO
rising edge. For binary code 111, the data
on the three 'output pins will correspond to
the channel being enabled for display; it
alternates as the channel displays alternate
and change state on the rising edges of
THO. The RAM load mode is disabled to get
the A Trigger SOURCE to alternate.
encoding for the A Trigger SOURCE select
bits.
B2S2, B2S1, B2SO: B2 Trigger SOURCE
select bits. Encoded the same as A Trigger
SOURCE select bits, except that code 111
does not select VERT Mode trigger. Selection between B1 SOURCE and 82 SOURCE is
normally made with the DS (delay select)
output signal. DS = 1 selects B1, and DS = 0
selects B2. If the B1 select bits are 111 and
the B1 SOURCE is selected (not forced),
then the data on output pins BTS2, BTS1,
and BTSO will track with the selected vertical
channel (similar to the A Trigger SOURCE
select outputs).
61 SLOPE, B2 SLOPE: B Trigger SLOPE bits.
One of these two bits is presented on the B
SLOPE output pin (if B SLOPE isn't being
forced), in the same way that the B1 and 82
sources are selected. When B1 SOURCE is
selected, then B1 SLOPE is also selected,
and B2 SLOPE gets selected when B2
SOURCE is selected.
VM1, VMO: Vertical MODE control bits. See
Table 3-1 2 for encoding.
Table 3-12
Vertical MODE Select
VM1
Table 3-11
Trigger Source Select
AS2
AS1
AS0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SOURCE
CH 1
CH 2
CH 1
CH 3
CH 4
Line
+ CH 2
VMO
MODE
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Not used
Chop Mode
Alt Mode (with no measurement)
Alt Mode (with measurement)
HM1, HMO: Horizontal MODE control bits.
See Table 3-13 for encoding.
--
Table 3-13
Horizontal MODE Select
VERT MODE
- p
-
ZAP: Setting this bit high forces the ZEN
output low. This bit is low for allow normal
operation of the ZEN output.
B1S2, B1S1, B1SO: B1 Trigger SOURCE
select bits. Bit encoding is the same as the
HM1
0
0
1
1
HMO
0
1
0
1
MODE
A only
ALT
B only
X-Y
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Table 3-14
Holdoff Counter Encoding
H4
H3
H2
HI
HO
1
1
0
0
0
0
10000
1
2
1
0
0
0
1
20000
1
0
5
1
0
0
1
0
50000
0
1
1
5
1
0
0
1
1
50000
0
1
0
0
10
1
0
1
0
0
100000
0
0
1
0
1
20
1
0
1
0
1
200000
0
0
1
1
0
50
1
0
1
1
0
500000
0
0
1
1
1
50
1
0
1
1
1
500000
0
1
0
0
0
100
1
1
0
0
0
100000
0
1
0
0
1
200
1
1
0
0
1
200000
0
1
0
1
0
500
1
1
0
1
0
500000
0
1
0
1
1
500
1
1
0
1
1
500000
0
1
1
0
0
1000
1
1
1
0
0
100000
0
1
1
0
1
2000
1
1
1
0
1
200000
0
1
1
1
0
5000
1
1
1
1
0
500000
0
1
1
1
1
5000
1
1
1
1
1
1a
H4
H3
H2
HI
HO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Count Length
Count Length
aStrobing RESET presets the holdoff counter to 499999 to simplify testing.
DD: Dual-delay control bit. DD = 1 for dual
delay (delta time), and DD = 0 for single
delay.
CBEN: Chop blank enable bit. CBEN = 1
allows the chop blanking signal to be passed
out the BLANK output pin (when W is
R
high); CBEN = 0 inhibits chop blanking.
SSE: SGL SEQ enable. SSE = 1 for single
sequence mode or 0 for repetitive mode.
Display Sequencer Operation
B ENDS A: B ends A enable (active high).
H4, H3, H2, H I , HO: Holdoff time. Encoded
as in Table 3-14. With the TEST pin held
high for normal operation.)
FSEL: Chop frequency select bit. With 10
MHz on the TC input pin, FSEL = 1 provides
a chop frequency of 625 kHz; FSEL = 0
produces 1.25 MHz (625 kHz is used).
The internal RAM is programmed for the desired
vertical channel display sequence, for both CHOP
and ALT Vertical Modes. In ALT mode, the RAM also
controls the horizontal display control outputs. In
CHOP mode, the RAM still controls the vertical
channel displays, but different logic controls the
horizontal display selection.
RAM data bits RD5, RD4, and RD3 are programmed
for a particular channel display (see Table 3-15).
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Table 3-15
Display Sequencer Channel Select Logic Bits
RD5
RD4
RD3
Channel
Bit RD2 selects between the A Sweep display and
the B Sweep display (only used in ALT Vertical Mode
(with measurement). The A Sweep is displayed if
this bit is set high (outputs HD1, H O = Ol), otherD
wise the B Sweep is displayed (outputs HD1,
H O = 10). Bit RD1 controls the DS (delay select)
D
output pin in ALT Vertical Mode (with or without
measurement). Finally, bit R O marks the last state
D
in a display sequence. When the R O bit goes high,
D
the sequencer finishes its current state and jumps
back to the initial state (RAM address 000 is the
initial state). In ALT Vertical Mode, the sequencer
will advance to the next state either on each rising
edge of the trigger holdoff pulse (ALT Vertical Mode
with measurement), or on every other rising edge of
the trigger holdoff pulse (ALT Vertical Mode with no
measurement).
The first type of ALT Mode is used when there is an
intensified zone (with or without an accompanying
B Sweep) for only one or two of the displayed
channel (s) ; every display state can be completely
specified by programming the RAM properly (no
more than eight display states are ever needed for
any measurement display sequence; hence, the
RAM is limited to eight addresses). The second type
of ALT Mode is used when there are intensified
zones and B Sweeps for all channels displayed. In
this mode, HD1 and H O automatically alternate
D
between the A sweep and the B Sweep on each
rising edge of the trigger holdoff pulse. Whenever
HD1 and HDO switch from the B Sweep back to the A
Sweep, the vertical sequencer advances to its next
state. This second type of ALT Vertical Mode is used
only when more than eight RAM locations are
needed to define a long display sequence in ALT
Horizontal Mode.
In ALT Vertical Mode, the vertical and horizontal display enable outputs are initialized as follows: the
trigger holdoff output is forced high (via the
processor interface), RESET is strobed, then trigger
holdoff is unforced to allow sweeps to occur. This
procedure ensures that the display enable and trigger source outputs are initialized to the first state of
the programmed display sequence.
In CHOP Vertical Mode, the leading edge of the chop
blanking pulses advance the vertical display enable
outputs. RAM bits RD5, RD4, and RD3 still determine
the vertical channel displayed, and RAM bit R O
D
marks the last display state in the sequence. RAM
bits RD2, and R D ~
are not used in CHOP Mode.
Other circuitry, clocked by the trigger holdoff pulse,
drives the horizontal display control outputs. The
same initialization procedure as described above for
ALT Vertical Mode is used. However, only the trigger
source and horizontal display enable outputs are
initialized. The vertical-display-enable outputs cycle
at the CHOP rate. Table 3-1 6 specifies the behavior
of the horizontal- display-enable outputs for all horizontal and vertical modes.
Trigger Holdoff Timer
When the B ENDS A control bit is low, the holdoff
timer is triggered by the rising edge of A GATE.
When the B ENDS A control bit is high, the holdoff
timer is triggered by either the rising edge of
B GATE, or the rising edge of A GATE, whichever
occurs first. The THO output pin will go high immediately, and go low after the programmed
number of holdoff oscillator cycles. In SGL SEQ
Mode (again, with the TEST input pin high), the
EOSS (end of single sequence) flag will go high and
the THO output will stay high after the last A Sweep
of the programmed sequence. Strobing RESET will
reset the EOSS flag, and set the THO output back
low again, if THO hasn't been forced high via the
Measurement Processor interface.
HOLDOFF OSCILLATOR. A relaxation oscillator circuit
formed by U601, Q600, Q601 and associated components is connected between the OSC OUT and
OSC RST pins to provide the input count pulses to
the holdoff timer. The HOLDOFF voltage applied to
the base of Q600 sets up a charging current into
timing capacitor C600. When the holdoff timer is inactive, the OSC RST output pin is high, and C600 is
held discharged. With the capacitor discharged, the
output of the oscillator is held high. When a rising
edge of A (or
E
in B ends A mode)
occurs, the OSC RST output will go low and allow the
voltage across C600 to ramp up. When this voltage
crosses an upper threshold, the output of U601 at
pin 7 goes low. This negative transition increments
the internal holdoff counter, and causes the OSC
RST output to go high, again discharging C600.
When the voltage drops below a lower threshold, the
oscillator output again goes high to repeat the oscillation cycle. After the last negative transition on the
OSC OUT pin for a particular count length, the OSC
RST output will go high and stay there until the next
time the THO timer is triggered.
.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Table 3-16
Horizontal and Vertical Display Response
-
HORIZONTAL CONTROL SIGNAL OUTPUTS
Delay
and
Vertical
Modes
-
Readout Inactive (ROR = 1)
Horizontal Modes (HM1 HMO)
Signal
Names
Readout
Active
(ROR = 0)
A Only
DD
VM1
0
0
or
0
0
A Alt B
B Only
XIY
(0 0 )
(0 1)
(1 0)
(1 1)
NSSS ( a )
DS
HDO
HD1
TS
1
HI
HI
LO
LO
2
HI
1
HI
HI
HI
LO
(b)
HI
LO
HI
LO
(c)
(c)
LO
LO
LO
NSSS (a)
DS
HDO
HDI
TS
(dl
HI
LO
LO
2
(d)
LO
HI
LO
(b)
LO
HI
HI
LO
(c)
LO
LO
LO
(f1
HI
LO
HI
LO
(b)
HI
HI
HI
LO
(c)
(c)
LO
LO
LO
(9)
HI
LO
HI
LO
(b)
HI
HI
HI
LO
(c)
(c)
LO
LO
LO
(f )
(0
LO
HI
LO
(b)
0)
HI
HI
LO
(c)
(c)
LO
LO
LO
(9)
(h)
LO
HI
LO
(b)
(h)
HI
HI
LO
(c)
(c)
LO
LO
LO
VMO
0
1
0
or
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
NSSS (a)
DS
HDO
HD1
TS
(f )
NSSS (a)
DS
HDO
HD1
TS
(9)
HI
HI
LO
LO
NSSS (a)
DS
HDO
HDI
TS
(f)
(9
HI
LO
LO
NSSS (a)
DS
HDO
HD1
TS
(9)
(h)
HI
LO
LO
HI
HI
LO
LO
(dl
l=m
HDI
4
(e)
(dl
FD3
HD1
(f)
HI
(dl
l m
=
HD1
(9)
HI
(h)
m
5
HD1
(f1
(i)
(h)
m
HD1
(9)
(h)
(h)
m
HD1
NOTES:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
NSSS = Complete A Sweep cycles in a single sequence.
Not applicable in single sequence mode.
Signal state not affected by readout.
Signal changes state after each rising edge of THO; initialized t o a high state in single sequence mode.
Signal changes state after every other rising edge of THO; it is initialized t o high state in SGL SEQ mode.
NSSS = Two times the number of states programmed into the vertical sequencer. In ALT Vertical Mode with no
measurement, the vertical sequencer advances to its next state at the end of every other A GATE.
-.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
NOTES (cont):
(g) NSSS = The number of states programmed into the vertical sequencer.
(h) Programmable with the vertical sequencer.
(i) Programmable with the vertical sequencer. There are two A Sweeps per vertical display state.
Sweep Gate Detection
Display Logic IC U600 also contains sweep gate
detect latches that can be read out and reset via the
Measurement Processor interface. The A GATE
t
detect latch o u t ~ u will ao hiah on the risina edae of
A GATE after aWfalling
edge of A GATE, if;he-E
sianal is low (i.e.,- the latch is armed by MGE) . The
.
B ~ A T detect latch output goes high when B-GATE
E
goes low (level sensitive). The A GATE latch is reset
on the leading edge of the A/B RESET signal, so that
the latch will not miss an A GATE occurring before
the end of the latch reset interval. The B GATE latch
resets when the A/B RESET signal is low.
-
Chop Clock
The clock frequency applied to the TC input pin is
either divided by 8 (FSEL = 0), or divided by 16
(FSEL = I ) , producing a positive-going pulse at the
BLANK output pin (when enabled) with a width equal
to about two times the period of the clock signal on
the TC input. To produce phase skewing, the chop
frequency divider circuit is forced to skip ahead by
four TC clock periods on a rising edge of A GATE.
This skipping is gated on and off by applying a
low-frequency clock signal (about 1 kHz from the
Calibrator circuit) to the LFC (low-frequency clock)
BLANK
H D , TS
CH x EN
input pin. Internally, the LFC signal is divided by two,
and when the resulting square wave is high, count
skip-ahead is enabled.
Readout lnterface
The Readout lnterface accepts inputs from the ROR
and ROB pins, and drives the BLANK output pin.
When W is high, the BLANK output is controlled by
R
the chop blank signal (when enabled by the CBEN
control bit).
-
When the ROR input is low, chop blanking is disabled
and the ROB input is inverted and allowed to control
the BLANK output. When the ROR input goes from
low to high, the BLANK output remains connected to
the readout blank signal for an additional four to six
TC clock periods. Normally, the ROB input will be low
during this time so that the BLANK output will be high
to mask vertical source-switching transients. The
HD1, HDO, and TS outputs are disabled two to four
TC periods after ROR goes low, and are again
enabled two TC periods before the BLANK output is
disconnected from the readout blank s i g C ( R 0 B ) .
For any readout request cycle, the ROR input
remains low for greater than six TC clock periods.
Relative timing of ROR, BLANK, HDO and HD1 (HDx),
TS, and vertical channel enables (CH x EN) is shown
in Figure 3-3.
55
& lt;
T \
\
22
117
cc
(6081-05)6555-30
Figure 3-3. Readout interface relative signal timing.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Trigger Logic IC (FLIC)
1
The Trigger Logic IC or FLIC (fast-logic integrated
circuit, U602 Diagram 4) does most of the fast logic
functions required to run the oscilloscope. The functions are: A Sweep control, B Sweep control and
measurement gate generation, Z-Axis control, and
trigger status detection.
2
4
A1
4
HD1
A0
4
HO
D
EOBS
DLYl2
4
DLY2
4
B TRIG
4
-
b
BUSY
*
A TRIG
b
EOAS
6
7
8
9
fl
12
*
*
14
vcc
L
?Jc
15
0
G
38
*37
36
35
34
K 4
E
vcc
DATA
vcco
N
C
C
(FLIC)
*31
30
TO
D
MSEL
F
29
4
28
" cco
C GATE
27
26
N
C
" cco
-
17
4
eue
-
,
S3
-20.54
BLANK: Blanking input, from the Display
Logic IC (U600).
HD1, HDO: Horizontal display select inputs,
from the Display Logic IC.
24
B GATE
S2
18
19
vcm
Si
4
4
The following is a description of the fast logic pin
outs (see Figure 3-4).
-
25
16
Pin Description
33
32
D
S
I
A GATE
4
I
TO
H
10
11
T
R
G
G
E
R
13
The Trigger Logic circuit is done in an ECL (emittercoupled logic) gate array, and all inputs and outputs
are compatible with standard ECL components.
39
BLANK
ZEN
3
5
The A Sweep logic generates the A Sweep gate
signal (A GATE), and provides trigger status information about the state of the A Trigger. The B
Sweep logic interfaces to the Delay Time Comparators (Diagram 3) and generates the B Sweep
gate (B GATE) and measurement gate signals.
There is also some logic that monitors the B Trigger
signal status when making voltage measurements
with the B Trigger circuit. The Z-Axis control logic
provides outputs for controlling the crt beam
intensity.
40
S
I
N
" EE
N
C
VEE
23
*
22
*
21
Figure 3-4. Trigger Logic IC (FLIC, U602)
pin out diagram.
ZEN:
Z-Axis enable input, from the Display
Logic IC. Active low.
BUSY: Counter busy signal. Not used in the
2246A.
SIN: Strobe input. Latches data into the internal register. Active low.
A1, AO: Address inputs. See Table 3-1 7 for
addressing codes.
ATRIG: A Sweep trigger input.
EOAS: End of A Sweep. This signal goes
high when the A Sweep ramp crosses its
end-of-sweep threshold.
THO: Trigger holdoff input from the Display
Logic IC.
EOBS: End of B Sweep. This signal goes
high when the B Sweep ramp crosses its
end-of-sweep threshold.
DLY12: Input from first delay comparator.
The comparator for the delay input switches
from low to high after the end of either the
first or the second sweep delay.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
B GATE: B Sweep gate output. Starts the B
Sweep ramp. Active high.
DLY2: Input from second delay comparator.
This comparator normally switches from low
to high after the end of the second sweep
delay (in dual-delay mode).
-
BUB : B Sweep unblanking output. Active
low.
B TRIG: B Sweep trigger input.
-: Measurement gate enable input from
MGE
C GATE : Measurement gate output. Not
used externally in the 2246A.
the Display Logic IC. Active low.
MSEL: Measurement select input. MSEL=1
causes the DLY12 signal rising edges to
sample the B TRIG input in strobed volts
measurements. MSEL=O selects the DLY2
signal rising edges.
Table 3-17
Trigger Logic IC Addressing Logic
Action when
SIN Strobed
A1
DATA: Data input to the internal, control
shift register.
-:
S1
Crt beam-intensity control output.
Turns on the beam current for the A Sweep
displays. Active low.
0
0
Strobed Volts Latch DATA clocked
into Control Reg
0
DS: Delay select signal from the Display
Logic IC. DS=1 selects first delay.
A0 Output of TDO pin
1
Auto baseline Latch Resets Auto baseline Latch
1
0
A Trigger Latch
Resets A Trigger
Latch
1
1
Peak Volts Latch
Resets Peak Volts
Latch
-
S2 : Crt beam-intensity control output.
Turns on the beam current for the B Sweep
displays. Active low.
-
S3 : Crt beam-intensity control output.
Turns on the beam current for the A Sweep
intensified zone displays. Active low.
-
S4 : Crt beam-intensity control output.
Turns on the beam current for the Readout
displays. Active low.
A GATE: A Sweep gate output. Starts the A
Sweep ramp. Active high.
TDO: Trigger data output. Data to be read is
selected via the A1 and A0 inputs (see
Table 3-1 7).
Trigger Logic IC Control Register Description
The control register of U602 is an 8-bit shift register
that receives input from the DATA pin. Bit 1 receives
the data on a low-to-high transition on the SIN pin
(A1 = A0 = 0). Bit 8 receives this d e after seven
more low-to-high transitions on the SIN pin. Bit 8 is
the msb of the control register. Table 3-1 8 lists the
control signal name associated with each control
register bit.
DM1, DMO: These bits select the delay
mode (see Table 3-1 9).
BRUN: This bit determines whether the B
Sweep is in RUNS AFTER delay mode or Triggered After delay mode. BRUN=1 selects
RUNS AFTER Mode.
PM1, PMO: These bits select the peak volts
detection mode as shown in Table 3-20.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Table 3-18
Control Register Signal-bit Names
ARUN: This bit determines whether the A
Sweep is in the free-run mode or in the triggered mode. ARUN=1 selects the free-run
mode.
Bit
Name
1
DM0
A Sweep Logic
2
DM1
3
BRUN
4
PMO
5
PM1
6
ZMO
7
ZM1
8
ARUN
When ARUN is high, the A Sweep logic works as follows. A high on the THO input causes the A GATE
output to go low. As soon as THO goes low, the A
GATE output will go high and the A Sweep runs. At
the end of the A Sweep there is a low-to-high transition on the EOAS input. That sets the the internal
end-of-A-sweep latch causing the A GATE output to
go low, and the A Sweep shuts off. This state exists
during sweep retrace and the baseline stabilization
period until the end of holdoff when the THO input
once again goes
high.
That
resets the
end-of-A-sweep latch and starts another A Sweep
cycle. Normally, the falling edge of A GATE will
cause an externally generated pulse to be presented
on the THO input, thus completing the loop and
allowing the A Sweep to free-run (auto-level and
auto triggered mode when the sweep is not
triggered).
Table 3-19
Delay Mode Selection Control Bits
DM1 DM0
Delay Mode
0
0
First delay set to zero
0
1
First and second delays set to zero
1
0
Normal delay mode
1
1
B Sweep disabled
Table 3-20
Peak Volts Detection Mode Logic
PM1
0
0
Nongated
0
1
Gated from end of delay to
end of A Sweep
1
0
Gated with
1
a
PMO
1
Gated with A GATE
Peak Detection Mode
ma
When ARUN is low, the operation is similar except
that after a pulse on the THO input, A GATE won't go
high until a low-to-high transition is presented on
the A TRlG input (triggered sweep mode).
For either free-run or triggered modes, THO going
high will cause the A GATE output to immediately go
low, if the end-of-A-Sweep latch is set or not. Once
the end-of-A-Sweep latch has been set, no more A
Sweeps can happen until the THO input is pulsed (at
the end of the holdoff). The end-of-A-Sweep latch
can only be set with the EOAS input when A GATE is
high.
The A Sweep logic of U602 also monitors the A TRlG
input to latch certain A Trigger events. One latch
(the auto-baseline latch) will set on any low-to-high
transition on the A TRlG input. Another latch (the A
Trigger latch) is level sensitive and will set when the
A TRlG input is high. Both latches may be read out
through the TDO (trigger-data out) pin, selected by
the A1 and A0 address input pins. That data is
applied to the TDI (trigger data in) pin of U6OO and
placed in the Display Logic IC's internal register to
be read by the Measurement Processor. Both
latches may also be r e s e t i a the SIN pin (see
description of A1 , AO, and SIN input pins).
C GATE not used externally in 2246A.
B Sweep Logic
ZM1, ZMO: These bits determine the intensified zone mode. See the Z-Axis logic
discussion.
The B Sweep logic functions about the same as the
A Sweep logic, except that more signals must be
monitored to determine when the B Sweep can run.
When DM1 and DM0 = 11, the B Sweep can't run at
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
all. When DM1 and DM0 = 10, the B Sweep won't be
allowed to run or trigger until the DLY12 input goes
high white the A GATE signal is also high (the normal
delayed sweep mode). When DM1 and DM0 = 01,
the B Sweep will be allowed to run or trigger immediately after the A GATE signal goes high (no B Sweep
delay). When DM1 and DM0 = 00, then the B Sweep
will be allowed to run or trigger immediately after the
A GATE signal goes high, if the DS (delay select)
input is high. If DS is low, the B Sweep is allowed to
run or trigger as soon as the DLY12 input goes high
while the A GATE signal is also high.
can be read at the TDO pin with A1 and A0 set this
way. The Measurement Processor reads the state of
the peak volts latch to determine when it has found
the correct digital value of the signal peak being
measured by the B Trigger Level Comparator.
The B Sweep logic beha=
as follows. The B GATE
signal goes high and BUB (B Sweep unblanking)
goes low together when the appropriate conditions
(described in the preceding paragraph) are met. A
low-to-high transition on the EOBS input will then set
the end-of-B-sweep latch, causing BUB to go high.
B GATE doesn't go low until the A GATE signal goes
low. This is used internally to generate the
and
outputs in some modes, and is used externally to
carry out the B ends A mode.
Strobed Volts Logic
53
The DLY12 input goes to a level-sensitive latch; if A
GATE is high and DLY12 momentarily goes high, the
latch will be set, so that the DLY12 input does not
need to be held high throughout the sweep cycle. A
high level on the THO input will cause the A GATE
signal to go low. That resets this latch and causes
the reset of the rest of the sweep logic, forcing B
GATE low and BUB high.
The peak-detect latch output will go high when the B
TRlG input goes high (if the gating condition selected
by PM1 and P O is satisfied). The latch output goes
M
low when reset.
This logic samples the state of the B TRlG signal with
the delay comparator outputs when making gated
voltage measurements. The strobed volts latch consists of an edge-triggered flip-flop with a multiplexer
driving the clock input, and the B TRlG signal driving
the D input. When MSEL=1, the DLY12 latch output
clocks the flip-flop. When MSEL=O, the DLY2 latch
output clocks the flip-flop. The state of the flip-flop
is read out at the TDO pin by the Measurement
Processor w h e n 4 , A0 = 00. The flip-flop is reset
by strobing the SIN input with A l , A0 = 11.
Z-Axis Logic
This
logic
drives the
Z-Axis
control
outputs
( g - g ) . These outputs have the following control
action:
The DLY2 input also goes to a level sensitive latch.
This second latch also gets reset when A GATE goes
low. Together with the DLY1 latch output, A GATE,
and the MGE input, the C GATE output signal gets
generated (not used externally in the 2246A).
C GATE goes low if A GATE is high, the DLY1 latch
has been set, the DLY2 latch is still reset, and the
MGE input is low.
-
S1 Turns on the A intensity current switch
(active low)
.
Turns on the B intensity current switch
(active low) .
S3
Peak Volts Logic
The peak volts logic detects the positive and negative peaks of the B TRlG signal. It consists of a levelsensitive latch that can be gated by the C GATE
signal, the A GATE signal, the DLY12 latch output, or
continuously. The latch may be reset by strobing the
SIN input with A1 and A0 set to 11. The latch output
Turns on the A intensified current switch
(active low) .
-
S4 Turns on the Readout intensity current switch
(active low).
Table 3-21 describes what the
- 3 outputs do
as a function of ZM1, ZMO, HD1, HDO,
C GATE,
BLANK, and ZEN.
m,
m,
m,
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
-
Table 3-21
Z-Axis Switching Logic
ZM1
ZMO
HD1
HDO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
-
S2
S3
1
1
1
1
S1
(a)
1
(c)
1
(a)
1
(c)
1
(a)
1
(c)
1
(a)
1
(c)
(b)
1
1
1
1
1
7
(el
1
1
1
(dl
1
1
S4
Display Mode
(c)
1
1
1
(c)
1
1
1
Readout
A Sweep intensified by BUSY
B Sweep
XIY
Readout
A Sweep intensified by C GATE
Blank
XIY
Readout
A Sweep intensified by BUB
B Sweep
XIY
Readout
A Sweep no intensified zone
Blank
XIY
1
1
(b)
1
(b)
1
1
(b)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(c)
1
1
1
1
Notes
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
= BLANK or -A
= BLANK or
m m m
or
or
= BLANK
= BLANK or A or C GATE or ZEN
= BLANK or AGATEor
or ZEN
or is a logical-or function.
ECL-to-CMOS Level Shifters
The Trigger Logic IC, U602, is an ECL device* Its
output signal swing is the standard ECL range of
about 0.6 V, ~ 1 the ECL logicdevices in the 2246A
1
are powered from the +5 v supply rather than a -5 v
supply. The resulting output voltage swing is from
about 4.5 V to about 3.9 V between the hiah and low
ECL logic levels. As U602 must pass signals to the
Display Sequencer IC (U600) at CMOS highs and
lows (about 3.9 V and 0 V respectively in this
application), logic level translators are required.
That job is done by an identical translator circuit for
each of the three signals that must be sent. The
circuit action of U603C, Q604, and Q605 (the
A GATE translator) is described.
The single-ended A GATE output signal of U602 at
pin 14 is applied to pin 4 of U603B. With its other
input pin left open, U603B is used as a line driver
-
only to produce a differential output signal. That
differential signal is applied to the bases of a
differential amplifier
pair of pnp transistors (Q604
and Q605). The output signal is taken across R612 in
the emitter of Q604. The emitter of Q605 is Connected directly to Qround- When the A GATE output
of U602 is high (at 4.5 V), the voltage applied to the
base of Q604 is 4.5 V, and the voltage on the base
of Q605 is 3.9 V. These voltage levels bias Q605 on
and Q604 off, with a resulting output level across
emitter resistor R612 of 0 V to the A (active
low) input of U600. When the A GATE output of U602
goes low at the end of the sweep, the bias voltage
levels on Q604 and Q605 reverse, and Q604 is
biased on (and Q605 off). Signal current through
emitter resistor R612 develops a voltage of about
3.9 V (the unasserted level) to the A GATE input of
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Display Logic Clock
The Display Logic clock signal at 10 MHz is generated by a transistor oscillator circuit composed of
Q608, Y600, and associated components. The frequency of oscillation is controlled by a ceramic
resonator, Y600, in the feedback path from the
collector to the base of Q608.
A AND B SWEEPS AND DELAY
COMPARATORS (Diagram 5)
Sweep Control Shift Registers
Two serial shift registers provide the control interface between the Measurement Processor and the A
and B Sweep circuitry. Control bits loaded into registers U302 for A Sweep and U303 for B Sweep are
serially clocked from the S DATA line by the SR1
R
CLK pulse. The states of the loaded bits select the A
and B Sweep timing by choosing the correct
charging current and timing capacitor to provide the
full range of sweep speeds. Other control bits
loaded into the two registers select the delay voltage
applied to the Delay Comparators and the output
voltage from the VOLTS CAL circuit (used for
measurement SELF CAL). Extra bits are shifted
through the two shift registers into the Auxiliary Data
Register (U1103, Diagram 3) via the AUX DATA
signal line to control the trigger bandwidth, the TV
Sync Detector switching, and the functions of 10X
MAG, X-Y display, and Vertical Comparator
enabling.
A and B Sweep Timing
Refer to Figure 3-5 for a simplified schematic of the
A Sweep circuitry.
TIMING RESISTORS. The Sweep Timing resistors in
resistor pack R313 are shared between the A Sweep
and the B Sweep circuitry; those in resistors pack
R321 are divided between the two sweep circuit.
Timing Resistor selection is done by multiplexers
U308 and U307 for the A Sweep and by U310 and
U311 for the B Sweep. The multiplexers are driven
by the Measurement Processor via control bits
loaded into Shift Register 1 (U302 and U303). (See
Table 3-22 for the control bit coding.)
SECIDIV VAR CIRCUIT. Variable sweep speed is
controlled by the TIME VAR voltage applied to operational amplifier U309B. The amplifier controls the
current passing through Darlington transistor Q301
to the voltage divider formed by resistor pack R313.
The voltages at the taps of the voltage divider set
the forward bias on the charging-current pass transistor, Q307, via operational amplifier U304. When
the SECIDIV VAR control is in its detent (calibrated)
position, diode CR301 is reverse biased, and the
divider formed by R311 and R314 between the
+2.5 V reference and ground precisely sets the input voltage to the noninverting input of U309B. With
a fixed voltage output from U309B, the current
through Q301 and R313 is also a fixed value. When
the SECIDIV VAR control is rotated out of its detent
position, the voltage at the junction of R309 and
R310 decreases to forward bias CR301. The input
voltage to U309B and, therefore, the current to R313
decreases in proportion to the amount of rotation of
the SECIDIV VAR control. A decreasing voltage at
the output taps of R313 decreases the charging
current through Q307 to increase the sweep ramp
time.
A AND B SWEEP TIMING CAPACITORS. The timing
capacitor selection circuitry is similar for the A and
the B Sweep, but the B Sweep has fewer range
steps and doesn't require two selectable capacitors.
Only the A Sweep timing capacitor selection is
described; like components in the B Sweep circuit
do the same job.
Timing capacitance for the A Sweep is made up of a
combination of fixed, variable, stray, and selectable
components. Sweep timing for the fastest A Sweep
speeds is done with a combination of the fixed,
variable, and stray capacitance and the selectable
charging current supplied through R321, U308, Q307
and Q330. When the slower sweep speeds are
selected, additional capacitors must be switched
into the circuit to ~ r o d u c e longer charging time.
a
The capacitors that are always in the A Sweep
charging path are C315 (a fixed capacitor), C314 (a
variable capacitor used to adjust the A Sweep timing
at the fastest sweep speeds), and the stray circuit
capacitance.
The base-to-collector junction capacitance Q330
changes as the voltage between the base and collector of Q330 increases during ramp up. At the
fastest A Sweep speeds, that change would affect
the timing at the start of the charging ramp. To compensate for the junction-capacity effect of Q330,
transistor Q328 (connected as a diode) is added between the charging current path and the A Sweep
Buffer output. The capacitive current through the
reverse-biased junction of Q328 adds current to the
output to make up for the current required to charge
the base-to-collector capacity of Q330 in the input
of the Sweep Buffer.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
+15 V
R3138, C. 0
FROM
SEC/DIV
I
T
I
c307A
Q310A. 03108.
0312
SELECTION FROM
6081-07
.
Figure 3-5. Simplified Sweep Circuit.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
The selectable sweep timing capacitors come in a
matched set of three capacitors, two for the A
Sweep timing (C307A and C307B) and one for the B
Sweep timing (C307C). When added capacitance
is needed for a sweep speed setting, the
Measurement Processor loads selection control bits
into Shift Reaister 1 (U302 for the A Sweep) that turn
or
or
that (2305
on either ~ s 0 5 ~ 3 0 6 both. ~ s s u m e
is biased on by a high control bit from pin 5 of U302.
Capacitor C307B is then added in parallel to the capacitors in the charging path, and a longer ramp
time is needed to reach the end-of-sweep voltage
level. Control bits selecting the charging current are
also loaded at the same time. See Table 3-22 for
the A Sweep timing and control bit selections
(as0-as5) and Table 3-23 for the B Sweep bit
selections (bs0-bs4)
.
baseline, run-up, and retrace (see Figure 3-6).
Sweep start and length of sweep run-up is
controlled by the A GATE and A GATE signals from
the Trigger Logic IC (U602, Diagram 4).
A GATE SIGNALS. The A GATE and A signals
are applied via 8.2 V zener diodes (VR301 and
VR302) to the bases of Q308 and Q309 in a differential amplifier configuration. The input circuit to the
differential pair level shifts the ECL signals (4.3 V to
3.4 V) to the proper biasing levels (-3.9 V to -4.8 V)
for the bases of the differential amplifier transistors.
Transistor Q326 in the emitter circuit of Q308 and
Q309 is the current source for the differential pair.
Transistor Q311 is part of the bias circuit for Q326
and provides feedback to the base of (2326 that controls the current provided to Q308 while the sweep is
being held at the baseline level.
Baseline Stabilizer
-
The iob of the Baseline Stabilizer circuit (Q302,
~ 3 0 3 and Q304 for the A Sweep and Q315. ~ 3 1 6 ,
,
and Q317 for the Sweep) is to tie the start of the
sweep ramps to the same fixed levelfor each
sweep* Operation of the A
stabilizer is
described.
A differential circuit formed by Q302 and Q303 compares the A Sweep feedback signal on the base of
(2303 against the reference voltage on the base of
Q302, to control the base bias current to Q304 and
thereby the sweep baseline level. Operational amplifier U309A generates the fixed reference that the
baseline voltage level is compared against. The
reference voltage amplifier has a gain of -0.8 (less
than one and inverted) ; and, with +2.5 V applied to
the inverting input and the noninverting input
grounded, the output level is -2 V. capacitor C305
filters the output to eliminate noise that could cause
sweep start jitter. The filtered voltage is applied to
the junction of R317, R354, and C305 and
references both Baseline Stabilizer circuits.
A and B Sweep Start
The A and B Sweep Start circuits operate the same
way with like components in each doing the same
job; only the A Sweep Start circuit is described.
Sweep time may be divided into three periods:
BASELINE STATE. In the baseline state (during
sweep holdoff), Q308 and Q304 are on and Q309 is
off, and the level at the collector of Q308 is held at
-2.8 V. That voltage is buffered by the A Sweep
Buffer (with about a 0.7 V rise across the base-toemitter-junction of Q312) and fed back to the base
of Q303 where it is compared with the -2 V reference produced by operational amplifier U309A. If the
baseline voltage is too low compared to the output
of U309A, Q303 (the retrace current regulator) is biased on a little harder. Additional base current is
available to Q304, and it conducts harder to raise
the output baseline voltage to the reference voltage
level. The opposite action occurs if the baseline
voltage is too high.
A smaller feedback loop formed by Q311 and R305
controls the gain of Q326 so that the standing current available (about 3 mA) is just enough to keep
Q304 biased on during the baseline state. When the
states of the gate signals reverse, Q309 is turned on
and Q308 turns off. The standing current then conducts through Q309 to rapidly pull the base of (2304
down to shut it off. When the base voltage reaches
about -2.7 V, Q333 conducts. That action clamps
the base voltage of Q304 (and the collector voltage
of Q309) at that level and prevents Q309 from saturating so that it will have a short turn-off time when
the sweep ends.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Table 3-22
A Sweep Timing Selections
SPEED
l timing
10 ns
4mA
20 ns
2 mA
Ctiminq
C314lC315
II
I
t
as5
as4
as3
as2
as 1
as0
Min H.O.
0
0
1
0
1
0
2.0 p s
0
0
0
1
1
0
2.0 p s
0
0
0
0
1
0
2.0 p s
50 ns
800 p A
100 ns
400 p A
II
0
0
1
0
0
1
2.0 p s
200 ns
200 p A
II
0
0
0
1
0
1
2.0 p s
80 p A
I
f
0
0
0
0
0
1
2.0 p s
40pA
II
0
0
1
0
0
0
2.0 p s
20 p A
II
0
0
0
1
0
0
4.0 p s
II
0
0
0
0
0
0
10 ps
C307B
0
1
1
0
1
0
2.0 p s
2 mA
II
0
1
0
1
1
0
4.0 p s
5 p ~ 800pA
II
0
1
0
0
1
0
10 ps
400pA
II
0
1
1
0
0
1
20 ps
200pA
II
0
1
0
1
0
1
40 ps
50 ps
80 p A
II
0
1
0
0
0
1
100 ps
100 ps
40 p A
II
0
1
1
0
0
0
200 ps
20 p A
II
0
1
0
1
0
0
400 ps
0
1
0
0
0
0
1.0 ms
C307A
1
0
1
0
1
0
2.0 ms
1
0
0
1
1
0
4.0 ms
500 ns
Ipsa
2 psa
5 psa
1 Ps
2 ps
lops
20ps
200 ps
500 ps
1 ms
8 pA
4 mA
8 pA
4 mA
II
2 ms
2 mA
II
5ms
800pA
11
1
0
0
0
1
0
10 ms
400 p A
II
1
0
1
0
0
1
20 ms
200 p A
II
1
0
0
1
0
1
40 ms
80 p A
II
1
0
0
0
0
1
100 ms
40 p A
II
1
0
1
0
0
0
200 ms
20 p A
II
1
0
0
1
0
0
400 ms
8 PA
It
1
0
0
0
0
0
10 ms
20 ms
50 ms
100 ms
200 ms
500 ms
a
Used only during horizontal characterization.
1s
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Table 3-23
B Sweep Timing Selections
SPEED
1 timing
10 ns
4 mA
20 ns
2 mA
Ctiming
C3291C330
II
II
bs4
bs3
bs2
bsl
bsO
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
400 pA
II
0
1
0
0
1
200 JLA
II
0
0
1
0
1
80 pA
II
0
0
0
0
1
40 pA
II
0
1
0
0
0
20 pA
II
0
0
1
0
0
5 ps
10 ps
8 pA
4 mA
I
f
0
0
0
0
0
C307C
1
1
0
1
0
20 ps
2 mA
II
1
0
1
1
0
800 JLA
11
1
0
0
1
0
400 pA
II
1
1
0
0
1
200 pA
II
1
0
1
0
1
80 pA
II
1
0
0
0
1
40 pA
II
1
1
0
0
0
20 pA
II
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
50 ns
100 ns
100 ms
100 ms
1
JLS
2 ps
50 ps
100 ps
100 ps
100 ps
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
,
800 p A
8 pA
I
1
RUNUP STATE. With Q304 and Q308 off, the
charging current from the timing circuit can begin
charging the timing capacitors, and the voltage at
the emitter of Q304 ramps up linearly. That ramp is
buffered by the A Sweep Buffer (U310A and B and
Q312) to drive the Horizontal Output Amplifier. As
the ramp is running up, it is being compared with a
fixed reference level by the Sweep End Comparators. When the ramp level reaches the comparison level, the A SWP END signal goes high. That
signals the Trigger Logic IC, U602, to end the A
GATE signal, and the sweep is switched to the
retrace state. The sweep ramp is also being fed
back to the base of Q303. At the point in the ramp
that the base voltage of Q303 exceeds that on the
base of Q302 (the -2 V baseline reference), Q303 is
biased off and Q302 conducts. This biasing conditions disables the feedback loop that stabilizes the
baseline voltage level, and it remains off until the
feedback voltage during the retrace period falls back
to near the -2 V baseline reference voltage on the
base of Q302.
RETRACE STATE. At the end of the sweep, the gate
signals reverse state. Transistor Q309 is biased off,
and Q308 is biased on. Retrace current supplied by
Q308 quickly returns the voltage across the timing
capacitor to a little below the baseline voltage level.
That retrace current is regulated by Q311 and Q326
to produce a rapid, yet rate-controlled retrace. At
the point of the fall in feedback voltage where Q303
starts to turn on, base current becomes available to
Q304 to turn it on, and the feedback loop that
stabilizes the voltage at the baseline level again
becomes active.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
EMITTER
(3304
- - --2.75
- --2.61
- --
BASE
030 4
v
- --3.30 V
- - - -2. I 1 v
A
I
I
I
V
I
I
I
I
I
I
BASE
Q309
(A GATE)
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
- - - 4 . 7 0
I
!l
RETRACE
I
I
V
I
I
-!
BASELINE
,-
RUNUP
-4.00 V
I
6555-27
Figure 3-6. A Sweep Start circuit waveforms.
A and B Sweep Buffers
The A Sweep Buffer (Q310A and B, and Q312) and B
Sweep Buffer (Q323A and B, and Q325) buffer the
voltage ramp as the timing capacitors charge. In the
A Sweep circuit, Q310A and Q310B are highimpedance FET amplifiers driving emitter follower
Q312. The output signal from the emitter of Q312 is
applied to the Delay Time Comparators, the End-ofSweep Comparators, fed back to the Baseline
Stabilizer circuit, and sent to the Horizontal Output
Amplifier (Diagram 6) as the A RAMP horizontal
deflection signal.
Sweep End Comparators
The sweep ramp signals must horizontally deflect
the electron beam across the entire face of the crt.
Comparators U316A, B, C, and D determine when
the A and B Sweeps have reached the required
amplitude. These comparators check the sweep
voltage against the reference level that defines the
end of the sweep and generate the A SWP END and
B SWP END signals when that level is reached. The
sweep-end signals are applied to the Trigger Logic
IC (U602) so that device knows when the sweeps
are done. The Trigger Logic IC then switches the
states of the A GATE or the B GATE signal (as
appropriate) to reset the sweep circuitry to its
baseline level.
Delay Time Comparators
When the A Sweep ramp runs, its amplitude is compared against two delay levels by the comparators
of U313. The differential outputs of the REF delay
comparator change states when the A Sweep
crosses the first delay level. The differential output
signal from the delay comparator is applied to ECL
line receiver U315C. That device has a high gain and
produces a fast-rise signal at an ECL level. When
the DLY END 0 (reference delay completed) is
received by the Trigger Logic IC (U602, Diagram 4),
a B GATE is produced to start the B Sweep in RUNS
AFTER B Trigger mode. That B Sweep displays the
applied waveform at the first (reference) delay
setting. At the end of the delay in RUNS AFTER
mode, the Trigger Logic IC begins watching for a B
Trigger signal that must occur before a B GATE is
produced.
The differential output of the second delay comparator in U313 changes states when the A Sweep
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
ramp at pin 9 crosses the second (delta) delay level
applied to pin 6. At that point, the DLY END 1 signal
is produced at the output of U315A (pin 2) and
applied to U602. A second B GATE signal is then
produced to start another B Sweep ramp to display
the signal at the delta delay setting.
Delay Time Switching
The DELTA DELAY and REF DELAY voltage level are
applied to multiplexer U301 from the DAC circuit.
The Measurement Processor established those voltages based on the settings of the CURSORITIME
POSITION controls made by the user from the front
panel. Switch section U301A is held permanently
switched to direct the DELTA DELAY signal to its
output pin.
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
(Diagram 6)
Horizontal Preamplifier
Horizontal Preamplifier IC U802 converts singleended horizontal signals (A sweep, B sweep,
horizontal readout, and X-Axis) into differential outputs to drive the crt horizontal deflection plates. The
horizontal preamplifier signals are selected by the
HDO and HD1 logic signals from Display Sequencer
U600 on Diagram 4. Magnified sweep, beam find,
horizontal positioning, and horizontal gain adjustments (XI and X10) are provided in U802 and
associated components.
The function of each pin of U802 is as
follows:
RO (Pin 1): RO HORIZ. lnput for horizontal
component of the readout display.
GA1 (Pin 2): Adjustment of R825 sets the
horizontal X1 gain.
A RAMP (Pin 3): lnput for the A Sweep
signal.
GND (Pin 4): Ground connection for U802.
B RAMP (Pin 5): lnput for the B Sweep
signal.
MAG (Pin 6): Selects XI0 magnified sweep
when high or normal sweep when low. Magnified mode is selected when in X-Y horizontal mode.
X (Pin 7): X-AXIS. This is the X-Axis signal
input when in X-Y horizontal mode. The
signal source is the CH 1 trigger signal from
U421A (Diagram 3). Adjustment of R827
sets the gain of the X-Axis signal.
HDO (Pin 8): Pin 8 (HDO) and pin 11 (HD1)
are logic lines that select the horizontal input
signal to output differentially at pins 18 and
19. Table 3-24 gives the selection logic.
Table 3-24
HDO and HD1 Logic
HD1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Horiz Signal Selected
HDO
VEE (Pin 9):
I
1
RO HORlZ
A SWEEP
B SWEEP
X-AXIS
-5 V supply to U802.
GA10 (Pin 10): Adjustment of R826 sets the
horizontal X I 0 gain.
HD1 (Pin 11): See the description for HDO
above.
ROUT (Pin 12): Horizontal Preamplifier differential output signal for the right deflection
plate.
LOUT (Pin 13): Horizontal Preamplifier differential output signal for the left deflection
plate.
BF (Pin 14): The BEAM FIND signal from
U503 (Diagram 4) switch the Beam Find
feature on or off. BEAM FIND on reduces the
horizontal deflection to within the graticule
area. Vertical deflection is also reduced and
the intensity is set to a fixed viewing level to
aid in locating off-screen, over-deflected,
or under-intensified displays.
POSITION (Pin 15): lnput for the horizontal
position control signal. Multiplexer section
U301B switches to reduce the range of the
Horizontal POSITION control to match that of
the Vertical POSITION controls when in X-Y
horizontal mode-When X-Y display mode is
selected, a low XY signal on Pin 9 of U301B
connects the pin 5 input to the horizontal position input of U802. The signal at pin 5 is a
reduced
horizontal positioning signal
produced by the R353lR358 voltage divider.
Vcc (Pin 16): +7 V supply to U802.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Driver Amplifiers
The differential output current signal from U802
passes through common-base current amplifiers
Q809 and Q810. These transistors drive current-tovoltage converters Q803-Q804 and Q807-Q808.
Emitter followers Q804 and Q803 convert the current
signal to a voltage signal to drive the
complementary-FET output amplifiers, Q801 and
Q802, to produce the negative-going deflection
voltage. Emitter followers Q808 and Q807 convert
the other side of the differential current to drive
Q805 and Q806 to produce the positive-going horizontal deflection voltage.
The circuit of Q804 and Q803 is configured to
respond rapidly to a negative-going feedback
signal; the circuit of Q807 and Q808 is configured to
respond quickly to the positive-going feedback
signal. Zener diode VR802 and associated resistors
R843 and R844 maintain the collector bias of Q803
and Q808 at 24 V.
Magnifier registration and horizontal readout centering is set by MAG REG potentiometer R809.
Adjustment of R809 is done to balance the currents
into the emitters of Q809 and (2810 to obtain the
correct horizontal position of the readout within the
graticule display area.
Output Amplifier
The differential circuitry of both sides of the Horizontal Output Amplifier is similar; operation of only
one side of the amplifier is described.
Complementary-FET amplifiers Q801 and Q802
produce the negative-going horizontal signal to drive
the left deflection plate. Two transistors are used to
provide adequate power handling. Since the two
gates are at different bias levels, signal voltage is
applied to the gate of transistor Q801 via C803.
Resistor R828, connected between the source and
drain of Q801, is a parallel current path around Q801
that balances the power handling requirements of
the two FETs. The amplifier FETs are high gain
devices, and the overall gain must be reduced to
maintain circuit stability at the faster sweep rates. To
provide the high-frequency gain reduction, resistor
R850 is in series with C802, from the source of Q802
to the drain of Q801, to damp the driving-energy to
(2801 supplied by C802 during the sweep retrace
transitions. Feedback resistor R806 provides positive
feedback and sets the overall gain of the output
amplifier stage. A parallel trimmer capacitor across
the feedback resistor, C807, adjusts the 2 ns sweep
timing for its best linearity. Impedance matching to
the deflection plate and additional signal damping is
provided by R802.
As the gate voltage of Q802 increases to follow the
input ramp signal, the drain voltage goes negative
from about 87 V toward the 15 V source voltage. At
the same time, the signal on the gate of
complementary-FET Q801 is reducing the current
through (2801, thereby allowing its source voltage to
fall. At the end of the ramp signal, the input voltage
falls, and through the positive feedback, Q802 is
rapidly biased off. That also biases Q801 on, and the
energy stored in C802 quickly returns the deflection
plate voltage back to its starting point.
--
Common-Mode Stabilizer
Operation amplifier U801A compares the node
voltage at the junction of R820, R821, and R822 to
ground. Its output drives the amplifier input
common-mode point (at the junction of R811 and
R812) The purpose of this dc feedback circuit is to
keep the average voltage level on the right and left
horizontal deflection plates set to the center of the
amplifier's dynamic operating range (about 70 V)
.
.
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJUST, AND
CONTROL MUX (Diagram 7)
Z-Axis and Auto Focus Amplifiers
The Z-Axis and Auto Focus Amplifiers circuit operate on the same principle and both get their drive
signal from the Z-Axis Focus Driver. However, the
differences are enough that both circuits are
described.
Z-AXIS AMPLIFIER. Intensity control signal current
from the Z-AxisIFocus driver is applied to the Z-Axis
amplifier via Q2707. That transistor acts as a current
buffer amplifier. The input signal line is clamped at
5.4 V by Q2715 to prevent an overdrive of the ZAxis circuit. The Z-Axis Amplifier output transistors
consist of Q2701 and Q2702 on one side of the
complementary-symmetry totem-pole output amplifier and Q2703 and Q2704 on the other side. Two
transistors are used on each side to divide the
power handling requirements needed to drive the crt
control grid. The crt grid capacity is large, and
requires a relatively large amount of power to
change the intensity level quickly.
In the base circuit of Q2704, CR2705 prevents the
base-to-emitter voltage from exceeding 0.6 V.
Zener diode VR2701 dc level-shifts the signal voltage level at the emitter of Q2705 for proper biasing
of Q2704. The ac signal components are bypassed
around VR2701 by C2703. Base biasing for Q2702
and Q2703 is taken from a series-resistance divider
formed by R2711, R2712, R2713, and R2714
between ground and the +I30 V supply. Base
--
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
biasing for Q2701 is provided by R2715 and R2716 in
series between ground and the +I30 V supply.
A negative-going input signal to the base of (22705
causes that transistor to decrease conduction, and
the voltage at the top of C2705 goes negative folQ2701 i s biased
lowing the input signal. ~ransistor
on harder by the negative transition, and Q2704
decreases in conduction. At the Z-Axis output signal
line (collector of Q2702), the increasing conduction
causes the voltage to rise towards the +I30 V supply
level. A positive-going input signal has the reverse
effect on the output signal. The full output-voltage
swing of about 60 V is produced by a 3 mA current
change of the Z-Axis FocusIDriver signal current.
Gain of the Z-Axis Amplifier stage is set by the feedback through R2708 and R2709 from the collector of
~ 2 7 0 2 the base of Q2705. The amplifier is cornto
pensated by the variable capacitor (C2704, Z-Axis
Response) in parallel with the feedback resistors.
BEAM FIND. The Z-Axis portion of the BEAM FlND
circuit consists of R2705 and Q2706. When BEAM
FlND is active, Q2706 is biased on. This clamps the
Z-Axis signal line via R2706 and raises the voltage at
the base of Q2705 to a level that produces a bright
trace.
Auto Focus Amplifier
The Auto Focus Amplifier (Q2708, Q2709, Q2711,
Q2712, and Q2713) uses a sample of the
Z-AxisfFocus Driver signal current from W2701 to
drive the auto-focus circuit. The input signal is
inverted by Q2708 to drive Q2711 in a complementary fashion to Q2705 in the Z-Axis Amplifier
circuit (as the opposite circuit action must happen to
produce the correct auto-focus response). The
auto-focus output amplifier is similar to the Z-Axis
amplifier, but it uses only one complementary transistor on each side (not as much power is needed to
drive the focus grid as needed to drive the intensity
grid).
Dc Restorers
The Z-Axis and the Auto Focus DC Restorers are
similar in operation. Both circuits are described, but
only the added portions of Auto Focus circuitry are
included in the discussion of the Auto Focus circuit.
The Dc Restorers set the crt control-grid and focusgrid biases and couple the ac and dc components of
the Z-Axis and the Auto Focus Amplifier outputs to
the crt grids. Direct coupling of the Z-Axis and Auto
Focus signals to the crt control grid is not employed
because of the high potential differences involved.
Refer to Figure 3-7 during the following discussion.
Z-AXIS DC RESTORER. Ac drive to the Z-Axis Dc
Restorer circuit is obtained from pin 12 of T2204.
The drive voltage has a peak amplitude of about
2130 V at a frequency of about 18 kHz and is
coupled into the Z-Axis Dc Restorer circuit through
R2722 and C2713. The cathode of diode CR2704 is
biased by Grid Bias potentiometer R2719 and referenced to ground via R2720. The ac-drive voltage
is clamped to the voltage set by the Grid Bias potentiometer wiper whenever the positive peaks forward
bias diode CR2704. Capacitor ~ 2 7 1 0
prevents significant loading of the potentiometer wiper voltage
when CR2704 conducts*
The Z-Axis Amplifier output voltage, which varies
between +16 V and +66 V, is applied to the Dc
Restorer at the anode of CR2703. The ac-drive
voltage holds CR2703 reverse biased until the voltage falls below the Z-Axis Amplifier output voltage
level. At that point, CR2703 becomes forward biased
and clamps the junction of CR2703, CR2704, and
C2713 to the Z-Axis output level. Thus, the 18 kHz
ac-drive voltage is clamped at two levels to produce
a roughly square-wave 18 kHz signal with a positive
dc-offset level.
The Dc Restorer is referenced to the -2750 V crt
cathode voltage through CR2702 and R2723. Initially,
both C2712 and C2711 charge up to a level determined by the difference between the Z-Axis output voltage and the crt cathode voltage. Capacitor
C2712 charges from the Z-Axis output through
R2721, R2723, CR2702, and CR2703, to the crt
cathode. Capacitor C2711 charges through R2723
(a series damping resistor), CR2702, and CR2701 to
the crt cathode.
During the positive transitions of the ac drive (from
the lower clamped level toward the higher clamped
level) the charge on C2712 increases due to the
rising voltage. The voltage increase across C2712 is
equal to the amplitude of the positive transition. The
negative transition is coupled through C2712 to
reverse bias CR2702 and forward bias CR2701. The
increased charge of C2712 is then transferred to
C2711 as C2712 discharges toward the Z-Axis
output level. Successive cycles of the ac input to the
Dc Restorer charge C2711 to a voltage equal to the
initial level plus the amplitude of the clamped
square-wave input.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
-2700
C27 I 1
+16
3-k
, CAT
T
O
GRID
R2724
6.2 M
6081-09
Figure 3-7. Simplified diagram of the DC Restorer circuitry.
The charge held by C2711 sets the control-grid bias
voltage. If more charge is added to that already
present on C2711, the control grid becomes more
negative (display dimmer). Conversely, if less
charge is added, the control-grid voltage level
becomes closer to the cathode-voltage level, and
the display becomes brighter. During periods that
C2712 is charging, the crt control-grid voltage is
held constant by the long time-constant discharge
path of C2711 through R2724.
Fast-rise and fast-fall transitions of the Z-Axis output signal are coupled to the crt control grid through
C2711 to start the crt writing-beam current toward
the new intensity level. The Dc Restorer output level
then follows the Z-Axis output-voltage level to set
the new bias voltage for the crt control grid.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Neon lamps DS2702 and DS2701 protect the crt
from excessive grid-to-cathode voltage if the
potential on either the control grid or the cathode is
lost for any reason.
AUTO FOCUS DC RESTORER. The action of the
Auto Focus circuit has to be in reverse of the action
of the 2-Axis circuit. The differential transistor pair
of Q2708 and Q2709 provides drive to the Auto Focus Amplifier that is inverted in polarity to the 2-Axis
signal. As the intensity increases (more beam current), the focus grid bias must become more positive to maintain the focus of the beam. Also, since
the focus grid operates at a less negative level than
the control grid, the Auto Focus DC Restorer is referenced to the -2750 V supply via a voltage divider
chain.
Table 3-25
Front-Panel Multiplexer
Channel Select Bits
POT6
POTS
0
1
0
CH 1 PROBE
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
The FOCUS potentiometer (R2758) voltage is taken
across the middle resistor of the divider string to
provide an adjustable focus voltage that sets the
nominal focus level. Capacitor C2758 filters the
reference supply voltage for the focus circuit.
POT7
Analog
Signal
Selected
0
1
1
1
0
B INTEN
1
1
1
ANALOG GND
CONTROL LINE
I
I
I
I
CH 2 PROBE
CH 3 PROBE
CH 4 PROBE
Volts Cal Signal Source
Scale Illumination
This circuit provides the precision voltages required
for setting the voltage measurement constants during the SELF CAL routine. Ground is connected to
the vertical input when GND Input Coupling is
selected.
Front-panel SCALE ILLUM control R905 varies the
base current of Q905, Q907, and Q908 to set the
intensity levels of the scale illumination bulbs
(DS901, DS902, DS903).
Five voltages are selected from a precision voltage
divider, R921, and multiplexed through U931 to the
vertical inputs at the appropriate time during the
SELF CAL routine. Selection is controlled by three
binary coded lines (VOLT CAL 0, 1, 2) from U303.
Those control bits and the selected output voltage
may be checked one at a time by running the VOLT
REF exerciser from the Service Menu.
NOTE
Bulb life is extended by keeping SCALE
ILLUM control set low or off except when full
intensity is required.
Probe Adjust Circuit
Control Multiplexer
Multiplexer U506, controlled by Data Latch U2313 on
Diagram 11, selects the A INTEN, B INTEN, and
READOUT control levels and probe code voltages to
be sent on the PROBE MUX signal line to multiplexer
U2309 on Diagram 11. The bit coding is shown in
Table 3-25. The selected output from U2309 is applied to the A-to-D Converter (U2306, Diagram 11)
where it is digitized and sent to the Measurement
Processor.
The Probe Adjust circuit generates a 0.5 V square
wave signal at about 1 kHz. Operational amplifier
U930A has a gain of about 4. The +2.5 V reference
on its noninverting input produces a little over 10 V
at the output pin. That voltage is divided by the voltage divider formed by R936, CR936, and R937 for a
peak amplitude of the signal of 0.5 V during the time
CR936 is forward biased. When CR936 is reverse biased by the output of U930B, the Probe Adjust output voltage is pulled down to 0 V through R937 to
ground.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Operational amplifier U930B is a free-running oscillator circuit with a period of about 1 ms. The oscillator frequency is determined mainly by the charging
time constant of C935 and R935. The voltage divider
formed by R938, R934, and R939 divides the +15 V
supply to provide a positive voltage on pin 5 of the
oscillator to get the circuit into oscillation. (When the
circuit is oscillating, the feedback signal switches the
pin 5 voltage between about +8 V to 0 V.) The gain
of the amplifier is high enough to drive pin 7 to the
positive supply voltage level at about 14 V, and the
signal voltage level on pin 5 rises to a little over 8 V
from the feedback current supplied by R933. The
CLK 1K signal taken from the junction of R934 and
R939 is supplied to U600 and is used to skew the
chop-clock frequency. The skew prevents the oscilloscope from triggering on the chop frequency when
displaying multiple traces in CHOP Mode.
At that level CR935 is reverse biased, and CR936 is
forward biased (by the output of U930A) to pass the
Probe Adjust high level output signal current.
Charging current through feedback resistor R934
charges C935 up from 0 V toward the output voltage
level. As soon as the charge on C935 (and the
voltage on pin 6 of U930B) reaches the voltage level
on pin 5, the output level at pin 7 drops to about
-5 V, and C935 must then begin discharging to the
new voltage level. At that point CR935 is forward
biased and that reverse biases CR936 so that the
Probe Adjust output voltage drops to 0 V. Resistor
R940, in series with CR935, limits current flow to
protect U930 and CR935 in the event of a static discharge to the PROBE ADJUST output connector.
and transceivers, the Address Decoding circuitry,
and the Power-On Reset IC (U2502).
-
Power-on Reset
The +5 V supply is monitored by U2502 to generate
the reset signals throughout the instrument. These
reset signals initialize the states of the logic devices
and ensure that memory writes to any of the RAM
spaces cannot occur until the +5 V supply is up to its
correct operating level. The RESET signal output at
pin 6 is initially high during power up (as soon as the
voltage has reached the operating level of the
RESET IC, U2502). That high signal is inverted by
U2506C to produce the SYS RESET signal. The
SYS RESET signal holds Processor U2501 in its reset
state.
The SYS RESET signal also resets and initializes the
Readout Processor (U2400, Diagram 9) and DAC
Processor (U2601, Diagram 12). At pin 5 of U2502,
a RESET signal is generated. That signal biases
Q2507 off t ~ - ~ r e v e n t s ~ s tRAM ~2521-frombeing
em
selected by any random states that might occur on
the address lines during reset as the voltage is
rising.
About 5 ms after the +5 V supply reaches the operating level required for the Processor, the RESET
condition is removed, allowing the Processor to
operate. At power off (and for a momentary drop in
the +5 V supply), when the +5 V supply falls below
the safe operating level of the logic devices, the
RESET condition occurs to prevent random
operation.
-.
Crt
The Trace Rotation adjustment, R911, varies the
current through the Trace Rotation coil. The Trace
Rotation coil is located between the crt face and the
vertical and horizontal deflection plates, and it
affects both the vertical and horizontal alignment of
the trace.
The Geometry adjustment, R2784, varies the voltage
level on the horizontal deflection-plate shields to
control the overall geometry of the display
(minimizes bowing of the display).
The Astigmatism adjustment, R2788, varies the
voltage level on the astigmatism grid to obtain the
best-focused display over the whole face of the crt.
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR (Diagram 8)
The Measurement Processor circuitry includes the
Processor (U2501), the System RAM (U2521), the
System ROM (U2519), communication bus latches
Measurement Processor
FUNCTION. Measurement Processor U2501 is a
multitasking device. Its major functions are the
following:
1. Continually refreshes the front panel indicator
LEDs. One column of the six-column LED
matrix is refreshed every 2.048 ms.
2. Continually scans the front panel switch settings, sensing rotation of rotary switches and
closures or openings of momentary-contact
switches. One column of the six-column
switch matrix (the same column number of
LEDs being refreshed) is read every
2.048 ms.
3. Communicates with the Readout Processor
and Readout RAM to set attributes for each
readout field, put text into each field, and
turn the readout fields on or off.
--
Theory of Operation-2246A
4. Scans the front panel pots and sets control
voltage levels. The Measurement Processor
selects a pot to be scanned by connecting it
to Comparator U2306 in the d-to-a circuitry.
The Measurement Processor does a
successive-approximation a-to-d conversion
on each pot, using the DAC (U2302) to output the search values to the Comparator. Pot
values are scanned, processed, and converted to analog control values by the DAC.
The analog levels from the DAC are output to
the controlled devices via sample-and-hold
circuits (U2304, U2305 on Diagram 11 and
U2606, U2607, U2608 on Diagram 12).
5. Sets up the hardware state of the instrument,
including shift registers 0 and 1, BEAM FIND,
and the operating states of U600 (SLIC) and
U602 (FLIC). This setup takes place as
needed for every change of a front panel
momentary-contact
or
rotary-contact
switch.
6. Keeps track of trigger status and controls the
trigger levels when in AUTO LEVEL mode. It
uses FLlC (U602) to find the A Trigger status
(writing to FLlC to reset the A Trigger latch,
and reading from it to get the status). It uses
SLIC (U600) to find the B Trigger status
(writing to SLIC to reset the B Gate latch, and
reading from it to get the status). To
reacquire the trigger level (positive and
negative peaks of the trigger source
waveform) it uses the Trigger ICs (U421 and
U431), and the Trigger Comparators in FLlC
(it writes to FLlC to reset the Trigger comparator latches, and reads from FLlC to get
the status of the latches). To switch between
free-running and triggered mode in AUTO
LEVEL and AUTO trigger modes, it writes to
the control register in FLIC; it switches to triggered mode when trigger frequency is sufficiently high and to free-run mode when too
low.
7. Tracks the trigger level and ground with cursors. The cursors are displayed by directing
the Readout system to display cursor characters, and using the DAC system to set the
REF CURSOR and DELTA CURSOR level to
match the trigger or ground point on the
waveform.
8. Does automated measurements. Some
measurements are knob-driven. They are:
I+ SEC 4
I+ 1/SEC 4
Service
When these measurements are running, a new
digital value is displayed, and the cursor or delayzone position is changed only when the user
changes the setting of one of the continuousrotation CURSOR/TIME POSITION controls. Other
measurements are waveform-driven, They are:
DC
+PEAK
-PEAK
PK-PK
GATED +PEAK
GATED -PEAK
GATED PK-PK
When these measurements are running, a new
digital value is displayed and the cursor position is
changed each time a measurement cycle occurs.
These measurements use the B trigger system; and,
for DC, the low-pass circuit formed by U1101B and
associated filter components (Diagram 3).
9. Controls the AUTOSET function by setting up
the vertical, horizontal, triggering, and crt
controls to obtain a usable display based on
the input signal characteristics.
10. Controls the STORE/RECALL system store
and recall functions.
Calibrates the measurement system. The
vertical and horizontal gains of the instrument
are set by manual potentiometer adjustments; therefore, the Processor does not
control the match between the waveform display and the graticule. However, it does adjust the measurement results to compensate
for any error in the vertical or horizontal gain.
(An example of this is that there could be
more than 0.5% error in matching a time
base signal to the graticule, but less than
0.5% error in a time measurement done on
that signal).
In the Time Base calibration routine, the Measurement Processor uses the TB Cal signal, the Trigger
circuitry, the A Sweep system, and U602 (FLIC) to
find the match between the delay levels (REF DELAY
and DELTA DELAY) and edges of the calibration
signal. In the Vertical System calibration, the
Processor uses the Voltage Reference Generator
(U931, Diagram 7), the Readout System, the Vertical Preamplifiers, the Delay Line Driver, and the Vertical Comparator (U702) to find the match between
Readout REF CURSOR and DELTA CURSOR levels
and vertical outputs generated by the preamplifiers.
It uses the Voltage Reference Generator, the Vertical Preamplifiers, and the Trigger circuitry to find the
match between trigger levels and trigger signals
picked off from the Vertical Preamplifiers.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR SIGNALS* Table
3-26 is a listing of signal name and function of the
Measurement Processor signals.
controlled by the D T / ~
(Data TransmitlReceived)
output from the Measurement processor. Data
enabling occurs when pin 39 (DEN) goes low while
pin 38 (MCSO) is high.
---
Data Buffers
-
BUS 0 BIDIRECTIONAL BUFFER. Buffer U2515
communicates the serial bit data to and from the
Measurement Processor. Seven data lines of the
eight available are used in this application. The
remaining one is connected to the +5 V supply to
prevent random states and noise from affecting the
other data lines in the device. The buffer is enabled
via U2503B when both pins 38 (MCSO) and 39 (DEN)
of the Processor are lgw. The direction of transfer is
controlled by the DT/R output of the processor.
BUS 1 BIDIRECTIONAL DATA BUFFER. Data communication to and from the Measurement Processor
is via Buffer U2514. Direction of the data transfer is
BUS ARBITRATION GATES. The Bus Arbitration
logic (U2503A and B, and U2506D) controls which
Bus Buffer is enabled for communication with the
Measurement Processor. This control logic is
necessary since both buffers cannot be active at the
same time. Bus 1 (U2514) is the eight-bit data communication bus, and Bus 0 (U2515) uses seven bits
to communicate single-bit data to the Measurement
Processor. On the Bus 0 ADO signal line, the
Measurement Processor sends the serial MB DATA
to each of the operating mode Shift Registers and to
SLlC (U600) and FLlC (U602). Additional arbitration
is provided by U2503C to produce a SLlC RD strobe
when the Measurement Processor wants to read the
status of the Display Controller.
-
-
Table 3-26
Measurement Processor Signals
Signal Function
Signal Name
SYS RESET
Master reset for the Processor board.
CLK 8M
8 MHz clock for the Readout and DAC Processors.
ADO-AD7
Multiplexed addressldata lines for the Measurement Processor.
A8-A15
Address lines for the Measurement Processor.
A1 6-A17
Multiplexed addresslstatus lines.
DO-D7
Data lines for Bus 1 (to memory and readout).
ADDR3-ADDRO
-
1
Latched addresses to Main board.
R INTR
O
Indicates the Readout System is busy when asserted.
DAC INTR
Indicates the DAC Subsystem is busy when asserted.
MB RETURN
Return data from the Main board Shift Register 2.
SW BD DATA
Data from the switch board.
AD COMP
Output of the A-to-D Converter Comparator, U2306.
MB DATA
Bidirectional data line to/from the Main board.
--
TB CAL
I
Time-base calibration signal to trigger circuit.
..
.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Address Latches
MULTIPLEXED AD BUS ADDRESS LATCH. Since the
A O through AD7 bits are multiplexed between
D
address and data information, the addressing information needs to be latched to hold it for stable addressing (demultiplexed) The ALE (Address Latch
Enable) signal from the Measurement Processor
(pin 61) goes high when the address bits are stable,
and the bits are latched into U2513. The device is
permanently enabled by the grounded enable pin.
.
NOblMULTlPLEXED ADDRESS BUS ADDRESS
LATCH (U2512)- Some of the nonmulti~lexed
address bits are also latched to maintain them
between ALE strobes The latching alsoprevents
address line problems on the Main board from
locking up the Measurement Processor. From
U2512, - latched
addresses
ADDRO-ADDR3
(A12-A15) are routed to the Display Controller
(U600) for addressing the internal registers in that
device. Those address lines are also applied to U501
(Diagram 4) for additional decoding to load the
Analog Control Shift Registers with the serial data
supplied from the MB DATA signal line. Two address
lines (A16-A1 7) are latched in U2512 for use by the
System ROM U2519.
Measurement Processor ROM
The operating code for the Measurement Processor
is stored in the System ROM (U2519). Immediately
after the Power On Reset ends, the Measurement
Processor fetches the first command from the reset
vector and begins running the program.
Measurement Processor RAM
The Measurement Processor RAM (U2521) provides
storage space for intermediate-step calculation
results, the front-panel settings, storelrecall system
setups, and the system calibration constants. The
Processor RAM is battery backed up so that data
stored during operation remains intact during
periods of power off. When the instrument is turned
on again, the stored front panel settings return the
oscilloscope to the same operating state that was
present at power off. The stored calibration constants preserve the accuracy of the measurement
system (assuming the instrument is warmed up and
was warmed up when the SELF CAL routine was last
done). If the backup battery is dead, or if the stored
calibration constants are lost for some other reason,
the instrument will do a SELF CAL at power on. This
restores accuracy to the instrument (unless the
problem is a RAM fault, in which case the instrument
cannot SELF CAL), but the battery circuitry should
be checked and the battery replaced if necessary.
Also, the SELF CAL routine should be run again after
the instrument is warmed up to generate accurate
calibration constants at the operating temperature. If
the power-off front panel settings are lost for any
reason, the power-on conditions that are set up are
only restored in valid states (but not any predefined
setup).
Address Decoder
The Address Decoders (U2517 and U2518) allow the
Measurement Processor to enable any device on the
busses for communication. Enabling signals
BUSO SEL and D A sEL
~ from the processor select
the Address Decoder (eitherE517 or U2518) that is
actively decoding when the WR signal is low.
Backup Battery
To keep the data stored in the Measurement
Processor RAM (U2521) during power off, a back-up
battery system (BT2501, CR2502, and R2506) is
used. The battery supplies the energy to maintain
the memory states of the static RAM. The lithium
battery is not rechargeable and has an operating life
of over three years. When the instrument is on,
CR2502 becomes reverse biased to prevent any
reverse current; when off, CR2501 is reverse biased
to isolate the back-up battery from the +5 V supply.
If the battery requires replacement, observe the
proper safety precautions in the handling and disposition of the replaced battery (see the WARNING
under " Battery " in the Specification).
READOUT SYSTEM (Diagram 9)
Readout Processor
The Readout Processor (U2400) is an eight-bit
microcomputer, containing its own internal ROM and
RAM. The Readout Processor controls the display of
text and cursors on the crt. It refreshes each
character in the display every 16 ms. When the
refresh rate becomes too high, refresh stops until
the rate is low enough again. When the refresh rate
becomes too low, refresh is done by taking control
of the crt beam for a character at a time (Fast
mode), until the refresh catches up. When the
refresh rate is just right, refresh is done a dot at a
time (Slow mode).
Each refreshed dot or character is refreshed with
the appropriate display position attributes. The
attributes define the characters or dots as:
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Stationary text that stays put at a fixed point
on screen (examples are scale factor and
menu displays) ;
2. The Readout Processor writes a byte to tristate latch U2402; the clock that does the
write also unasserts R INTR .
O
Cursor-level offset text whose position is
determined by the REF CURSOR or DELTA
CURSOR control levels only (examples are
the time-measurement cursors) ; or
3. The Measurement Processor waits until
R INTR is unasserted, then reads tri-state
O
O
R
latch U2402. It then strobes R BUF W to
assert R INTR (if another byte is coming
O
from the Measurement Processor).
Cursor-level and position-level offset text
whose display position is determined by both
the cursor levels and the vertical position
controls (an example is the TRACK TRIG
LEVEL cursor).
The Readout Processor also communicates
with the Measurement Processor system to
obtain its RAM programming (for determining the display types) and report its
status.
MeasurementIReadout Processor Communication
Protocol
A data byte is transmitted between the Measurement Processor and Readout Processor as follows:
1. The Measurement Processor waits until
R INTR is unasserted (the Readout
O
Processor is ready to receive).
2. The Measurement Processor writes a byte to
tri-state Write Latch U2401 by strobing
R BUF W ; this asserts R INTR (from
O
R
O
lnterrupt Latch U2417C and D) and causes an
interrupt to the Readout Processor.
3. The Readout Processor, when interrupted,
reads the Write Latch (U2401); it then
unasserts R INTR by clocking the Interrupt
O
Latch to reset it. (This is the same clock used
when the Readout Processor writes to tristate Read Latch U2402.)
Communication from the Readout Processor to the
Measurement Processor is done for diagnostics only
and can be started only by the Measurement
Processor. The Measurement Processor may check
the communication link by comparing bytes sent to
bytes received, query the Character Code RAM contents, and check the Character ROM identification
header. The replies are all sent between the
Readout Processor and Measurement Processor a
byte at a time as follows.
1. The Readout Processor waits until R INTR is
O
asserted (the Measurement Processor is
ready to receive).
-.
Display Refreshing
READOUT FIELD. A Readout field is refreshed in this
way:
1. The display field is selected by latching the
top address bits for the field into U2411
(FLD2-FLDO) .
2. The mixing attributes for the field are latched
into U2411 (MIX3-MIXO) .
3. The position-tracking attributes for the field
are latched into U2403 (CH 4 POS EN through
CH 1 POS EN and R TRACE SEP EN).
O
4. The starting address for the field (set by
communication with the Measurement
Processor) is latched into counters U2404
and U2405 (CH7-CHO) .
--
5. One character at a time, all the characters in
the field are refreshed until the top address
for the field (set by communication with the
Measurement
Processor)
has
been
refreshed.
READOUT CHARACTER. A Readout character is
refreshed in this way:
1. R RUN is asserted. This tells the Dot
O
Refresher PAL (U2410) to begin the character refresh and releases the reset on the Dot
Counter (U2407) and the Dot Refresher
divider (U2409B).
2. For each dot in the character, the next dot is
ref reshed.
3. When the final dot is refreshed, EOCH (endof-character at U2408 pin 17) becomes
asserted, and Q EOCH (the latched version)
becomes asserted. The Readout Processor
unasserts R RUN, and increments the charO
acter address counter lines CH7-CHO.
READOUT DOT. A Readout dot is refreshed in this
way:
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
.
is unasserted (this causes RO HORlZ
and RO VERT to control the crt horizontal and
vertical) briefly to show the dot.
position of the dot, U2412 generates the
vertical analog current for the dot, and U2413
the horizontal analog current.
2. RO BLANK is unasserted then asserted (this
unblanks then blanks the crt beam).
7. U2414 sets up the mixing for the vertical output signal (see Readout Position Mixer).
1
3. DOT CLK is asserted and unasserted (this increments the dot counter lines DOT4-DOTO).
8. U2415 sets up the mixing for the horizontal
output signal.
lnterrupt Request Latch
FAST REFRESH. Fast refresh occurs when the
Processor asserts FAST (whenever the refresh rate
is too low) or when A GATE is unasserted (the
sweep is in holdoff). In this mode, RO REQ is
asserted at the start of a character, and unasserted
at the end. Whenever RO REQ is asserted, the
Readout system controls the crt beam intensity and
the vertical and horizontal position of the beam.
Dots are refreshed every 1.6 ~s during fast refresh.
SLOW REFRESH. Slow refresh occurs when the
Processor unasserts FAST (when the refresh rate is
not falling behind in refreshing the readout) and
A GATE is asserted. In this mode, RO REQ is
asserted before each dot in a character, and
unasserted after each dot.
When the Measurement Processor wants to write
new display data to the Readout Processor or
Character Codes RAM (U2406), it latches the new
data into the Readout Write Latch (U2401) from the
DO-D7 bus lines by issuing the RO BUF W (readout
R
buffer write) strobe to the lnterrupt Request Latch
(U2417). The output of U2417D (pin 11) is latched
low and the Readout Processor is interrupted from
its display processes ( RO INTR goes low). The
Readout Processor enables the Readout Write Latch
and reads in the new data. When the character is
received, the Readout Processor transfers the byte
to the Character Code RAM and resets the lnterrupt
Request Latch (U2417D) to let RO INTR go high
again.
Data flow for the dots in a character is roughly this:
Communication Latches
1. FLD2-FLDO
refreshed.
give the current field being
2. CH7-CHO give the position of the character
within that field. CH7-CH5 gives the row
within the Readout (row 0 at the bottom, and
7 at the top), and CH4-CHO gives the column
(column 0 at the left, column I f hex at the
right) .
3. Given the field and character position, the
RAM (U2406) outputs the character code
(the code for the character that is to be displayed at that position) on R7-RO.
4. DOT4-DOT0 gives the dot that is being refreshed within the character.
5. Given the character code and dot number,
ROM U2408 outputs the position of the dot
within the character. There are up to 31 dots
in a character, in an array of 128 possible dot
positions (16 vertical by 8 horizontal).
DD6-DD3 gives the vertical position of the
dot, and DD2-DDO gives the horizontal
position.
6. Given the row and column containing the
character, and the vertical and horizontal
Communication from the Measurement Processor
and the Readout Processor is done via the Readout
Write Latch (U2401). The Readout Read Latch
(U2402) is used only for diagnostics communication.
Character Position Address Counter
The starting address of a readout field to be
displayed is loaded into the Character Position
Address Counter (U2404 and U2405). The counter
then sequences through the addresses of the
characters loaded in Character Code RAM U2406.
The vertical and horizontal position of the character
being displayed is also defined by the output of the
counter and is supplied to the Vertical and Horizontal
DACS on the CHO-CH7 bus lines.
Character Codes RAM
The ASCII codes needed to display a field of readout
are loaded into the Character Codes RAM (U2406)
from the Measurement Processor via the Readout
Writer Buffer (U2401) on the RO-R7 bus lines. When
the field is displayed, the RAM is addressed in
sequence by the Character Position Address
Counter to output those codes for a display refresh.
The field of codes accessed by the FLDO-FLD2
address lines defines either text (menus, measurement readouts, and error messages), vertical
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
cursors, or horizontal cursors. Each field has space
for up to 255 characters, and each field is superimposed over the others on the crt. The difference
between vertical and horizontal orientation of the
cursors types is done by rotating the character field
90 degrees. Hexadecimal addresses for a field are
shown in Figure 3-8.
6081-10
Dot Refresher
Dot Refresher U2410 is a programmable-AND,
fixed-OR logic (PAL) device. It monitors RO RUN for
its low states to determine when a refresh cycle
starts. It then assert RO REQ to take control of the
display for refreshing the displayed character dots.
RO BLANK goes high then low again for each displayed dot. The clock signal then goes low and high
again to clock the Character Dot Counter (U2407A
and U2407B) to the address of the next dot in the
character being refreshed. In Fast mode (when
there is low demand for display time or the refresh
rate is getting too slow), each character is completely refreshed. In Slow mode, the dots are refreshed at the rate of only one dot per each readout
request.
When all the dots in a character have been refreshed, the EOCH (end-of-character) signal from
Character Dot Position ROM U2408 tells U2410 that
there are no more pixels to be refreshed in that
character. RO REQ is then unasserted to release
control of the display system and Q EOCH (U2410,
pin 18) is sent to the Readout Processor to tell it that
the Dot Refresher is finished with the character.
Figure 3-8. Display addresses.
Character Dot Counter
The Character Dot Counter (U2407A and B) is reset
before the start of each character display. When
RO RUN goes low (the start of a refresh cycle), the
reset is released and the clock signal from the Dot
Refresher (U2410) clocks the output of the counter
through the number of counts needed to address all
the dots in a character stored in the Character Dot
Position ROM (U2408)
.
The Dot Refresher also asserts the POS EN signal
low (pin 19) when readout associated with any of the
traces is being displayed. That signal enables the
Readout Position Enable Latch (U2403)
.
The 8 MHz System Clock is divided down to 4 MHz
by DividerfCounter U2409A for clocking the Readout
Processor and to 2 MHz to clock the Dot Refresher
(after inversion by U2417B). The 2 MHz signal also
clocks U2409B, a second divider that produces the
signals that cycle the Dot Refresher through its
internal states.
Character Dot Position ROM
Readout Position Enable Latch
The dot sequence and dot position to display each
character is stored in the Character Dot Position
ROM (U2408). Character addressing for the display
is provided by the Character Codes RAM (U2406) on
the RO-R6 bus lines. Addressing of the individual
dots within a character is provided from the Character Dot Counter (U2407A and U2407B) on the
DOTO-DOT4 signal lines. The pixel information output by the Character Dot Position ROM defines the
vertical and horizontal position of the dot to be displayed. At the end of a character display, the EOCH
signal is generated from U2408 pin 17 to the Dot
Refresher (U2410) to let that device know that the
character is finished and the next character can be
started.
When the readouts must follow the Channel Vertical
POSITION controls or the TRACE SEP control, the
vertical position information must be added to the
readout position. This job is done in the Vertical
Position Switching circuitry (Diagram 2). The time of
enabling and the readout position that is enabled is
determined by the Readout Processor. The correct
enabling data for the next field of characters to be
displayed is latched into U2403 from the RO-R7 (bits
0-4 only) bus by the POS STB signal (U2403, pin
11). See Table 3-27. When a field is being refreshed, the outputs of U2403 are enabled by the
POS EN signal from the Dot Refresher, U2410
pin 19.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Disable CH 1 position
current
Enable CH 1 position
current
value to mix with the horizontal output signal to
define the readout position on the display. When
positionable text is displayed (such as time cursors),
the cursor position signal is mixed with the horizontal
character position signal. That summed signal then
defines (horizontally) where a character dot is
displayed on the crt. None of the readout (text or
cursors) is positionable using the Horizontal
POSITION control.
current
Field and Mixer Control Latch
Table 3-27
Position Enable Bit Assignment
-
b4
b3
b2
bl
x
x
x
x
Value
bO
0
I
Enable CH 2 position
current
x
x
x
1
x
x
0
x
x
x
o
x
x
x
x
l
x
x
x
Enable CH 4 position
current
0
x
x
x
x
Disable Trace Sep
current
1
x
x
x
x
Enable Trace Sep
current
I
Disable CH 3 position
current
Enable CH 3 position
current
Disable CH 4 position
current
-
Readout DACs
Vertical Character and Dot position data bytes are
converted to analog current for eventual application
to the Vertical Delay Line by Vertical Readout DAC
U2412. The vertical signal current is applied to both
signal mixer multiplexers (U2414 and U2415). When
fixed position text is displayed, the output mixer
selects a fixed position value to mix with the horizontal output signal to define the readout position on
the display. When positionable text is displayed
(such as time cursors), the cursor position signal is
mixed with the horizontal output signal. That
summed signal then defines (vertically) where a
character (dot) is displayed on the crt. Vertical
Readouts that follow the Channel Vertical POSITION
controls (tracking cursors and associated text) have
their position information summed with the Vertical
Position Switching circuitry (Diagram 2) just before
the Delay Line Driver.
Horizontal Character and Dot position data bytes are
converted to analog current for application to the
Horizontal Preamplifier (U802, Diagram 6) by Horizontal Readout DAC U2413. The horizontal signal
current is applied to both signal mixer multiplexers
(U2414 and U2415). When fixed position text is displayed, the output mixer selects a fixed position
Selection signals for switching the Readout Position
Mixer multiplexers (U2414 and U2415) are latched
into Field and Mixer Control Latch U2411 by the MIX
pin
STB output from the Readout Processor ( ~ 2 4 0 0
25). Three field selection bits used in addressing the
Character Code RAM are also loaded from the data
byte output from U2400 on the RO-R7 data bus. The
MIX3-MIX0 bits select the combination of fixed,
positionable, and character (dots) signals that are
mixed to produce the required readout positions on
the crt.
The Field signals (FLDO, FLD1, and FLD2) access
the type of characters that are displayed (menus
and readout labels, vertical cursors, or horizontal
cursors). Each of the three fields contains space for
255 characters. Characters from each field are
superimposable over the other field's characters in
the display. The attributes implicitly affect the field
specified by bO, b l , and b2 (b2 is always handled as
if zero, even if not communicated as zero).
Readout Position Mixers
The Readout Position Mixer (U2414, U2415) selects
either fixed or cursor-position voltages to mix with
the character signals to position them in the display.
Selection is done with the MIXO-MIX3 signal levels
set by the Measurement Processor for the particular
field of
characters
being displayed (see
Table 3-28).
The 2246A Readout Output Mixer allows three modes
of display to present the text and vertical or horizontal cursors.
TEXT OUTPUT MODE. The vertical output displays
vertical text information, locked to crt vertical screen
position. The horizontal output displays horizontal
text information, locked to crt horizontal screen position.
HORIZONTAL CURSOR MODE. The vertical output
displays vertical text information, whose position is
controlled by an analog cursor level control. The
horizontal output displays horizontal text information,
locked to crt horizontal screen position.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Table 3-28
-
Field and Mixer Attribute Bit Assignment
MIX3
MIX2
MIX1
MIX0
NC
FLD2
FLD1
FLDO
x
x
x
x
x
b2
bl
b
O
x
x
0
0
x
x
x
x
Route Horiz DAC to Horiz Ampl
x
x
0
1
x
x
x
x
Route Cursor0 to Horiz Amplifier
x
x
1
0
x
x
x
x
Route Cursor1 to Horiz Amplifier
x
x
1
1
x
x
x
x
Unassigned
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
Route Vert DAC to Vert Ampl
0
1
x
x
x
x
x
x
Route Vert DAC
1
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
Route Vert
1
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
Route Horiz DAC to Vert Ampl
VERTICAL CURSOR MODE. The vertical output provides a ramp signal, locked to crt vertical screen
position. The horizontal output matches the voltage
of an analog cursor level control.
MIXER OPERATION. The readout system displays
text in a pixel-type representation. For example, an
underlined letter " A " may be represented as in
Figure 3-9. Blackened spaces in the illustration
denote a displayed pixel.
For each character, one pixel at a time is displayed
by driving the vertical and horizontal outputs to
values representing the vertical and horizontal position of a pixel within the character and then unblanking the Z-Axis.
Multiplexers U2414 and U2415 are ganged electronic
switches that mix current and voltage settings. Vertical Readout DAC U2412 (vertical text generator)
provides an output current from pin 2 that is proportionate to the vertical position of the pixel being
displayed; the minimum output is 0 mA. Horizontal
Readout DAC U2413 (horizontal text generator) provides an output current that is proportionate to the
horizontal position of the pixel being displayed. Its
minimum output is also 0 mA. The REF CURSOR and
DELTA CURSOR levels are voltages that offset the
text output for the type of cursor being displayed
(vertical TIME cursors or horizontal VOLTS cursors).
When straight text is to be displayed, dc levels for
offsetting the vertical and horizontal text display
Value
Field number (0,1, or 2)
+ Cursor0 to Vert Amplifier
DAC + Cursor1 to Vert Amplifier
outputs are added. Horizontal and vertical signals to
be mixed for a particular readout are selected by the
MIXO-3 outputs of latch U2411. The data is latched
from the Readout Processor bus when MIX STB
clock is generated by the Readout Processor.
Output Buffers
The Output Buffers (U2416A and U2416D-vertical,
and U2416B and U2416C-horizontal) are voltage
follower circuits that mix the signals selected by the
Readout Position Multiplexers and buffer them for
application to the vertical delay line (RO VERT) and
the Horizontal Preamplifier (RO HORIZ)
.
Figure 3-9. Character pixel arrangement.
Theory of Operation-2246A
The voltage at U2416 pin 14 depends on two things:
the current from U2414 pin 13, and the voltage at
U2414 pin 3. The possible displays are given in Table
3-29.
The voltage at U2416 pin 8 depends on two things:
the current from U2415 pin 13, and the voltage at
U2415 pin 3. The possible conditions are shown is
Table 3-30.
Service
At intervals of about 2 ms, a column of LEDs is
refreshed (turned on or off) and the status (open or
closed) of the connected column of switches is
read. All six columns of LEDs and the six columns of
switches are completely refreshed and checked
every 12 ms. The timing is fast enough to prevent
flicker of the LEDs and to catch a push button
closure.
LED Refresh
SWITCH BOARD AND INTERFACE
(Diagram 10)
The front-panel LEDs that backlight the switches and
panel labels are schematically arranged in a matrix
of eight rows and six columns. The front-panel
switches are arranged in a matrix of 16 rows and six
columns. Each LED and switch is connected to a
distinct row/column intersection, with a column of
LEDs and a column of switches being common and
enabled by the same signal.
Assume LED column AS0 is being refreshed. First,
the LED Cathode Register, U2524, is loaded with a
data byte from the Measurement Processor. That
byte defines the LEDs that are on for that column,
and the outputs of Cathode Driver U2525 for the
" on " LEDs are low. Then, a high on the D bit of the
O
Measurement Processor Data Bus is latched into
LED Anode Register U2523 with the LED ANODE CLK
signal. That high turns on the associated Darlington
transistor (Q2506 for the AS0 column), and the
LEDs in that column that also have their cathodes
low from U2525 are turned on.
Table 3-29
Display Possibilities
Readout Type
U2414-3
U2414-13
Stationary Text
0.6 V
U2412 output
Horizontal Ref Cursor
REF CURSOR
U2412 output
Horizontal Delta Cursor
DELTA CURSOR
U2412 output
Vertical Ref Cursor
0.6 V
U2413 output
Vertical Delta Cursor
0.6 V
U2413 output
Table 3-30
Possible Signal Conditions to U2416
Readout Type
U2415-3
U2415-13
Stationary Text
2.0 V
U2413 output
Horizontal Ref Cursor
2.0 V
U2413 output
Horizontal Delta Cursor
2.0 V
U2413 output
Vertical Ref Cursor
REF CURSOR
0 mA
Vertical Delta Cursor
DELTA CURSOR
0 mA
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
Switch Reading
At the same time the AS0 LED column is refreshed,
the connected AS0 switch column is pulled high
through CR2006. The switch status (low for open or
high for closed) for the active switch column is
parallel loaded into the Switch Board Shift Registers
(U2001 and U2002). This switch status data is then
shifted out serially (by 15 SW BD SR SHIFT clocks)
to the Measurement Processor on the SW BD DATA
return line. The position of a high in the serial data
stream, and knowing the active column, tells the
Measurement Processor the switch in column AS0
that is closed (the CH 1 VOLTSIDIV setting).
Columns with push-button switches may or may not
have a switch closed. A switch closure is interpreted
by the Measurement Processor, and any new operating conditions needed (determined from the
firmware routines called up to handle a particular
switch closure) are set up.
At the next 2 ms interrupt, the Measurement
Processor loads new data into Cathode Register
U2524 to enable the LED rows, and the column is
advanced to enable the A01 column for refresh and
switch reading. The process described is continual
while the oscilloscope is on.
Part of the Measurement Processor routine stores
the new front panel settings in the System RAM each
time a change is made. At power on (after being
turned off), the stored front-panel settings are
recalled from the System RAM to return the
oscilloscope to the same operating state that existed
at power off (with some exceptions).
Diagnostic
When the Measurement Processor is running the
register checks during the DIAGNOSTIC, it can
check the condition of registers U2001 and U2002.
Serial data is placed on the AS0 line from the D bit
O
of the Measurement Processor data bus. That data
is serially shifted through the two registers to the SW
BD DATA return line. The Measurement Processor
compares the returned data stream with what was
sent. A difference in the data bits shows an error; a
correct comparison passes the test.
Pot Multiplexer Latch
Latch U2313 latches data from the data bus (DO-D7)
to control multiplexers U2308 and U2309 on this
diagram and U506 on Diagram 7.
Front-Panel Control Multiplexers
Multiplexers U2308 and U2309, controlled by the
Measurement Processor via Pot Mux Latch U2313,
select the front-panel control levels that are compared with the output of the D-to-A Converter
(U2302). The result of that comparison is sent via
signal line AD COMP to the Measurement Processor
(U2501, Diagram 8).
Input Data Latches
Binary data bytes to be converted to analog voltages
are loaded into two latches (U2300 and U2301).
Data Latch U2301 latches data to the DAC Multiplexer (U2303). Data Latch U2300 latches data to
D-to-A Converter (U2302).
Digital-to-Analog Converter
The D-to-A Converter (U2302) using eight data bits
can produce 256 discrete output signal current
levels from 0 to 2 mA. Signal current flows through
R2303 to the +2.5 V reference voltage. The resulting
voltage drop across the resistor moves the voltage
at pin 3 of voltage follower U2314 away from +2.5 V
toward 0 V and below. When there is 0 mA output,
the voltage at pin 12 is +2.5 V. At maximum output
current, the voltage at pin 12 is -2.5 V.
A-TO-D CONVERSION. The output from U2304D is
also applied to comparator U2306. When analog-todigital conversion is being done, the Measurement
Processor drives the DAC to produce comparison
voltage levels in a binary search pattern. The output
of U2306 is monitored to determine the smallest
DAC input change that will produce an output
change from the comparator. That value is then
used as the digital representation of the analog
voltage applied to the other pin of the comparator
from the output of Multiplexer U2308 or U2309.
Signals on that multiplexed line are the front panel
potentiometers wiper voltages and the probe code
levels.
DAC SYSTEM (Diagram 12)
ADC AND DAC SYSTEM (Diagram 11)
The ADC and DAC System permits the Measurement
Processor to provide analog control voltages to the
circuitry under its control and to find out certain
analog voltage levels that it must have to do its control and measurement functions.
Dac Refresh Processor
The Dac Processor (U2601) is an eight-bit microcomputer containing its own internal memory. The
job of this processor is to refresh the D-to-A Converter (U2602) with the front-panel control levels
that have been loaded into the Dac Processor
memory from the Measurement Processor.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Binary values for the front-panel control settings
from the Measurement Processor are loaded via
DACO-DAC7 into the Dac Refresh Processor
(U2601) memory. Whenever the Measurement
Processor has determined that a control value has
changed, it updates the Dac Processor memory with
the new value. The Dac Processor continuously
sends the front-control binary values to the Digitalto-Analog converter (U2602) and multiplexes the
resulting analog signals to the individual control
circuits.
Digital-to-Analog Converter
The D-to-A Converter (U2602) has 12-bit resolution
that can produce 4096 discrete output signal current
levels from 0 to 2 mA. Signal current flows through
R2603 to the +2.5 V reference voltage. The resulting
voltage drop across the resistor moves the voltage
at pin 5 of voltage follower U2609B away from +2.5 V
toward 0 V and below. When there is 1 mA output,
the voltage at pin 5 is +2.5 V At maximum output
current, the voltage at pin 5 is -2.5 V. Voltage
Follower U2609B buffers the voltage and applies it to
the control circuit selected by the Measurement
Processor.
Control Multiplexers
Analog voltage levels from the D-to-A Converter
U2602 are multiplexed to the individual front-panel
control circuits. Three multiplexers, U2604 and
U2605 on this diagram and U2303 on Diagram 11
handle all of the potentiometer controlled circuits in
the instrument (except FOCUS and SCALE ILLUM
which are not digitized).
Sample-and-Hold Circuits
The analog voltages from multiplexer U2303 remain
stable only for the short period of time that the DAC
is at a fixed output level. Control voltages to the
analog circuitry must remain constant except for
changes to the control settings. Those control
voltages are held constant between refreshes by
sample-and-hold circuits formed by a capacitor (to
hold the voltage) and a voltage follower (to buffer
the voltage held by capacitor). The voltage follower
circuits are provided by the operational amplifiers of
U2304 and U2305. Extra noise filtering for two of the
control voltages (REF DELAY and DELTA DELAY) is
provided by using an R pi-type filter input circuit to
C
the voltage follower.
Service
The analog voltages from multiplexer U2604 and
U2605 remain stable only for the short period of time
that the DAC is at a fixed output level. Control
voltages to the analog circuitry must remain
constant except for changes to the control settings.
Those control voltages are held constant between
refreshes by sample-and-hold circuits formed by a
capacitor (to hold the voltage) and a voltage
follower (to buffer the voltage held by capacitor).
The voltage followers circuits are provided by the
operational amplifiers of U2606, U2607, and U2608.
POWER SUPPLY (Diagram 13)
The Power Supply (Diagram 13) provides the various
low-voltages needed to operate the 2246A and the
high-voltage required by the cathode-ray tube (crt) .
The supply circuitry is arranged in the following
functional blocks: AC Input, Primary Power Rectifier,
Start-Up circuit, Preregulator Control circuit,
Preregulator Power Switching circuit, lnverter Control
circuit, lnverter Power Switching circuit, LowVoltage Secondary Supplies, and High-Voltage
Supply (see Figure 3-1 0).
Ac power via the power cord is rectified and filtered
by the Primary Power Rectifier to supply the dc
voltage to Preregulator circuitry. The output voltage
level from the Primary Power Rectifier depends on
the ac supply voltage level and may vary between
about 125 V and 350 V. This unregulated, filtered,
dc voltage is supplied to the Preregulator Start-Up
circuit and the Preregulator Switching circuit. The
Preregulator Power Switching circuit supplies
+44 Vdc output power to drive the lnverter Power
Switching circuit.
The +44 V Preregulator output voltage is switched by
the lnverter Power Switching circuit to produce an
alternating current through the primary of the
lnverter power transformer. The current source to
the lnverter switching transistors is monitored and
regulated by the lnverter Control circuit to maintain a
constant output voltage level across the transformer
secondaries.
The Low-Voltage Secondary Supplies rectify and filter the low-voltage secondary ac voltages to provide
the dc power requirements for the instrument. Two
other secondary windings on the lnverter Power
Transformer are used in the High-Voltage Supply, a
high-voltage winding and a crt filament winding.
Voltage from the high-voltage winding is further
multiplied and converted to dc voltage for the crt
anode, cathode, and intensity-grid voltages.
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
I
L
AC INPUT
FL220 I
.
RT2201,
VR2204.
F220 1
PRIMARY
POWER
RECTIFIER
CR2231 CR2232.
,
CR2233. CR2234
4b
t 8 0 V TO t 4 0 0 V DC
T
4I
t
PREREGULATOR
SUPPLY CURRENT
PREREGULATOR
SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
02201. T2203
,2202
=
t44
PREREGULATOR
CONTROL CIRCUIT
02202, 02203,
U220 1
START-UP CIRCUIT
02204.
02211
THERMAL
CUTOUT
I
A
A
-'
4
OVERCURRENT
MONITOR
A220 1
4I
L
VOLTAGE
MONITOR
R2205
t44 V
4
k
b
PREREGULATOR
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
CONTROL
02208
VOLTAGE
CROWBAR
02206.
VR220 1
CONTROL CURRENT
VOLTAGE
FEEDBACK
FAN
825
T2204
]
I
-
C2203
t44 V
=
& lt;
INVERTER
POWER
SWITCHING
02209.
022 10,
02214
-
Y
A
INVERTER
CONTROL
CIRCUIT
02212.
022 1 3
v
LOW VOLTAGE
SECONDARY
SUPPLIES
$1
'
LOW VOLTAGES
TO ALL CIRCUITS
130 V AC TO DC RESTORER
s t 1 3 . 7 kV TO CAT ANODE
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
U2230
.
c-2.7
kV TO Z-AXIS 8 CAT CIRCUIT
TO CRT FILAMENT
6081-1 2
Figure 3-10. Power Supply block diagram.
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
Both overvoltage and overcurrent protection are
provided to protect the oscilloscope circuitry from
further damage if a circuit component fails.
Ac Input
Applied source voltage is input to the Primary Power
Rectifier via surge protection circuitry and noise filtering circuitry. A sealed line filter (FL2201), L2207,
L2208, C2214, C2213, C2216, C2215, R2260,
R2227, and R2228 form a low-pass filter designed to
prevent transmission of high-frequency noise signals either into or out of the instrument. Bleeder
resistor R2215 across the input line filter drains off
any charge retained by the capacitors in the input
circuitry when the power is disconnected. Thermistor RT2201 prevents a sudden rush of input
current into the rectifier and filter capacitor, C2202,
when the power switch is turned on. The thermistor
presents a relatively high resistance when cold, then
quickly reduces to a low value when warmed up.
Varistor VR2204 acts as a surge limiter to reduce the
effects of any power line surges that may damage
the input circuit components. The varistor is a
voltage-sensitive device that quickly reduces its
resistance value when its voltage limits are
exceeded. Line fuse F2201 protects the instrument
from additional damage in case of of a severe short
in the power supply.
Primary Power Rectifier
Rectification of the input ac source voltage is done
by bridge rectifier CR2233. Simple capacitive filtering of the rectifier output is done by C2202. The
filtered output voltage may range between about
80 Vdc and 400 Vdc, depending on the amplitude of
the ac input voltage. A line trigger signal is picked
off by T2206 for use when the Trigger SOURCE is set
to LINE. Bleeder resistor R2256 drains off the charge
on C2202 when the instrument is turned off.
Start-Up Circuit
The Start-Up circuit provides the operating supply
voltage to the Preregulator. At power on, C2204 in
the Start-Up circuit begins charging through R2203
and R2204 from the output of the Primary Power
Rectifier. When the voltage across C2204 reached
20 V, the voltage at the base of Q2204 is about
6.8 V. This base voltage level causes Q2204 to conduct (there is a 6.2 V zener diode in the emitter
path), and Q2211 also is then biased on. Positive
feedback to the base of Q2204 (from the collector of
Q2211 through R2220) then keeps both transistors
on. The dc voltage to U2201 (Vcc) for start up (and
continued running after start up) is provided by the
charge on C2204 via Q2211,
With U2201 on and drawing current from C2204, the
voltage across C2204 begins to fall. If the
Preregulator output rises to +44 V before the voltage
across C2204 falls to 10 V, then CR2202 becomes
forward biased, and current pulses are supplied by a
winding (pins 8 and 9) on T2203 to keep C2204
charged (and U2201 operating).
If the Preregulator output does not rise to +44 V
w,ithin the time it takes to discharge C2204 below
10 V (about 1/10 of a second), the voltage at the
base of Q2204 will drop too low for the feedback
voltage to keep it on. That will cause 4221 1 to also
shut off. The start-up cycle repeats when the
voltage across C2204 again reaches 20 V (recharging from the output of the Primary Power Rectifier output via R2203 and R2204). Continued failure
of the Preregulator to start up and the repeated
attempts to do so is called the " Chirp " mode. Zener
diode VR2206 prevents the voltage across C2204
from exceeding about 30 V if no start-up attempt
occurs.
Preregulator Control Circuit
The Preregulator Control IC, U2201, is a pulse-width
modulator used to control the on time of
Preregulator Switching FET Q2201. It contains an
oscillator, comparators, voltage and current error
amplifiers, and logic circuitry that controls its
operation. The modulated output pulses drive
switching transistor Q2201 through a buffer amplifier
composed of Q2202 and Q2203. Pulse width (the
time that FET Q2201 is on) is inversely proportional
to the control voltage at pin 3 of U2201 (i.e., a lower
voltage at pin 3 makes the pulse width wider to keep
(22201 on longer.
.Pin 7 of U2201 is the IC ground reference, and it is
tied directly to the +44 V output voltage. Therefore,
the Preregulator IC and the Start-Up circuitry operating potentials " float " on the regulated output
voltage (developed across C2203).
Pin 2 of U2201 is the current-summing node to the
voltage-error amplifier. The error amplifier will try to
keep the voltage on pin 2 equal to the voltage on pin
1 (the +44 V supply voltage). The error amplifier
maintains pin 2 at +44 V by raising (or lowering as
necessary) the voltage at pin 3. This raises (or
lowers) the voltage across C2203 so that less (or
more) current will be drawn out of the current
summing node.
The major current injected into the summing node is
from the regulated 5 V output, from pin 12 of U2201,
via R2212. That current is about 0.6 mA. The current
through R2206 adds to the current shunted by the
Preregulator Output Voltage Control transistor,
Q2208, to produce about 0.6 mA to keep the current
into and out of the summing node balanced. The
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
actual current through R2206 is the output voltage
(+44 V across C2203) divided by the resistance
value of R2206 (100 k n ) or about 0.4 mA.
restart after about half a second, but will shut down
again if the overvoltage condition continues (this is
the " chirp " mode).
SOFT START. At the initial turn-on of the instrument, C2203 is discharged. If no action were taken
to prevent it, the initial charging current to that
capacitor would exceed safe limits. To avoid such a
problem, a " soft start " of the charging path is done.
PREREGULATOR OUTPUT CONTROL. The voltage
across the lnverter current source transistor, FET
Q2214, is monitored by Q2208 (from the collector
voltage of either Q2209 or Q2210). That voltage has
to be maintained at the proper level to provide
enough regulation room for the secondary supply
voltages and still not dissipate more power than necessary in Q2214. If the voltage across Q2214 is too
high, Q2209 is biased on harder and draws more
current from the input summing node (pin 2 of
U2201) of the voltage error amplifier in U2201, the
Preregulator Control IC. The output of the error amplifier at pin 3 of U2201 then rises, and the width of
the switching pulse to the Preregulator Switching circuit narrows to decrease the +44 V output.
At turn-on, the +5 V output of U2201 steps to +5 V
immediately. A +5 V pulse is coupled to pin 4 of
U2201 via C2207. This pin is the " dead time control "
input, and when it is high, the dead time between
switching pulses to Q2201 is increased to 100%.
Switching transistor Q2201 does not turn on, and no
charging of C2203 occurs. Then, as C2207 charges,
the voltage on pin 4 begins to decrease toward the
ground reference value (on pin 7). This decreases
the dead time, allowing increasingly wider conduction pulses to occur.
The on-time gradually increases until the charging
current is limited by the internal current limit amplifier of U2201. At that point, the Preregulator is acting as a current source. When the voltage across
C2203 reaches +44 V, the voltage error amplifier
starts to limit the output, and the Preregulator has
reached its operating level and acts as a voltage
source.
CURRENT LIMIT. The output current of the
Preregulator switching FET, Q2201, is limited to a
safe value. If the current exceeds 2.4 amperes, the
voltage dropped across R2201 causes pin 14 of
U2201 (one input of the current limit amplifier) to
exceed the voltage on pin 13 of U2201 (the other
input pin of the current limit amplifier). The output of
the current limit amplifier then goes high, raising the
voltage on pin 3 of U2201. Increased voltage on pin
3 narrows the width of the turn-on pulses to
switching FET Q2201 and limits the output current.
The lnverter Control circuit (Q2212 and Q2213)
senses the decreased voltage across the primary of
the lnverter power transformer (T2204) and
responds by driving Q2214, the lnverter currentsource transistor, harder; thereby decreasing the
voltage across it.
Control response time in the feedback loop just described is long; but it does not need a fast response
time, since the circuit only determines the power
dissipation in Q2214. Compensation of the circuit to
prevent oscillation is done by a low-pass filter
(10 Hz cutoff) formed by C2238, R2205, and R2246.
Preregulator Switching Circuit
The Preregulator Switching circuit provides the
energy required to keep C2203 charged up to
+44 V. Switching FET Q2201 is driven by the pulsewidth modulated output of the Preregulator IC
(U2201) via a buffer amplifier circuit. The
Preregulator IC controls the on-time to maintain the
voltage across C2203 at +44 V.
Usually, with a circuit failure, the excess loading
remains, and the pulses remain narrow. The
Preregulator Control IC then shuts down because
the charge on C2204 is not maintained via the
Preregulator supply winding on T2203, and the
Preregulator goes into the chirp mode (continual
shut down and restart attempts).
For the following discussion of the switching circuit,
assume that Q2201 is off, C2201 is charged to the
rectified line voltage (160 V from the Primary Power
Rectifier), and the +44 V supply is up and driving a
circuit load.
OVERVOLTAGE CROWBAR. If the output voltage
across C2203 exceeds about +51 V, VR2201 in the
crowbar circuit conducts. The gate of SCR Q2206
then rises; and, if the rise is enough, the SCR
latches on. When on, Q2206 shorts out C2203, and
the current limit circuit causes the switching pulses
to Q2201 to become very narrow. Preregulator IC
U2201 then shuts down (as described in the Current
Limit discussion). The Preregulator will attempt a
When the Preregulator IC turns on Q2201, the drain
of Q2201 is immediately clamped to 44 V. This
forces 116 V (160 V - 44 V) across pins 6 and 7 of
T2203. Current begins increasing linearly in that coil
as Q2201 supplies current to the +44 V supply. With
the one end of C2201 clamped to +44 V, and C2201
being charged to +I60 V, the other end of C2201 is
pushed down with the anode of CR2201 going to
-1 16 V (44 V - 160 V). This places 116 V (0 116 V) across pins 1 and 2 of T2203 and current
Theory of Operation-2246A
begins increasing. linearly in that coil, also flowing
through Q2201 to the +44 V supply. After a time
determined by Preregulator IC U2201, the drive
signal to Q2201 is switched low, and the switching
FET is turned off.
The current flowing in both coils of T2203 must continue as the magnetic field collapses, but it cannot
flow through Q2201. The only available path is
through CR2201 (previously biased off). The polarity
reversal of the voltage across T2203 that occurs forward biases CR2201, and permits the energy in the
magnetic field to be released to the +44 V supply.
When CR2201 is forward biased its cathode is
clamped to the +44 V supply level. With C2201 still
charged to +I60 V (the supply voltage), its positive
end is pushed up to 204 V (44 V + 160 V). Now there
is -44 V (160 V - 204 V) across the coil of T2203
from pin 7 to pin 6 and -44 V (0 - 44 V) from pin 2
to pin 1 (see Figure 3-1 1). Since C2201 is in parallel
with C2202 for dc voltages (coils are shorts to dc),
the dc voltage across C2201 can change very little.
The capacitance of C2201 is large enough that the
charging and discharging currents do not have
enough time to change the voltage across C2201 in
normal operation.
200
v
0220 1
DRAIN
40 V
v
line voltage level means a shorter on time of Q2201
is needed to maintain +44 V across C2203.
lnverter Power Switching Circuit
The Inverter Power Switching circuit is composed of
switching transistors Q2209 and Q2210, current
source transistor Q2214, inverter power transformer
T2204, base-drive transformer T2205, and associated components. Current supplied by the +44 volts
output from the Preregulator circuit is alternately
switched through each side of the center-tapped
primary of T2204 to drive the loads on the secondary
windings of the inverter transformer.
INVERTER STARTER. As the Preregulator turns on,
the +44 V supply increases from 0 V. The increasing
voltage forward biases CR2236 and charges C2248
through the base-emitter junctions of Q2209 and
Q2210. Current is drawn through each side of
T2204, from the center tap, as the transistors conduct. One of the two transistors will have a slightly
higher gain than the other, and its collector voltage
will decrease more than the other. The voltage difference across the primary of T2204 also appears
across the primary winding of T2205, and a feedback voltage is induced in the secondary winding of
T2204. The polarity of the transformer is such that
the conduction of -the higher gain transistor is reinforced (positive feedback), and that transistor
quickly saturates while the other is cut off. One end
of the primary of T2204 is driven toward ground
while the other end is opened. After about half a
second, C2248 charges up, CR2236 becomes reverse biased, and that path for current through the
conducting transistor is blocked.
1r6*
D
-
If the lnverter Power Switching circuit stops, the Inverter Starter circuit will not restart it until C2248 is
discharged. Furthermore, C2248 will not discharge
until the +44 V supply falls.
CR220 1
AOE
N D
O
-120
Service
V
V
6081-13
Figure 3-1 1. Preregulator switching waveforms.
The two coils of T2203 need not be coupled magnetically for the circuit to operate. Both coils are
wound on the same core for convenience. Transformer action is minimal because the waveforms
impressed across both coils are nearly identical.
After a time controlled by the Preregulator IC (the
dead time), the on-time cycle for Q2201 repeats.
On time depends on the line voltage level: a higher
INVERTER POWER SWITCHING. Switching is
started by one or the other of either Q2209 or Q2210
conducting more that the other, and circuit action
biases the other one off. Assume for this discussion
that Q2210 is biased on and Q2214 is off. Current
flows through current-source FET Q2214, ontransistor Q2210, and half of the primary of T2204
(pins 9 and 11). The voltage drop across currentsource transistor Q2214 holds the emitter voltage of
Q2209 and Q2210 at 3 V. Voltage across pins 9 and
11 is therefore 41 V (44 V - 3 V)
.
Through autotransformer action, 41 V is induced in
the other half of the primary winding of T2204 from
pin 8 to the center-tap pin. That voltage adds to the
41 V from pins 9 to 11 to produce a potential of 82
volts across the primary of switching transformer
T2205. Current rapidly ramps up through the primary
Theory of Operation-2246A
Service
of T2205 and induces a positive feedback base
current in one-half of its center-tapped secondary
that keeps Q2210 turned on. Current in the other
half of the secondary biases on CR2227 to prevent a
high reverse base-to-emitter voltage from being
developed across Q2209.
After about 25 ps, the current through the primary of
T2205 saturates the magnetic core and the primary
impedance of the transformer drops to a low value.
When saturation occurs, the impedance presented
by L2206 by comparison to that of T2205 is large,
and most of the voltage applied from the secondary
of T2204 is then dropped across L2206. The SeCOndary voltage of T2205 drops to zero, and with no
base-drive current to Q2210, that transistor
switches off.
With both Q2209 and Q2210 off, the magnetic
energy stored in the primary of T2205 and in L2206
causes current to flow in the primary of T2204,
reversing the voltage polarity on this winding. The
voltage reversal is not instantaneous because of the
parasitic capacitance of the T2204 windings. When
the reverse voltage gets high enough, base current
flows to Q2204 and that transistor turns on. The
inverter current flow cycle through T2204 then
repeats but in the opposite direction to induce ac
current in the various secondary windings of the
inverter power transformer.
INVERTER CONTROL LOOP. Whenever either
(22209 or Q2210 is on, the collector voltage of the
on transistor forward biases either CR2205 (if Q2209
is on) or CR2204 (if Q2210 is on). Capacitor C2219
is then charged to nearly the same voltage that is
applied to the center tap of the primary winding of
lnverter Transformer T2204.
A resistive voltage divider formed by R2239, R2238,
and potentiometer R2252 (+7.5 V ADJUST) applies a
fraction of the voltage across C2219 to the base of
Q2213 (one-half of a differential amplifier formed by
Q2212 and Q2213). The voltage on the base of
Q2213 is compared to a voltage on the base of
Q2212 that is referenced back to the +44 V center
tap voltage of T2204. If the collector voltage of the
conducting inverter switching transistor (Q2009 or
Q2210) is not the correct level (about 3 V) , the gate
voltage of current-source FET Q2214 will be raised
or lowered as needed to correct the error.
Low-Voltage Secondary Supplies
The low-voltage power supply circuitry on the pin 12
to pin 22 and pin 13 to pin 15 secondary windings of
the lnverter power transformer consist of rectifier
and filter components only. All the regulation is done
by the Preregulator and lnverter Control circuitry in
the primary side of the transformer. Both half-wave
and full-wave rectifiers are used, and either simple
capacitor or capacitive-input PI filter circuits are
used. Rectifier and filter type used for each of the
secondary voltages depends on the load requirement. A single 130 Vac output from pin 12 of T2204
supplies the drive to the Z-Axis dc restorer circuitry.
Power for the blower fan is supplied by the -1 5 V
power supply line.
The center-tapped secondary winding from pins 13
to 15 of ~ 2 2 0 4is used for the +5 v and -5 v
supplies. Both are full-wave rectified and filtered
using capacitive-input PI filters.
High-Voltage Supply
The high-voltage power supply uses two secondary
windings of T2204: one for high-voltage multiplier
U2230 and the other for the crt filament. Flying leads
from the top of the transformer make the circuit
connections into the high-voltage circuitry. The crt
filament winding consists of a few turns of insulated
wire.
-
The high-voltage winding attaches directly to the HV
Multiplier. Outputs from HV Multiplier U2230 are the
13.7 kV to the crt anode via a high-voltageinsulated connecting lead and the -2.7 kV supplied
to the crt cathode, focus grid, and intensity grid.
The -2.7 kV supply is filtered by a two-section
capacitive input RC filter. A neon lamp across the
second section of the filter provides protection
against arcing if there is a failure that can cause a
large difference of potential to develop between the
crt heater and cathode circuits.
MAIN BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION
(Diagram 14)
The Main Board Power Distribution diagram
schematically displays the distribution paths and
decoupling circuits for the low voltages from the
Power Supply. The supply and ground connections
to the various integrated circuits in the instrument
are also shown. Use this diagram to aid circuit
tracing when trying to locate a power supply loading
problem associated with the Main Board.
- -
Theory of Operation-2246A Service
PROCESSOR BOARD POWER
DISTRIBUTION (Diagram 15)
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
(Diagram 16)
The continuing power distribution from the Main
Board to the top board (Processor Board, A16) is
depicted in the Processor Board Power Distribution
schematic diagram. Use Diagram 15 to aid in
locating power supply loading problems that are
isolated to the Processor Board.
Circuit board interconnections with the plug, jack,
pin numbers, and signal names shown are found in
schematic Diagram 16. The diagram is useful in
checking continuity of cable runs and signal paths
from board to board through the instrument.
Section 4-2246A
Service
Introduction
This Performance Check Procedure verifies the
Performance Requirements of the 2246A as listed in
the Specification (Section 1) and helps determine
the need for readjustment. These checks may also
be used as an acceptance test or as a preliminary
troubleshooting aid.
You do not have to remove the wrap-around cabinet
from the 2246A to do this procedure. All checks can
be made with controls and connectors accessible
from the outside.
Test Equipment Required
Table 4-1 lists all the test equipment required to do
the Performance Check Procedure. Test equipment
specifications described are the minimum necessary
to provide accurate results. For test equipment
operating information, refer to the appropriate test
equipment instruction manual.
When you use equipment other than that recommended, you may have to make some changes to
the test setups. If the exact example equipment in
Table 4-1 is not available, use the Minimum Specification column to determine if any other available
test equipment might be adequate to do the check.
repair, refer the instrument to a qualified service
person.
Preparation
This procedure is divided into subsections to let you
check individual sections of the instrument when it is
not necessary to do the complete Performance
Check. An Equipment Required block at the beginning of each subsection lists the equipment from Table 4-1 that is needed to do the checks in that
subsection.
The initial front-panel control settings at the beginning of each subsection prepare the instrument for
the first step of the subsection. Do each of the steps
in a subsection completely and in order to ensure
the correct control settings for steps that follow. To
ensure performance accuracies stated in the Specification (Section I ) , let the instrument warm up for
20 minutes and run the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS
routine.
To run the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS routine:
Press the top and bottom menu-item select buttons
to display the SERVICE MENU. Underline and select
SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS. Press RUN to start the
routine, then QUIT to return to the normal
oscilloscope mode.
Performance Check Interval
NOTE
To ensure instrument accuracy, check the performance of the 2246A after every 2000 hours of
operation, or once each year if used infrequently. If
the checks indicate a need for readjustment or
Performance accuracies are ensured
only when the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS is done AFTER the 20-minute
warmup.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
Table 4-1
Test Equipment Required
Item and
Description
Minimum
Specification
Use
Example of
Test Equipment
Leveled Sine-Wave
Generator
Frequency: 250 kHz to
above 150 MHz. Output
amplitude: variable from
10 mV to 5 V p-p. Output impedance: 50 a.
Amplitude accuracy:
constant within 1.5% of
reference frequency to
100 MHz.
Vertical, horizontal,
triggering, measurement bandwidth, and
Z-Axis checks and
adjustments.
TEKTRONlX SG 503
Leveled Sine-Wave
Generator.a
Calibration Generator
Standard-amplitude
signal levels (dc and
square wave): 5 mV to
50 V. Accuracy: ? 0.25%.
High-amplitude signal
levels: 1 V to 60 V.
Repetition rate: 1 kHz.
Fast-rise signal level: 1 V.
Repetition rate: 1 MHz.
Rise time: 1 ns or less.
Flatness: 0.5%.
Signal source for gain
and transient response checks and
adjustments.
TEKTRONIX PG 506
Calibration
Generator.a
Time-Mark Generator
Marker outputs: 5 ns to
0.5 s. Marker accuracy:
+
- 0.1 %. Trigger output:
1 ms to 0.1 ~s timecoincident with markers.
Horizontal checks and
adjustments. Display
adjustment. time cursor
checks.
TEKTRONlX TG 501
Time-Mark
Generator.a
Function Generator
Range: less than 1 Hz to
1 kHz; sinusoidal output;
amplitude variable up to
greater than 10 V p-p
open circuit with dc offset adjust.
Low-frequency checks.
TEKTRONIX FG 502
Function Generatora
Coaxial Cable
(2 required)
Impedance: 50 a.
Length: 42 in.
Connectors: BNC.
Signal interconnection.
Tektronix Part Number
012-0057-01.
Precision Coaxial Cable
Impedance: 50 R.
Length: 36 in.
Connectors: BNC.
Used with PG 506 Calibration Generator and
SG 503 Sine-Wave
Generator.
Tektronix Part Number
012-0482-00.
+
-
-
a~equires TMSOO-series
a
power module.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
Table 4-1 (cont)
Item and
Description
Minimum
Specification
Use
Example of
Test Equipment
Termination
(2 required)
Impedance: 50 R.
Connectors: BNC.
Signal termination.
Tektronix Part Number
01 1-0049-01.
1O Attenuator
X
Ratio: 10X.
Impedance: 50 R.
Connectors: BNC.
Triggering checks.
Tektronix Part Number
01 1-0059-02.
2X Attenuator
Ratio: 2X.
Impedance: 50 R.
Connectors: BNC.
Triggering checks.
Tektronix Part Number
01 1-0069-02.
Adapter
Connectors: BNC
male-to-miniature-probe
tip.
Signal interconnection.
Tektronix Part Number
013-0084-02.
Alignment Tool
Adjust TRACE ROTATION
Length: 1-in shaft.
pot. Adjust variable
Bit size: 3/32 in.
Low capacitance; insulated. capacitors and resistors.
Test Oscilloscope
Bandwidth:
20 MHz.
Dual-Input Coupler
Connectors: BNC
female-to-dual-BNC
Tektronix Part Number
003-0675-00.
Z-Axis response
adjustment.
TEKTRONIX 2246A.
Signal interconnection.
Tektronix Part Number
067-0525-01.
male.
T-Connector
Connectors, BNC.
Signal interconnection.
Tektronix Part Number
103-0030-00.
Precision Normalizer
Input resistance: 1 M R :
Input capacitance: 20 pF.
Input capacitance
adjustments.
Tektronix Part Number
067-1 129-00.
TV Signal Generator
Provide composite TV video Check TV Trigger circuit.
and line sync signals.
Tektronix
067-0601 -00.
Calibration fixture with
067-5002-00 (525160)
and 067-501 0-00
(1201160) plug-ins.
Digital Multimeter
(DMM)
Dc volts range: 0 to
140 V. Dc voltage
accuracy 0.15%.
4 112 digit display.
Tektronix DM 501A
Digital Multimeter?
+
a ~ e q u i r e s TMSOO-series power module.
a
Power supply voltage
checks and adjustments.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
INDEX TO PERFORMANCE CHECK
PROCEDURE
7 . TV Field Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . 4-1 6
8 . TV Line Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . 4-17
9 . Line Trigger Functional Check . . . . . . 4-17
DISPLAY
.
1 TRACE ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
2 . Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
VERTICAL
.
.
1 Input COUPLING Functional Check . . . . 4-6
2 CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
3 . CH 3 and CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4 CH 1 and CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
5 CH 1 and CH 2 lnput COUPLING
Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
6 CH 2 INVERT Trace Shift . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
7 . CH 1 and CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
8 . Low Frequency Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
9 . CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Deflection
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
10 CH 3 and CH 4 Vertical Deflection
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
11. ADD Mode and CH 2 INVERT
Deflection Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
12 . Vertical POSlTlON Range
(all channels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
13 CH 1 to CH 2 Signal Delay Match . . . . 4-1 0
14. CH 1 to CH 4 Signal Delay Match . . . . 4-10
15. CH 3 to CH 4 Signal Delay Match . . . . 4-10
16 CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Bandwidth . . . 4-1 0
17. CH 3 and CH 4 Vertical Bandwidth . . . 4-1 1
18. SCOPE BW (Bandwidth Limit)
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1
19. Common-mode Rejection Ratio . . . . 4-1 1
20 . Channel Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1
21 . AC-Coupled Lower -3 dB Point . . . . 4-1 2
22 Vertical ALT and CHOP Modes . . . . . . 4-12
23 BEAM FIND Functional Check . . . . . . 4-13
24 . A and B Trace Separation . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TRIGGERING
. 500 Hz Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
500 kHz Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . 4-1 5
. 25 MHz Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
1
2.
3
4.
5.
6.
150 MHz Trigger Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Single Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 6
Trigger LEVEL Control Range . . . . . . . 4-1 6
HORIZONTAL
A and B Sweep Length . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal POSITION Range . . . . . . . .
VAR SECIDIV Range . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnifier Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A and B Timing Accuracy
and Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . A and 6 Magnified Timing
Accuracy and Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 . Delay Time Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Delay Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 . Delay Time Position Range . . . . . . . . .
10. X-Axis Gain Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . .
11. X-Y Phase Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12. X-Axis Bandwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.
2.
3
4
5.
.
.
.
MEASUREMENT CURSORS
1. I+ SEC +I and I+ 1/SEC +I Cursor
Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . I t PHASE 4 Cursor Accuracy . . . . . . .
3 . I t VOLTS +I Cursor Accuracy . . . . . . .
4 h VOLTS+ Cursor Accuracy . . . . . .
5 . Tracking Cursors Position Accuracy
.
.
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-24
CHI ICH2 VOLTMETER
.
1 DC Volts Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 . DC Volts Normal Mode
Rejection Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 . +Peak. - Peak. and Peak-Peak
Volts Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . 25 MHz +Peak. -Peak. and
Peak-to-Peak Volts Accuracy . . . . . .
5 . 100 MHz +Peak. -Peak. and
Peak-to-Peak Volts Accuracy . . . . . .
6 . Gated Volts Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-26
4-26
EXTERNAL Z-AXIS AND PROBE ADJUST AND
FRONT-PANEL SETUP FUNCTIONS
Check External Z-Axis Input . . . . . . .
PROBE ADJUST Output . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTO SETUP Functional Check . . . . .
STOREIRECALL SETUP Functional
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . Run MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS
Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.
2.
3.
4.
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-28
4-29
..
-
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
DISPLAY
I
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1)
50
Time-mark generator
LR BNC coaxial cable
50 LR BNC termination
c. CHECK-trace rotation control range is adequate
to align trace with center graticule line using a
small straight-bladed alignment tool.
1. TRACE ROTATION
a. Set:
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 COUPLING
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger CPLG
Trigger SLOPE
Trigger HOLDOFF
Trigger LEVEL
Horizontal MODE
Horizontal POSITION
A SECIDIV
Measurements
FOCUS
SCOPE BW
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1
0.1 v
AC
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
DC
I (positivegoing)
Min
12 o'clock
A
12 o'clock
2 FS
All off (press
CLEAR
DISPLAY three
times)
For best
defined display
Off
b. Position trace vertically to the center graticule
line.
d. ADJUST-trace
graticule line.
parallel to
center
horizontal
2. Geometry
a. Connect time-mark generator (TG 501) to CH 1
via a 50 LR BNC coaxial cable and a 50 LR BNC
termination.
b. Set generator for 0.2 ps time marks.
c. Position the bottom of the CH 1 signal below the
bottom graticule line.
d. CHECK-deviation of any vertical line within the
center eight horizontal divisions does not exceed
0.1 division (half a minor division).
e. Set CH 1 COUPLING to GND.
f.
Position trace slowly from the bottom graticule
line to the top graticule line while making the following check.
g. CHECK-bowing or tilt of baseline trace doesn't
exceed 0.1 division (half a minor division) within
the eight vertical divisions.
h. Disconnect test signal from the 2246A.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
VERTICAL
I
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1 )
Leveled sine-wave generator
50 R precision BNC coaxial cable
Calibration generator
Function generator
50 R termination
Adapter BNC-male-to-miniature probe tip
50 fl BNC coaxial cable
Dual-input coupler
1. lnput COUPLING Functional Check
a. Set:
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 and CH 2
VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 and CH 2
lnput COUPLING
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger CPLG
Trigger SLOPE
Trigger LEVEL
Trigger HOLDOFF
Horizontal POSITION
Horizontal MODE
SECIDIV
FOCUS
Measurements
SCOPE BW
CH 2 INVERT
d. Position the bottom of the signal to the center
horizontal graticule line.
e. Set CH 1 lnput COUPLING to AC.
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1 and CH 2
f.
CHECK-display is centered about the center
horizontal graticule line.
g. Move the test signal to the CH 2 input.
h. Set CH 2 Vertical MODE to on (CH 1 off).
DC
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
DC
I
(positivegoing)
12 o'clock
Min
12 o'clock
A
0.5 ms
For best
defined display
All off (press
CLEAR
DISPLAY three
times)
Off
Off
b. Connect function generator (FG 502) sine-wave
output to the CH 1 input via a 50 R BNC coaxial
cable and a 50 R BNC termination.
i.
Repeat the procedure for CH 2.
j.
Disconnect the test signal from the 2246A.
2. CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSlDlV Trace Shift
a. Set:
CH 1 and CH 2
Vertical MODE
CH 1 and CH 2
VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 and CH 2
lnput COUPLING
2 mV
GND
b. Set Vertical MODE to CH 1 (CH 2 off).
c. Position trace to center horizontal graticule line.
d. Switch CH 1 VOLTSIDIV through all positions
from 2 mV to 5 V.
e. CHECK-trace shift does not exceed 0.2 division
between steps.
f.
c. Set function generator output for 1 kHz sinewave signal of five divisions peak-to-peak with
maximum positive dc offset.
On
Set Vertical MODE to CH 2 (CH 1 off).
g. Position CH 2 trace to the center horizontal
graticule line.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
h. Switch CH 2 VOLTSIDIV through all positions
from 2 mV to 5 V.
Service
5. CH 1 and CH 2 lnput COUPLING Trace Shift
a. Position trace to center graticule line.
i.
CHECK-trace shift does not exceed 0.2 division
between steps.
3. CH 3 and CH 4 VOLTSIDIV Trace Shift
a.
Set Vertical MODE to CH 3 (CH 2 off).
b. Set CH 2 lnput COUPLING to DC.
c. CHECK-trace
division.
d. Set:
b. Position trace to the center horizontal graticule
line.
c. Switch CH 3 VOLTS/DIV between 0.1 V and
0.5 V.
d. CHECK-trace
division.
shift
does
not
exceed one
e. Set Vertical MODE to CH 4 (CH 3 off).
f.
Position trace to the center horizontal graticule
line.
g. Switch CH 4 VOLTSIDIV between 0.1 V and
0.5 V.
h. CHECK-trace
division.
shift
does
not
exceed one
shift does not exceed 0.25
Vertical MODE
CH 1 (CH 2
off).
GND
CH 1 Input COUPLING
e. Position trace to center graticule line.
f.
Set CH 1 lnput COUPLING to DC.
g. CHECK-trace
division.
shift does not exceed 0.25
6. CH 2 INVERT Trace Shift
a. Set:
Vertical MODE to CH 2
CH 2 Input Coupling
(CH 1 off).
GND
b. Position trace to center horizontal graticule line.
4. CH 1 and CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV Trace Shift
c. Set CH 2 INVERT On.
a. Set:
d. CHECK-trace
division.
CH 1 (CH 4 off)
2 mV
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
b. Position trace to center graticule line.
shift
does
not
exceed one
e. Set:
CH 2 INVERT
CH 2 COUPLING
Off
DC
c. Set CH 1 VAR VOLTSIDIV fully CCW.
d. CHECK-trace
division.
shift
does
not
exceed one
a. Set Vertical MODE to CH 1 and CH 2.
e. Set:
CH 1 VAR VOLTSIDIV
Detent
(calibrated)
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
2 mV
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTS/DIV
f.
7. CH 1 and CH 2 VAR VOLTSlDlV Range
b. Position CH 1 and CH 2 traces to the center horizontal graticule line.
c. Connect calibration generator (PG 506) Std
Ampl output to the CH 1 input via 50 ll precision
BNC coaxial cable. Set generator to Std Ampl
output to 50 mV.
Position trace to center graticule line.
d. Set:
g. Set CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV fully CCW.
h. CHECK-trace
division.
i.
shift
does
not
exceed one
Set CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV to detent (calibrated)
position.
CH 1 and CH 2
VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 VAR VOLTSIDIV
10 mV
Fully CCW
e. CHECK-the signal amplitude is two divisions or
less.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
f.
Set:
CH 1 VAR VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 Vertical MODE
Table 4-2
Signal-to-Graticule Accuracy
Detent
(calibrated)
Off
VOLTSIDIV
Setting
g. Move the test signal to the CH 2 input.
h. Set CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV fully CCW.
Std Ampl
Setting
Deflection Accy.
(in divisions)
2 mV
10 mV
4.90 to 5.10
5 mV
20 mV
3.92 to 4.08
10 mV
50 mV
4.90 to 5.10
20 mV
100 mV
4.90 to 5.10
50 mV
200 mV
3.92 to 4.08
8. Low-Frequency Linearity Check
0.1 V
500 mV
4.90 to 5.10
a. Set:
0.2
v
1v
4.90 to 5.10
0.5 V
2V
3.92 to 4.08
1V
5V
4.90 to 5.10
2V
10 V
4.90 to 5.10
5V
10 V
3.92 to 4.08
i.
Repeat the CHECK procedure for CH 2.
j.
Set CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV to detent (calibrated)
position.
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SCOPE BW
b. Set calibration generator to Std Ampl output,
20 mV.
c. Move the test signal to the CH 1 input.
f.
d. Position the top of the signal to top graticule line.
e. Check the signal amplitude is between 1.9 and
2.1 divisions.
f.
Set bottom of the signal to bottom graticule line.
g. Check the signal amplitude is between 1.9 and
2.1 divisions.
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
10. CH 3 and CH 4 Vertical Deflection Accuracy
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 3 and CH 4
VOLTSIDIV
9. CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Deflection Accuracy
CH 3 and CH 4
on; CH 1 off
0.1 V
b. Position CH 3 and CH 4 traces to the second
graticule line down from the center horizontal
graticule line.
Set calibration generator to Std Ampl output,
10 mV.
c. CHECK-all positions of the VOLTSIDIV settings
for correct signal-to-graticule accuracy, using
the settings in Table 4-2 for the checks.
CH 1 (CH 2 off)
2 mV
g. Repeat CHECK procedure for CH 1.
h. Repeat the procedure for CH 2.
a. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 2 mV.
Set:
Move CH 1 test setup to the CH 3 input.
d. Set calibration generator to Std Ampl output,
0.5 V.
e. CHECK-the signal amplitude is between 4.90
and 5.10 divisions.
d. Set calibration generator to Std Ampl output,
10 mV.
f.
e. Move the test signal to the CH 1 input.
g. Set CH 3 Vertical MODE to Off.
Move the test signal to the CH 4 input.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 INVERT
SCOPE BW
CH 1 and CH 2 lnput
COUPLING
h. Repeat CHECK for CH 4.
i.
Set CH 3 and CH 4 VOLTSIDIV to 0.5 V.
j.
Set calibration generator to Std Ampl output,
2 v.
k.
CHECK-the signal amplitude is between 3.92
and 4.08 divisions.
I.
Set CH 3 Vertical MODE On (CH 4 off).
n. Repeat CHECK procedure for CH 3.
o. Disconnect the test setup from the 2246A.
11. ADD Mode and CH 2 INVERT Deflection
Accuracy
CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 and CH 2 lnput
COUPLING
ADD (all others
off)
0.1 V
DC
b. Connect calibration generator Std Ampl output
to the CH 1 and CH 2 inputs via 50 fi precision
BNC coaxial cable and a BNC dual-input coupler.
c. Set the calibration generator to Std Ampl output,
0.2 v.
d. Position the ADD signal to the center of the crt
graticule with the CH 1 and CH 2 POSITION
controls.
e. CHECK-that the ADD signal amplitude is between 3.92 and 4.08 divisions.
f.
Set CH 2 INVERT On.
AC
Position trace to center horizontal graticule line.
d. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for twodivision signal at 50 kHz.
e. Set:
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 POSITION
f.
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
1V
Off
Off
b. Connect leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output to the CH 1 and CH 2 inputs via a 50 fi
BNC coaxial cable, a 50 R BNC termination, and
a BNC dual-input coupler.
C.
m. Move the test signal to the CH 3 input.
Service
0.1 V
Fully CW
CHECK-that the bottom of the waveform is at
least one division above the center horizontal
graticule line.
g. Set CH 1 POSITION fully CCW.
h. CHECK-that the top of the waveform is at least
one division below the center horizontal graticule
line.
i.
Set:
CH 1 POSITION
Vertical MODE
CH 2 POSITION
j.
12 o'clock
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
Fully CW
CHECK-that the bottom of the waveform is at
least one division above the center horizontal
graticule line.
k, Set CH 2 POSITION fully CCW.
I.
CHECK-that the top of the waveform is at least
one division below the center horizontal graticule
line.
m. Set CH 2 POSITION to 12 o'clock.
h. CHECK-the ADD signal amplitude is 0.08 division (less than half a minor graticule division) or
less excluding trace width (sweep will free run).
n. Move the BNC dual-input coupler from the CH 1
and CH 2 inputs to the CH 3 and CH 4 inputs.
o. Set:
g.
Disconnect the test setup from the 2246A.
12. Vertical POSITION Range (all channels)
Vertical MODE
CH 3 and CH 4
VOLTSIDIV
CH 3 POSITION
CH 3 (CH 2 off)
0.1 V
Fully CW
a. Set:
A SECIDIV
CH 1 Vertical MODE
0.1 ms
On (ADD off)
p. CHECK-that the bottom of the waveform is at
least one division above the center graticule
line.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
b. Move the CH 2 signal to the CH 4 input
connector.
q. Set CH 3 POSITION fully CCW.
r.
CHECK-that the top of the waveform is at least
one division below the center graticule line.
s.
Set:
CH 3 POSITION
Vertical MODE
t.
12 o'clock
CH 4 (CH 3 off)
Repeat the procedure for CH 4.
d. CHECK-that the leading edges of the two
waveforms have less than 0.1 horizontal division
separation at the center graticule line excluding
trace width.
15. CH 3 to CH 4 Signal Delay Match
u. Set C 4 POSITION to 12 o'clock.
W
v.
c. Superimpose the CH 4 waveform on the CH 1
waveform.
a. Set:
Disconnect the test setup from the 2246A.
Vertical MODE
Trigger SOURCE
13. CH 1 to CH 2 Signal Delay Match
b. Move the CH 1 signal to the CH 3 input and the
CH 3 trigger signal to the CH 2 input.
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 1 and CH 2
lnput COUPLING
CH 1 and CH 2
VOLTSIDIV
SEC/DIV
Trigger SOURCE
CH 1 and CH 2
b. Superimpose the CH 1 and CH 2 traces at the
100% graticule marking.
c. Connect calibration generator (PG 506) FAST
RISE, rising-edge signal to the CH 1 and CH 2
inputs via a 50 Cl precision BNC coaxial cable, a
50 R BNC termination, and a BNC dual-input
coupler.
c. Superimpose CH 3 and CH 4 waveforms at the
center graticule line.
d. CHECK-that the leading edges of the two
waveforms have less than 0.1 horizontal division
separation at the center graticule line.
e. Disconnect the test setup.
16. CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Bandwidth
a. Set:
X I 0 MAG
Vertical MODE
SECIDIV
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV
CH 1 and CH 2 lnput
COUPLING
Trigger SOURCE
Horizontal POSITION
d. Connect calibration generator TRIG OUT signal to
the CH 3 input via a 50 a BNC coaxial cable and
a 50
BNC termination.
e. Set the calibration generator output for five divisions of signal amplitude at 1 MHz.
f.
CH 3 and CH 4
(CH 1 off)
CH 2
Position the rising edges of the superimposed
waveforms horizontally to the center vertical
graticule line.
g. Set X I 0 MAG On (for 2 ns/div sweep speed).
h. CHECK-that the leading edges of the two
waveforms have less than 0.1 horizontal division
separation at the center graticule line excluding
trace width.
14. CH 1 to CH 4 Signal Delay Match
a. Set Vertical MODE to CH 1 and CH 4 (CH 2 off).
Off
CH 1 (CH 3 and
CH 4 off)
0.1 ms
2 mV
DC
VERT
12 o'clock
b. Connect leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
2
output to the CH 1 input via a 50 A precision
BNC coaxial cable and a 50 4 BNC termination.
2
c. Set the Leveled Sine-Wave Generator output for
a six-division signal amplitude at 50 kHz.
d. Set the generator Frequency Range and Frequency Variable controls for a 100 MHz output
signal.
e. CHECK-the displayed signal amplitude is 4.2 divisions or more.
f.
Repeat the frequency setup and CHECK procedure for VOLTSIDIV settings of 5 mV through
1 v.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
Move the test signal to the CH 2 input.
Set:
e. CHECK-that the sine-wave generator output
frequency is between 17 MHz and 23 MHz.
f.
Cti 2 (CH 1 off)
2 mV
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
Repeat the complete Bandwidth check procedure for Channel 2.
CH 3 and CH 4 Vertical Bandwidth
19. Common-mode Rejection Ratio
a. Connect leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output to the CH 1 and CH 2 input connectors via
a 50 R precision BNC coaxial cable, a 50 R BNC
termination, and a BNC dual-input coupler.
b. Set the leveled sine-wave generator output for
an eight-division signal-display amplitude at
50 kHz.
Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 3 and CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
CH 3 (CH 2 off)
0.1 V
c. Set:
ADD MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 INVERT
CH 1 Vertical MODE
SCOPE BW
Connect leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output to the CH 3 input via a 50 R precision
BNC coaxial cable and a 50 R BNC termination.
Set the generator output for a six-division signal
display at 50 kHz.
Set the generator Frequency Range and Frequency Variable controls for a 100 MHz output
frequency
.
e. CHECK-that the signal display amplitude is 4.2
divisions or more.
f.
Disconnect the test setup.
Repeat the
setting.
procedure
for
0.5
On
10 mV
On
Off
Off
d. Adjust CH 1 or CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV for smallest
signal amplitude (as needed).
e. Set the leveled sine-wave output frequency to
50 MHz.
f.
Set:
CH 1 Vertical MODE
ADD MODE
VOLTSIDIV
On
Off
g. Move the test signal to the CH 4 input.
g. Set the leveled sine-wave output amplitude for
an eight-division display.
h. Set Vertical MODE to CH 4
h. Set the Vertical MODE to ADD (CH 1 off).
i.
CHECK-the
amplitude.
18. SCOPE BW (Bandwidth Limit) Accuracy
j.
Disconnect the test setup.
a. Set:
20. Channel Isolation
i.
Repeat the procedure for CH 4.
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SCOPE BW
CH 1 (CH 4 off)
10 mV
On
b. Move test signal from the CH 4 input to the CH 1
input.
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503) output for a six-division signal amplitude at 50 kHz.
d. Set the leveled sine-wave generator Frequency
Range and Frequency Variable controls to produce a signal display amplitude of 4.2 divisions,
signal is less than 0.8 division in
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 2 INVERT
CH 1, CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4
VOLTSIDIV
Trigger SOURCE
CH 1 and CH 2
(ADD off)
Off
0.1 v
CH 1
b. Connect the leveled sine-wave generator (SG
503) output to the CH 1 input via a 50 Cl precision BNC coaxial cable and a 50 Cl BNC
termination,
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
d. Set CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4 Vertical MODE On
(CH 1 off).
e. CHECK-display amplitude is 0.1 division or less,
excluding trace width, on the CH 2, CH 3, and
CH 4 traces.
f.
Move sine-wave generator signal to the CH 2
input.
VERT
NORM
Fully CW
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger MODE
Trigger HOLDOFF
c. Set the leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output for a five-division signal display amplitude
at 100 MHz.
b. Connect function generator (FG 502) output to
the CH 1 input via a 50 R BNC coaxial cable and
a 50 i BNC termination.
2
c. Set the function generator output controls to
produce a six-division sine-wave display at 10
Hz (with no dc offset).
d. Set CH 1 lnput COUPLING to AC.
g. Set:
e. CHECK-display
more.
CH 1, CH 3, and
CH 4 Vertical MODE
Trigger SOURCE
On (CH 2 off)
CH 2
h. CHECK-display amplitude is 0.1 division or less,
excluding trace width, on the CH 1, CH 3, and
CH 4 traces.
i.
j.
Move sine-wave generator signal to the CH 3
input.
Set:
f.
g. Repeat the procedure for CH 2.
h. Disconnect the test equipment from the 2246A.
22. Vertical ALT and CHOP Modes
Vertical MODE
On (CH 3 off)
CH 3
CHOP Vertical MODE
k. CHECK-display amplitude is 0.1 division or less,
excluding trace width, on the CH 1, CH 2, and
CH 4 traces.
CH 1 and CH 2
VOLTSIDIV
CH 3 and CH 4
VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 and CH 2 lnput
COUPLING
Horizontal MODE
SECIDIV
Trigger MODE
Move sine-wave generator signal to the CH 4
input.
m. Set:
CH 1, CH 2, and CH 3
Vertical MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Set Vertical MODE to CH 2 (CH 1 off).
a. Set:
CH 1, CH 2, and CH 4
Vertical MODE
Trigger SOURCE
I.
amplitude is 4.2 division or
On (CH 4 off)
CH 4
CH 1, CH 2,
CH 3, and CH 4
on
Off (ALT
mode)
DC
A
1 ms
AUTO LEVEL
n. CHECK-display amplitude is 0.1 division or less,
excluding trace width, on the CH 1, CH 2, and
CH 3 traces.
b. Position all traces for two divisions of separation
with the CH 1 trace near the top; then in order
down the graticule area with the CH 4 trace near
the bottom.
o. Disconnect the test setup.
c. Set SECIDIV to 10 ms.
21. AC-Coupled Lower -3 dB Point
d. CHECK-that four traces are sweeping across
the screen alternately.
a. Set:
e. Set CHOP Vertical MODE On.
A SECIDIV
Vertical MODE
10 ms
CH 1 (all others
off)
f.
CHECK-that four traces are sweeping across
the screen simultaneously.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
B SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
B Trigger MODE
TRACE SEP
23. BEAM FlND Functional Check
a.
Push BEAM FlND in and hold.
b. CHECK-the signal is visible and compressed
fully within the graticule area as the horizontal
and vertical position controls are rotated through
their ranges.
c. Release the BEAM FlND button.
d. Set all Vertical and Horizontal POSITION controls
at the 12 o'clock position.
0.5 ms
B
RUNS AFTER
Fully CW
b. Position the CH 1 trace below the center horizontal graticule line to display the separated B
trace.
c. CHECK-for at least four divisions of upward
trace separation between the B trace and the A
trace.
d. Set TRACE SEP fully CCW.
24. A and B Trace Separation
e. Position the CH 1 trace above the center horizontal graticule line to display the separated B
trace.
a. Set:
A SECIDIV
Vertical MODE
Horizontal MODE
1 ms
CH 1 (others
off)
ALT
f.
CHECK-for at least four divisions downward
trace separation of the B trace from the A trace.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
TRIGGERING
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1)
Function generator
1O BNC attenuator
X
50
BNC termination
TV signal generator
Leveled sine-wave generator
50
BNC coaxial cable
2X BNC attenuator
Dual-input coupler
NOTE
1. 500 Hz Trigger Sensitivity
a. Set:
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 and CH 2 Input
COUPLING
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SCOPE BW
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger CPLG
rigger SLOPE
Trigger HOLDOFF
FOCUS
Measurements
Horizontal POSITION
The Trigger LEVEL control may be used
to obtain a stable display.
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1
f.
On
A
2 ms
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
AC
I (positivegoing)
Min
For best
defined display
All off (press
CLEAR
DISPLAY three
times)
12 o'clock
b. Connect function generator (FG 502) obtput to
BNC coaxial cable, and
the CH 1 input via a 50
a 50
BNC termination.
c. Set function generator (FG 502) output to produce a 7.0 division sine-wave display at 500 Hz.
d. Add a 10X and a 2X BNC attenuator before the
50
BNC termination (for a 0.35 division
display).
e. CHECK-that the display is stably triggered with
DC, HF REJ, and AC Trigger CPLG; and that the
display will not trigger on NOISE REJ or LF REJ
Trigger CPLG.
Set:
B
DC
B Trigger
NORM
VERT
I (positivegoing)
0.5 ms
30.000
(minimum
delay time)
For viewable
display
Horizontal MODE
Trigger CPLG
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger SLOPE
B SECIDIV
DELAY Time
B INTEN
NOTE
It may be necessary to adjust the Trigger
LEVEL control to obtain a display.
g. CHECK-that using the Trigger LEVEL control the
display can be stably triggered in DC, HF REJ,
and AC Trigger CPLG; and that the display cannot be triggered in NOISE REJ or LF REJ Trigger
CPLG.
h. Disconnect the test setup from the CH 1 input.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
B SECIDIV
2. 500 kHz Trigger Sensitivity
a. Set:
SCOPE BW
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
A SECIDIV
Off
A
A Trigger
2 P
S
b. Connect leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output to the CH 1 input via a 50 R BNC coaxial
cable and a 50 R BNC termination.
B
B Trigger
20 ns
g. CHECK-that using the Trigger LEVEL control the
display can be stably triggered in DC, LF REJ,
and AC Trigger CPLG; the display cannot be triggered in NOISE REJ and HF REJ Trigger CPLG
settings.
h. Set leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503) to
produce a 1.4 division display at 25 MHz.
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator output to produce a 7.0 division sine-wave display amplitude
at 500 kHz.
i.
CHECK-that the display can be stably triggered
with NOISE REJ Trigger CPLG but does not trigger with HF REJ CPLG.
d. Add a 10X and a 2X BNC attenuator before the
50 R BNC termination (for a 0.35 division display
amplitude).
j.
Set:
e. CHECK-that the display cannot be triggered in
either HF REJ of NOlSE REJ CPLG.
f.
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
k. CHECK-that the display is stably triggered with
NOlSE REJ Trigger CPLG but does not trigger
with HF REJ CPLG. (The Trigger LEVEL control
may be adjusted to improve display stability in
NOlSE REJ CPLG.)
Set:
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
B SECIDIV
B
B Trigger
1 )Is
g. CHECK-that the display cannot be triggered in
HF REJ or NOlSE REJ CPLG by adjusting the Trigger LEVEL control.
3. 25 MHz Trigger Sensitivity
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
Trigger CPLG
A SECIDIV
A
A Trigger
DC
50 ns
b. Remove the 10X and 2X BNC attenuators from
the signal path.
A
A Trigger
4. 150 MHz Trigger Sensitivity
a. Set Trigger CPLG to DC.
b. Set leveled sine-wave generator to produce a
1 .O division display at 150 MHz.
c. CHECK-that the display is stably triggered in
DC, LF REJ, and AC Trigger CPLG; the display is
not triggered in NOlSE REJ and HF REJ Trigger
CPLG.
d. Set:
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
B
B Trigger
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator output to produce a 7.0 division display amplitude at 25 MHz.
e. CHECK-that using the Trigger LEVEL control the
display can be stably triggered in DC, LF REJ,
and AC Trigger CPLG; the display cannot be triggered in NOlSE REJ and HF REJ Trigger CPLG.
d. Add a 10X and a 2X BNC attenuator before the
50 R BNC termination.
f.
e. CHECK-that the display is stably triggered in
DC, LF REJ, and AC Trigger CPLG; the display is
not triggered in NOISE REJ and HF REJ Trigger
CPLG settings.
f.
Horizontal MODE
Vertical MODE
CH 2, CH 3, and CH 4
VOLTSIDIV
AIB SELECT
Trigger CPLG
Set:
Trigger CPLG
Set:
g.
A
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
0.1 v
A Trigger
DC
Move test signal from CH 1 to the CH 2 input.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
h. Set leveled sine-wave generator output to produce a 1.0 division display amplitude at
150 MHz.
i.
j.
CHECK-that a stable display can be obtained.
(The Trigger LEVEL control may be adjusted to
improve the display stability.)
f.
Set Vertical MODE to CH 1 (others off).
m. Remove the 2X BNC attenuator from the test
signal path.
n. Set Leveled Sine-Wave Generator output for a
2.2 division display amplitude at 100 MHz.
.
CHECK-that the Trigger READY LED turns on
and remains on.
A INTEN
CH 1 Input COUPLING
314 fully CW
DC (see
CHECK below)
h. CHECK-that the TRIG'D LED flashes, and the
READY LED turns off after a single sweep and
readout display occurs when the lnput COUPLING switches to DC.
6. Trigger LEVEL Control Range
a. Set:
Trigger MODE
o. CHECK-that the display is stably triggered with
NOISE REJ Trigger CPLG but is not triggered with
HF REJ Trigger CPLG.
Trigger LEVEL
A INTEN
p. Set:
Trigger CPLG
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
SGL SEQ
g. Set:
Repeat procedure for the CH 3 and CH 4 (turn
on the appropriate Vertical MODE and move the
test signal as required).
k. Move test signal to the CH 1 input.
I.
Trigger MODE
AUTO (not
AUTO LEVEL)
Fully CCW
For a good
viewing
intensity
b. Remove 1O and 2X BNC attenuators from the
X
test signal path.
.
.
B Trigger
q. Repeat 100 MHz NOISE REJ Trigger CPLG procedure for the B Trigger.
c. Reduce leveled sine-wave generator output
level until a stably triggered display is just
obtainable.
d. Set Trigger LEVEL fully CW.
5. Single Sweep Mode
e. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a
stable display (if necessary).
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
A
10 J.LS
A Trigger
b. Remove the 10X BNC attenuator from the test
signal path.
f.
Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 1 V.
g. CHECK-that the CH 1 signal display amplitude is
four divisions or more (peak-to-peak) . Note
that the signal is not triggered.
h. Disconnect the test setup from the 2246A.
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator output to produce a 7.0 division display amplitude at 50 kHz.
d. Add a 10X and a 2X BNC attenuator before the
50
BNC termination. (Display should stably
trigger with AUTO LEVEL finding the correct trigger level setting.)
e. Set:
A Trigger MODE
CH 1 lnput COUPLING
NORM
GND
7. TV Field Trigger Sensitivity
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
Trigger SLOPE
Trigger MODE
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
2 v
0.2 ms
7, (negativegoing)
TV FIELD
-\
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
b. Connect TV signal generator negative-going
sync pulse output to the CH 1 input via a 50 i
l
BNC cable.
c. Set CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV control for a 0.5 division composite sync signal.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
d. CHECK-that a stable display is obtained.
e. Set CH 2 VAR VOLTSIDIV to Detent Position
(calibrated)
.
e. Set:
CH 2 INVERT
Trigger SLOPE
On
I (positive-
f.
Disconnect the TV signal generator from the
2246A.
going)
f.
CHECK-that a stable display is obtained.
9. Line Trigger Functional Check
a. Set:
8. TV Line Trigger Sensitivity
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
a. Set:
SECIDIV
Trigger MODE
Trigger HOLDOFF
20 ps
,
TV LlNE
For a single
triggered
display
b. CHECK-that a stable display is obtained.
c. Set:
CH 2 INVERT
Trigger SLOPE
Off
I
(negativegoing)
d. CHECK-that a stable display is obtained.
CH 2 Input COUPLING
A SECIDIV
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger CPLG
0.1 V (without
X
a 1O probe
attached)
DC
5 ms
AUTO LEVEL
LINE
DC
b. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 2 input
connector.
c. CHECK-that the display can be triggered in both
I (positive-going) and I (negative-going)
slopes.
d. Disconnect the test setup.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
HORIZONTAL
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1)
50 SZ BNC coaxial cable
Time-mark generator
50 SZ BNC termination
~t DELAY Control
OR
1. A and B Sweep Length
a. Set:
B INTEN
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 and CH 2
Input COUPLING
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
Horizontal MODE
A SEC/DIV
Horizontal POSITION
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger CPLG
Trigger SLOPE
Trigger HOLDOFF
Trigger LEVEL
Measurements
FOCUS
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1
DC
0.5 V
A
2 ms
12 o'clock
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
AC
I (positivegoing)
Min
12 o'clock
All off (press
CLEAR
DISPLAY three
times)
For best
defined display
b. Connect time-mark generator (TG 501) to the
CH 1 input via a 50 SZ BNC coaxial cable and a
50 SZ BNC termination.
f.
CCW to the
lowest DELAY
readout value
For a visible
display
CHECK-the Delay Time readout is 30.000 ms,
and the B Sweep length is greater than 10
divisions.
2. Horizontal POSITION Range
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
Horizontal POSITION
A
Fully CW
b. CHECK-that the start of trace positions past the
center vertical graticule line.
c. Set Horizontal POSITION fully CCW.
d. CHECK-that the 1l t h time marker is positioned
to the left of the center vertical graticule line.
3. VAR SEClDlV Range
a. Set:
SECIDIV
SECIDIV VAR
Horizontal POSITION
1 ms
Fully CCW
12 o'clock
b. Set time mark generator for 5 ms time marks.
c. Set generator for 2 ms time marks.
c. CHECK-the time-mark spacing is equal to or
less than two divisions.
d. CHECK-sweep length of the A trace is greater
than 10 divisions.
d. Set SECIDIV VAR fully CW (calibrated detent) .
e. Set:
4. Magnifier Registration
Horizontal MODE
B SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
B
1 ms
B Trigger
RUNS AFTER
a. Set X I 0 MAG on.
b. Position center a time marker to the center vertical graticule line.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
d. CHECK-for
trace shift.
less than 0.5 division horizontal
c. Position the time marker peaks vertically to the
center horizontal graticule line (allows use of the
minor division graticule markings as an aid in
making the accuracy checks).
d. Position the second time marker to the second
vertical graticule line.
5. A and B Timing Accuracy and Linearity
a. Set A SECIDIV to 20 ns.
b. Set time-mark generator for 20 ns time marks.
e. Repeat the procedure for all other SECIDIV settings. Use Table 4-3, Settings for Timing
Accuracy Checks, for the SECIDIV and timemark generator settings.
Table 4-3
Settings for Timing Accuracy Checks
Time-Mark Setting
SEClDlV Setting
Normal
Normal
X I 0 MAG
X I 0 MAG
20 ns
50 ns
2 ns
5 ns
20 ns
50 ns
5 ns
5 ns
0.1 p s
0.2 p s
0.5 p s
10 ns
20 ns
50 ns
0.1 ns
0.2 p
0.5 p s
10 ns
20 ns
50 ns
1 PS
2 PS
0.1 p s
0.2 p s
5 PS
0.5 p s
1 IIS
2 PS
5 CLS
0.1 p s
0.2 FS
0.5 p s
10 p s
20 p s
50 p s
1 PS
2 PS
5 FS
10 p s
20 p s
50 p s
1 PS
2 PS
5 PS
0.1 ms
0.2 ms
0.5 ms
10 p s
20 p s
50 p s
0.1 ms
0.2 ms
0.5 ms
10 p s
20 p s
50 p s
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
0.1 ms
0.2 ms
0.5 ms
1 ms
2 rns
5 ms
0.1 ms
0.2 ms
0.5 ms
A Sweep only
--
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
f.
Exclude any portion of the sweep past the 100th
magnified division.
Set SECIDIV to 20 ns.
g. Set time-mark generator for 20 ns time marks.
h. Set:
Set SECIDIV to 5 ns.
g. Align the correct time marker to the second vertical graticule line (see NOTE above).
Horizontal MODE
For a viewable
display
i.
f.
Repeat the CHECK procedure for all the B SECI
DIV settings.
h. CHECK-that the tenth displayed time marker is
within 0.24 division (left or right) of the tenth
graticule line.
i.
CHECK-that the linearity accuracy is 0.1 division over any two of the center eight divisions.
(Excluding any portion of the sweep past the
100th magnified division for SECIDIV settings of
5 ns through 20 ns.)
j.
Repeat the timing and linearity checks for all
SECIDIV settings between 10 ns and 0.5 s. Use
the SECIDIV and Time Mark Generator X I 0 MAG
settings given in Table 4-3.
6. A and B Magnified Timing Accuracy and
Linearity
a. Set time-mark generator for 5 ns time marks.
b. Set:
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
Horizontal MODE
B SECIDIV
X I 0 MAG
A
20 ns
B
20 ns
On (for
2 nsldiv sweep
speed)
0:5 v (use
0.2 V for the
5 ns time
markers if
necessary)
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
k. Set:
Horizontal MODE
SECIDIV
I.
A
2 ns (with X I 0
MAG on)
Set time-mark generator for 5 ns time marks.
m. Repeat the magnified accuracy and linearity for
the A Sweep at all SECIDIV settings.
7. Delay Time Jitter
NOTE
a. Set:
In the following checks, for magnified
SECIDIV settings between 2 ns and 20
ns, set the fifth or sixth time marker from
the start of the sweep to the second vertical graticule line. For the SECIDIV settings between 50 ns and 50 ms (.5 ms
for B Sweep), position the leading edge
of the second time marker to the second
graticule line.
c. Align the rising edge of the fifth or sixth time
marker from the start of the sweep with the second vertical graticule line (center the display
vertically) .
d. CHECK-that the rising edge of the fourth displayed time marker crosses the center horizontal graticule line at between 8.27 divisions to
8.73 divisions.
e. CHECK-the linearity is within 0.1 division over
any 2.5 divisions of the center eight divisions.
X I 0 MAG
A SECIDIV
Horizontal MODE
SECIDIV
Off
1 ms
ALT
0.5 ps
b. Set time-mark generator for 1 ms time marks.
c. Position the intensified dot to the leading edge of
the 10th time marker to display the rising edge
on the B Trace (using the I+ OR DELAY control).
d. Set:
Horizontal MODE
B INTEN
B
Fully CW
(maximum
intensity)
e. CHECK-that the jitter on the leading edge does
not exceed one division over a two-second
interval. Disregard slow drift.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
8. Delay Time Accuracy
9. Delay Time Position Range
a. Set:
a. Set time-mark generator for 0.1 ms.
Horizontal MODE
B SEC/DIV
TRACE SEP
CH 1 POSITION
ALT
10 ps
Fully CCW
(maximum
downward
position)
To display both
the ALT
and the B
Delayed Traces
b. Position the first time marker on the ALT trace to
first vertical graticule line (left-most edge).
c. Position the intensified dot to full left position
(counterclockwise rotation of the
O DELAY
R
control)
.
b. Set:
A SECIDIV
B SECfDIV
I+ O DELAY control
R
1 ms
5 P
S
CCW to 30.000
c. CHECK-that the intensified dot is positioned at
or before the second time mark.
d. Turn the I+OR DELAY control clockwise until the
delay readout stops increasing (largest
number).
e. CHECK-that the intensified dot is positioned at
or after the 99th time marker (located at a Delay
Time of 9.9 ms).
f.
Disconnect the time-mark generator from the
2246A.
d. CHECK-that the readout is ?0.000 ms.
e. Position the intensified zone to the second time
marker and align the leading edge of the time
marker displayed on the B Trace to the left-most
(first) graticule line. Using the Readout Accuracy
Limits given in Table 4-4, check the delay time
accuracy.
f.
Repeat the procedure for the third through 10th
time markers.
Table 4-4
Delay Time Accuracy
Time Marker
1st
2nd
3rd
Readout Accuracy Limits
10. X-Axis Gain Accuracy
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
Vertical MODE
CH 1 and CH 2
VOLTS/ DIV
CH 1 Input COUPLING
CH 2 Input COUPLING
X-Y
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
10 mV
DC
GND
b. Connect calibration generator Std Ampl output
to the CH 1 and CH 2 inputs via a 50 C precision
l
BNC coaxial cable and a BNC dual-input coupler.
c. Set calibration generator for Std Ampl output,
50 mV.
d. CHECK-X-Axis amplitude is between 4.85 and
5.1 5 horizontal divisions.
e. Disconnect calibration generator.
11. X-Y Phase Difference
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
Vertical MODE
CH 1 Input COUPLING
A
CH 1 (CH 2 off)
DC
b. Connect leveled sine-wave generator output to
the CH 1 input via a 50 ln BNC coaxial cable and
a 50 LR BNC termination.
y
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for six
divisions of signal display amplitude at 50 kHz.
g. CHECK-ellipse opening at the center is 0.3
division or less, measured horizontally.
d. Set:
12. X-Axis Bandwidth
Horizontal MODE
CH 1 lnput COUPLING
X-Y
GND
a. Set Vertical MODE to CH 2 (CH 1 off).
b. Set leveled sine-wave output to 3 MHz.
e. Position dot to graticule center.
c. CHECK-X-Axis
display
divisions or more.
f.
d. Disconnect the test equipment from the 2246A.
Set CH 1 lnput COUPLING to DC.
is
4.2
horizontal
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
MEASUREMENT CURSORS
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1)
Time mark generator
50fl BNC coaxial cable
1.
Calibration generator
50 BNC termination
SEC 4 and It 1 ISEC4 Cursor Accuracy
a. Set:
Trigger HOLDOFF
CH 2 INVERT
SCOPE BW
FOCUS
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1
0.5 V
DC
A
1 ms
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
DC
VERT
I (positivegoing)
Min
Off
Off
For best
defined display
b. Connect time-mark generator (TG 501) output
via a 50 fl BNC coaxial cable and a 50 fl BNC
termination to the CH 1 input.
c. Set time-mark generator for 1 ms time marks.
d. Position first time marker horizontally to the first
vertical graticule line (left-most edge of the
graticule) .
e. Press TlME button to display the TlME menu.
f.
Press It SEC 4
cursors.
the
readout is 0.975 ms to
i.
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 and CH 2
Input COUPLING
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger CPLG
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger SLOPE
h. CHECK-that
1.025 ms.
menu button to turn on time
g. Position the reference cursor to the first time
marker and the delta cursor to the second time
marker.
Press the TlME button to display the TlME menu.
j.
Set I t l / S E C 4 on.
k. CHECK-that
1.025 kHz.
I.
the
readout
is
0.975 kHz
Position delta cursor to align with the 1 l t h time
mark.
m. CHECK-that the readout is 99.7Hz to 100.7 Hz.
n. Set IcSEC-N on.
o. CHECK-that the readout is between 9.930 ms
and 10.070 ms.
2. t+ PHASE4 Cursor Accuracy
a. Set generator for 0.5 ms time marks.
b. Set TlME menu on.
PHASE+ menu selection to display the
c. Press
I PHASE4 and I+ SET 360 O+1
t
menu choices.
d. Set I+ SET 360 " +I on.
e. Position the first time marker to first graticule
line. Then position the Reference cursor to the
leading edge of the third time marker and the
delta cursor to the leading edge of the ninth
time-marker.
f.
SET I PHASE4 on.
t
g. Position delta cursor to the leading edge of the
sixth time marker.
h. CHECK-that the readout is between 177.9 and
1 82.1 degrees.
i.
Disconnect time-mark generator.
-
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
3.
5. Tracking Cursors Position Accuracy
VOLTS4 Cursor Accuracy
a. Set:
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV
SECIDIV
VOLTS CURSORS Menu
I+ VOLTS4 CURSORS
a. Press CLEAR DISPLAY (press twice).
0.1 V
0.5 ms
On
On
b. Set:
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
MEASUREMENTS CURSORS
Menu
AUTO TRACKING MENU
TRACK TRIG LVL
TRACK h
MENU
Trigger MODE
b. Connect calibration generator (PG 506) output
to the CH 1 input via a 50 R precision BNC
coaxial cable.
c. Set calibration generator to Std Ampl 0.5 V.
d. Position bottom of the signal to the second horizontal graticule line from the bottom.
e. Position the reference cursor to the bottom of
the signal and the delta cursor to the top of the
R
signal (both cursors move with the I+ O DELAY
control).
f.
4.
CHECK-that the readout is between 0.495 V
and 0.505 V.
h VOLTS4 Cursor Accuracy
a. Select MEASUREMENTS CURSORS menu, then
select h VOLTS4 CURSORS.
R
b. Position I+ O DELAY control either clockwise or
counterclockwise.
c. CHECK-that the readout is between 0.495 V to
0.505 V, and none of the cursors move when
the I+ O DELAY control is rotated.
R
d. Disconnect calibration generator.
On
On
On
On
Off
AUTO (not
AUTO LEVEL)
c. Connect calibration generator Std Ampl output
via a 50 R BNC cable to the CH 1 input.
d. Set calibration generator for Std Ampl output of
0.5 V.
e. Adjust Trigger LEVEL control to align trigger level
cursor with the bottom of the signal.
f.
+
CHECK-the readout is 0.000 V 0.005 V, and
the GND cursor is aligned with the bottom of the
signal.
g. Set trigger level cursor to align with the top of
the signal.
h. CHECK-the
0.525 V.
readout is between 0.475 V and
i.
Press CLEAR DISPLAY.
j.
Disconnect test equipment if ending here.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
CH IICH 2 VOLTMETER
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1)
50 R BNC coaxial cable
50 R BNC termination
Calibration generator
Leveled sine-wave generator
Function generator
.-.
-
e. Set calibration generator for Std Ampl output of
50 mV dc.
1. DC Volts Accuracy
a. Set:
f.
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 INVERT
SCOPE BW
CH 1 lnput COUPLING
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger CPLG
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger SLOPE
Trigger HOLDOFF
CHI lCH2 VOLTMETER
FOCUS
Horizontal POSITION
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1
50 mV
Off
Off
GND
A
1 ms
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
DC
VERT
I (positivegoing)
Min
DC
For best
defined display
12 o'clock
Set:
--
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 Input COUPLING
CHECK-the
51.0 mV.
10 mV
DC
readout is between 49.0 mV and
Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 0.1 V.
Set calibration generator for Std Ampl output
0.5 V.
CHECK-the
0.505 V.
readout is between 0.495 V and
Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 1 V.
Set calibration generator for Std Ampl output of
5 v.
CHECK-the
5.05 V.
readout is between 4.95 V and
Disconnect Std Ampl signal from the CH 1 input.
b. CHECK-ground readout is 0.0 mV 51.2 mV.
2. DC Volts Normal Mode Rejection Ratio
c. Set calibration generator (PG 506) internal
Square WaveIDC switch to DC.
a. Set SECIDIV to 5 ms.
NOTE
The PG 506 must be removed from the
T M power supply to make the change to
dc output from the generator. Turn the
power off before removing or inserting
any plug-in from the T M power supply
b. Connect function generator (FG 502) output to
the CH 1 input via a 50 R BNC coaxial cable.
c. Set function generator for a six-division sinewave display amplitude at 50 Hz (with CH 1
VOLTSIDIV at 1 V).
d. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 0.2 V.
e. CHECK-that the readout is less than t 0.01 9 V.
d. Connect the calibration generator Std Ampl output to the CH 1 input via a 50 R precision BNC
coaxial cable.
f.
Disconnect the function generator signal from
the 2246A.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
3. +Peak, -Peak, Peak-to-Peak Volts Accuracy
4. 25 MHz +Peak,
Accuracy
- Peak, and Peak-to-Peak
Volts
a. Set:
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
10 mV
DC
+PEAK
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 Input COUPLING
CHI lCH2 VOLTMETER
b. Set the calibration generator (PG 506) internal
Square WavelDC Switch for a square-wave output signal.
a. Connect leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output to the CH 2 input via a 50
BNC coaxial
cable and a 50 SZ BNC termination.
b. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 20 mV.
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a
readout of 100.0 mV 20.5 mV at 50 kHz.
d. Set leveled sine-wave
25 MHz.
generator output for
NOTE
It is necessary to remove the PG 506
from the TM power supply module to set
the internal Square WavelDC switch to
square-wave output.
c. Connect calibration generator Std Ampl output
to the CH 2 input via a 50 Ln precision BNC
coaxial cable.
d. Set calibration generator for Std Ampl output of
50 mV dc.
e. CHECK-the
105.0 mV.
f.
readout is between 95.0 mV and
Set CH1lCH2 VOLTMETER to -PEAK.
g. CHECK-the
-54.0 mV.
readout is between -46.0 mV and
h. Set CH1lCH2 VOLTMETER to +PEAK.
i.
CHECK-the
54.0 mV.
readout is between 46.0 mV and
e . CHECK-that the readout is between 47.0 mV
and 53.0 mV.
5. 100 MHz +Peak, -Peak, and Peak-to-Peak Volts
Accuracy
f.
a. Set leveled sine wave generator (SG 503) output
frequency to 100 MHz.
Set SCOPE BW on.
g. CHECK-the
52.3 mV.
readout is between 47.7 mV and
h. Set:
i.
CHECK-the
-52.3 mV.
j.
On
-PEAK.
Set SCOPE BW Off.
I.
readout is between 34.4 mV and
c. Set CH1lCH2 VOLTMETER to -PEAK.
CH 2 INVERT
CHI lCH2 VOLTMETER
k. CHECK-the
-53.0 mV.
b. CHECK-the
54.0 mV.
readout is between -47.7 mV and
d. CHECK-the
-54.0 mV.
e. Set CHI lCH2 VOLTMETER to PK-PK.
f.
readout is between -47.0 mV and
readout is between -34.4 mV and
CHECK-the
107.0 mV.
readout is between 69.7 mV and
g. Disconnect the leveled sine-wave signal from
the 2246A.
Set.
6. Gated Volts Accuracy
CHI lCH2 VOLTMETER
CH 2 INVERT
m. CHECK-the
53.5 mV.
PK-PK
Off
readout is between 46.5 mV and
n, Disconnect calibration generator.
a. Set:
A SECIDIV
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
b. Set CHI lCH2 VOLTMETER to GATED +PEAK.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
.
Connect calibration generator (PG 506) Std
Ampl output to the CH 2 input via a 50 ll
precision BNC coaxial cable. Set the generator
to Std Ampl output, 50 mV.
d. Set delta TIME POSITION to minimum intensified
zone width.
f.
Set the intensified dot to a positive peak of the
displayed waveform.
-
g. CHECK-the
53.0 mV.
readout is between 47.0 mV and
h. Set the intensified dot to a negative peak of the
displayed waveform.
+ 0.5 mV.
i.
e. CHECK-that the width of the dot is less than 0.2
division.
CHECK-the readout is 0.0 mV
j.
Disconnect the test signal from the 2246A.
- ..
Performance Check Procedure-2246A Service
EXTERNAL Z-AXIS, PROBE ADJUST AND FRONT-PANEL
SETUP FUNCTIONS
I
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1)
BNC T-connector
Test oscilloscope with a 10X probe
Calibration generator
Two50 R BNC coaxial cables
50 R Precision BNC coaxial cable
1. Check External Z-Axis lnput
2. PROBE ADJUST Output
a. Set:
a. Set:
READOUT (Intensity)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 INVERT
SCOPE BW
CH 1 lnput COUPLING
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
AIB SELECT
Trigger MODE
Trigger CPLG
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger SLOPE
Trigger HOLDOFF
FOCUS
Horizontal POSITION
For a viewable
readout
For a viewable
trace
CH 1
1v
Off
Off
DC
A
0.5 ms
A Trigger
AUTO LEVEL
DC
VERT
I (positivegoing)
Min
For best
defined display
12 o'clock
b. Connect calibration generator (PG 506) Std
Ampl output to the CH 1 and the EXT Z-AXIS
inputs via a 50 R precision BNC coaxial cable, a
BNC T-connector, and two 50 R BNC coaxial
cables. Set generator to Std Ampl output, 5 V.
CH 1 Vertical MODE
SECIDIV
10 mV
0.2 ms
b. Connect a 10X probe to the CH 1 input connector and connect the probe tip to the 2246A
PROBE ADJUST output. (When using Tektronix
coded probes the readout changes to .1V.)
c. CHECK-For a 5-division vertical display of
PROBE ADJUST square-wave signal (squarewave period is typically 1 ms, within 25%).
3. AUTO SETUP Functional Check
a. Set:
CH 1 COUPLING
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
A SECIDIV
GND
2 mV
20 ns
b. Press the AUTO SETUP button.
c. Check that the Probe Adjust waveform is stably
displayed on the upper half of the crt.
4. STOREIRECALL SETUP Functional Check
c. Set A INTEN to maximum intensity.
d. CHECK-waveform display intensity starts decreasing at 1.8 V or less and the waveform is
completely blanked out at 3.8 V.
a. Press the top and bottom Menu-Select buttons
to display the SERVICE MENU.
b. Press the down-arrow menu button twice to
underline CONFIGURE.
e. Set A INTEN to midrange.
f.
Disconnect the test equipment from the 2246A.
c. Press RUN to display the first CONFIGURE
question.
Performance Check Procedure-2246A
Service
R
o. Rotate I+ O DELAY control to move the underline to the status location.
Answer the questions as follows:
KEEP MENU ON WHEN MEAS
SELECTED?
(as
underlined)
p. Rotate 4 (ALTER CHAR) control until END SEQ is
displayed.
RECALL ONLY (IN STOREIRECALL)?
NO
q. Press RETURN button to return to the Store/
Recall menu.
KEEP MENU ON WHEN SIR
SELECTED?
YES
KEEP READOUT ON IN SGL SEQ?
(as
underlined)
r.
Rotate 4 control counterclockwise to display a
lower numbered setup.
s.
Press RECALL button.
t.
Check that the front-panel settings change.
Press the CLEAR DISPLAY button to return to the
normal operating mode.
u. Rotate +I control clockwise to the highest setup
number (with your name).
Press the STOREIRECALL SETUP button to call
up the StorelRecall menu.
v.
Rotate the 4 control clockwise to display the
highest numbered setup.
w. Check that the front-panel settings changed and
the Probe Adjust signal is displayed as it was
before selecting a lower numbered setup.
Press INSERT NEXT to store the current frontpanel settings in the next memory location.
x.
Check that the setup number is increased by
one and record name and status are blank.
Press ALTER LABELS button to call up Alter
Labels menu.
Rotate I+ O DELAY control to move the underR
line to the first position in the record name
location.
Rotate 4 (ALTER CHAR) control to display the
first character in your name.
Rotate the I+ O DELAY control to move the
R
underline to the second character and select the
second character in your name with the +I
(ALTER CHAR) control.
Continue moving the underline and selecting a
character until your complete name is displayed
(15 characters maximum).
Press RECALL button.
Press DELETE button to delete your stored
setup.
5. Run MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS Routine
a. Press the top and bottom Menu-Select buttons
to display the SERVICE MENU.
b. Press the down-arrow menu button four times
and press SELECT to display the INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU.
c. Press the down-arrow menu button once and
press RUN to run the MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS
routine.
d. When the routine is finished, press the CLEAR
DISPLAY button to return to the normal oscilloscope mode.
THIS COMPLETES THE
PROCEDURE.
PERFORMANCE CHECK
Section 5-2246A
Service
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT-PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS PROCEDURE
PURPOSE
between +20°C and +30°C, and the instrument must
have had a warm-up period of at least 20 minutes.
This Adjustment Procedure returns the instrument to
conformance with the Performance Requirements as
listed in the Specification Tables in Section 1.
Adjustments should be done only after the checks in
the Performance Check Procedure (Section 4) have
indicated a need for a readjustment of the
instrument.
PARTIAL PROCEDURES
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
The test equipment listed in Table 4-1 (section 4) is
all the equipment required to complete the Adjustment Procedure in this section and the Performance
Check Procedure in Section 4. Test equipment
specifications described in Table 4-1 are the
minimum necessary to provide accurate results; you
must use Equipment that meets or exceeds these
specifications. Detailed operating instructions for
test equipment are not given in this procedure; if
more operating information is required, refer to the
appropriate test equipment instruction manual.
When equipment other than that recommended is
used, control settings of the test setup may need to
be altered. If the exact item of equipment given as
an example in Table 4-1 is not available, first check
the Use column to verify use of this item. Then use
the Minimum Specification column to determine
whether other available test equipment might work.
LIMITS AND TOLERANCES
The limits and tolerances stated in this procedure
are instrument specifications only if they are listed in
the Performance Requirements column of the Table
1-1 , Electrical Characteristics. Tolerances given are
applicable only to the instrument under adjustment
and do not include test equipment error. Adjustments must be made at an ambient temperature
This procedure is divided in subsections to permit
adjustment of individual sections of the instrument
(except the Power Supply) whenever a complete readjustment is not required. For example, if only the
Vertical section fails to meet the Performance
Requirements (or has had repairs made or components replaced, it can be readjusted with little or
no effect on other sections of the instrument.
However, if the Power Supply section has undergone
repairs or adjustments that change the absolute
value of any of the supply voltages, a complete
readjustment of the instrument is required.
At the beginning of each subsection is a list of the
initial front-panel control settings required to prepare the instrument for Step 1 in that subsection.
Each succeeding step within a subsection should
then be done completely and in the sequence presented to ensure that control settings will be correct
for steps that follow.
INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS AND
ADJUSTMENT INTERACTION
Do not preset any internal controls, since that may
make it necessary to recheck or readjust a major
portion of the instrument when only a partial check
or adjustment might otherwise have been required.
To avoid unnecessary recheck and readjustment,
change an internal control setting only when a
Performance Characteristic cannot be met with the
original setting. When independently changing the
setting of any internal control, always check Table
5-1 for possible interacting adjustments that might
be required.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A
Service
Table 5-1
Adjustment Interactions
REPLACEWWTS MADE
MA6 REGISTRATION
A 2On8 TIMING
B 2Ons TIMING
MID-FREQUENCY FLATNESS
CAT REPLACEMENT
The use of Table 5-1 is particularly important if only
a partial procedure is done, or if a circuit requires
readjustment due to a component replacement. To
use this table, first find the adjustment that was
made (extreme left column). Then move to the
right, across the row, until you come to a darkened
square. From the darkened square, move up the
table to find the affected adjustment at the heading
of that column. Check the accuracy of this adjustment using the Performance Check Procedure in
Section 4. Then, if necessary, make a readjustment.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
Specific interactions are called out within certain adjustment steps to indicate that the adjustments must
be repeated until no further improvement is noted .
PREPARATION FOR ADJUSTMENT
It is necessary to remove the cabinet to do the
Adjustment Procedure . See the cabinet removal
instructions in the Maintenance section of this
manual .
All test equipment items required to do the complete Adjustment Procedure are described in Table
4-1 at the beginning of Section 4. Performance
Check Procedure . The specific items of equipment
needed to do each subsection in this procedure are
listed at the beginning of that subsection .
Connect the test equipment and the 2246A to an
appropriate ac-power source and allow 20 minutes
warmup before making any adjustments .
4 . Ch 3 Step Balance (R141) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5 . Ch 4 Step Balance (R161) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
6 . Ch 1 MfILf Gain (R13) And
Compensation (C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
7 . Ch 1 Input Capacitance (C14) . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
8 . Ch 1 Input Compensation X I 0 (C11) . . . . 5-8
9 . Ch 1 Input Compensation XI00 (C10) . . . 5-8
10. Ch 1 Gain (R211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
11. Ch 2 MfILf Gain (R23) And
Compensation (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
12. Ch 2 Input Capacitance (C124)
5-9
13 . Ch 2 Input Compensation X I 0 (C21) . . . . 5-9
5-9
14. Ch 2 Input Compensation X I 00 (C20)
15. Ch 2 Gain (R221) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
16. Ch 3 MfILf Compensation (C134) . . . . . . . 5-9
17. Ch 3 Gain (R231) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
18. Ch 4 MfILf Compensation (C154) . . . . . . . 5-9
19. Ch 4 Gain (R241) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
20 . Delay-line Hf Compensation
(R272, R273. R275. C274. C273) . . . . . . 5-10
21 . Ch 3 Hf Compensation (C138) . . . . . . . . 5-10
22 . Ch 4 Hf Compensation (C158) . . . . . . . . 5-10
23 . Ch 1 And Ch 2 Bandwidth Check . . . . . . 5-10
24 . Ch 3 And Ch 4 Bandwidth Check . . . . . . 5-11
.........
...
Horizontal
INDEX TO ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Power Supply. Display. And Z-axis
1. Power Supply DC Levels (R2252) . . . . . . . . 5-4
2 . Grid Bias (R2719) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
3 . Astigmatism (R2788) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
4 . Trace Rotation (Front Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5 Geometry (R2784) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
6 . Z-axis Response (C2704) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
.
Vertical
1. Vertical Output Gain (R703) And Readout
Vertical Centering (R260) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
2 . Ch 1 Step Balance (R12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
3 . Ch 2 Step Balance (R22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
1. Horizontal X I Gain (Timing) (R826) . . . . .
2 . Horizontal X I 0 Gain (Timing) (R825) . . . .
3 . Readout Horizontal Gain (R823) And
Mag Registration (R809) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 . A 20 ns Timing (C314) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 . B 20 ns Timing (C329) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 . 2-5 ns Timing (C807. C814) . . . . . . . . . .
7 . X Gain (R827) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
Measurement Bandwidth And Self
Characterization
1 . Volts Cal (R920) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
2 . €3 Trigger Bandwidth (R455) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
3 . Self Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Adjustment Procedure-2246A
Service
POWER SUPPLY, DISPLAY, AND Z-AXIS
-
-
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1 ):
50 R Coaxial Cable
50 R Termination
Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Leveled Sine- Wave Generator
Test Oscilloscope w/lOX Probe
See the ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS section
at the back of this manual for locations of test points and adjustments.
first test point listed in Table 5-2 (all test points
on J1204, Main board).
INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS
1. Set
Vertical MODE
CH 1 COUPLING
VOLTSIDIV
Vertical POSITION
Controls
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
SECIDIV
Trigger LEVEL
HOLDOFF
SLOPE
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger COUPLING
MEASUREMENTS
MENU Displays
.
A INTEN
READOUT
FOCUS
SCALE ILLUM
b. CHECK-Voltage reading is within the range
given in Table 5-2.
CH 1
DC
0.1 V
c. Move DMM positive lead to each of the other
supply voltages in Table 5-2 and check that
voltage ranges are within limits.
12 o'clock
A
A
0.1 ms
12 o'clock
min (CCW)
NOTE
If all supply voltages are within the limits
given in Table 5-2, it is not necessary to
adjust the power supply. If voltages are not
within limits, you will have to adjust the
+7.5 V supply, recheck the other voltages,
and continue with a complete readjustment of
the instrument.
1
AUTO LEVEL
CH 1
DC
OFF
OFF
10 o'clock
12 o'clock
for well defined display
fully CCW
PROCEDURE
1. Power Supply DC Levels (R2252)
a. Connect a Digital Multimeter (DMM) negative
lead to chassis ground. Connect positive lead to
d. Connect a Digital Multimeter (DMM) negative
lead to chassis ground and positive lead to
+7.5 V test point (J2104-8).
e. ADJUST-+7.5 V ADJ (R2252) for +7.5 V and
check that all supply voltages in Table 5-2 are
within limits. The +7.5 V Adjustment is
accessible through the right side frame.
f.
Disconnect Digital Multimeter.
--
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
cable and a 50 0 BNC termination. Set for a
5-division display at 50 kHz.
Table 5-2
Power Supply Voltage Limits
Nominal
supply
Voltage
+7.5 V
+I30 V
+59 V
+15 V
+5.0 V
-5.0 V
-7.5 V
-15 V
Test Point
(+ lead)
Limits
(0°C to 58°C)
Min
J1204-8
J1204-11
J1204-10
J1204-7
J1204-1'2
J1204-5
J1204-9
J1204-6
Max
+7.42 to
+127.17 to
+55.74 to
+14.65 to
+5.05 to
-5.14 to
-7.48 to
-15.57 to
+7.57
+135.03
+59.18
+15.55
+5.25
-5.35
-7.78
-16.53
DISCONNECT: Leveled Sine-Wave Generator.
4. Trace Rotation (Front Panel)
a. Set CH 1 COUPLING to GND.
b. Position trace to center horizontal graticule line
and beginning of trace to first vertical graticule
line.
c. ADJUST-TRACE ROTATION (front panel) to align
trace parallel with center horizontal graticule
line.
5. Geometry (R2784)
2. Grid Bias (R2719)
a. Set:
a. SET:
HORlZ MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 COUPLING
BW LIMIT
A INTEN
B INTEN
READOUT (Intensity)
SCALE ILLUM
c. ADJUST-ASTIG (R2788) together with frontpanel FOCUS control for best overall resolution
of the sine-wave display.
X-Y
5v
GND
On
Fully CCW
Fully CCW
Fully CCW
Fully CCW
0.1 v
DC
50 ps
Fully ccw (off)
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 COUPLING
SECIDIV
READOUT (intensity)
(off)
(off)
(off)
(off)
b. ADJUST-GRID BlAS (R2719) for a visible dot.
c. Position dot just off center screen with vertical or
horizontal POSITION controls.
d. Set FOCUS control for a well defined dot.
e. ADJUST-GRID BlAS (R2719) so that dot is no
longer visible.
b. Connect Time Mark Generator to CH 1 via 50 0
cable and 50 0 termination. Display 10 ps time
marks.
c. Position base trace below bottom graticule line.
d. ADJUST-GEOM (R2784) for minimum bowing of
time marks across the full graticule area.
Vertical bowing of time mark across screen
should be no more than 0.1 division.
e. Disconnect Time Mark Generator.
6. 2-Axis Response (C2704)
,
3. Astigmatism (R2788)
a. Set:
a. Set:
READOUT (Intensity)
SECIDIV
READOUT (Intensity)
HORlZ MODE
A INTEN
READOUT (Intensity)
SECIDIV
VAR SECIDIV
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 COUPLING
A
10 o'clock
12 o'clock
5 CLS
Detent (fully CW)
10 mV
DC
12 o'clock
5P
S
Fully CCW (off)
b. Connect test oscilloscope with 10X probe to
R2718 (either side)
.
c. ADJUST-Z AXIS RESP (C2704) for flattest
response possible of the signal displayed by the
test scope.
b. Connect Leveled Sine-Wave Generator output to
the CH 1 input connector via a 50 ln BNC coaxial
d. Disconnect test oscilloscope8
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
b. Connect calibration generator to CH 1 input via
Precision coaxial cable. Set generator for
50
STD AMPL and 1 volt.
7. Readout Jitter (R724)
a. Set:
READOUT (intensity)
SECIDIV
CH 1 COUPLING
A INTEN
12 o'clock
10 ms
DC
Fully CCW (off)
.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
VERTICAL
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1):
50 ll Termination
Precision Normalizer (20 pF)
Calibration Generator (PG506)
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator
50 ll Coaxial Cable
See the ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS section
at the back of this manual for locations of test points and adjustments.
INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS
1. Set:
Vertical MODE
INPUT COUPLING
VOLTSIDIV
Vertical POSITION
Controls
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
SECIDIV
Trigger LEVEL
HOLDOFF
SLOPE
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger COUPLING
MEASUREMENTS
MENU Displays
A INTEN
READOUT
FOCUS
SCALE ILLUM
CH 1 and CH 2
DC
0.1 v
12 o'clock
A
A
0.1 ms
12 o'clock
min (CCW)
f
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
DC
OFF
OFF
10 o'clock
12 o'clock
for well defined
display
fully CCW
INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU. Press down-arrow
button three times to underline selection, then press
SELECT button. Run ADJUST Vertical OUTPUT
routine. Press down-arrow button twice to underline
selection, then press RUN button.
NOTE
For this adjustment, the 2246A must be
placed in the " normalJJoperating position to
avoid incorrect alignment due to effects of the
earth's magnetic field.
b. ADJUST-VO
GAIN (R703) and R
O VERT
CENTERING (R260) alternately until dashed lines
produced by the diagnostics are aligned with
dotted lines on the graticule.
c. Press END button to end the ADJUST Vertical
OUTPUT routine. Then press QUIT button to quit
the Service Menu and return to the normal
oscilloscope display.
2. CH 1 Step Balance (R12)
a. Set:
PROCEDURE
1. Vertical Output Gain (R703) and Readout Vertical Centering (R260)
Vertical MODE
CH 1 COUPLING
BW LIMIT
CH 1 (CH 2 off)
GND
On
b. Position trace to center of screen.
a. Run ADJUST Vertical OUTPUT routine.
Select SERVICE MENU. Simultaneously press the top
and bottom menu-item select buttons. Select
c. ADJUST-R12 (CH 1 STEP BALANCE) so the
trace does not move vertically while switching
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV switch from 10 mV to 50 mV.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
b. Add precision normalizer between termination
and CH 1 input connector. Set calibration
generator Period to 1 kHz and adjust Pulse Amplitude for 5-division display.
3. CH 2 Step Balance (R22)
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 2 COUPLING
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
GND
b. Position trace to center of graticule.
c. ADJUST4322 (CH 2 STEP BALANCE) so that
trace does not move vertically while switching
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV switch from 10 mV to 50 mV.
c. ADJUST-C114
best flat top.
-
(CH 1 INPUT CAPACITANCE) for
-
--
d. Remove precision normalizer from the input
cable.
8. CH 1 lnput Compensation X I 0 (C11)
a. Set:
4. CH 3 Step Balance (R141)
a. Set Vertical MODE to CH 3 (CH 2 off).
b. Position trace to center of graticule.
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
0.1 V
50 ps
b. Set calibration generator Period to 10 kHz and
adjust Pulse Amplitude for a 5-division display.
c. ADJUST-R141 (CH 3 STEP BALANCE) so that
trace does not move vertically while switching
CH 3 VOLTSIDIV switch from 0.1 V to 0.5 V.
c. ADJUST-C11 (CH 1 INPUT COMP X10) for flattest response.
5. CH 4 Step Balance (R161)
9. CH 1 lnput Compensation XI00 (C10)
a. Set Vertical MODE to CH 4 (CH 3 off).
a. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 1 V.
b. Position trace to center of graticule.
b. Set calibration generator
5-division display.
c. ADJUST-RIG1 (CH 4 STEP BALANCE) so that
trace does not move vertically while switching
CH 4 VOLTSIDIV switch from 0.1 V to 0.5 V.
c. ADJUST-C10 (CH 1 INPUT COMP X I 00) for flattest response.
6. CH 1 MFlLF Gain (R13) and Compensation
(C1)
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 COUPLING
SECIDIV
CH 1 (CH 4 off)
50 mV
DC
50 ps
b. Connect calibration generator to CH 1 input via
50 R BNC coaxial cable and 50 R BNC termination. Set generator for HIGH AMPL. Set Period
to 10 kHz and adjust Pulse Amplitude for a
5-division display.
c. ADJUST4313 (CH 1 MFILF GAIN) and C1 (CH 1
MF/LF COMP) for the flattest response.
7. CH 1 lnput Capacitance (C114)
a. Set:
amplitude
for
a
--
.
.
-
10. CH 1 Gain (R211)
a. Set calibration generator to STD AMPL and
Amplitude to 50 mV. Remove 50 R termination
from input cable.
b. Set:
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
10 mV
0.2 ms
c. ADJUST-CH
1 GAIN (R211) for
5-division display amplitude.
exactly a
11. CH 2 MFILF Gain (R23) and Compensation
(C2)
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 COUPLING
SECIDIV
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
50 mV
DC
50 ps
-
7
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
b. Move calibration generator signal to CH 2 input.
Add 50
termination.
-
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
c. Set calibration generator for HlGH AMPL. Set
Period to 10 kHz and adjust Pulse Amplitude for
5-division display.
d. ADJUST423 (CH 2 MFILF GAIN) and C2 (CH 2
MFILF COMP) for flattest response.
12. CH 2 lnput Capacitance (C124)
a. Set:
16. CH 3 MFILF Compensation (C134)
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 3 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
CH 3
0.1 V
50 ps
b. Move calibration generator signal to CH 3 input.
Add 50 rIZ termination.
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
b. Add precision normalizer between termination
and CH 2 input connector. Set calibration
generator Period to 1 kHz and adjust Pulse
Amplitude for 5-division display.
c. ADJUST-C124
best flat top.
c. ADJUST-CH 2 GAlN (R221) for exactly a
5-division display amplitude.
c. Set calibration generator for HlGH AMPL. Set
Period to 10 kHz and adjust Pulse Amplitude for
a 5-division display.
d. ADJUST-C134
response.
(CH 3 MFILF COMP) for flattest
(CH 1 INPUT CAPACITANCE) for
17. CH 3 Gain (R231)
d. Remove precision normalizer from the input
cable.
13. CH 2 lnput Compensation X I 0 (C21)
0.1 V
50 ps
b. Set calibration generator Period to 10 kHz and
adjust Pulse amplitude for a 5-division display.
c. ADJUST-C21 (CH 2 INPUT COMP X I 0) for flattest response.
14. CH 2 lnput Compensation XlOO (C20)
a. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to 1 V.
b. ADJUST-C20 (CH 2 INPUT COMP X I 00) for flattest response.
15. CH 2 Gain (R221)
a. Set calibration generator to STD AMPL and
Amplitude to 50 mV. Remove 50 R termination
from the input cable.
b. Set:
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
CH 3 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
0.5 V
2 ms
b. Set calibration generator for STD AMPL. Set
amplitude to 2 V. Remove 50 rIZ termination.
a. Set:
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
a. Set:
c. ADJUST-CH
3 GAlN (R231)
4-division display amplitude.
for
exactly
18. CH 4 MFlLF Compensation (C154)
a. SET:
Vertical MODE
CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
CH 4 (CH 3 off)
0.1 V
50 ~s
b. Move calibration generator signal to CH 4 input.
Add 50 rIZ termination.
c. Set calibration generator for HlGH AMPL. Set
Period to 10 kHz and adjust Pulse Amplitude for
a 5-division display.
d. ADJUST-C154
response.
(CH 4 MFILF COMP) for flattest
19. CH 4 Gain (R241)
a. Set:
CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
b. Set calibration generator for STD AMPL. Set
amplitude to 2 V. Remove 50 Cl termination.
21. CH 3 HF Compensation (C138)
a. Set:
c. ADJUST-CH 4 GAIN (R241) for exactly a
4-division display amplitude.
Vertical MODE
CH 3 VOLTSIDIV
CH 3 (CH 1 off)
0.5 V
d. Disconnect calibration generator from CH 4.
e. CHECK-MEASUREMENT BANDWIDTH and SELF
CHARACTERIZATION procedure and adjust as
necessary.
20. Delay-line HF Compensation (R272, R273,
R275, C274, C273)
c. ADJUST-C138
response.
(CH 3 HF COMP) for flattest
22. CH 4 HF Compensation (C158)
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
BW LIMIT
b. Move calibration generator signal to CH 3. Set
Pulse Amplitude to maximum to obtain about 2.5
division display.
CH 1 (CH 4 off)
50 mV
20 ns
Off
b. Connect calibration generator positive-going
FAST RlSE OUTPUT to the CH 1 input via a 50 ll
precision coaxial cable and a 50 Ln termination.
c. Set calibration generator for FAST RlSE at 1 MHz
and adjust Pulse Amplitude for a 5-division
display.
d. Position the top of display to the center horizontal graticule line.
e. ADJUST-DLY LINE COMP adjustments (R272,
R273, R275) for flattest response and (C274,
C273) for sharpest front corner with minimum
overshoot. Figure 5-1 shows the area of the
waveform is affected by each adjustment.
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
CH 4 (CH 3 off)
0.5 V
b. Move calibration generator signal to CH 4.
c. ADJUST-C158
response.
(CH 4 HF COMP) for flattest
d. Disconnect calibration generator.
23. CH 1 and CH 2 Bandwidth Check
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
CH 1 (CH 4 off)
2 mV
0.1 ms
b. Connect leveled sine-wave generator output to
the CH 1 input via a 50 Ln precision coaxial cable
and a 50 Cl BNC termination.
c. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a
six-division signal amplitude at 50 kHz.
d. Set the generator Frequency Range and
Frequency Variable controls for a 90 MHz output
signal.
e. CHECK-the displayed signal amplitude is 4.2
divisions or more.
f.
Repeat the frequency setup and CHECK procedure for VOLTSIDIV settings of 5 mV through
1 V, except perform CHECK at 100 MHz.
NOTE
Figure 5-1. Areas of waveform affected by
HF compensation.
When checking bandwidth at a VOLTSIDIV
setting of 1 v,-use 5 divisions at 50 kHz and
check for 3.5 divisions or more at 100 MHz.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A
g. Move the test signal to the CH 2 input.
h. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
i.
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
2 mV
Repeat the complete bandwidth check procedure for Channel 2.
24. CH 3 and CH 4 Bandwidth Check
Service
d. Set the generator Frequency Range and
Frequency Variable controls for a 100 MHz output frequency.
e. CHECK-signal display amplitude is 4.2 divisions
or more.
f.
Repeat the
setting.
procedure
for
0.5
VOLTSIDIV
g. Move the test signal to the CH 4 input.
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 3 VOLTSIDIV
CH 3 (CH 2 off)
0.1 V
b. Move the leveled sine-wave generator signal to
the CH 3 input.
c. Set the generator output for a six-division signal
display at 50 kHz.
h. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 4 VOLTSIDIV
CH 4 (CH 3 off)
0.1 V
i.
Repeat the procedure for CH 4.
j.
Disconnect leveled sine-wave generator.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
HORIZONTAL
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1 ):
50
50
Time-Mark Generator
Calibration Generator
Coaxial Cable
R Termination
See the ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS section
at the back of fhis manual for locations of test points and adjustments.
INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS
1. Set:
Vertical MODE
INPUT COUPLING
VOLTSIDIV
Vertical POSITION
Controls
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
SECIDIV
Trigger LEVEL
HOLDOFF
SLOPE
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger COUPLING
MEASUREMENTS
MENU Displays
A INTEN
READOUT
FOCUS
SCALE ILLUM
CH 1 and CH 2
DC
0.1 v
12 o'clock
A
A
0.1 ms
12 o'clock
min (CCW)
1
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
DC
OFF
OFF
10 o'clock
12 o'clock
for well defined
display
fully CCW
PROCEDURE
1. Horizontal X I Gain (Timing) (R826)
d. ADJUST-HORIZONTAL 1X GAlN (R826) for one
time mark per division over the center 8
divisions.
2. Horizontal X I 0 Gain (Timing) (R825)
a. Set X I 0 MAG to ON.
b. Set time mark generator for 10 ps time marks.
c. Position display about center screen.
d. ADJUST-HORIZONTAL X I 0 GAlN (R825) for one
time mark per division over the center 8
divisions.
3. Readout Horizontal Gain (R823) and MAG
Registration (R809)
a. Set:
X I 0 MAG
SECIDIV
A INTEN
Off
1 ms
CCW (off)
b. Select Time CURSORS. Press the CURSORS button and select SEC from the menu.
c. Rotate the I+ OR DELAY control counterclockwise and the 4 control clockwise until cursors stop moving.
a. Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV
c. Position display to center of screen.
CH 1 (CH 2 off)
0.5 V
b. Connect time mark generator to CH 1 input via
50 i2 BNC coaxial cable and 50 R BNC termination. Set generator for 0.1 ms time marks.
d. ADJUST-MAG REG (R809) and RO HORlZ GAlN
(R823) alternately until the reference cursor
lines up exactly with the left graticule line and the
delta cursor lines up exactly with the right
graticule line.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
e. Remove CURSORS from screen. Press CLEAR
DISPLAY button.
f.
Set:
SECIDIV
A INTEN
20 ps
10 o'clock
g. Set time mark generator for 0.1 ms time marks.
h. Position rising edge of middle time mark to the
center vertical graticule line.
i.
Set X I 0 MAG to On.
j.
b. Set time mark generator for 5 ns time marks.
c. ADJUST-2 NS TlMlNG (C807, C814) for 1 cycle
per each 2.5 divisions over the center 8 divisions. See Figure 5-2. Use the vertical transition
of the sine wave instead of the peaks for better
accuracy.
d. INTERACTION-between C807 and C814. Readjust as necessary to make the timing at 2.5,
5, and 7.5 divisions within t 0 . 2 division
(1 minor division).
INTERACTION-between MAG Registration and
horizontal positioning of the time cursors. Check
for less than 0.5 division shift of time mark rising
edge between MAG off and MAG on. If not within
0.5 division, recheck the accuracy of R809 and
R823 adjustments; readjust if necessary.
e. Disconnect time mark generator.
4. A 20 ns Timing (C314)
a. Set:
X I 0 MAG
SECIDIV
Off
20 ns
b. Set time mark generator for 20 ns time marks.
c. ADJUST-A 20 NS TlMlNG (C314) for one time
mark per division over the center 8 divisions.
6081-15
Figure 5-2. 2-5 ns Timing.
5. B 20 ns TlMlNG (C329)
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
SECIDIV (B)
7. X Gain (R827)
B
20 ns
b. Set time mark generator for 20 ns time marks.
c. ADJUST-B 20 NS TlMlNG (C329) for one time
mark per division over the center 8 divisions.
X I 0 MAG
Horizontal MODE
Vertical MODE
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
Off
X-Y
CH 2
10 mV
b. Connect calibration generator to CH 1 input via
50 SZ coaxial cable. Set generator for STD AMPL.
Set Amplitude to 50 mV.
6. 2-5 ns Timing (C807, C814)
a. Set:
Horizontal MODE
X I 0 MAG
CH 1
CH 1 COUPLING
a. Set:
A
On
50 mV
AC
c. ADJUST-X GAIN (R827) for 5 divisions of horizontal signal.
dl Disconnect calibration generator.
Adjustment Procedure-2246A
Service
MEASUREMENT BANDWIDTH AND SELF
CHARACTERIZATION
Equipment Required (See Table 4-1):
Digital Multimeter (DMM)
Leveled Sine- Wave Generator
50
Coaxial Cable
See the ADJUSTMENT LOCATIONS section
at the back of this manual for locations of test points and adjustments.
INITIAL CONTROL SETTINGS
Set:
b. ADJUST-VOLTS CAL (R920) so the DMM reads
0.250 V.
2. B Trigger Bandwidth (R455)
Vertical MODE
INPUT COUPLING
VOLTSIDIV
Vertical POSITION
Controls
Horizontal MODE
AIB SELECT
SECIDIV
Trigger LEVEL
HOLDOFF
SLOPE
Trigger MODE
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger COUPLING
MEASUREMENTS
MENU Displays
A INTEN
READOUT
FOCUS
SCALE ILLUM
CH 1 and CH 2
DC
0.1 v
12 o'clock
A
A
0.1 ms
12 o'clock
min (CCW)
J-
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
DC
OFF
OFF
10 o'clock
12 o'clock
for well defined
display
fully CCW
a.
Set:
Vertical MODE
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
SECIDIV
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
20 mV
50 ps
b. Preset potentiometer R455 to midrange.
c. Run the SELF CAL routine. Press CH 11CH 2
VOLTMETER button and select SELF CAL.
d. Connect leveled sine-wave generator output to
the CH 2 input connector via a 50 il BNC precision coaxial cable and a 50 il BNC termination.
Set generator for a 5-division display at 50 kHz.
e. Set CH 1ICH 2 VOLTMETER for PK-PK voltage
measurement. Set output of Leveled Sine-Wave
Generator for a peak-to-peak readout display of
100 mV 20.5 mV. Adjust generator to 115 MHz.
f.
ADJUST-B TRIG BANDWIDTH (R455) for a peakto-peak readout of 75 mV 20.5 mV.
PROCEDURE
1. Volts Cal (R920)
a. Connect digital multimeter (DMM) LO lead to
chassis ground and the high lead to R921 pin 6.
3. Self Characterization
a. Run the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS routine.
Press both top and bottom menu-item select
buttons. Select INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU, then
Adjustment Procedure-2246A Service
SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS. Press RUN to start
the routine. When the routine is done, continue
with part b. or press QUIT to return to normal
oscilloscope mode.
b. Run MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS routine. Press
the down-arrow button to select the INTERNAL
SETTINGS MENU. Press SELECT, then press the
down-arrow button to select MAKE FACTORY
SETTINGS. Press RUN to start the routine. When
done, press QUIT to return to normal
oscilloscope mode.
MAINTENANCE
This section of the manual contains information for
conducting
preventive
maintenance,
troubleshooting, and corrective maintenance on the 2246A
Oscilloscope. General information regarding the
care and handling of the semiconductor devices that
can be damaged by static discharges is provided in
" Static-Sensitive Components. " Routine cleaning in-
structions and visual inspection checking for defects
are covered in " Preventive Maintenance. " Internal
testing capabilities and diagnostic test routines are
included in the " Troubleshooting " part of this section. Circuit board removal procedures are included
in the " Corrective Maintenance " part of this section.
STATIC-SENSITIVE COMPONENTS
The following precautions are applicable when performing any maintenance involving internal access
to the instrument.
Table 6-1
Relative Susceptibility to Static-Discharge
Damage
Semiconductor Classes
Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this instrument.
This instrument contains electrical components that
are susceptible to damage from static discharge.
Table 6-1 lists the relative susceptibility of various
classes of semiconductors. Static voltages of 1 k V
to 30 k V are common in unprotected environments.
When performing maintenance, observe the following precautions to avoid component damage:
1. Minimize handling of static-sensitive
nents.
compo-
Relative
Susceptibility
Levels a
MOS or CMOS microcircuits or I
discretes, or linear microcircuits
with MOS inputs
(Most Sensitive)
1
ECL
2
Schottky signal diodes
-
3
Schottky TTL
4
High-frequency bipolar
transistors
5
JFET
6
Linear microcircuits
Low-power Schottky TTL
2. Transport and store static-sensitive components
or assemblies in their original containers or on a
metal rail. Label any package that contains
static-sensitive components or assemblies.
(Least Sensitive)
a~oltage
equivalent for levels (voltage discharged
from a 100-pF capacitor through a resistance of
100
a):
3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by
wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap while
handling these components. Servicing staticsensitive components or assemblies should be
performed only at a static-free work station by
qualified service personnel
6 = 600 to 800 V
7 = 400 to 1000 V (est)
8 = 900 V
9 = 1200 v
Maintenance-2246A
Service
4. Keep anything capable of generating or holding
a static charge off the work station surface.
5. Keep the component leads shorted together
whenever possible.
6. Pick up components by their bodies, never by
their leads.
7. Do not slide the components over any surface.
8. Avoid handling components in areas that have a
floor or work-surface covering capable of generating a static charge.
9. Use a soldering iron that is connected to earth
ground.
10. Use only approved antistatic, vacuum-type
desoldering tools for component removal.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
INTRODUCTION
Preventive maintenance consists of cleaning, visual
inspection, and checking instrument performance.
Preventive maintenance on a regular basis may prevent instrument malfunction and improve instrument
reliability. The required frequency of maintenance
depends on the severity of the environment in which
the instrument is used. An appropriate time to do
preventive maintenance is just before instrument adjustment.
Exterior
INSPECTION. Inspect the external portions of the instrument for damage, wear, and missing parts; use
Table 6-2 as a guide. Instruments that appear to
have been dropped or otherwise abused should be
checked thoroughly to verify correct operation and
performance. Deficiencies that could cause personal injury or could lead to further instrument damage should be repaired immediately.
INSPECTION AND CLEANING
Visually inspect and clean the 2246A as often as operating conditions require. Accumulation of dirt in
the instrument can cause overheating and component breakdown. Dirt on components acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat dissipation. It also provides an electrical conduction path
that could result in instrument failure, especially under high-humidity conditions
Do not allow moisture to get inside the instrument during external cleaning. Use only
enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
CLEANING. Loose dust on the outside of the instrument can be removed with a soft cloth or small softbristle brush. The brush is particularly useful on and
around the controls and connectors. Remove remaining dirt with a soft cloth dampened in a mild
detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive
cleaners.
Clean the light filters and the crt face with a soft lintfree cloth dampened with either isopropyl alcohol or
a mild detergent-and-water solution.
Do not use chemical cleaning agents which
might damage the plastics used in this instrument. Use a nonresidue-type cleaner, preferably isopropyl alcohol or a solution of 7%
mild detergent with 99% water. Before using
any other type of cleaner, consult your
Tektronix Service Center or representative.
Interior
To access internal portions of the instrument for inspection and cleaning, refer to the Removal and Replacement Instructions in the Corrective Maintenance part of this section.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-2
External Inspection Checklist
Repair Action
Item
Inspect For
Cabinet, Front Panel, and
Cover
Cracks, scratches, deformations,
damaged hardware or gaskets.
Touch up paint scratches and
replace defective components.
Front-panel controls
Missing, damaged, or loose knobs,
buttons, and controls.
Repair or replace missing or
defective items.
Connectors
Broken shells, cracked insulation,
and deformed contacts. Dirt in
connectors.
Replace defective parts. Clean or
wash out dirt.
Carrying Handle
Correct operation.
Replace defective parts.
Accessories
Missing items or parts of items,
bent pins, broken or frayed cables,
and damaged connectors.
Replace damaged or missing items,
frayed cables, and defective
parts.
Table 6-3
Internal lnspection Checklist
Item
Inspect For
Repair Action
Circuit Boards
Loose, broken, or corroded solder
connections. Burned circuit boards.
Burned, broken, or cracked
circuit-run plating.
Clean solder corrosion with an
eraser and flush with isopropyl
alcohol. Resolder defective connections. Determine cause of
burned items and repair. Repair
defective circuit runs.
Resistors
Burned, cracked, broken, or
blistered.
Replace defective resistors. Check
for cause of burned component
and repair as necessary.
Solder Connections
Cold solder or rosin joints.
Resolder joint and clean with
isopropyl alcohol.
Capacitors
Damaged or leaking cases.
Corroded solder on leads or
terminals.
Replace defective capacitors. Clean
solder connections and flush with
isopropyl alcohol.
Semiconductor
Loosely inserted in sockets.
Distorted pins.
Firmly seat loose semiconductors.
Remove devices having distorted
pins. Carefully straighten pins (as
required to fit the socket), using
long-nose pliers, and reinsert
firmly. Ensure that straightening
action does not crack the pins,
causing them to break.
Wiring and Cables
Loose plugs or connectors. Burned,
broken, or frayed wiring.
Firmly seat connectors. Repair or
replace defective wires or cables.
Chassis
Dents, deformations, and damaged
hardware.
Straighten, repair, or replace
defective hardware.
Maintenance-2246A Service
INSPECTION. Inspect the internal portions of the
2246A for damage and wear, using Table 6-3 as a
guide. Repair deficiencies immediately. The corrective procedure for most visible defects is obvious;
however, particular care must be taken if heat-damaged components are found. Since overheating usually indicates other trouble in the instrument, it is important that the cause of overheating be corrected
to prevent further damage.
If any electrical component is replaced, conduct a
Performance Check for the affected circuit and for
other closely related circuits (see Section 4 for the
Performance Check). If repair or replacement work
is done on any of the power supplies, conduct a
complete Performance Check and, if so indicated,
an instrument readjustment (see Section 5 for Adjustment Procedure).
To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that circuit boards and components are
dry before applying power to the instrument.
CLEANING. To clean the interior, blow off dust with
dry, low-pressure air (approximately 9 psi). Remove
any remaining dust with a soft brush or a cloth
dampened with a solution of mild detergent and
water. A cotton-tipped applicator is useful for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards. If these
methods do not remove all the dust or dirt, the instrument may be spray washed using a solution of
1% mild detergent and 99% water as follows:
1. Remove covers and shields to reach parts to be
cleaned (see Removal and Replacement Instructions).
2. Spray wash dirty parts with the detergent-andwater solution; then use clean water to thoroughly rinse them.
3. Dry all parts with low-pressure air.
4. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven
or drying compartment using low-temperature
(125OF to 150°F) circulating air.
SWITCH CONTACTS. Switch contacts are permanently treated when assembled. Neither cleaning nor
other preventive maintenance is necessary, unless
the switch board is replaced or the switch assembly
has remained disassembled for a long period of
time.
LUBRICATION
A regular periodic lubrication program for the instrument is not necessary. Most of the potentiometers
used in this instrument are permanently sealed and
generally do not require periodic lubrication. The
backs of the front-panel knob guides have been lubricated when assembled and will require lubrication
again only when the front panel assembly is replaced. Rotary switches are installed with proper lubrication when assembled and will require lubrication
only when the rotor is replaced.
SEMICONDUCTOR CHECKS
Periodic checks of the transistors and other semiconductors in the oscilloscope are not recommended. The best check of semiconductor performance is actual operation in the instrument.
PERIODIC READJUSTMENT
To ensure accurate measurements, check the performance of this instrument every 2000 hours of operation, or if used infrequently, once each year. If
you replace any components, it may be necessary
to readjust the affected circuits.
Complete Performance Check instructions are given
in Section 4 of this manual; adjustment instructions
are given in Section 5. The Performance Check Procedure can be helpful in localizing certain troubles in
the instrument. In some cases, minor problems may
be revealed or corrected by readjustment. If only a
partial adjustment is performed, see Table 5-1 (the
interaction chart) for possible adjustment interaction
with other circuits.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
Preventive maintenance performed on a regular basis should reveal most potential problems before an
instrument malfunctions. However, should troubleshooting be required, the following information is
provided to aid in locating a fault. In addition, the
material presented in the Theory of Operation and
Diagrams sections of this manual may be helpful
while troubleshooting.
TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS
Diagnostic Firmware
This instrument contains built-in diagnostic routines
that can aid in localizing failures. An automatic
power-up self test checks the system RAM and ROM
and readout interface circuitry. If a failure is detected, this information is presented in either of two
ways: a flashing code display on the Trigger LEDs
or, if the instrument is capable of presenting a
readout, error messages in the crt display. In addition to the power-on testing, various diagnostic routines can be run from the service mode using the
SERVICE MENU. (See Internal Testing Capabilities in
this subsection for the details.)
Schematic Diagrams
Complete schematic diagrams are located on
tabbed foldout pages in the Diagrams section. Portions of circuitry mounted on each circuit board are
enclosed by heavy black lines. The assembly number and name(s) of the circuit(s) are shown near
the top or the bottom edge of each diagram.
Functional blocks on schematic diagrams are outlined with a wide gray line. Components within the
outlined area perform the function designated by the
block label. The Theory of Operation uses these
functional block names when describing circuit operation as an aid in cross-referencing between the
circuit description and the schematic diagrams.
on each diagram. Waveform illustrations are located
adjacent to their respective schematic diagram.
Circuit Board Illustrations
Circuit board illustrations showing the physical location of each component are provided for use in conjunction with each schematic diagram. Each board
illustration is found in the Diagrams section on the
back of a foldout page, preceding the first related
schematic diagram (s)
.
The locations of waveform test points are marked on
the circuit board illustrations with hexagonal outlined
numbers corresponding to the waveform numbers
on both the schematic diagram and the waveform
illustrations.
Circuit Board Locations
The location of a circuit board within the instrument
is shown on each foldout page along with the circuit
board illustration.
Circuit Board Interconnections
A circuit board interconnection diagram (schematic
Diagram 16) is provided in the Diagrams section to
aid in tracing a signal path or power source between
boards. All wire, plug, and jack numbers are shown
along with their associated wire or pin numbers and
signal names.
Power Distribution
Two Power Distribution diagrams (schematic Diagrams 14 and 15) are provided to aid in troubleshooting power supply problems. These diagrams
show the components that the various voltages are
applied to and the jumper connections and decoupling components used to apply the power to those
circuits. Excessive loading on a power supply by a
circuit fault may be isolated by disconnecting the appropriate jumpers.
Grid Coordinate System
Component numbers and electrical values of components in this instrument are shown on the schematic diagrams. Refer to the first page of the Diagrams section for the reference designators and
symbols used to identify components. Important
voltages and waveform reference numbers (enclosed in hexagonal-shaped boxes) are also shown
Each schematic diagram and circuit board illustration has a grid border along its left and top edges. A
table located next to each schematic diagram lists
the grid coordinates of each component shown in
that diagram. To aid in physically locating components on the circuit board, the table also lists the
Maintenance-2246A
Service
grid coordinates of each component in the circuit
board illustration.
Near each circuit board illustration is an alphanumeric listing of all components mounted on that
board. The second column in each listing identifies
the schematic diagram in which each component
can be found. These component-locator tables are
especially useful when more than one schematic
diagram is associated with a particular circuit board.
Component Color Coding
Information regarding color codes and markings of
resistors and capacitors is located in the color-coding illustration (Figure 9-1) at the beginning of the
Diagrams section.
RESISTOR COLOR CODE. Resistors used in this instrument are carbon-film, composition, or precision
metal-film types. They are usually color coded with
the EIA color code; however, some metal-film type
resistors may have the value printed on the body.
The color code is interpreted starting with the stripe
nearest to one end of the resistor. Composition resistors have four stripes; these represent two significant digits, a multiplier, and a tolerance value.
Metal-film resistors have five stripes representing
three significant digits, a multiplier, and a tolerance
value.
CAPACITOR MARKINGS. Capacitance values of
common disc capacitors and small electrolytics are
marked on the side of the capacitor body. White ceramic capacitors are color coded in picofarads, using a modified EIA code.
Dipped tantalum capacitors are color coded in
microfarads. The color dot indicates both the positive lead and the voltage rating. Since these capacitors are easily destroyed by reversed or excessive
voltage, be careful to observe the polarity and voltage rating when replacing them.
DIODE COLOR CODE. The cathode end of each
glass-encased diode is indicated by either a stripe,
a series of stripes or a dot. For most diodes marked
with a series of stripes, the color combination of the
stripes identifies three digits of the Tektronix Part
Number, using the resistor color-code system. The
cathode and anode ends of a metal-encased diode
may be identified by the diode symbol marked on its
body.
Semiconductor Lead Configurations
Figure 9-2 in the Diagrams section shows the lead
configurations for semiconductor devices used in
the instrument. These lead configurations and case
styles are typical of those used at completion of the
instrument design. Vendor changes and performance improvement changes may result in changes
of case styles or lead configurations. If the device in
question does not appear to match the configuration
shown in Figure 9-2, examine the associated circuitry or consult a manufacturer's data sheet.
Multipin Connections
This instrument uses two types of cable connectors.
The main type is an etched-circuit ribbon cable with
pin connectors crimped directly to the end of the
cable. The number one pin is indicated by a mark on
the ribbon cable. The other type of connector is a
plastic holder containing connectors crimped to the
ends of individual wires. Orientation, where important, is indicated by a triangle (arrow).
TROUBLESHOOTING EQUIPMENT
The equipment listed in Table 4-1 of this manual, or
equivalent equipment, may be useful when troubleshooting this instrument.
TROUBLESHOOTING TECHNIQUES
The following procedure is arranged in an order that
enables checking simple trouble possibilities before
requiring more extensive troubleshooting. The first
two steps use diagnostic routines built into the operating system of the instrument.
The next four procedures are check steps that ensure proper control settings, connections, operation, and adjustment. If the trouble is not located by
these checks, the remaining steps will aid in locating
the defective component. When the defective component is located, replace it using the appropriate
replacement procedure given under Corrective
Maintenance in this section.
Before using any test equipment to make
measurements on static-sensitive, currentsensitive, or voltage-sensitive components or
assemblies, ensure that any voltage or current supplied by the test equipment does not
exceed the limits of the component to be
tested.
Maintenance-2246A
1. Power-up Tests
Service
6. Check Instrument Performance and
Adjustment
When the instrument power is applied, self tests are
automatically run to verify proper operation of the
system RAM and ROM and readout interface circuitry. If the power-up test fails, failure codes appear in the Trigger Mode LEDs to identify the general
location of the fault. (See Power-Up Testing later in
this section for failure-code information.)
Check the performance of either those circuits
where trouble appears to exist or the entire instrument. An apparent trouble may be the result of
misadjustment. The complete performance check is
given in Section 4 of this manual and adjustment instructions are given in Section 5.
2. Diagnostic Routines
7. Isolate Trouble to a Circuit
Various diagnostic routines can be run from the
service mode. The routines can be run at any time
by displaying the SERVICE MENU and selecting the
desired item from the menu using front panel pushbuttons.
To isolate problems, use any symptoms noticed
when checking the instrument's operation to help localize the trouble to a particular circuit. For example, if the vertical deflection is incorrect on all channels, the problem is most likely from the delay line
driver to the vertical output; if deflection is bad only
on one channel, the problem is from the attenuator
of that channel to the input of the delay line driver.
The detailed block diagram shown in the foldout section may be used as an aid in determining signal flow
and control line dependency for correct circuit operation. Refer to the troubleshooting hints given in
Table 6-6 for diagnostic routine failures. Troubleshooting hints by diagram are given immediately following Table 6-6, and Table 6-9 may be used to aid
in locating a problem in the measurement system.
Entry into the SERVICE MENU and its uses are explained in the Diagnostic Routines discussion later in
this section.
3. Check Control Settings
Incorrect control settings can give a false indication
of instrument malfunction. If there is any question
about the correct function or operation of any control, refer to the Operating Information in the 2246A
Operators Manual.
8. Check Power Supplies
4. Check Associated Equipment
Before proceeding, ensure that any equipment used
with the 2246A is operating correctly. Verify that input signals are properly connected and that the interconnecting cables are not defective. Check that
the ac-power-source voltage to all equipment is
correct.
5. Visual Check
For safety reasons, an isolation transformer
must be used between the ac power main
and the instrument's ac power input whenever troubleshooting is done with the cabinet
removed. This is especially important when
working in the Preregulator and Inverter
Power Supply sections of the instrument.
To avoid electrical shock, disconnect the instrument from the ac power source before
making a visual inspection of the internal circuitry.
When trouble symptoms appear in more than one
circuit, first check the power supplies; then check
the affected circuits by taking voltage and waveform
readings. Check first for the correct output voltage
of each individual supply. These voltages are measured between J1204 (interface connector between
power supply and main board) and ground (J1204
pin 4 or 8). See the associated circuit board illustration and Table 6-4.
Perform a visual inspection. This check may reveal
broken connections or wires, damaged components, semiconductors not firmly mounted, damaged circuit boards, or other clues to the cause of
an instrument malfunction.
Voltages levels may be measured either with a DMM
or with an oscilloscope. Voltage ripple amplitudes
must be measured using an oscilloscope. Use a 1X
probe with as short a ground lead as possible to
minimize stray pickup.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
NOTE
10. Check Voltages and Waveforms
Use 20 MHz bandwidth limiting on the test
oscilloscope. A higher bandwidth may produce higher observed ripple levels.
If the power-supply voltages and ripple are within
the listed ranges in Table 6-4, the supply can be
assumed to be working correctly. If they are outside
the range, the supply may be either misadjusted,
operating incorrectly, or excessively loaded. The
power supply adjustment procedure is given in the
Power Supply, Display, and Z-Axis subsection of
Section 5 (the Adjustment Procedure).
Often the defective component can be located by
checking circuit voltages or waveforms. Typical voltages are listed on the schematic diagrams.
Waveforms indicated on the schematic diagrams by
hexagonal-outlined numbers are shown adjacent to
the diagrams. Waveform test points are shown in
the circuit board illustrations.
NOTE
Voltages and waveforms indicated on the
schematic diagrams are not absolute and
may vary slightly befween instruments. To establish operating conditions similar to those
used to obtain these readings, see the Voltage and Waveform Setup Conditions preceding the waveform illustrations in the Diagrams section.
A defective component elsewhere in the instrument
can create the appearance of a power-supply problem and may also affect the operation of other circuits. Use the power distribution diagrams (schematic Diagrams 14 and 15 in the foldouts) to aid in
localizing a loading problem to a particular circuit.
9. Check Circuit Board Interconnections
After the trouble has been isolated to 'a particular
circuit, again check for loose or broken connections, improperly seated semiconductors, and heatdamaged components.
Note the recommended test equipment, front-panel
control settings, voltage and waveform conditions,
and cable-connection instructions. Any special control settings required to obtain a given waveform are
noted under the waveform illustration. VoltsIDiv and
SecIDiv settings of the test oscilloscope for a
waveform are indicated in the waveform illustration.
Table 6-4
Power Supply Voltage and Ripple Limits
Nominal
Supply
Voltage
+I30
+58
Test Point
(+ lead)
Test Point
(+ lead)
Min
Max
60-150 Hz
20-40 kHz
J1204-11
+I27
+I35
J1204-10
+55
70 mV
120 mV
Limits (-1 O°C
to 55OC)
P-P ~ i ~ ~ l e "
+59
70 mV
40 mV
+15
J1204-7
+14.6
+15.6
8 mV
4 mV
+7.5
J1204-8
+7.4
+7.6
8 mV
4 mV
+5.0
J1204-1,2
-5.0
J1204-5
+5.0
-5.2
+5.3
-5.4
30 mV
4 mV
20 mV
4 mV
-7.5
J1204-9
-7.5
-7.8
4 mV
J1204-6
-1 5.5
-1 6.6
4 mV
10 mV
-15 unreg
a
At rated load.
100 mV
Maintenance-2246A
11. Check Individual Components
I WARNING
(
To avoid electric shock, always disconnect
the instrument from the ac power source before removing or replacing components.
The following procedures describe methods of
checking individual components. Two-lead components that are soldered in place are most accurately
checked by first disconnecting one end from the circuit board. This isolates the measurement from the
effects of the surrounding circuitry. See Figure 9-1
for component value identification and Figure 9-2 for
semiconductor lead configurations.
When checking semiconductors, observe the
static-sensitivity precautions given at the beginning of this section.
TRANSISTORS. A good check of a transistor is actual performance under operating conditions. A transistor can most effectively be checked by substituting a known-good component. However, be sure
that circuit conditions are not such that a replacement transistor might also be damaged. If substitute
transistors are not available, use a dynamic-type
transistor checker for testing. Static-type transistor
checkers are not recommended, since they do not
check operation under simulated operating conditions.
When troubleshooting transistors in the circuit with a
voltmeter, measure both the emitter-to-base and
emitter-to-collector voltages to determine whether
they are consistent with normal circuit voltages.
Voltages across a transistor may vary with the type
of device and its circuit function.
Some of these voltages are predictable. The emitter-to-base voltage for a conducting silicon transistor will normally range from 0.6 V to 0.8 V. The emitter-to-collector voltage for a saturated transistor is
about 0.2 V. Because these values are small, the
best way to check them is by connecting a sensitive
Service
voltmeter across the junction rather than comparing
two voltages taken with respect to ground. If the former method is used, both leads of the voltmeter
must be isolated from ground.
If voltage values measured are less that those just
given, either the device is shorted or no current is
flowing in the external circuit. If values exceed the
emitter-to-base values given, either the junction is
reverse biased or the device is defective. Voltages
exceeding those given for typical emitter-tocollector values could indicate either a nonsaturated
device operating normally or a defective (opencircuited) transistor. If the device is conducting,
voltage will be developed across the resistors in
series with it; if open, no voltage will be developed
across the resistors unless current is being supplied
by a parallel path.
When checking emitter-to-base junctions, do
not use an ohmmeter range that has a high
internal current. High current may damage
the transistor. Reverse biasing the emitterto-base junction with a high current may degrade the current-transfer ratio (Beta) of the
transistor.
A transistor emitter-to-base junction also can be
checked for an open or shorted condition by measuring the resistance between terminals with an ohmmeter set to a range having a low internal source
current, such as the R X 1 k n range. The junction
resistance should be very high in one direction and
much lower when the meter leads are reversed.
When troubleshooting a field-effect transistor (FET) ,
the voltage across its elements can be checked in
the same manner as previously described for other
transistors. However, remember that in the normal
depletion mode of operation, the gate-to-source
junction is reverse biased; in the enhanced mode,
the junction is forward biased.
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS. An integrated circuit (IC)
can be checked with a voltmeter, test oscilloscope,
or by direct substitution. A good understanding of
circuit operation is essential when troubleshooting a
circuit having IC components. Use care when checking voltages and waveforms around the IC so that
adjacent leads are not shorted together. An IC test
clip provides a convenient means of clipping a test
probe to an IC.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
When checking a diode, do not use an ohmmeter scale that has a high internal current.
High current may damage a diode. Checks
on diodes can be performed in much the
same manner as those on transistor emitterto-base junctions.
DIODES. A diode can be checked for either an open
or a shorted condition by measuring the resistance
between terminals with an ohmmeter set to a range
having a low internal source current, such as the R X
1 kf2 range. The diode resistance should be very
high in one direction and much lower when the meter leads are reversed.
Silicon diodes should have 0.6 V to 0.8 V across
their junctions when conducting; Schottky diodes
about 0.2 V to 0.4 V. Higher readings indicate that
they are either reverse biased or defective, depending on polarity.
RESISTORS. Check resistors with an ohmmeter. Refer to the Replaceable Electrical Parts list for the tolerances of resistors used in this instrument. A resistor normally does not require replacement unless its
measured value varies widely from its specified
value and tolerance.
INDUCTORS. Check for open inductors by checking
continuity with an ohmmeter. Shorted or partially
shorted inductors can usually be found by checking
the waveform response when high-frequency signals are passed through the circuit.
CAPACITORS. A leaky or shorted capacitor can best
be detected by checking resistance with an ohmmeter set to one of the highest ranges. Do not exceed
the voltage rating of the capacitor. The resistance
reading should be high after the capacitor is charged
to the output voltage of the ohmmeter. An open capacitor can be detected with a capacitance meter or
by checking whether the capacitor passes ac signals.
12. Repair and Adjust the Circuit
If any defective parts are located, follow the replacement procedures given under Corrective Maintenance in this section. After any electrical component
has been replaced, the performance of that circuit
and any other closely related circuit should be
checked. Since the power supplies affect all circuits,
performance of the entire instrument should be
checked if work has been done on the power supplies. Readjustment of the affected circuitry may be
necessary. Refer to the Performance Check Procedure and the Adjustment Procedure, (sections 4 and
5) and to Table 5-1 (Adjustment Interactions).
INTERNAL TESTING CAPABILITIES
The diagnostics built into the 2246A permit the technician to test much of the digital circuitry and the
digital-to-analog interface. The following text describes the testing capabilities of the Measurement
Processor and the firmware controlled circuitry.
Power-Up Testing
The systems shown in Figure 6-1 are tested at
power-on. Failure codes appear in the Trigger
MODE LEDs, with ON being shown as " x " and OFF
as " 0 " in the figure. In the event of a display failure
where error message cannot be displayed on the
crt, the codes indicate a failure area to begin troubleshooting.
F a i l u r e Code
(seen on t h e
T r i g g e r LEOS)
Tests Run
System RAM
System ROM
Readout I n t e r f a c e
DAC Subsystem
a,
o =
2 d ,c
5
X
O
0
X
z
O
X
0
O
O
0
X
X
& gt; w
z
7
O
0
0
O
,
,
g0
i
LI
" "
, I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6555-22
Figure 6-1. Power-on test failure codes.
Power-up tests performed are:
1 . RAM diagnostics-failures indicated by flashing
AUTO LEVEL lamp. Three diagnostics are run on
all locations in the RAM:
a.
Store and read 00.
b. Store and read FF.
c . Store and read pseudo-random pattern.
Maintenance-2246A
2.
ROM diagnostics-failures indicated by flashing
AUTO lamp. Tests all of ROM, except for ROM
header. Runs proprietary version of CRCC test.
3. Readout interface diagnostics-failures indicated
by flashing NORM lamp. Performs a marchingone test around the loop from D7-DO to R7-RO
and back.
4.
DAC interface diagnostics-failures indicated by
flashing AUTO LEVEL and NORM lamps. Performs three tests:
a.
Checks that DAC INTR is high after powerUP.
goes low after a byte
b. checks that DAC ~NTR
is sent from the Measurement Processor.
c.
Checks that DAC INTR goes high again after
the DAC Processor reads the byte sent from
the Measurement Processor.
Service
Each service menu has a title and a number of selectable items in the menu. The title appears in the
top line of the crt display, and the selectable items
appear under the title, indented (see Figure 6-2).
Menu choices that are names of sub-menus have a
following slash ( I ) ,and when one is underlined, the
word " SELECT " appears in the modifier menu list.
When a choice with sub-menus is selected, the
sub-menu choices are displayed on the left side of
the screen with the name of the selected sub-menu
displayed in the top line.
A menu choice that has no following slash is an executable service routine. The routine may be run by
underlining it and pressing the menu button next to
the RUN label that appears in the modifier menu list.
Executable servicing selections are: diagnostics that
message
return either a pass message Or a
along with service data; one-shot exercisers that
carry out some service and immediately return to
the menu; or regular exercisers that carry out a
service while con~nuously
displaying service data.
SERVICE MODE
The service mode driver menu is accessed by
pressing the top and the bottom menu-item buttons
at the same time. The main SERVICE MENU will be
displayed as shown in Figure 6-2. Each service
menu display has two parts; the part to the left is the
service menu, and the part to the right is the modifier menu.
SERVICE MENU/
........................
DIAGNOSE
7' MENU
3.
CONFIGURE
SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS
An underlined service-menu choice is available for
selection. To select a menu item, use the buttons
next to the up-arrow and down-arrow symbols to
move the underline up or down in the SERVICE
MENU. When the underline is below the sub-menu
title, pressing the menu button next to up-arrow
MENU label returns to the preceding menu containing that sub-menu (an up-menu operation).
Pressing the QUlT selection or CLEAR Display button
at any time the choice is displayed will cause the
scope to return to normal oscilloscope mode. If a
service routine is operating that has an END menu
selection displayed, pressing the button next to END
exits the routine and returns to the selection menu
(where QUlT is displayed). Routines that run once,
return to the selection menu when finished.
INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU/
EXERCISER MENU/
QUIT
6555-23
Figure 6-2. Main SERVICE MENU.
The diagnostic tests in the SERVICE MENU may be
run with a conditional setting that determines how
many times the routine is done. The conditional
MODE setting menu choice appears in the modifier
menu when the DIAGNOSE choice in the SERVICE
MENU is underlined (see Figure 6-3). One of the following mode types will be displayed:
ONCE, CONTINUOUS, UNTIL PASS, or UNTIL FAIL
Maintenance-2246A Service
Change the mode type displayed in the bottom line
by pressing the MODE button. When ONCE is the
mode, the diagnostic is run once, and the result is
displayed. When CONTINUOUS is the mode, the diagnostics are run continuously. When UNTIL PASS is
the mode, the diagnostics are run until they pass.
When UNTIL FAlL is the mode, the diagnostics are
run until they fail. In order to stop a diagnostic that is
looping in the CONTINUOUS, UNTIL PASS, or UNTIL
FAIL mode, press the HALT button. The diagnostic
will stop and display the current status. When the
status is displayed, press END to return to the SERVICE MENU choices.
SERVICE MENU/
D ..nP.tJ.o.3.c.
I.
T
'
CONFIGURE
\1
INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU/
RUN
FRONT PANEL MENU/
PROC BOARD MENU/
QUIT
MAIN BOARD MENU/
MODE:
ONCE
6555-24
Figure 6-3. SERVICE MENU with DIAGNOSE
choice selected.
Service Routines
Descriptions of the available service routines are
given in Table 6-5. The complete SERVICE MENU
has this structure:
SERVICE MENU1
DIAGNOSE
CONFIGURE
SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS
INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU1
MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS
LOAD STOREIRECALL SETUPS
ADJUST VERTICAL OUTPUT
EXERCISER MENU/
FRONT PANEL MENU1
EXERCISE POTS
EXERCISE LEDS
EXERCISE SWITCHES
PROC BOARD MENU1
A TO D MENU1
EXERCISE DACS
EXERCISE PORTS
READOUT MENU1
SHOW READOUT ROM HEADER
EXERCISE RO INTERFACE
EXERCISE TIME REF
SHOW SYSTEM ROM HEADER
SHOW AUTO RESTARTS
MAIN BOARD MENU1
SHIFT REGISTER MENU/
EXERCISE SR 0
EXERCISE SR 1
EXERCISE SR 2
EXERCISE VOLT REF
Table 6-5
SERVICE MENU Selections
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Action
Menu Item
DIAGNOSE
CONFIGURE
I
I
I
Runs all diagnostics in sequence, stopping at the first failed diagnostic.
(See Table 6-6 for a diagnostic test failure troubleshooting guide.)
Diagnostics are:
RO (readout) INTERFACE
ROM RAM
SLlC CONTROL REG
SHIFT REGISTERS (in SR2, SRO, SR1, SR3 order)
DAC
Triggers
Configures the scope-mode operation of the instrument according to the
users' wishes. Configuration is done by answering yestno questions. The
questions are:
KEEP MENU ON WHEN MEAS SELECTED? The menu remains displayed after a
measurement function has been selected from one of the Measurements menus.
Note
The RECALL ONLY menu (see below) remains on after each selection
regardless of the KEEP MENU ON WHEN MEAS SELECTED setting.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-5 (cont)
SERVICE MENU Selections
Action
Menu Item
RECALL ONLY? (IN STOREIRECALL) Selecting YES displays the Recall Only
menu when the STOREIRECALL SETUP button is pressed. From the Recall
Only menu you can easily step through all of the stored front-panel setups.
Selecting NO displays the StoreIRecall menu when the STOREIRECALL
SETUP button is pressed. From the StoreIRecall Setup menu you can
store, edit, and recall front-panel setups.
MENU ON WHEN SIR SELECTED? Selecting YES causes the STOREIRECALL
menu to remain displayed after a store or recall function has been selected.
KEEP READOUT ON IN SGL SEQ? Selecting YES causes the readout to be
on constantly when in SGL SEQ trigger mode.
Selecting NO causes the readout to flash on for a brief period after the
signal display sequence has finished.
SELF CAL
MEASUREMENTS
MAKE FACTORY
SETTINGS
Self characterizes the gain and offset errors in the vertical system and
time base so that they may be compensated for in the measurements.
This should be run only after instrument is warmed up properly, although
if desired, it can be used to compensate for an unusual operating temperature.
Resets the front panel settings to those shipped with the instrument.
Used to produce a known setup condition. The following is a partial
list of settings:
Vertical MODE
CH 1ICH 2 COUPLING
CH 1, 2, 3, 4 VOLTSIDIV
CH 2 INVERT
SCOPE BW
HORIZONTAL MODE
A SECIDIV
B SECIDIV
AIB Trigger SLOPE
AIB Trigger SELECT
A Trigger MODE
B Trigger MODE
AIB Trigger SOURCE
AIB Trigger COUPLING DC
MEASUREMENTS
-
LOAD STOREIRECALL
SETUPS
-
CH 1 AND CH 2
DC
.1 v
OFF
OFF
A
.Ims
1P
S
1
A
AUTO LEVEL
RUNS AFTER
CH 1
OFF
-
--
Loads eight factory front-panel setups into the StoreIRecall memory. The
setups are stored in memory locations 01 through 08 and all previously
stored setups in locations 01 through 20 will be deleted. When you select
this item, a message will be displayed that will give you the choice to
continue or not continue with the loading of the factory setups. Don't
select YES unless you are sure that you want to delete all of your previously stored setups.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-5 (cont)
SERVICE MENU Selections
Action
Menu Item
ADJUST VERTICAL
OUTPUT
Used to adjust the vertical output gain and centering (see Adjustment
Procedure in Section 5).
EXERCISE POTS
Shows the name of the latest digitized potentiometer moved, along with
its hexadecimal value (from FF to 0 0 ) . Starts by showing the HORlZ
POSITION and its value until another pot is adjusted. Pressing END exits
the exerciser.
-
EXERCISE LEDS
Uses the delay control to select a single LED, turn it on, and display its
circuit number. The exerciser is used to check for adjacent-row or adjacent-column shorts in the front panel board and for inoperative LEDs.
Pressing END exits the excerciser.
-
EXERCISE SWITCHES
Shows the circuit number of the latest momentary-contact button pressed,
or the name and position of the latest rotary switch turned. Pressing END
exits the exerciser.
EXERCISE DACS
Attaches the DAC (U2302, Diagram 11) to a single sample-and-hold
channel (through U2303), and outputs a sawtooth waveform to that
channel. Select the channel by pressing STEP. This excerciser may
be used to trace a sample-hold value through the system, with the
DAC system operating in a non-multiplexed mode. Pressing END exits the exerciser.
EXERCISE PORTS
Continuously does analog-to-digital conversion on a single A-to-D port.
Select the port by pressing STEP. The exerciser may be used to trace
a single potentiometer wiper value or probe code value through the
system by operating the A-to-D converter in a non-multiplexed mode.
Pressing END exits the exerciser.
SHOW READOUT
ROM HEADER
Shows the Readout ROM part number (U2408, Diagram 9) and its
expected and actual checksum.
EXERCISE RO
INTERFACE
Continuously echos a marching-bit value across the readout interface.
This exerciser may be used to check the integrity of the MeasurementProcessor-to-Readout-Processor communication system. Pressing END
exits the exerciser.
SHOW SYSTEM
ROM HEADER
Shows the system ROM part numbers (U2519, Diagram 8) and checksums
of the installed firmware version.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-5 (cont)
SERVICE MENU Selections
-
-
Action
Menu Item
EXERCISE TIME REF
Steps through the timing frequencies used to characterize the horizontal
timing accuracy. Calibration periods are shown in the following table.
-
-
Time
5 1s
10 ps
20 ps
50 ~s
.1 ms
.2 ms
.5 ms
1 ms
2 ms
5 ms
-
Test Period
32
64
128
256
512
1.024
2.048
4.096
8.192
32.768
ps
ps
ps
ps
ps
ms
ms
ms
ms
ms
-
SHOW AUTO
RESTARTS
Shows the address being executed if a software error occurs that causes
execution out of normal memory space. This is for factory use only and is
of no use in field servicing of the instrument. If an AUTO RESTART is ever
seen, record the address displayed and report it to a service center; the
error address is cleared from memory when SHOW AUTO RESTARTS is
exited.
EXERCISE SR 0
Shifts alternate zeros and ones through Shift Register 0 (U171, U172, and
U173, Diagram 1). This shift register sets Attenuator and Input Coupling
relay positions and Vertical Preamplifier gain settings.
~~~~~
EXERCISE SR 1
Shifts alternate zeros and ones through Shift Register 1 (U302 and U303,
Diagram 5; U1103, Diagram 3). This shift register sets sweep speeds
and auxiliary trigger settings (TV Trigger, Scope Bandwidth, X I 0 magnification, and X-Y Mode).
-
EXERCISE SR 2
Shift alternate zeros and ones through Shift Register 2 (U502, Diagram 4 ) .
EXERCISE VOLT REF
Steps through all settings of the Voltage Reference Generator (U931,
Diagram 7) that are used to calibrate the Volts Measurement system.
For each setting, Channels 1 and 2 are placed into the gain configuration
(2 mV through 50 mV) that uses that setting. The voltage select lines
(VOLTS CAL 2-0) may be checked for activity, and the generated
VOLTS CAL SIGNAL may be measured to check its values.
VOLTSIDIV
Cal voltage
Maintenance-2246A
Service
oubleshooting the instrument. Testing routines and
troubleshooting information for use in the event of a
failed test are given in Table 6-6.
DIAGNOSE Tests
The complete DIAGNOSE routine may be called up
by the service technician as needed to aid in tr-
Table 6-6
DIAGNOSE ROUTINES
Path, devices tested, and troubleshooting actions
Error Label
INTERFACE ERROR
I
Measurement Processor to Readout Processor Communications.
(hex number that was written, 2 characters).
WROTE
I
(hex number that was read, 2 characters).
READ
This test rotates a 1 through the byte on the bus lines. The difference
between WROTE and READ indicates which bit is stuck.
Devices to troubleshoot:
U2401, U2402, U2417C and D, and bus lines between Measurement Processor and Readout Processor.
Check U2501 pin 29 for enabling signal to U2402, and U2400 pin 22 for
clock.
RAM ERROR
Writes and reads test bytes from the Readout RAM (U2406).
ADDRESS
(hex address of error location, 3 characters).
WROTE
(hex data written, 2 characters).
READ
(hex data read, 2 characters).
The difference between WROTE and READ data indicates a stuck bit.
(RO RAM)
PART NUM (Tektronix Part Number without dashes).
EXPECTED CHECKSUM (hex number, 2 characters).
ACTUAL CHECKSUM (hex number, 2 characters).
NOTE
Readout ROM is internal to the Readout Processor,
U2400; a failure of this test may mean a bad Readout
Processor.
Maintenance-2246A
Table 6-6 (cont)
DIAGNOSE ROUTINES
Path, devices tested, and troubleshooting actions
Error Label
REG SR 2
Front Panel Potentiometer Multiplexer data path check.
WROTE
(hex data written, 1 character).
READ
(hex data read, 1 character) .
Device Tested: U502, Diagram 4.
Troubleshooting checks :
Check pin 11 for correct clock.
Check pin 2 for data.
Check pin 12 for multiplexer output.
-
REG SR 0
-
Attenuator and Preamplifier data path check.
WROTE
(hex data written, 6 characters).
READ
(hex data read,, 6 characters).
Devices Tested: U171, U172, and U173 on Diagram 1 .
NOTE
U171 and U172 have +15 V clocks and data; U173 has
+5 V clocks and data.
Troubleshooting checks :
Check pin 3 of each device for correct clock.
Check pin 9 of each device for marching bit pattern.
Attenuator relay latches are driven and a clacking sound is heard.
-
REG SR 1
-
Sweeps and Auxiliary Trigger data path check.
WROTE
(hex data written, 6 characters).
READ
(hex data read, 6 characters).
Devices Tested:
U302 and U303 on Diagram 3; U1103 on Diagram 3. Clock and data
levels for U302 and U303 are +15 V; they are +5 V for U1103.
Troubleshooting checks:
Check pin 3 of each device for correct clock.
Check pin 9 of each device for marching bit pattern.
Service
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-6 (cont)
DIAGNOSE ROUTINES
Path, devices tested, and troubleshooting actions
Error Label
REG S 3
R
Switch board data path check.
WROTE
(hex data written, 4 characters).
READ
(hex data read, 4 characters).
NOTE
There is no exerciser for SR 3 , but it is included in " DIAGNOSE. "
Devices Tested: U2001 and U2002, Diagram 10.
Troubleshooting Checks:
Check pin 10 for serial data in.
Check pin 9 for serial data out.
Check pin 2 for clock.
DAC ERROR 0
The A-to-D system, Diagram 11, is not working correctly.
Ground level was digitized out of the specified error limits.
Devices to troubleshoot:
U2515 and U2517, Diagram 8; U2306, U2302, U2300, U2313, and
U2314, Diagram 11; U506, Diagram 7
(Triggers)
The trigger diagnostic partially checks the Trigger SOURCE, Trigger
CPLG, and Trigger SLOPE circuitry.
Error Messages:
TlME SIGNAL TOO SMALL
AT A Trigger
A Trigger circuitry failed amplitude test.
TlME SIGNAL TOO SMALL
AT B Trigger
B Trigger circuitry failed amplitude test.
NO A Trigger FOR TlME
CAL SIGNAL
(2 digit code, see table)
Trigger never occurred.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-6 (cont)
DIAGNOSE ROUTINES
Error Label
Path, devices tested, and troubleshooting actions
Time Base
Cal Signal
I
Code
Check U421, U431, U1106A, and associated circuitry, Diagram 3.
SLlC (Display Logic IC, U600) and FLlC (Trigger Logic IC, U602) gate
outputs and level shifters, Diagram 4.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS BY DIAGRAM
Vertical SELF CAL-Checks Cursor and
Preamplifier Outputs
The circuitry listed below must be operational for
Vertical SELF CAL to work. Troubleshoot these circuits if voltage measurements or tracking cursors
are not correct.
1. DAC system (U2303, U2304, and U2305, Diagram 11 ; U2601 and associated circuitry, Diagram 12).
2. Trigger Level Comparators (U431 and U421,
Diagram 3).
7. Vertical Preamps (U210, U220, U230, and
U240), Delay Line Drivers (Q250, Q251, Q252,
and Q253), and Vertical Position Switching circuitry (U203, U801B, U201, U202, U280, Q284
and Q285, Diagram 2).
HORIZONTAL SELF CAL-Checks Sweep Timing
1. Put the oscilloscope into Self Cal and check at
U421A pin 4 (Diagram 3) for changing width calibration signals.
2. Run the " EXERCISE TIME REF " exerciser and
check for correct TB CAL signal at U421A pin 4,
Diagram 3 (see Table 6-5).
Schematic Diagram 1-Vertical INPUTS
3. VERT COMP feedback (U702, Diagram 2).
1. Run DIAGNOSE to check for shift register failure.
4. ECL-to-CMOS translators (Q604, Q605, Q606,
Q607, Q602, and Q603) between U600 and U602
(Diagram 4).
2. Run the shift register exerciser for Shift Register
0. Check for clock, data, and strobe signals.
Check the shift register outputs.
5. Data to Measurement Processor (data bus and
bus transceivers, Diagram 8).
NOTE
6. VOLTS CAL signal (U931, Diagram 7).
The outputs of U171 and U172 are at 15 V;
the outputs from U173 are at 5 V .
Maintenance-2246A
Service
3. Check the outputs of the relay driver transistor
arrays (U174 and U175). When a transistor is
blown in one of the arrays, the usual symptom is
8 V on its output.
4. Go to a known setup and check the outputs for
correct levels (see Circuit Description in Section 3). The MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS selection
under INTERNAL SETTINGS of the SERVICE
MENU provides known control states.
I WARNING
)
Vertical output transistors Q70 7 and Q702
run extremely hot (in excess of 7 00 " C) . Use
care when probing in those areas to not touch
the heat sinks or cases with bare fingers.
5. Check relay contacts.
6. Follow the signal path and check for correct signal and gains. Put in a known signal for each
attenuator setting and check at the Vertical Preamplifier inputs to determine if the signal path is
ok. The front panel boards and the attenuator
shield have to be removed to gain access to the
solder side of the Main Board.
7. Check the channel input buffer amplifier (U112
or U122) output if the vertical deflection of either
channel 1 or channel 2 is defective. If the buffer
amplifier output is held at -6 V or a strange sawtooth signal is present, replace that buffer amplifier.
8. Check gains and offsets of the CH 3 or CH 4
input buffers (Q131 or Q151).
The vertical output amplifier runs hot. DO
NOT touch it with bare fingers.
The metal tab on top of the vertical output
amplifier IC (U707) is NOT ground. Do not
connect a ground lead to it. Doing so may
cause the IC to fail and usually causes R733
from pin 74 of U707 to the -5 V supply to
open.
6. A common mechanical failure is lead breakage
on R708. If the resistor pack is moved excessively, the leads will break. The resistor pack will
then have to be replaced.
NOTE
Schematic Diagram 2-Vertical PREAMPLIFIERS,
DELAY LINE DRIVERS and OUTPUT
Perform the following troubleshooting checks with no
signal input.
1. Check both inputs of the delay line. If offset on
either side, troubleshoot the offsetting side. Inputs to the bases of Q250 and Q251 should be at
+7.5 v.
2. Differential voltage across the delay line should
be 0 V 20.5 V.
3. Check signal gain through the Preamplifier ICs
(U210, U220, U230, and U240). Gain is 10 mV/
division of input signal.
4. Check INVERT operation.
5. Check the operation of U260 if the inputs to delay line driver are not at 7.5 V. This operational
amplifier is the bias stabilization circuit that compares the average dc level to +7.5 and moves
the emitters (and therefore the bases) of Q250
and Q251 to return the inputs to 7.5 V.
The heat sinks on Q707 and Q702 may be
removed for short periods of time to permit
access for a test probe around the close-in
circuitry. DO NOT leave them off for extended
periods. Check that they are on all the way
when replaced.
7. If the heat sinks on the output transistors shake
loose, the plastic grommet inserted in the top of
the heat sink prevents the sink from touching the
metal cabinet. If the grommet is left out, then
the metal cabinet may come in contact with the
heat sink; and the transistor, the vertical output
amplifier IC, and R733 will usually fail. If the heat
sinks are removed during maintenance, they
must fit tightly when replaced and the grommet
must be checked.
NOTE
The cases of Q707 and Q702 are the base
leads of the transistors, not the collector as is
usual for a TO5 case. Also, the tab marks the
collector lead, not the emitter.
8. The vertical outputs to the crt may be momentarily shorted together to check for offsets in the
crt. (This should center the vertical trace.)
Maintenance-2246A
9. The output at pins 6 and 7 of U701 may be
shorted together to check for offsets in the Vertical Preamplifier. (This should bring the trace to
within +/-0.5 division of center.)
10. Pins 18 and 19 of U701 may be shorted together
to check for offsets from the delay line. (This
should bring the trace to within +/-I .5 divisions
of center.)
11. Shorting the bases of Q701 and Q702 together
usually causes the vertical output circuit to oscillate.
12. Check the center lead of R708 for a voltage of
about +60 V, and a common-mode voltage difference (between the two deflection plates) of
about 0 V (when pins 6 and 7 of U701 are
shorted together).
13. Check the operation of Vertical Comparator
U702 by noting if the TRACK MEASUREMENT
cursors are off screen when called up. (The Vertical Comparator circuit is enabled only during a
vertical Self Cal.)
Schematic Diagram 4-DISPLAY AND TRIGGER
LOGIC AND PROCESSOR INTERFACE
1. Put the oscilloscope into A Horizontal Display
mode with CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical modes on.
2. Check U600 vertical enables (CH 1 EN, pin 39;
CH 2 EN, pin 38)
3. Probe U600 A TRIG selects (ATS 0, pin 31;
ATS 1, pin 32; ATS 2, pin 33; A SLOPE, pin 30)
and B TRIG selects (BTS 0, pin 27; BTS 1,
pin 28; BTS 2, pin 29; B SLOPE, pin 26) while
making trigger source and slope changes on the
front panel. (Probe the A select lines for A trigger changes and the B select lines for B trigger
changes.)
4. Check the 10 MHz clock at U600 pin 1 and U600
power sources. Check the 1 kHz clock at pin 2.
5. Check communication lines (SLIC RD, pin 8;
SLIC WR, pin 3; ADDRO through ADDR3, pins 4
through 7, respectively; and MB DATA, pin 9) for
activity while making front panel trigger-mode
changes.
6. Check T O line, pin 17. Signal should go to a
H
logic high then low again for every new frontpanel setup condition, such as changing trigger
mode, vertical mode, etc.
Service
7. Check TDI, U600, pin 10, for a CMOS-level
switching signal.
8. Check TDO, U602, pin 30, for an ECL-level
switching signal.
9. Check the A TRIG signal at U602 pin 7.
10. Check the A GATE signal at U602 pin 14. Vary
the Holdoff control to see if the spacing between
each A GATE pulse changes.
11. Check the Holdoff oscillator output at U600 pin
15. Vary the HOLDOFF control to see if the width
of the oscillator pulses varies.
Schematic Diagram 5-A
DELAY COMPARATORS
AND B SWEEPS AND
1. Check that the baseline voltage (level that is
present during holdoff after retrace) of the A
and B ramp signals is -2 V. (The baseline level is
referenced to the output of U309B and controlled by Q302, Q303, and Q304 for the
A sweep and Q315, Q316, and Q317 for the
B sweep).
2. Check the Sweep End Comparators, U316, for
correct output. The sweep should end at a maximum of 2.5 V. Check the outputs (pin 15 for the
A Sweep and pin 2 for the B Sweep) for about
3.8 V (the middle of ECL transitions).
3. Place the oscilloscope in delay and delta delay
and check the Delay Time Comparators for correct outputs (DLY END 1 and DLY END 0).
4. Check U301 for correct switching and delay level
transfer. Vary the Delay Time and the Delta
Delay time and check for smooth signal change
at pins 12 and 13 of U301C. If not correct,
troubleshoot DAC system or front panel
controls.
5. Run diagnostics to check for Shift Register 1
(U302 and U303) failure.
6. Exercise S 1 and check switching of U307,
R
U308, U310, and U311.
Schematic Diagram 6-HORIZONTAL
AMPLIFIER
OUTPUT
1. Turn off the READOUT and check the ramps for
equal (but opposite) waveforms on each plate.
(Run MAKE FACTORY SETTINGS under the INTERNAL SETTINGS MENU in the SERVICE
MENU.)
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-7
Horizontal Display State Logic
DO NOT short the horizontal output leads together or to ground. This will cause the output amplifier FETs to fail.
2. The MOSFET output transistors (Q801 and Q802,
left plate; Q805 and Q806, right plate) run hot. If
either side is cold, it is defective.
3. If output is railed to one side or the other, check
U801A and the common-mode feedback. This
circuit is supposed to keep the outputs at about
70 V average to ground.
NOTE
Pins 12 and 13 of U802 may be shorted together to determine if the unbalance is before
or after the horizontal preamplifier (U802).
DO NOT short to ground.
4. Check the A RAMP and B RAMP input signals (A
Horizontal mode for A RAMP and B Horizontal
mode for B RAMP). They start at -2 V and ramp
up to about +2.5 V.
5. Check the R HORlZ input for correct waveform.
O
6. Check for the X AXIS input signal on pin 7 of
U802 in X-Y mode (a signal must be applied to
the CH 1 input).
7. Check at the junction of R855 and R854 (the
common-mode bias point of Q810 and Q809)
for 9.5 V.
8. Check at the junction of R846 and R852 (the
common-mode source voltage of Q802 and
Q805) for 15 V.
9. Check at the junction of R845 and R847 (the
common-mode collector voltage of emitter followers Q803 and Q807) for 24 V.
10. Check the HDO and HD1 signals to U802 (see
Table 6-7 for display states).
11. The horizontal preamplifier, U802, runs warm to
the touch, but not hot.
HDO
HD1
Display
0
0
Readout
0
1
A Sweep
1
0
B Sweep
1
1
X-Y
Schematic Diagram 7-Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE
ADJUST, AND CONTROL MUX
-
1. Turn off the Readout (READOUT control fully
CCW) and test the node between CR2703 and
C2711 for correct Z-Axis waveform. Vary INTEN
to check operation. (Readout signals add confusion to the waveforms.)
2. Check for correct auto-focus operation at the
junction of CR2715 and the collector of Q2712.
Circuit action is exactly opposite of the Z-Axis to
- .
obtain focus tracking.
3. Parts replaced in the CRT High Voltage circuit
and Z-Axis are safety controlled parts. Replacements need to be exact. The power supply is
capable of delivering more that 15 watts at high
voltages.
-
--'..
.
Schematic Diagram 8-MEASUREMENT
PROCESSOR
1. Check U2501, pin 57 for a RESET condition.
Processor will be in permanent reset condition if
RESET is high. Check that RESET goes high then
low again at power on.
2. Check SYS RESET at U2506C pin 8.
3. Check that U2502 pin 5 is low when RESET is
high. (This signal prevents random RAM writes
on power up and power down when the processor is being reset.)
4. Check the 8 MHz clock (CLK 8M) at U2501
pin 56.
8. Check address decoding. Using a data analyzer
or word recognizer probe, set up to recognize
the address that produces a selected enabling
strobe from the address decoding circuitry. Observe that the strobe is produced when the correct address is output by the Measurement
Processor. The easiest way to generate most
addresses during normal operation is to change
a front-panel setting. See Table 6-8 for the
addresses.
-
-
-
-.,
-
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-8
Measurement Processor 1 0 Memory Map
1
Address range (A19
Binary 4
-
w
-
- AO)
Signal name and
description
Signal
source
01 10
0000
0000
OXXX XXXX
LED CATH CLK -Latches cathode
data to Front-Panel LEDs.
U2501 pin 25
(Diagram 8)
01 10
0000
0000
1XXX XXXX
LED ANODE CLK-Latches anode
data to Front-Panel LEDs.
U2501 pin 27
(Diagram 8)
01 10
0000
0001
OXXX
RO BUF WR -Latches Readout
Processor control datas.
U2501 pin 28
(Diagram 8)
0110
0000
0001
1XXX XXXX
RO BUF RD-Enables Readout RAM
data onto bus DO-D7 (used for diagnostics only).
U2501 pin 29
(Diagram 8)
01 10
0000
0010
OXXX
XO
OO
DAC BUF WR-Latches
control data.
U2517 pin 15
(Diagram 8)
0110
0000
0010
OXXX
XOO1
DAC MSB CLK -Latches the most
significant byte of data to the D-to-A
Converter.
U2517 pin 14
(Diagram 8)
0110
0000
0010
OXXX XOlO
POT MUX CLK -Latches channel
selection code for pot multiplexer.
U2517 pin 13
(Diagram 8)
0110
0000
0010
OXXX XOlO
SNAP CLK -Selects whether control
of CH 1-CH 4 POSITION, TRACE SEP,
A INTEN, B INTEN, and READOUT are
controlled by front-panel pots or fixed
resistor dividers.
U2517 pin 12
(Diagram 8)
1oOX
XXXX XXXX XXXX X O
OO
MB CNTL W -Write enables ProR
cessor Interface circuitry (Diagram 4).
U2518 pin 15
(Diagram 8)
1OOX
0000
Sets BEAM FIND (U503 pin 7) high ON.
U503 pin 7
(Diagram 4)
lOOX
XXXX XXXX XXXX XOO1
SW BD SR LOAD -Loads column data
into switch board registers.
U2518 pin 14
(Diagram 8)
10OX
XXXX XXXX XXXX X010
SW BD SR SHIFT -Shifts data in
switch board registers to the SW
BD DATA signal line.
U2518 pin 13
(Diagram 8)
10OX
XXXX XXXX XXXX X011
SLlC W -Write to SLIC, U600
R
Diagram 4.
U2518 pin 12
(Diagram 8)
XXXX
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
DAC Processor
Maintenance-2246A Service
-
Table 6-8 (cont)
Measurement Processor 110 Memory Map
~b--
-
Address range (A19
Binary
- AO)
Signal name and
description
Signal
source
100X
XXXX XXXX XXXX XI00
FLlC W -Write to FLIC, U602
R
Diagram 4.
U2518 pin 11
(Diagram 8)
1O X
O
0001
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
S 0 CLK-Clock Shift Register 0.
R
U606F pin 12
(Diagram 4)
1O X
O
0010
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
S 1 CLK-Clock Shift Register 1.
R
U606B pin 4
(Diagram 4)
100X
001 1
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
Sets BEAM FIND (503 pin 7) low (OFF).
U503 pin 7
(Diagram 4)
10OX
0011
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
Sets MSEL (U602 pin 29) low (delta
or long delay).
U503 pin 13
(Diagram 4)
1OOX
0100
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
Sets MSEL (U602 pin 29) high
reference or short delay).
U503 pin 13
(Diagram 4)
1O X
O
0101
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
Sets S DATA signal line low.
R
U606C pin 6
(Diagram 4)
1O X
O
01 10
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
Sets S DATA signal line high.
R
U606C pin 6
(Diagram 4)
1OOX
01 11
XXXX XXXX X O
OO
Places S 2 in shift mode (U502 pin 10,
R
Diagram 4).
U2512 pin 5
(Diagram 8)
1OOX
1XXX XXXX XXXX X O
OO
A places S 2 in load mode (U502
R
pin 10, Diagram 4).
U2512 pin 5
(Diagram 8)
10OX
1111
TRIG CLK -Loads coupling data
to triggers.
U600 pin 19
(Diagram 4)
1010
xxxx xxxx xxxx
Chip enable for Measurement Processor
RAM (U2521 pin 20).
U2501 pin 36
(Diagram 8)
XXXX XXXX X011
XXXX
Schematic Diagram 9-READOUT SYSTEM
1. Run EXERCISE POTS (under the EXERCISER and
FRONT PANEL menus) and check the digitized
front panel pots for proper operation. The name
of the exercised pot is displayed in the readout
along with its current hexadecimal value. The
value range from at or near 00 to at or near FF
and the displayed value should change smoothly
as the pot is rotated. EXERCISE POTS always
displays the HORIZ POSITION pot when first
called.
2. Check Readout Request pulse (RO REQ, U2410
pin 14).
Maintenance-2246A
3. Check Readout Blanking signal (RO BLANK,
U2410 pin 16) .
4. Check activity of Readout Processor (U2400).
5. Check outputs of
Readout
DACs
respectively).
Vertical
(U2412
and Horizontal
and
U2413,
6. Check outputs of Vertical and Horizontal
Readout Mixers (U2416A and U2416B, respectively) and multiplexers (U2414 and U2415,
respectively) .
Schematic Diagram 10-SWITCH BOARD AND
INTERFACE
1. Run the EXERCISE SWITCHES exerciser and
check each of the front panel switches for correct operation. The circuit number of the latest
switch pressed is displayed in the readout.
2. Run the EXERCISE LEDS exerciser and check
that each of the front panel LEDS may be turned
on. The circuit number of the lighted LED is displayed in the readout.
Schematic Diagram 11-ADC, DAC SYSTEM and
12-DAC SUBSYSTEM
Service
when the power is turned on, then the
preregulator is ok and Q2214 is not shorted.
NOTE
If your version of the power supply board has
a jumper (W2201) in the drain lead of the
current source FET (Q2214), use the following procedure to turn off the Inverter:
Turn off the power and unplug the ac power
cord. Unsolder one lead of the jumper and
pull it from the circuit board.
b. Short from pin 1 to pin 3 of T2205 (secondary base drive to the switching transistors).
If the +44 V comes up then Q2209 and
Q2210 are not shorted.
3. Usually, a failure is a short of Q2210, Q2209, or
Q2214 immediately followed by the shorting of
the remaining switching transistors in the
inverter.
4. A dc power supply capable of supplying +45 V at
2 amperes may be used to drive the inverter circuit. If that operates correctly, then the problem
is either in or before the preregulator circuit.
1. Run EXERCISE DACS (under EXERCISER, PROC
BOARD, and A TO D menus) and probe the demultiplexed outputs of U2303 (Diagram 11) ,
U2604 and U2605 (Diagram 12) and each of the
sample-and-hold circuits for proper operation.
5. A +15 V supply may be used to supply charging
voltage to Q2204. If the supply to U2201 pin 10
comes up, then Q2204 and Q2211 are ok.
2. Run EXERCISE PORTS (under EXERCISER, PROC
BOARD, and A TO D menus) and trace the signal
path of any problems with the A-to-D
Converter.
TROUBLESHOOTING MEASUREMENT
ERRORS
Schematic Diagram 13-POWER
SUPPLY
1. Check +DC at the output of the rectifier bridge
for approximately ( V a c ~ ~ s1-41
X
4).
2. If power supply is in the chirp mode (continually
restarting and shutting down), excessive loading
of the +44 V supply is probable.
a. With the power off, short across VR2207 to
shut off the Inverter. If the +44 V comes up
When certain measurement malfunctions occur, the
symptoms usually indicate the circuit components
that may be causing the problems. Read the following text to become familiar with the terms used in
describing a measurement failure problem and the
setup conditions needed to determine the symptoms. Then use Table 6-9 to check for measurement malfunction symptoms and probable causes.
1. Verify all the following conditions and read the
definitions before attempting to use Table 6-9
for locating the source of measurement-error
problems.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Conditions:
Type 4 volts measurements are:
All vertical channels can be successfully displayed and positioned independently.
GATED +PEAK, GATED -PEAK, and GATED
PK-PK
The A and B sweeps both free-run and trigger
successfully.
Both A and B Trigger COUPLING and SOURCE
operate properly.
\
Measurement value accuracy is the accuracy of
number displayed in top line of readout on the
crt.
.-
Normal-appearing readout text and cursors can
be displayed.
Measurement cursor accuracy is the accuracy
of the match between cursor position and the
measurement value.
Definition of terms:
--
Type 1 volts measurements are:
I+ VOLTS4 and
/h VOLTS+
Type 2 volts measurements are:
Type 3 volts measurements are:
+PEAK, -PEAK,
Trigger value accuracy is the accuracy of the
number displayed on the trigger level cursor.
Trigger cursor accuracy is the accuracy of the
match between cursor position the value displayed on the cursor.
A TL is the A trigger level measurement system.
B TL is the B trigger level measurement system.
PK-PK
Table 6-9
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
I
Symptoms
VERTICAL INPUTS (schematic Diagram 1)
Ground relay stuck in
signal position
Gross value problems for Types 1-4 volts measurements.
Gross value problems A TL and B TL.
Test: Use " EXERCISE VOLT REF. " Check that the ground relay is in
ground position.
Defective X10, X100,
X I , X2, X5 Relays
and Attenuators
Gross value problems for affected channel for Types 1-4 volts
measurements.
Gross value problems in A TL and B TL.
Test: Check channel accuracy at all VOLTSIDIV settings.
ZERO HYST line stuck
low (U 173-1 3)
In Type 4 measurements, minor value problems for +PK cursors
when gating interval is at negative end of waveform, and for
-PK cursors when gating interval is at positive end of waveform.
Test: Turn off all measurements; use the A Horizontal Mode. U431
pin 28 should be -3.0 volts.
Switch to ALT Horizontal Mode. U431 pin 28 should be -0.7 volts.
-.
-
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
Symptoms
RO FREEZE line stuck
high (U173-11)
Gross cursor problems for Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross cursor problems for A TL and B TL.
Gross valve problems with Type 1 measurements.
Test: Monitor during CH 1ICH 2 VOLTMETER menu SELF CAL. Signal
line should reach TTL low.
VERTICAL PREAMP AND OUTPUT AMPLIFIER (schematic Diagram 2)
Preamp Trig Outputs
Bad
Gross value problems for Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements for
affected channel.
Test: Check B triggering on the affected channel.
Preamp Vert Outputs or
Enable Bad
Gross cursor problems for Types 2, 3, and 4 measurement for
affected channel.
Gross value accuracy problems for Type 1 measurements for
affected channel.
Test: With only the affected channel selected for display, check
that channel is shown and check gain accuracy.
VERT COMP output
(U702:7)
Gross value problems with Type 1 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with A TL and B TL.
Test: Lift W1101 and ground the base of Q703. VERT COMP
should be toggling between TTL high and TTL low either with readout
on or with two channels on (one at screen top, one at screen bottom).
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM (schematic Diagram 3)
A Trig Source
Multiplexer (U421A)
" SEARCH FAILED AT 5 ~ s for " SELF CAL " on time measurements
"
unless stuck in LINE.
Minor to gross value problems (depending on which source is
stuck) with the A TL measurement.
Test: Set A Trigger SOURCE to VERT.
For each channel, display only that channel and check that the
signal applied to the displayed channel appears at pin 25 of
U421.
-
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
A Trig Cplg Multiplexer
(U421B)
Symptoms
.
May get " SEARCH FAILED at . . " for " SELF CALMon time
measurements if coupling is stuck in HF REF coupling.
Minor to gross value problems with the A TL if coupling is
stuck in any position except DC.
-
Test: Switch between all A Trigger COUPLING settings with a 10 kHz
square wave connected to CH 1 input; use CH 1 for the A Trigger
SOURCE and set A Trigger SLOPE to
,
Check signal at U421 pin 25 (square edge for DC or NOISE REJ;
rounded corner for HF REJ; spiked corner for LF REJ; signal
center shifts to ground for AC).
A Trig line stuck high
or low (U421C-10)
--
" SEARCH FAILED AT 5 ps for SELF CAL " on time measurements.
Gross value problems with A TL.
Test: Set the A Trigger mode to NORM. Check that the sweep can
be triggered on the Channel 1 signal.
B Trig Source Multiplexer
(U431A)
Minor to gross value problems (depending on which bit is stuck)
with types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
1
Minor to gross value problems with B TL. " SEARCH RETURNED
BAD VALUE AT . . . " on time measurements (unless stuck in LINE
SOURCE).
Test: Set B Trigger Source to VERT. For each channel, display
only that channel and check that the signal applied to the displayed
channel appears at U431 pin 25.
B Trig Cplg Multiplexer
(U431B)
Minor to gross value problems with Types 3 and 4 measurements
(depending on which coupling bit is stuck).
Gross value problems with Type 2 measurements (unless stuck
in measurement mode input).
Minor to gross value problems with B TL.
B Trig BW Limit
circuitry
Minor value problems with Type 3 and 4 measurements if stuck in
limited BW position.
Minor value problems with Type 2 measurements if stuck in full
BW position.
BW FULL B line
(U1103-14)
See notes on " B Trig BW limiter. "
Test: Should be CMOS low when SCOPE BW button is lit.
Should be CMOS high when SCOPE BW button is not lit; use ALT
Horizontal Mode with B CPLG set to DC.
-
-
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
Symptoms
B Trig
(U431C)
Gross value problems with Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross value problems with B TL.
" SEARCH RETURNED BAD VALUE AT
B TV TRIG EN line stuck
high (U1103-4)
. . . " on time measurements.
Gross value problems with Type 2 measurements.
Test: Run CH 11CH 2 VOLTMETER DC measurement and check that
the B TV TRIG EN signal is at TTL low.
VERT COMP EN line stuck
high (U1103-7)
See notes on " VERT COMP " (schematic Diagram 2).
Test: VERT COMP EN should be at CMOS high in normal use. Run
" SELF CALMfrom the CH 11CH 2 VOLTMETER menu and check
that VERT COMP EN goes to a CMOS low.
. . . " from
LINEITIME BASE CAL
signal Mux stuck in
LINE position (U1106A)
" RETURNED BAD SEARCH VALUE AT
time measurements.
DC Average circuit
(U1101B
Gross value problems for Type 2 measurements (minor value
problems with low frequencies if RC values in the filter are incorrect).
" SELF CAL " for
Test: Run " EXERCISE TIME REF " diagnostic and check the output of
U1106A (pin 1) for changing signal.
Test: Display only CH 1, run DC measurement. Apply to 50 Hz sinewave signal with a DC offset to the CH 1 input. Check that only the
dc value appears at output of the DC Average circuit.
DISPLAY AND TRIGGER LOGIC AND PROCESSOR INTERFACE
(schematic Diagram 4)
MB RETURN line
(U502-12)
See notes on VERT COMP (schematic Diagram 2).
MP DLY SEL line
(U503-13 or
MP DLY SEL Interface
(U602)
" SEARCH RETURNED BAD VALUE AT 5 ps " on time measurements.
Test: Turn all measurements off. Use the A Horizontal mode. The
MP DLY SEL signal should be at a TTL high.
S DATA line
R
(U606C-6)
Effects are the same as those caused by malfunctions in S 0 and
R
S 1.
R
Test: The A Sweep rate changes when SECIDIV knob is rotated in the
A Horizontal Display Mode.
S 0 CLK line
R
(U606F-12)
Effects are the same as those caused by malfunctions in S 0.
R
Test: Channel 1 sensitivity changes when CH 1 VOLTSIDIV knob is
rotated.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
SR 1 CLK line
(U606B-4)
Symptoms
I
Effects same as those caused by malfunctions in SR 1.
Test: Check that the A Sweep rate changes when SECIDIV knob
is rotated in the A Horizontal Display Mode.
SR 1 CLK TTL line
(U501-13)
Effects same as those caused by malfunctions in auxiliary section of
SR 1 (U1103, Diagram 3)
.
Test: HF noise in trace reduces when SCOPE BW button is lit and
increases when not lit.
Processor-to-DisplaySequencer Interface
(U600)
TDO Level Shifter
(U603, Q603, Q602)
I
Gross effects on all voltage and time measurements.
Test: Run DIAGNOSE and note results of SLlC CONTROL REG
test; Set the A Trigger Mode to NORM; check that the ATS 0-2
signal lines (pins 31-33) change when the A Trigger SOURCE is
changed. Check that no " LOW REP RATE " warning occurs with
Type 4 measurements.
Same as Processor-to-Display-Sequencer
Interface problem.
Test: Using NORM mode for both triggers, VERT source for both
triggers, and CH 1 only displayed; apply a four-division, squarewave signal to the CH 1 input.
In the A Horizontal mode, check that the Trig'd LED light goes
off and the sweep stops running with the Trigger LEVEL control
at full CW rotation.
Change to AUTO mode for A trigger; check that sweep free runs
with the Trigger LEVEL control at full CW rotation.
Check that the Trig'd LED can be lit and the sweep can be triggered when the Trigger Level is set to within the signal limits.
Keep the A Sweep triggered for the next check.
In B Horizontal mode, check that the Trig'd LED goes off, and
the sweep stops running with the Trigger LEVEL control set at full
CW rotation.
Check that the Trig'd LED can be lit and the sweep made to trigger when Trigger Level is set to within the signal limits.
Change to RUNS AFTER Mode for the B Trigger. Check that the
B Sweep free runs.
.
-
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
Symptoms
DLY SEL line stuck low
(U602-32)
" SEARCH RETURNED BAD VALUE AT 5 p s " for " SELF CAL " on time
measurements.
Test: Use settings given in previous test. Set the first delay zone to
the start of the sweep with le control. Check that the second delay
zone can be positioned over the entire sweep length with the
+I control.
DLY SEL line stuck
high (U602-32)
" SEARCH RETURNED BAD VALUE AT 0.1 ms " for " SELF CALMon
time measurements.
Test: Use settings given in previous test. Set the first delay zone to
the start of the sweep with It control. Check that the second delay
zone can be positioned over the entire sweep length with the
+I control.
ATS 0-2 (U600,
pins 31-33) A Trig
Source Multiplexer
See notes on " A Trig Source Multiplexer " (schematic Diagram 4).
BTS 0-2 (U600,
pins 27-29) B Trig
Source Multiplexer
See notes on " B Trig Source Multiplexer " (schematic Diagram 3).
B SLOPE line stuck
high (U600-26)
Gross problems with +PEAK value, Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross value problems with the B TL measurement.
TRIG CLK line
(U600-19)
See notes on " A Trig Cplg Multiplexer " and " B Trig Cplg Multiplexer "
(U421 and U431, Diagram 3).
A AND B SWEEP AND DELAY COMPARATORS (schematic Diagram 5)
DLY END 0 line stuck
low or high (U315-15)
" SEARCH RETURNED BAD VALUE AT 5 k s " for " SELF CAL " on time
measurements.
Test: Run the Ic TIME4 measurement in ALT Horizontal Mode with
the A SECIDIV at 1 msldiv and the B SECIDIV at 0.1 msldiv.
Check that the first delay zone can be positioned over the length
of sweep using the It control.
RefIDelta Delay Muxes
stuck (U301A & C)
See notes on DLY SEL (schematic Diagram 4).
A Sweep Control circuit
(U302 & U303)
" SEARCH RETURNED BAD VALUE AT (affected SECIDIV setting) "
for " SELF CAL " on time measurements.
Test: Use " EXERCISE VOLT REF " diagnostic.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
VOLT CAL 0-2
(U302 & U303)
Symptoms
Gross value problems with Types 1, 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross value and cursor problems with A TL and B TL.
Test: Use " EXERCISE VOLT REF " diagnostic.
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJUST, AND CONTROL MUX (schematic Diagram 7)
VOLT CAL line
(U93 1-3)
Gross value problems with types 1, 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross value and cursor problems with A TL and B TL.
Test: Use " EXERCISE VOLT REF " diagnostic.
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR (schematic Diagram 8)
TB CAL line
(U2501-22)
" SEARCH FAILED AT SWEEP SPEED
measurements.
. . . "
in " SELF CAL " on time
Test: Use " EXERCISE TIME REF " diagnostic.
Check that TB CAL signal is correct and signal path is intact to U421A
pin 4 (Diagram 3) through U1106A.
SLlC W
R
(U2518-12)
See notes on " Processor-to-Display-Sequencer Interface "
(schematic Diagram 4).
SLlC RD
(U2503C-8)
See notes on " Processor-to-Display-Sequencer Interface "
(schematic Diagram 4).
FLlC W
R
(U2518-11)
See notes and tests on " TDO Level Shifter " (schematic
Diagram 4).
MB DATA
(U2515-11)
See notes on " Processor-to-SLIC Interface " (schematic
Diagram 4).
Field & Mixer Control
Latch or Readout Position
Mixer stuck (U2411,
U2414, U2415)
Gross cursor problems with Types 1, 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with A TL and B TL.
Test: Run k VOLTS4 CURSOR Measurement mode with
only CH 1 displayed.
Check that cursors move the CH 1 position control.
Check that I+ cursor moves with It control and 4 cursor
moves with +I control.
Check that top and bottom line of readout do not move
with any position control.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
Table 6-9, (cont)
Measurement Error Troubleshooting Hints
Circuit
Problem
Symptoms
ADC, DAC SYSTEM (schematic Diagram 11)
A TRIG LVL
(U2304C-8)
See notes for " A TRIG " (schematic Diagram 3).
Test: Select A trigger, set A Trig mode to NORM.
Check that A TRIG LVL can be set to any value from -2.5 to +2.5
volts using the Trigger LEVEL control.
B REF TRIG LVL
(U2304B-7)
See notes for " B TRIG " (hints for schematic Diagram 3).
Test: Select B trigger, set B Trig mode to NORM, and select B
Horizontal mode.
Check that B REF TRIG LVL can be set to any value from -2.5 to +2.5
volts with Trigger LEVEL pot.
REF DLY
(U2305C-8)
" RETURNED BAD SEARCH VALUE AT
time measurements.
. . . " for
" SELF CAL " on
Test: Run ItTIME+I measurement in ALT Horizontal mode; A at
1 ms/div, B at 0.1 ms/div.
Check that first delay zone can be positioned over length of
sweep with the I+ control.
DELTA DELAY
(U2305B-7)
" RETURNED BAD SEARCH VALUE AT
on time measurements.
. . . " for
" SELF CAL " on
Test: Use the preceding REF DELAY settings, and set first delay zone
to start of sweep with I+ control.
Check that second delay zone can be positioned over length of sweep
with +I control.
REF CURSOR
(U2304D-14)
Gross value problems with Type 1 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with A TL and B TL.
Test: Run I+ VOLTS4 CURSOR Measurement Mode.
Check that I+ cursor can be positioned 215 divisions around the
trace ground.
DELTA CURSOR
(U2304A-1)
Gross value problems with Type 1 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with Types 2, 3, and 4 measurements.
Gross cursor problems with A TL and B TL.
Test: Run I+ VOLTS4 CURSOR Measurement Mode.
Check that +I cursor can be positioned ?15 divisions around the
trace ground level.
Maintenance-2246A
Service
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
1 WARNING
INTRODUCTION
Corrective maintenance consists of component replacement and instrument repair. This part of the
manual describes special techniques and procedures that are needed to replace components in this
instrument. If it is necessary to ship your instrument
to a Tektronix Service Center for repair or service,
refer to the Repackaging for Shipment information in
this section.
)
Portions of the power supply are floating at
the ac line voltage level and pose a shock
hazard if not isolated from ground.
6. Use an isolation transformer to supply power to
the 2246A if you troubleshoot in power supply
with power applied to the instrument.
OBTAINING REPLACEMENT PARTS
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
To reduce the possibility of personal injury or instrument damage, observe the following precautions.
1. Disconnect the instrument from the ac-power
source before removing or installing components.
2. Verify that the line-rectifier filter capacitors are
discharged prior to performing any servicing.
3. Use care not to interconnect instrument grounds
which may be at different potentials (cross
grounding).
4. When soldering on circuit boards or small insulated wires, use only a 15-watt, pencil-type soldering iron.
Electrical and mechanical replacement parts can be
obtained through your local Tektronix Field Office or
representative. However, many of the standard
electronic components may usually be obtained
from a local commercial source. Before purchasing
or ordering a part from a source other than
Tektronix, Inc., please check the Replaceable Electrical Parts list for the proper value, rating, tolerance, and description.
-
NOTE
The physical size and shape of a component
may affect instrument performance, particularly at high frequencies. Always use directreplacement components, unless it is known
that a substitute will not degrade instrument
performance. Parts in the crt high-voltage
and Z-Axis circuits are safety-controlledUSE EXACT REPLACEMENTS in these circuits.
Special Parts
Do not exceed 9 in-I of torque when tightening the 6-32 screws.
5. Use care not to overtighten screws into chassis.
Threads that have been formed directly into aluminum components can be stripped out. If this
occurs, use a 6-32 nut to secure the screw.
In addition to the standard electronic components,
some special parts are used in the 2246A. These
components are manufactured or selected by
Tektronix, Inc. to meet specific performance requirements, or are manufactured for Tektronix, Inc.
in accordance with our specifications. The various
manufacturers can be identified by referring to the
Cross Index-Manufacturer's Code number to Manufacturer at the beginning of the Replaceable Electrical Parts list (Section 8). Most of the mechanical
parts for in this instrument are manufactured by
Tektronix, Inc. Order all special parts directly from
your local Tektronix Field Office or representative.
-
-
Maintenance-2246A
Ordering Parts
When ordering replacement parts from Tektronix,
Inc., be sure to include all of the following
information:
1. lnstrument type (include modification or option
numbers) .
2. lnstrument serial number.
Service
tightly packed between the carton and the
instrument.
5. Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler
or strapping tape.
6. Mark the address of the Tektronix Service Center and also your own return address on the
shipping carton.
3. A description of the part (if electrical, include its
full circuit component number).
MAINTENANCE AIDS
4. Tektronix part number.
REPACKAGING FOR SHIPMENT
It is recommended that the original carton and packing material be saved in the event it is necessary for
the instrument to be reshipped using a commercial
transport carrier. If the original materials are unfit or
not available, then repackage the instrument using
the following procedure.
1. Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton
having a test strength of at least 275 pounds and
with an inside dimension at least six inches
greater than the instrument dimensions.
2. If instrument is being shipped to a Tektronix
Service Center, enclose the following information: show the owner's address, name and
phone number of a contact person, type and serial number of the instrument, reason for returning, and a complete description of the service
required.
3. Completely wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent to protect the outside
finish and prevent entry of foreign materials into
the instrument.
4. Cushion the instrument on all sides using three
inches of padding material or urethane foam,
The maintenance aids listed in Table 6-10 include
items required for performing most of the maintenance procedures in this instrument. Equivalent
products may be substituted for the examples given,
provided their characteristics are similar.
INTERCONNECTIONS
Several types of mating connectors are used for the
interconnecting cable pins. The following information
provides the replacement procedures for the various
type connectors.
End-Lead Pin Connectors
Pin connectors used to connect the wires to the interconnect pins are factory assembled. They consist
of machine-inserted pin connectors mounted in
plastic holders. If the connectors are faulty, the entire wire assembly should be replaced.
Ribbon-Cable Connectors
The etch-ribbon cables have the connector pins
crimped onto the wire runs. If the connectors are
defective, the entire ribbon cable assembly must be
replaced.
Maintenance-2246A Service
Table 6-10
Maintenance Aids
Description
Specification
Usage
Example
Soldering Iron
15 to 25 W.
General soldering
and unsoldering.
Antex Precision
Model C.
Tom Screwdriver Tips
and Handle
Tom tips: #T7, #T9,
#T10, #T15, and #T20.
Assembly and
disassembly .
Tektronix Part Numbers:
#T7
003-1 293-00
#T9
003-0965-00
#T10 003-081 4-00
#T15 003-0966-00
#T20 003-0866-00
Handle: 114 inch hex
drive.
Handles:
8 112 in. 003-0293-00
3 112 in. 003-0445-00
Nutdrivers
1I 4 inch, 5116 inch,
1I2 inch, and 9116 inch.
Assembly and
disassembly.
Xcelite #8, #lo, #16
and #18.
Open-end Wrench
9/16 inch and 112 inch.
Channel Input and
Ext Trig BNC
Connectors
Tektronix Part Numbers:
Assembly and
disassernbly
Allen wrenches.
Long-nose Pliers
Component removal
and replacement.
Diamalloy Model
LN55-3.
Diagonal Cutters
Component removal
and replacement.
Diamalloy Model
M554-3.
Hex Wrenches
0.050 inch, 1/16 inch.
.
9116) 003-0502-00.
112) 003-0822-00
Vacuum Solder
Extractor.
No Static Charge
Retention.
Unsoldering static
sensitive devices and
components on multilayer boards.
Pace Model PC-10.
Contact Cleaner
No-Noise. @
Switch and pot
cleaning.
Tektronix Part Number
006-0442-02.
Pin-Replacement Kit
Replace circuit board
connector pins.
Tektronix Part Number
040-0542-01.
IC-removal Tool
Removing DIP IC
packages.
Augat TI 14-1.
Cleaning attenuator
and front-panel
assemblies.
2-lsopropanol.
Isolation Transformer
Isolate the instrument from the ac
power source for
safety.
Tektronix Part Number
006-5953-00.
1X Probe
Power supply ripple
check.
TEKTRONIX P6101A
lsopropyl Alcohol
Reagent grade.
Maintenance-2246A Service
LITHIUM BATTERY (B2501)
The lithium battery used to supply backup power to
the System RAM should last for at least 3 years.
However, when it becomes necessary to replace the
battery, be sure to observe the following general
warning about disposal of lithium batteries.
1 WARNING I
To avoid personal injury, observe proper procedures for handling and disposal of lithium
batteries. Improper handling may cause fire,
explosion, or severe burns. Do not recharge,
crush, disassemble, heat the battery above
2 12 F ( 1 00 OC), incinerate, or expose contents of the battery to water. Dispose of battery in accordance with local, state, and national regulations.
After replacing a power transistor, check that
the collector is not shorted to the chassis before applying power to the instrument.
To remove socketed dual-in-line packaged (DIP) integrated circuits, pull slowly and evenly on both
ends of the device. Avoid disengaging one end of
the integrated circuit from the socket before the
other, since this may damage the pins.
To remove a soldered DIP IC when it is going to be
replaced, clip all the leads of the device and remove
the leads from the circuit board one at a time. If the
device must be removed intact for possible reinstallation, do not heat adjacent conductors consecutively. Apply heat to pins at alternate sides and ends
of the IC as solder is removed. Allow a moment for
the circuit board to cool before proceeding to the
next pin.
SOLDERING TECHNIQUES
Typically, small quantities (less than 20) can
be safely disposed of with ordinary garbage
in a sanitary landfill. Larger quantities must
be sent by surface transport to a hazardous
waste disposal facility. The batteries should
be individually packaged to prevent shorting
and packed in a sturdy container that is
clearly labeled " Lithium Batteries- DO NOT
OPEN. "
TRANSISTORS AND INTEGRATED
CIRCUITS
Transistors and integrated circuits should not be replaced unless they are actually defective. If one is
removed from its socket or unsoldered from the circuit board during routine maintenance, return it to its
original board location. Unnecessary replacement or
transposing of semiconductor devices may affect
the adjustment of the instrument. When a semiconductor is replaced, check the performance of any
circuit that may be affected.
Any replacement component should be of the original type or a direct replacement. Bend component
leads to fit their circuit board holes, and cut the
leads to the same length as the original component.
See Figure 9-2 in the Diagrams section for the semiconductor lead-configurations.
The reliability and accuracy of this instrument can be
maintained only if proper soldering techniques are
used to remove or replace parts. General soldering
techniques that apply to maintenance of any precision electronic equipment should be used when
working on this instrument.
1 WARNING
)
To avoid an electric-shock hazard, observe
the following precautions before attempting
any soldering: turn the instrument off, disconnect it from the ac power source, and wait
at least three minutes for the line-rectifier filter capacitors to discharge.
Use rosin-core wire solder containing 63% tin and
37% lead. Contact your local Tektronix Field Office
or representative to obtain the names of approved
solder types.
When soldering on circuits boards or small insulated
wires, use only a 15-watt, pencil-type soldering
iron. A higher wattage soldering iron may cause
etched circuit conductors to separate from the
board base material and melt the insulation on small
wires. Always keep the soldering-iron tip properly
tinned to ensure the best heat transfer from the tip
to the solder joint. Apply only enough solder to make
a firm joint. After soldering, clean the area around
Maintenance-2246A Service
the solder connection with an approved flux-removing solvent (such as isopropyl alcohol) and allow it to
air dry.
Only an experienced maintenance person,
proficient in the use of vacuum-type desoldering equipment should attempt repair of
any circuit board in this instrument. Many integrated circuits are static sensitive and may
be damaged by solder extractors that generate static charges. Perform work involving
static-sensitive devices only at a sta tic-free
work station while wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap. Use only an antistatic vacuum-type solder extractor approved by a
Tektronix Service Center.
Excessive heat can cause the etched circuit
conductors to separate from the circuit
board. Never allow the solder extractor tip to
remain at one place on the board for more
than three seconds. Solder wick, springactuated or squeeze-bulb solder suckers,
and heat blocks (for desoldering multipin
components) must not be used. Damage
caused by poor soldering techniques can void
the instrument warranty.
3. Bend the leads of the replacement component
to fit the holes in the circuit board. If the component is replaced while the board is installed in
the instrument, cut the leads so they protrude
only a small amount through the reverse side of
the circuit board. Excess lead length may cause
shorting to other conductive parts.
4. Insert the leads into the holes of the board so
that the replacement component is positioned
the same as the original component. Most components should be firmly seated against the circuit board.
Attempts to unsolder, remove, and resolder
leads from the component side of a circuit
board may cause damage to the reverse side
of the circuit board. The following techniques
should be used to replace a component on a
circuit board:
1. Touch the vacuum desoldering tool tip to the
lead at the solder connection. Never place the
tip directly on the board; doing so may damage
the board.
5. Touch the soldering iron tip to the connection
and apply enough solder to make a firm solder
joint. Do not move the component while the solder hardens.
6. Cut off any excess lead protruding through the
circuit board (if not clipped to the correct length
in step 3).
7. Clean the area around the solder connection
with an approved flux-removing solvent. Be
careful not to remove any of the printed information from the circuit board.
NOTE
Some components are difficult to remove
from the circuit board due to a bend placed in
the component leads during machine insertion. To make removal of machine-inserted
components easier, straighten the component leads on the reverse side of the circuit
board.
When removing a multipin component, especially an IC, do not heat adjacent pins consecutively. Apply heat to the pins at alternate sides
and ends of the IC as solder is removed. Allow a
moment for the circuit board to cool before proceeding to the next pin.
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTIONS
1 WARNING
)
To avoid electric shock, disconnect the instrument from the power input source before
removing or replacing any component or
assembly.
The exploded view drawings in Replaceable Mechanical Parts list may be helpful during removal and
Maintenance-2246A
reinstallation of individual components or subassemblies. Circuit board and component locations
are shown in Diagrams section.
Read these instructions before attempting to remove
or install any components.
Service
7. Install the rear-panel. Secure it with four #15
Torx-head screws.
8. Install a Torx-head screw in the right side of the
cabinet.
Crt Removal and Replacement
Cabinet
1 WARNING
)
To remove the cabinet:
1. Unplug the power cord from its rear-panel connector.
--
2. Place the instrument face down on a clean, flat
surface.
3. Remove the Torx-head screw from the right side
near the rear of the cabinet.
4. Remove the plastic rear cover, held with four
Torx-head screws.
5. Slide the cabinet housing up and off the
instrument.
Use care when handling a crt. Breaking the
crt can cause high-velocity scattering of
glass fragments. Protective clothing and
safety glasses or safety face shield should be
worn. Avoid striking the crt on any object
which might cause it to crack or implode.
When storing a crt, either place it in a protective carton or set it face down on a smooth
surface in a protected location with a soft mat
under faceplate.
To remove the crt:
1 WARNING
1 WARNING
)
Potentially dangerous voltages exist at several points throughout this instrument. If it is
operated with the cabinet removed, do not
touch exposed connections or components.
Before replacing parts or cleaning, disconnect the ac-power source from the instrument and check that the line-rectifier filter capacitors have discharged. Also, check the low
voltages at the Power-SupplylMain-Board
interface connector (J1024). If any of the
supply-voltage or line-voltage filter capacitors remain charged for more that 20 seconds, discharge them to ground through a
I k l l , 5- or 6-watt resistor.
)
To avoid electrical shock, carefully discharge
the crt anode lead directly to the metal chassis. To avoid static-discharge damage to
electronic components, do not allow the anode lead to discharge into the adjacent
circuifry .
1. Disconnect the high-voltage anode lead. Pull the
anode-lead coupler apart slowly and carefully.
DO NOT touch the exposed connector pin as it is
withdrawn from coupler socket. Discharge the
exposed anode pin to the metal chassis only. A
hole is provided in the left side of the power supply chassis for the purpose of holding the end of
the lead to prevent a recharge while it is
disconnected.
2. Unplug the trace rotation cable (P27) from the
Main board.
To install the cabinet:
-
6. Carefully slide the cabinet housing over the rear
of the instrument. Be careful not to snag any of
the folded ribbon cables. Make sure the cabinet
housing slides between the plastic front-panel
housing and the instrument chassis.
3. Unplug the two vertical and the two horizontal
deflection leads from the crt neck. Grasp each
lead connector with long-nosed pliers and pull it
straight away from the crt neck pins. Be careful
not to bend the neck pins.
4. Remove the crt implosion shield and bezel frame
(held with two screws at the lower side).
Maintenance-2246A
Service
5. Place your left hand on crt neck shield and your
right hand over crt face. Move the crt assembly
forward to unplug the crt from its socket and
carefully withdraw it from the instrument while
ensuring that the crt anode lead clears all obstructions. Do not hold the crt assembly by the
shield only.
6. If it is necessary remove the metal shield from
crt. Carefully slide the shield to rear of the crt.
Be careful not to damage the neck pins.
To install the crt:
7. Install the metal shield over the neck of the crt.
Make sure that the plastic grommet is in place
over the front of the shield. Align the neck pins
with the shield holes.
8. Check that the graticule scale-illumination light
pipe is in place at bottom front of crt opening.
Also make sure that the four crt corner cushions
are in place in the crt opening of the subpanel.
9. Carefully guide the crt, anode lead, and trace
rotation-cable into the instrument. Line up the crt
base pins with base socket. Make sure that the
ground clip above the rear of the crt shield goes
outside of the shield. Hold in on the rear of the
base socket with one hand and push on the face
of the crt with the other hand t6 c o m ~ l e t e'eat
l~
the crt base pins. If the crt will not go in all the
way, check for bent pins. DO NOT FORCE this
connection!
10. connect the trace rotation cable (P27) to the
Main board.
11. Connect the vertical and horizontal deflection
leads to the crt neck pins. The horizontal deflection leads (going to bottom pins) should be
crossed.
NOTE
Do not disconnect the ends of the delay line
from board as indicated in the Main board
removal procedure. It is not necessary for replacing the input BNC connectors.
2. Using a 9116 open-end wrench, remove and replace the defective BNC connector(s).
3. Replace the Main board (see Main board installation procedure).
A15 DAC Subsystem Board
To remove the DAC Subsystem board:
1. Unplug ribbon cables J2604 and J2601 (on Processor board).
2. Remove the four Torx-head attaching screws.
3 a Remove the DAC Subsystem board from the
instrument.
To install the Dac Subsystem board:
-
--.
1. Position the board to align the screw holes and
install the four Torx-head attaching screws (two,
518 in. screws in the center and one, 7116 in.
screw at each corner).
2. plug in ribbon cables J2604 and J2601. Press
the ribbon cable pins firmly into the connector
holes.
A1 6 Processor Board
12. Connect the high-voltage anode lead.
13. Install the crt implosion shield and frame using
two 718 in. Torx-head screws.
14. Check that the graticule illumination light bulbs
are in place in the light pipe at the bottom of the
crt.
BNC Connectors (Vertical Inputs)
To remove the Processor board:
1. Unplug ribbon cables J2501, J18pin, J17pin, and
J25pin from the the processor board. To aid the
release of the ribbon-cable pins from connector, slide a thin-shafted, flat-bladed screwdriver
between the ribbon cable (near the connector)
and the etched-circuit board and pry gently
upward.
2. Remove the six Torx-head attaching screws
(one at each corner and two in the middle).
To replace BNC Connectors:
1. Remove the Main board (see Main board removal procedure).
3. Unplug J2501 (17-pin) from the Potentiometer
board and lift the Processor board out of the
instrument.
-
Maintenance-2246A Service
4. Disconnect the connectors from J2208 and
J2225 and the two wires from ac-line filter.
(Note the color stripes on the wires to the line
filter for reinstallation.)
To install the Processor board:
5. Pull the HV connector through the grommet in
the power supply housing.
Do not exceed 9 in-lb of torque when fightening the 6-32 screws that hold the circuit
board to the chassis. Damage to the circuit
board and/or screw threads may result if the
screws are overtightened.
3. Position the board to align the screw holes and
install the six Torx-head attaching screws (two,
5/8 in. screws in the center and one, 7/16 in.
screw at each corner).
5. Plug in ribbon cables J20pinl J17pin, J18pinl
J1 7pin, and J25pin. Press the ribbon cable pins
firmly into the connector holes.
To remove the Power Supply board:
1. Remove the Processor board (see Processor
board removal procedure).
1
WARNING
The POWER switch must be in the OFF position to safely remove the shaft from the shaft
of the switch in the following step. Pulling the
shaft off with the POWER switch on may
damage the switch shaft and spring
assembly.
7. Remove the power-switch-extension
shaft.
Snap the extension shaft off the transitional pivot
assembly, then pull the shaft off the switch.
A18 Power Supply Board
,
6. Set the POWER switch in the OFF (out) position.
)
To avoid electrical shock, carefully discharge
the crt anode lead directly to the metal chassis. To avoid stafic-discharge damage to
electronic components, do not allow the anode lead to discharge into the adjacent
circuitry
.
2. Disconnect the high-voltage anode lead. Pull the
anode-lead coupler apart slowly and carefully.
DO NOT touch the exposed connector pin as it is
withdrawn from coupler socket. Discharge the
exposed anode pin to the metal chassis only. A
hole is provided in the left side of the power supply chassis for the purpose of holding the end of
the lead to prevent a recharge while it is
disconnected.
3. Remove the eight screws holding the power supply housing shield and remove the shield.
8. Remove the six screws that hold down the Power
Supply board.
9. Unplug the Power Supply board from the Main
board interface connector. Grasp the two heat
sinks near the center of the board, one with
each hand, and pull up to disconnect the interface connection.
10. Lift the front of Power Supply board and withdraw the board from the power-supply housing.
To install the Power Supply board:
11. Place the Power Supply board into power-supply
housing. First, guide the fuse holder into the
rear panel, then lower the front end of the board
until the board interface pins touch the interface
connector.
12. Plug the interface pins into the interface connector. With the Power Supply board against the
rear panel, pull up on the large electrolytic capacitor (near the center of the board) with one
hand and push down on HV multiplier module (at
front of board) with the other hand. This action
tends to align the pins with the connector. At the
same time you will have to move the board
around slightly so that the pins will easily slide
into the connector holes. DO NOT FORCE this
connection, otherwise you may bend the pins.
Maintenance-2246A Service
Switch board). Use long-nose pliers as necessary to reach the fasteners.
Do not exceed 9 in-16 of torque when tightening the 6-32 screws that hold the circuit
board to the chassis. Damage fo the circuit
board or screw threads may result if the
screws are overtightened.
13. Secure the circuit board with six screws.
14. lnstall the power-switch-extension shaft. Snap
the shaft onto the switch, then onto the transitional pivot assembly.
15. Insert the high-voltage lead through the powersupply-housing
grommet
and snap the
connector shell into the clamp at the front of the
power-supply housing.
16. Connect the leads to J2208, J2225, and the acline filter (observe the color coding noted when
the filter leads were disconnected).
17. Install the power-supply-housing
eight screws.
shield with
5. Unclip the high-voltage connector from the front
of the power-supply housing. Remove the plastic retaining clip from the housing (it is pressed
in). Move the high-voltage connector to the top
of the power-supply housing to make room for
removing the PotentiorneterlSwitch board.
6. Move the PotentiorneterlSwitch board assembly
back away from the front panel and lift it out of
the instrument.
To separate the A12 Potentiometer board from the
Switch board:
7. Pull out on the three snap fasteners that hold the
Potentiometer board to the Switch board.
8. Separate the Potentiometer board from the
Switch board.
9. If necessary, unplug the VAR control shafts from
their potentiometers.
To install the Potentiometer board:
18. Connect the crt anode lead to the HV connector.
10. Set the three snap fasteners on the board in the
released (out) position.
19. lnstall the Processor board (see Processor
board installation instructions).
11. Plug the three VAR control shafts onto the VAR
potentiometers.
PotentiorneterlSwitch board Assembly
12. Set the Potentiometer board in place over the
Switch board and press in on the snap
fasteners.
To remove
assembly :
the
PotentiorneterlSwitch
board
1. Unplug ribbon-cable connector P2501 from the
Processor board and unplug ribbon-cable connector P2105 from the Potentiometer board.
2. Remove the CH 1 and CH 2 VOLTSIDIV VAR
knobs and the SECIDIV VAR knob. (A 1116 in.
hexagonal wrench is needed for the set screws).
3. Pull out all the remaining front-panel knobs to
the right of the crt. Grasp the knobs firmly and
pull straight out from the front panel.
4. Pull out on the four captive plastic snap fasteners on the back of the switch board that hold the
Switch board assembly to the front panel (not
those that hold the Potentiometer board to the
To install the PotentiorneterlSwitch board assembly:
13. Set the four snap fasteners (on the Switch
board) in the released (out) position.
14. Guide the PotentiorneterlSwitch board assembly
into place behind the front panel and press in on
the snap fasteners.
15. lnstall the control knobs. Push knobs in while rotating slightly until they align with the shaft and
snap in place. The two knobs without a positionindicator rib go on the Ic and 4 control shafts.
16. lnstall the three VAR control knobs, using 1116
in. allen wrench. Make sure that VAR controls
are in the detent (fully CW) position, then rotate
the knobs so that the VAR label is horizontal before tightening the set screws.
-
Maintenance-2246A Service
17. Install the high-voltage connector clip to the
front side of the power-supply housing and snap
the connector shell into it.
18. Connect ribbon cable J2105 to the Potentiometer board and P2501 to the Processor board. Position the connector pins in the socket holes and
push them fully into place.
--
A1 0 Main Board
NOTE
This procedure is intended for the complete
replacement of the Main board. All repairs
and component replacements (except BNC
connectors) can be done without completely
removing the Main board. When replacing
BNC connectors, use the BNC Connector replacement procedure previously given in this
section.
To remove the Main board:
'
1. Remove the crt (see crt removal procedure).
2. Pull out and remove the five crt-display control
knobs.
3. Remove the Processor board (see Processor
board removal procedure).
4.Remove the shield from the power-supply housing (held with eight screws).
5. Unplug the three-wire cable from J2208 on the
Power Supply board. Pull the cable and connector through the plastic grommet.
6. Release the crt socket from its holder on the
rear panel. First pull off clear plastic socket retainer, then push the socket out the rear enough
to turn it sideways and push it through to the
inside of the instrument.
7. Remove the PotentiometerISwitch board assembly (see PotentiometerISwitch board assembly
removal procedure).
8. Remove the top and bottom attenuator shields.
The bottom shield is held with 5 screws and the
top shield is held with one remaining screw. See
Figure 6-4.
NOTE
If the Main board is being removed to replace
or repair a component (such as a BNC connector), it is not necessary to disconnect the
delay line from the board as indicated in the
following step.
9. Unsolder the main delay-line wires from both
sides of board (see Figures 6-4 and 6-5).
10. Unclip the delay line from both sides of the
board and from the two clips at the lower side of
the rear panel. Remove the two clips from the
rear panel.
11. Remove the ten screws that hold the Main board
to the chassis. Back out the three screws going
through the rear panel enough to allow removal
of Main board. See Figure 6-4.
12. Pull the three ribbon cables through to the bottom of the instrument.
13. Lift the back of main board enough to disconnect interface connection between Main board
and Power Supply board.
14. Slide the Main board back away from front panel
to completely remove the board from the
instrument.
To install the Main board:
15. Guide the BNC connectors at front of the Main
board into the holes in the front panel. Make
sure that you guide the PROBE ADJUST jack into
the front panel as well as the BNC connectors.
16. Lower the rear of Main board while guiding the
interface connector onto the power supply interface pins. DO NOT FORCE this connection; the
pins may bend. Make sure that the grommet
holding the crt and power supply wires is in
place between the board and the rear panel.
Do not exceed 9 in-lb of torque when tightening the 6-32 screws that hold the circuit
board to the chassis. Damage to the circuit
board or screw threads may result if the
screws are overtightened.
17. Secure the Main board with ten screws. See Figure 6-4.
18. Solder both ends of delay line to Main board. Be
sure to observe the polarity of the leads. See
Maintenance-2246A Service
Figures 6-4 and 6-5. Press the ends of delay
line into the clips on board.
21. Install the shield on the power-supply housing
(eight screws).
-
-
the rear panel and snap the delay line into them.
22. Install the inside attenUatOr shield (secure with
one screw). Then install the outside attenuator
shield (secure with five screws).
20. Connect the three-wire cable from the crtsocket cable assembly to J2208 on the Power
Supply board.
23. Install the PotentiorneterlSwitch board assembly
(see PotentiometerISwitch board assembly installation procedure).
19, Snap the two plastic clips into the lower edge of
1
-0
1
A-
I
I
0
0
0
PLASTIC
SHIELD
FLAT
6081-18
Figure 6-4. Main board removal.
-
Maintenance-2246A Service
24. lnstall the Processor board.
25. Dress the two ribbon cables to the top of the
instrument. Connect them to the Processor and
Potentiometer boards.
26. lnstall the crt socket. Turn the socket sideways
and push it through the crt-socket holder in the
rear panel.
27. Install the crt (see crt installation procedure).
Figure 6-5. Delay-line connections to top of
Main board.
Section 7-2246A
Service
OPTIONS
INTRODUCTION
This section contains a general description of the instrument options and accessories available at the
time of publication of this manual. Additional information about instrument options and other accessories can be obtained either by consulting the current
Tektronix Product Catalog or by contacting your local
Tektronix Field Office or representative.
INTERNATIONAL POWER CORDS
Instruments are shipped with the detachable powercord option ordered by the customer. Descriptive information about the international power-cord options is provided in Section 2 " Preparation for Use. "
The following list describes the power cords available for the 2246A.
Standard
North American
120 V, 60 Hz, 74 in.
Option A1
Universal Euro 220 V,
50 Hz, 2.5 m
Option A2
UK 240 V, 50 Hz,
2.5 m
Option A3
Australian 240 V,
50 Hz, 2.5 m
Option A4
North American
220 V, 50 Hz, 2.5 m
Option A5
Switzerland 220 V,
50 Hz, 2.5 m
OPTION 1R RACKMOUNTED INSTRUMENT
When the 2246A Portable Oscilloscope is ordered
with Option 1R, it is shipped in a configuration that
permits easy installation into a 19-inch-wide equipment rack. Also, and optional rackmounting kit may
be ordered to convert the standard 2246A to a rackmounted instrument. Installation instructions for
rackmounting are provided in the documentation
supplied with the .rackmounting kit and the 1
R
Option.
REPLACEABLE
ELECTRICAL PARTS
PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION
Replacement parts are available from or through your local
Tektronlx. Inc. Field Office or representative.
Changes to Tektronlx instruments are sometimes made to
accommodate improved components as they become available,
and to give you the benefit of the latest clrcuit improvements
developed In our engineering department. It is therefore important. when orderlng parts, to include the following information in
your order. Part number. instrument type or number, serial
number, and modlficatlon number if applicable.
If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new or
Improved part, your local Tektronix. Inc. Field Office or representatlve wlll contact you concerning any change In part number.
Change ~nformation,i f any.
manual.
IS
Only the c~rcuitnumber will appear on the diagrams and
circuit board illustrations. Each diagram and circuit board
illustration is clearly marked with the assembly number.
Assembly numbers are also marked on the mechanical exploded
views located in the Mechanical Parts List. The component
number is obtained by adding the ummMy number prefix to the
circuit number.
The Electrical Parts List is div~ded and arranged by
assemblies in numerical sequence (e.g., assembly A1 with tts
subassemblies and parts, precedes amembly A2 with ~ t s
subassemblies and parts)
Chassis-mounted parts have no aswmbly number prefix
and are located at the end of the Electrical Parts List.
located at the rear of this
TEKTRONIX PART NO. (column two of the
Electrical Parts List)
LIST OF ASSEMBLIES
A 1st of assembltes can be found at the beglnnlng of the
Electrtcal Parts Llst. The assembltes are lrstedrn numerical order
When thecomplete component number of a part IS known, thls llst
will tdentlfy the assembly In whlch the part IS located
lndtcates part number to be used when orderrng replacement part from Tektrontx.
CROSS INDEX-MFR. CODE NUMBER TO
MANUFACTURER
SERIAL/MODEL NO. (columns three and four
of the Electrical Parts Ust)
The Mfr. Code Number to Manufacturer index for the
Electrical Pans Ltst 1 located immediately after this page. The
s
codes, names and addresses of manufacCross Index prov~des
turers of components listed in the Electrical Parts List.
Column three (3) indicates the serial number at which the
part was first used. Column four (4) indicates theserial number at
whlch the part was removed. No w i a l number entered ~ndicates
s
part 1 good for all serial numbers.
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbrevtat~ons
conform to Amerlcan Nattonal Standard Y 1.1
COMPONENT NUMBER (column one of the
Electrical Parts List)
A numbertng method has been used to tdentify assemblies,
subassembltes and parts. Examples of thls numbering method
and typlcal expanstons are illustrated by the following:
Example a.
-
NAME 81 DESCRIPTION (column five of the
Electrical Parts List)
In the Parts List, an Item Name is separated from the
descr~ption a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an ltem
by
Name may sometimes appear as incomplete. For further ltem
Name identification, the U.S. Federal Cataloging Handbook H6-1
can be utilized where possible.
component number
A23R 1234
A23
Assembly number
R1234
Circuit number
Read: Resistor 1234 of Assembly 23
Example b.
Indlcates the code number of the actual manufacturer of the
part. (Code to name and address cross reference can be found
immediately after this page.)
component number
4
A23A2 R1234
Assembly
number
MFR. CODE (column six of the Electrical Parts
List)
4
R1234
Read: Resistor 1234 of Subassembly 2 of AssemMy 23
MFR. PART NUMBER (column seven of the
Electrical Parts List)
Indicates actual manufacturers part number
Rep1aceabl e E l ectrical Parts
-
22464
CROSS INDEX
- MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER
Cade
MaInJfaCturer
Adbess
City. State. Zip
AMP INC
2800 FULLING MILL
PO BOX 3608
1201 SOUTH 2ND ST
13500 N CENTRAL EXP
PO BOX 655012
ROUTE 202
WRRISBURG PA 17105
W GENESEE ST
AUBURN NY 13021
1328 WINTERS AVE
PO BOX 1028
19M AVE SOUTH
P 0 BOX 867
5005 E MCDOWELL RD
GRAND JUNCTION
MYRTLE BEACH SC 29577
1600 WINCHESTER RD
11901 MDISON AVE
LIBERlYVI LLE I 60048-1267
L
CLEVELAND OH 44101
600 W JOHN ST
HICKSVILLE NY 11802
1500 SPACE PARK DR
SANTA CLARA CA 95050
10400 RIDGEVIEW CT
CUPERTINO CAW CA 95014
NELA PK
CLEVELAND OH 44112
RICHARDS AVE
W A L K CT 06852
BERNE I N 46711-9506
ALLEN-BRADLEY CO
TEXAS INSTRWNTS INC
SEMICONDUCTOR GROUP
RCA CORP
SOLID STATE DIVISION
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO
SEMI-CONDUCTOR PRODUCTS DEPT
CAPCO INC
AVX CERAMICS DIV OF AVX CORP
MOTOROLA INC
SEMIcONDUCTOR PROOUCTS SECTOR
C m IK
o
R
UNION CARBIDE CORP
MATERIALS SYSTEMS DIV
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP
GOVERNMENT SYSTEMS DIV
PRECISION MONOLITHICS INC
SUB OF BOORNS INC
FAIRCHI LD SEMICONWCTOR CORP
NORTH AMERICAN SALES
SUB OF SCHLUMBERGER LTD MS 118
GENERAL ELECTRIC CO
MINIATURE LAMP PROMICTS DEPT
BURNDY CORP
CTS CORP
BERNE DIV
THICK FILM PRODUCTS GROUP
MICROSEMI C W - SCOTTSDALE
AMPHENOL CADRE DIV BUNKER RAMO CORP
I T T SEMICONDUCTORS DIV
MICROSEMI CROP
IllSEMICONDIXTORS
A DIVISION OF INTERNATIONAL
TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH CORP
AMETEK INC
RODAN DIV
MINNESOTA MINING AND MFG CO
TEXTOOL PRODUCTS DEPT
ELECTRONIC PRODUCT DIV
MEPCO/CENTRALAB
A NORTH PMERICAN PHILIPS CO
KYOCERA INTERNATIONAL I
NC
CORNING GLASS WORKS
SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC
NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP
IllS C W INC
BOURNS INC
TRIMPOT DIV
INTEL CORP
HEWLETT-PACKARD CO
OPTOELECTRONICS DIV
MURATA ERIE NORTH AMERICA INC
GEORGIA OPERATIONS
CENTRE ENGINEERING INC
S T m N E R ELECTRONICS INC
SPRAGUE-GOODMAN ELECTRONICS INC
MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORP OF N r n I c A
406 PARR ROAD
8700 E THOMAS RD
P 0 BOX 1390
2830 S FAIRVIEW ST
500 BROADWAY
CO 81502
PHOENIX AZ 85008-4229
SCOTTSDALE AZ 85252
LOS GATOS CA
WEST PALM BEACH FL
SANTA ANA CA 92704-5948
lAWRMCE M4 01841-3002
P 0 BOX 168
2905 BLUE STAR ST
ANAHEIM CA 92806-2510
1410 E PIONEER DR
IRVING TX 75061-7847
P 0 BOX 760
MINERAL WELLS TX 76067-0760
11620 SORRENTO VALLEY RD
PO BOS 81543 PLANT NO 1
550 HIGH ST
2100 EARLYWOOD Dl?
PO BOX 547
2900 SEMICONDUCTOR DR
8081 WALLACE RD
1200 COLUMBIA AVE
SAN DIEGO CA 92121
BRADFORD PA 16701-3737
FRANKLIN I N 46131
SANTA CLARA CA 95051-0606
EDEN PRAIRIE MN 55344-2224
RIVERSIDE CA 92507-2114
SANTA CLARA CA 95051
3065 BOWERS AVE
370 W TRIMBLE RD
SAN JOSE CA 95131
2200 LAKE PARK DR
SMYRNA GA 30080
2820 E COLLEGE AVE
6135 AIRWAYS BLVD
PO BOX 21947
134 FULTON AVE
STATE COLLEGE PA 16801-7515
c H 9 n m m TN 3742i-zg70
ONE PANASONIC WAY
PO BOX 1501
GARDEN CITY PARK NY 11040-5352
SECAUCUS NJ 07094-2917
Replaceable Electrical Parts
CROSS INDEX
MmtJf-
- MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFACTURER
Cade
lkihss
City. State. Zip
1 2 HARBOR PARK DR
12920 NE 125TH WAY
5334 STERLING CENTER DRIVE
927 E STATE PKY
9 2 HAYDEN AVE
PORT WHINGTON NY 11550
KIRKLAND, W 98034-7716
A
WESTLAKE VILLAGE CA 91361
S C W U R G I L 60195-4526
LEXINGTON MA 02173-7929
TDK ELECTRONICS CORP
DE YOUNG MUFACTURING INC
WESTLAKE CAPACITORS INC
NICHICON /AMERICA/ CORP
S P W E ELECTRIC CO
WRLD HEADQUARTERS
R-OW CORP
16931 MILLIKEN AVE
A R W T CORP
250 SHEFFIEU) ST
BUSSMANN
114 OLD STATE RD
DIV OF COOPER INDUSTRIES INC
PO BOX 14460
MEPCOICEKTRALAB INC
MJY 2 0 W
P 0 BOX 858
A NORTH AMERICAN PHILIPS CO
TRW INC
4 0 1 N BROAD ST
TRW ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
IRC FIXED RESISTORS PHILADELPHIA DIV
14150 SW KARL BRAUM DR
TEKRONIX INC
PO BOX 500 MS 53-111
2064 12TH AVE
DALE ELECTRONICS INC
PO BOX 609
SFE TECHNOLEI ES
1501 FIRST ST
LWILLASTRASSE 23-25
ROEDERSTEIN E SPUIALFABRIK FUER
KONDENSATOREN GMBN
1128 LEXINGTON AVE
UNITED CHEMI-CON INC
TOPTRON CORP
TWO
18 AIRPORT BLVD
MITEL SEMICONDUCTOR INC
ONE PANASONIC WAY
PANASONI COMPANY
C
DIV OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORP
19678 8TH ST E
WORLD PRODUCTS INC
PO OBX 517
NEC ELECTRONICS USA INC
401 ELLIS ST
ELECTRON DIV
PO OBX 7241
MUSASHI WRKS OF HITACHI LTD
1450 JOSUIHON-CK)
rnIRA-SHI
TOSHIBA AMERICA INC
2692 DW AVE
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS DIV
BUSINESS SECTOR
M4RCON AMERICA CORP
7 0 0 LAWEHR RD
GFS MANUFACTURING INC
6 PROGRESS DR
BOX 517
2-268 SOBUDAI ZAWA
TOKYO COSMOS ELECTRIC CO LTD
4 5 SALEM ST
TEKA PROWCTS INC
WI LHELM WESTERMAN
PO BOX 2345
AUGUSTA-ANLAGE 56
A R W T CORP
10400 N TANTAU AVE
8333 S.W. CIRRUS DR.
MARSHALL INDUSTRIES
TDK CORPORATION OF AMERICA
2254 N. FIRST ST.
IRVINE CA 92713
MOUFlTAINSIDE NJ 07092-2303
ST LOUIS MO 63178
FORT DODGE I A 50501
PHILADELPHIA PA 19108-1001
BEAVERTON OR 97077
COLUMBUS NE 68601-3632
SAN FERNANDO CA 91340-2707
8300 LANDSHUT GEFWANY
ROCHESTER NY 14606
JAPAN
BROMONT QUE CAN JOE 1LO
SECAUCUS N 07094
J
MOUNTAIN VIEW CA 94039
TOKYO JAPAN
TUSTIN CA 92680
KANAGWJA 228 JAPAN
PROVIDENCE R I 02907
6800 MQNNMIM 1
WEST G E W Y
CUPERTINO CA 95014-0708
BEAVERTON, OR 97005
SAN JOSE, CA. 95131
- 2246A
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Canponent No.
Tektrunix
Part No.
A8
A10
A12
A14
A15
A16
670-9783-01
671-0387-01
670-9402-01
670-9399-01
671-0247-00
671-0314-00
- 2246A
Serial/Assetbly No.
Effective
Dsamt
Nrme & Description
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT
B ASSY :CRT CONTROL
D
B ASSY:WIN
D
B ASSY :POTENTIOMETER
D
B ASSY :SWITCH
D
B ASSY:DAC SUBSYS
O
B ASSY :PROCESSOR
D
CIRCUIT B ASSY :LV WWER SUPPLY ,A18
D
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Canpanent No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
A
8
A8P8
A8R901
A8R902
A8R903
A8R905
670-9783-01
131-4038-00
311-2344-00
311-2344-00
311-2344-00
311-2344-00
Serial/Assably No.
Effktie
I$cart
tlane & Descriptim
CIKUIT B ASSY :CRT CONTROL
D
C0NN, RCPT, ELEC: HlR, 1 X 8, RTANG, 0.1 SPACING
RES,VAR,NONW:CKTBD,4.7KOHi1,20%,1.25W
RES, VAR, N0NGIW:CKT BDf4.7K W,20 " k, 1.25W
RES,VAR,W:CKTBDf4.7KM,2~,l.25W
RES,VAR,NONGlrl:CKTBDf4.7KW,20%,1.2SW
Mr.
Code
80009
00779
71590
71580
71590
7190
m. PartNo.
670-9783-01
640453-8
MI7140001
W7140001
BA17140001
BA17140001
- 2246A
Rep1aceabl e Electrical Parts
Telctmnix
carammt No.
Part No.
A10
A1OAT11 7
A10AT127
AlOClOl
A10C102
A1E l 0 3
671-0387-01
307-2135-00
307-2135-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
2 8 1-0909-00
- 2246A
Serial/~lyNo.
effect ill^ Dswnt
b & Description
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MAIN
RES NTWK, FXD, F I :ATTENUATOR D I P PKG
RES N M , FXD, F I :ATTENUATOR D I P PKG
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,5OV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20 " 4,50V
M.
r
Crrde
W. PartWo.
80009
671-0387-01
80009 307-2135-00
80009
54583
54583
54583
307-2135-00
MAlW7RlCP23M-T
MAlZX7RlCP23M-T
M412X7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
DI:O.O22UF,2VA,50V
DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
D I :0.022UF,20%, 50V
DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
DI:0.022UF.20%,50V
54583
54583
54583
54583
54583
54583
MA12X7RlH223M-T
MA1W7RlH223M-T
MAlZX7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlW23M-T
MAlW7RlW23M-T
MA1W7RlH223M-T
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,VAR,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
D I :0.022UF,20 " A,50W
DI:O.O22UF,20%,5OV
DI:0.6-3PF,400V
DI : 0 . 0 2 2 ~ , 2 0 % , 5 0 ~
D I :O.O22UF,20 " ?,500V
DI:O.O22UF,20%.50V
80009
283-0414-01
M412X7RlH223M-T
313613-140
MAlW7RlH223M-T
283-0414-01
MAlW7RlH223M-T
CAP,VAR,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD, CER
CAP,FXD,CER
DI:0.6-3PF,40W
DI:lOOOPF,20%,100V
D I :1000PF,20%, 100V
DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
D I :20PF, %, 500V
D1:62PF,%,lOW
CAP,VAR,PLASTIC:2.5 - 20PF,10W
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :15PF, 10%, 100V
CAP VAR,CER.DI :2.8-IOPF
CAP, FXD,CER D I : 15PF, 10%.100V
54583
52763
54583
80009
54583
52763
04222
04222
54583
96733
04222
313613-140
MAlOlC102MAA
MAlOlClOimAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
R3900
MAlOlA620GAA
52769
GZL20000
54583
54583
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MA106A150KAA
281-0315-00
MA106A150KAA
04222
80009
04222
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 10UF,20%, 5 W
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UF.20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:20PF,%,500V
CAP,FXD,CER D I : 6 2 P F , % , l W
CAP,VAR,CER,DI :3.3-20PF
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20?,50V
T W 2 0 KMC50VBlORM5XllF
54583 MAlW7RlH223M-T
96733 R3900
04222 MAlOlA620GAA
52769 GKU 18000
54583 MAlW7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,5OV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:15PF,10 " A,100V
CAP VAR,CER,DI :2.8-IOPF
CAP,FXD,CER DI:15PF,lO%,lW
CAP,FXD, ELCTLT: 10UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
04222
80009
04222
TKO020
54583
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MA106AlW
281-0315-00
MA106AlW
KMC50VBlORMY(llF
MAlW7RlH223M-T
CAP, FXD,CER D I :4700PF, 10 " A,100V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :220UF, 20 " A. 10V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :220UF, ZVA, 1OV
CAP, FXD. CER D I :15PF, 10%. 100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I : 15PF, 1 %100V
0
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 10UF,20 " A, 50V
04222
55680
55680
04222
04222
TKO020
MA201C472KAA
UVXlC221MPAlTA
UVXlC221MPAlTA
MA106A150KAA
MA106AlW
KMCSOVBlORMSXllF
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :lOUF, 20%. 50V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: lOUF, 20%. 50V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: lOUF, 20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,2VA,5OV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF.2VA,50V
TKO020 KMCWBlORMSXllF
TKO020 KMC50VBlCRM5XllF
TKO020 KMC50VB10RM5XllF
54583 MAlW7RlH223M-T
54583 MAlW7RlH223M-T
54583 MAlZX7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
04222
DI:22PF,10 " 4,100V
D I :0.022W ,20%, 50V
DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
0 1 :0.022W,20%,50V
54583
54583
54583
54583
MAlOlA220KAA
MA1W7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
-
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Carponart No.
AlOC215
A10C216
A10C217
A10C218
A10C219
AlOCZO
Tektmnix
Part No.
290-0974-01
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0775-01
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
Serial/Assd1y No.
Effective
Ibcart
nfr.
Code
- 2246A
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:lOUF,20%,5
W
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF,20%,
SOV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER D :O.lUF,20%,50V
I
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.0221iFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
TKO020
54583
54583
04222
54583
54583
CIFr. P a r t b .
KMCSOWlORMSXllF
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
SAlOSE104MAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI:22PFf10%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,SOV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:10UF.20%,5V
0
CAP,FXD,CER DI :O.
lUF,20%,50V
04222
54583
54583
54583
TKO020
04222
MAlOlA220KAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
KMC5WBlORM5XllF
SA105ElW
CAP,FXD,CER D :0.022UFf20%,50V
I
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,S0V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:IOUF,20% 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.1UFf20%,50V
54583
54583
54583
54583
TK0020
04222
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlfQ23M-T
KMC50VBlORMY(llF
SA105E104MAA
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,5OV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%,S0V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF.20%,5OV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20kfS0V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:IOUF,20%,5W
CAP,FXD,CER D :0.1UF,20%,50V
I
54583
54583
54583
54583
TKO020
04222
MlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlZX7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
KMC5WBlORMY(llF
SA105E104MAA
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF, 50V
ZU%,
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:lOUF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER D :O.022UF,20%,
I
50V
CAP,FXD,CER D :1000PF,209 & 100V
I
CAP,FXD,CER D :51PF,l%,
I
100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:33 PF,5%,50V
54583
TKO020
54583
04222
04222
04222
MA1W7RlH223M-T
KMC50VBl~SXllF
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlOlClO2HA4
MAlOlA510GAA
GC105A33tA.l
CAP,VAR,PLASTIC:3.2-32PF,lOOV
CAP,VAR,CER,DI
:1.5-4.OPF
CAP,FXD,CER DI :91PFf5%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER 01 :0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF, 50V
20%,
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20A,SOV
52769
52769
04222
54583
54583
54583
GZL 32000
GKU MOO0
MClOlA910J
WlW7RlH223M-T
MQTZURlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,SOV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :1000PF,20k,lOOV
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:lUF,10%,35V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:IUF,10%,35V
54583
54583
04222
05397
54583
05397
MATW7RlH223M-T
MAlWRlH223M-T
MA101C102MAA
T3228105K035AS
MAlW7RlH223M-T
T3228105K035AS
05397
8009
T3228105K035AS
295-0198-00
54583
54583
54583
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
04222
54583
54583
52769
04222
54583
MAlOlA5106AA
MA1W7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
GKU 25000
MQTOlA5loGAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
Wane & Descriptian
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:lUF,1ffkf35V
CAP SET,MATCHED: 10.WF, 1.5%,25V/
(I),
(l)O.lUF,
1.5%,35V/(1)0.0099UF,1.5?~,50V
(LOCATIONSA,B,C)
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF,20%,
50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :51PF,
1%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER D :0.022Wf20%,
I
5W
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,2Vk,50V
CAP,VAR,CER,DI :3-8-25PF
CAP,FXD,CER D :51PF,1%,IOOV
I
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
Replaceable Electrical Parts
(hummt No.
A10C320
A10C321
A10C326
A10C329
A10C330
A10C337
Tektrmix
Part Mo.
281-0909-00
281-0798-00
281-0909-00
281-0297-00
281-0799-00
281-0909-00
-
2246A
Serial/Assably No.
Effective
lSne & Description
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
CAP.FXD,CER D I :51PF, 1%, 100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP, VAR, PLASTIC :3.2-32PF, lOOV
CAP,FXD,CER D I :62PF,2%,100V
CAP, FXD, CER D I :0.022UF. Zm, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
w. Part k.
K41W7R1H223M-T
MAlOlA5106AA
WW7RlH223M-T
GZL 32000
MAlOlA620GAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
D I :0.022W,20%,50V
D I :0. 022UF,2m, 50V
D I :0.022UF,20%, 5OW
D I :O.OlUF, 10%,1WV
D I :270PF,5%,50V
D I :430PF,5%.100V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: lUF, 10%.35V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:680 PF,10%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :430PF,Yk, 100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :330PF,20%, 100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :100PF,5%, 100V
CAP, FXD,ELCTLT: lUF, 103/,,35V
CAP,FXD,CER D I : 1000PF,20%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.OlUF. 10%. 100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:270PF,5%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :430PF,Vk,100V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: lUF, 10%,35V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:680 PF,10%,5W
CAP,R(D,CER D I :430PF,S%,lW
CAP,FXD,CER D I :0.047UF,20%,50V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: lUF, 1PA,35V
CAP, FXD, CER D I :1000PF. 20%. 100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UF,20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
D I :680 PF,10%,50V
DI:lOOPF,Yk,100V
D I :lOOPF,Yk, 100V
D I :100PF,5%,100V
D I :100PF,5%, 100V
DI:100PF,5%,100V
MA105C651KAA
MAlOlAlOlJAA
MAlOlAlOlJAA
MAlOlAlOlJAA
MAlOlAlOlJAA
MA1O l A l0 1JAA
MAlOlAlOlJAA
GC105A33OJ
GC105A33(11
GC105A33(11
GC105A33A3
MA1W7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
D I :33 PF,5%,50V
D I :0.022UF,20%,50V
DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
DI:O.O22W,20%,50V
D I :100PF,5%, 100V
DI:100PF,5%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
D I :O. 022UF,20%, 5OV
DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
D I :5.6PF,+/-0.5PF,lOOV
DI:5.6PF,+/-0.5PF.lOOV
GClOW3OJ
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MA1W7RlH223M-T
WOlAlOlJAA
MAlOlAlOlJAA
Replaceable Electrical Parts
CaAwlent No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
AlOC613
AlOC701
A10C702
AlOC703
A10C704
AlOC705
281-0909-00
2 8 1-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
283-0057-00
Serial/~ly
No.
Effective
Dscant
Nae & Ogcriptim
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%.50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf2(Pk,50V
CAP,FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,+80-20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD, CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
D I :4.7PFf+/-0.5PFf100V
D1:51PFf1%,100V
D I :0. 022UF, 20%, 50V
DI:27PF,10%,50V
DI:27PF,10kf50V
DI:O.lUf,+80-20%,200V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.1UFf+80-20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :15000PFf20%,200V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20 " kf50V
CAP,FXD.CER DI:0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,VAR, PLASTIC:0.25-1 .5PFf600V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:lOOPF,%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O. lUF,+80-20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :150O0PFf20%, 200V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%,50V
CAP,VAR, PLASTIC:0.25-1 .5PFf600V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UFI 20%, 50V
CAP. FXD, ELCTLT :100UF, 20%, lOVAC
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.1UFf+80-20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :100PF,%, 100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.O22UFf20%,50V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :lOUF, 20%, 5 W
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :lOUF, 20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP, FXD,MTLZD:0.O22UFf10%,63V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :lOUF, 20%, 50V
CAP, FXD,ELCTLT :lOUF, 20%, 50V
A10C1003
AlOC1004
A10C1005
AlOC1006
AlOCllOl
AlOC1102
290-0974-01
2 8 1-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
290-0183-00
- 2246A
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 1W,20%, SOV
CAP,FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP.FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20 " k,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf2Wk,50V
CAP, FXD,ELCTLT: lUF, 10%,35V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: lUF, 10 " /0,35V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :lOUF, 20%, 5W
CAP,FXD,CER DI:680 PFf10 " A.50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:l00PFf5%,l00V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:62PFf2%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER D I :62PF,2%. 1MW
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :IOUF, 20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf 20%, 50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O. 022UF,20k,50V
04222
04222
54583
51642
51642
04222
MAlOlA4R7M
MA101A510GAA
MA1W7RlH223M-T
ADVISE
ADVISE
SR306E104ZAA
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Carpa#nt No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
AlK.2705
AlOC2706
AlOC2707
A 1OC2708
A10C2709
AlOC2710
281-0771-00
281-0893-00
2 8 1-0893-00
283-0057-00
283-0057-00
283-0057-00
- 2246A
Serial/Asdly No.
Effective
Dscont
Naae & Description
CAP. FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
D I :2200PF,20%,200V
D I :4.7PF,+/-O.SPF,IOOV
D I :4.7PF,+/-0.5PF,lOOV
DI:O.lUF,+80-2096.200V
D I :O. 1UF,+80-20%,200V
D I :O. lUF,+80-2PA,200V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:O.OlUF,20%,4KV
CAP, FXD, PLASTIC: 1200PF, 10%,4000V
CAP, FXD, CER D I :2200PF, 20%, 200V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP, FXD, CER D I :2200PF. 20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O,lUF,+80-20%,200V
CAP, FXD,MTLZD:O.OlUF,20%,4KV
CAP, FXD, PLASTIC:1200PF,10%,4000V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :2200PF, 20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022W,20%,W
CAP, FXD,MTLZD: 0.01UF,2m,4KV
CAP, FXD,MTLZD:O.OlUF,20%,4KV
CAP, FXD,CER D I :22PF, 10%, 100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,+80-20%,200V
CAP, FXD,CER 01:0.022UF,20%, 50V
CAP, FXD,CER D1 :O. 1UF,+80-20%,200V
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,40V,20W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI :SW,SI,40V,200M,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150M4,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,3OV,150MA,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,3OV,1501rC9,3OV,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA,00-41
SEMICOND DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA,DD-41
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,l50MA,3W,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,40V,2OW,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,40V,2001rCA,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI :SW,SI,30V,1501w19,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,3OV,150M4,3W,~35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,S1,175V,O.lA,DD-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW.SI,175V,O.lA,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI :SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DD-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,15@4,3OV,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI :SW,SI ,30V,150MQ,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150M9,30V,DO-35
DVC,DI:RECT,S1,400V,lA
DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
DVC,DI :SW,SI ,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150HA,30V,DO-35
DVC,DI :SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
WC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
DVC, D I :RECT, S I,
400V, 1A
DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
SEMICOND DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
DELAY LINE, ELEC:
LAMP, INCAND:14V,8OM4,73E,WEDGE BASE
LAMP, INCAND:14VV80MA,73E,WEDGE BASE
Mfr. Part No.
M4106E222MAA
MlOlA4R7DAA
MAlOlA4R7DAA
SR306E104ZAA
SR306E104ZAA
SR306E104ZAA
Replaceable Electrical Parts
CaAponent No.
Tektronix
P r No.
at
A10DS903
AlODS2701
AlODS2702
AlODS2703
AlODS2704
A 1O J l l
150-0146-00
150-0035-00
150-0035-00
150-0035-00
150-0035-00
131-3731-00
Serial/Ass & ly No.
Effaztiw
ascart
hJsm? & DescriDtim
LAMP, ItCAND:l4V,80MA,73E,UEffiE BASE
LAMP,GLOW:9W M4Xf0.3MA,AID-T,WIRE LD
LAMP,GLOW:9W MAXfO.3MA,AID-T,WIRE LD
LAMPfGLOW:9W MAXf0.3MA,A1D-T,WIRE LD
LAMPfGLOW:90V W,0.3MAfAID-T,WIRE LD
CONN ,RCPT ,ELEC:BNC ,MALE
CONN ,RCPT ,ELEC :BNC, MALE
CONN ,RCPT, ELEC :BNC ,MALE
CONN ,RCPT ,ELEC:BNC ,MALE
CONN ,RCPT ,ELEC:HEADER, RTANG, 2 POS ,0.1 SP
CONN, RCPT, ELEC: HEADER, 1 3 CIRCUIT, 0.156 SP
RELAY, ARMATURE :1 FORM C ,12VDC
AlOKlOl
A1OK102
A1OK103
A10Kl04
A10 K l05
A10K107
148-01 74-00
148-0173-01
148-0173-01
148-0174-00
148-01 74-00
148-01 74-00
28JR377-1
2-77-1
28JR377-1
640452-2
80009 131-3638-00
TK1689 D S l W D C 12V
RELAY,N@MTLRE:l FORM C,12VDC
RELAY, ARMATURE :l2VDC
RELAY ,ARMATURE: 12VDC
RELAY,WTURE:l FORM C,12MC
RELAY, ARMATLRE :1 FORM C ,12VDC
RELAY, ARMATURE :1 FORM C ,12VDC
TKl689
TKl689
TKl689
TKl689
TK1689
TKl689
DSlEM-DC 12V
RKlEDClPV
RKlEDClEV
DSlEM-DC 12V
DSlEM-DC 12V
DSlEM-DC 12V
COIL,RF:FXD,2.2IRif10 " L
54583
COIL,RF:FXD,180NH,10 " A,O.l O(.M,llOOW
80009
COIL,RF: FXD,330NH
COIL, RF: FXD,330NH
80009
80009
COIL,RF:FXD,180NH,lO%,O.l OtM,llOOMA
80009
COIL, RF: FXD, 330NH
80009
SP0305-2R2K
108-1341-00
108-1339-00
108-1339-00
108-1341-00
108-1339-00
COILfRF:R(D,33ONH
COIL, RF: FXD,33ONH
COIL, RF: FXD,330NH
TRANSFORMER, RF: TAPPED INWCTOR
TRANSFORMER, RF: TAPPED INDUCTOR
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:HR,l X 36,O.l CTR,O.O25PI N
108-1339-00
108-1339-00
108-1339-00
TK1441 86-504-1
TKl441 86-504-1
TKl483 082-3640-SS13
24931
24931
24931
00779
RELAY ,ARMATURE: 1 FORM C, 12VDC
RELAY, ARMATURE :l2VDC
RELAY ,ARMATURE: 12VDC
RELAY ,ARMATURE: 1 FORM C, 12VDC
RELAY ,ARMATURE: 1 FORM C, 12VDC
INWCTOR, FIXED:33UH, 10%,1.8A
INDUCTOR, FIXED:33UH, lo%, 1.8A
COIL, RF: FIXED, 61NH
COIL, RF: FIXED, 61NH
INDUCTOR, FIXED:33UH, 1% 1.M
C,
COIL,RF: FXD,330NH
COILfRF:FXD,330NH
80009
80009
80009
CONN, RCPT, ELEC: HDR,1 X 36,O. 1 CTR, 0.025PI N TKl483 082-3640-SS13
CONN, RCPT, ELEC: HR, 1 X 36.0.1 CTR, 0.025PI N TKl483 082-3640-SS13
SEMICOND DVC SE:FET,SI,TO-92
04713 SPF627M2
(LOCATION A AND B)
SEMICOND DVC SE :FET ,S I ,TO-92
04713 SPF627M2
(LOCATION A AND B)
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
04713 2N2907A
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,TO-92
04713 SPS8223
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,30M9,2GHZfTO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,30M9,2GHZ,TO-92
TRANS I
STOR: SELECTED
STOR :SELECTED
TRANS I
TRANSISTOR:DARLINGTON, NPN,SI
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,TO-92
04713
SPS8223
151-0271-05
80009 151-0271-05
80009 151-0192-00
80009 151-0192-00
TKl016 MPSAl4, TPE2
80009
- 2246A
Rep1uceable Elect rical Parts
G -
& No.
A100304
A10Q305
A1 0Q306
A1 0Q307
A1 0Q308
A10Q3d9
Tektmnix
PartNo.
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
151-0829-00
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
- ZS6A
Serial/Assedly No.
Effective n##rt
M.
r
Wlrae & Description
TRANSISTOR:NPN.SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
TRANSI STOR :NPN ,SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
TRANSI STOR :PNP ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,AMPLIFIER1625,TO-92
C#le
W. Partwo.
& 0009
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
151-0829-00
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
SEMICOND DVC SE:FET,SI ,TO-92
(LOCATIONS A AND B)
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSI STOR :NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92
TRANS I STOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
TRANSI STOR:NPN ,SI AMPLI FIER,625,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,AMPLIFIER,625,TO-92
SEMICOND DVC SE :FET ,SI ,TO-92
(LOCATIONS A AND B)
.
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
04713
151-0830-00
151-0830-00
351-0829-00
151-083040
151-0830-00
SPF627M2
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO42
TRANS I STOR :NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANS I STOR :PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSI STOR :PNP ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR :NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANS I STOR :NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN ,SI %,TO-39
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,5W,TO-39
.
TRANSI STOR :NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-92
TRANS I STOR:MOSFET ,VDMOS ,P-CW ,TO-39
TRANSIST0R:MOSFFT ,VDMOS,N-CHAN,TO-39
TRANS I STOR :NPN ,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
80009 151-0190-00
80009 151-0190-00
80009 151-1212-00
80009 151-1211-00
80009 151-0736-00
04713 SPS8223
TRANSISTOR:MOSFET,VDMDS,N-CHAN,TO-39
TRANS I STOR :MOSFET ,VOWS,P-CHAN,TO-39
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-928
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-92B
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-928
80009
80009
04713
80009
80009
151-1211-00
151-1212-00
2N2907A
151-0711-00
151-0711-00
151-0711-00
lA,TO-226AE/237
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,40V,
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,40V,lA,TO-226AE/237
04713
04713
SPS8956(MPSW51A)
SPS8956(MPSW51A)
80009
-
Raplaceable Electrical Parts
C m e t No.
a mn
AlOQ908
AlOQlOOl
AlOQ1002
A10Q1003
A10Q1004
A10Q1005
Tektmnix
Part No.
151-0622-00
1 5 1-0424-00
151-0424-00
151-0424-00
151-0424-00
151-0216-04
Serial/Assdly No.
Effective
Dscont
Mr.
Code
M . PartNo.
r
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
04713
Sf58956(MPSV51A)
SPSS246
SPS8246
SPS8246
SPS8246
SPS8803RL
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S I ,TO-92
RES,FXD,FILM:8.2K,M,%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:8.2K,M,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:8.2K,M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:8.2K,Om,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK M,5%,0.2W
80009
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
151-0190-00
TR20JE O
W
TR20JE 08K2
TR20JE 08K2
TR20JE 08K2
TR20JElOKO
RES,FXD,FILM:75
RES,FXD,FILM:62
RES,FXD,FILM:20
RES,FXD,FILM:lO
RES,FXD,FILM:75
RES,FXD,FILM:39
57668
19701
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE 75E0
50430(63ROOJ
TR20JE20E
TR20JElOEO
CRB20 FXE 75E0
NTR25J-E39EO
RES1FXD,FILM:402K OtM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD1FILM:402K OI.M11%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM: 200K OHM. 1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lO 0tMl5%.0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:8.87K OHl,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RESlFXD,FILM:1.78K Otfl1l%,0.2W,TC=TO
91637
91637
91637
57668
57668
57668
CCFS0640202F
CCF50G40202F
CCF50G20002F
TREOJElOEO
CRB20 FXE 8K87
CRB20 FXE 1K78
RES,FXD,FILM:1.5K OM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD, FILM:75 OM, 1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OI.M11%,O.2W,TC=TO
RES,VAR,NONWd:TlWR,20 Om,20%,0.5W LINEAR
RES,FXD,FILM:37.4 OM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:39 OM1%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
TK1450
80009
57668
CRB20 FXE 1K50
CRB20 FXE 75EO
CRB20 FXE 75E0
GF06111
322-3056-00
NlR25J-E39EO
RES,FXD,FILM:402K OM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES1FXD,FILM:402K OM,1X10.2W,TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM: 200K 01-M, 1%,0.2k',TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lO Om,Y/o,0.2W
91637
91637
91637
57668
CCF50G40202F
CCF50G40202F
CCF50G20002F
TR20JElOEO
N r & Descriptim
ae
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,40V, l A , TO-226AE/237
TRANSISTOR: NPN ,S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S I ,TO-92
TRANS I
STOR :NPN,S I ,TO-92
TRANSI
STOR :NPN ,S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: SELECTED
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI , T O 4 2
TRANSI STOR: SELECTED
TRANSISTOR: PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: SELECTED
TRANSISTOR: PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,TO-92
TRANSI STOR :NPN ,S I ,TO-92
TRANS I
STOR :NPN ,S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR :SELECTED
TRANSISTOR :NPN ,S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
STOR :PNP, S I ,TO-92
TRANSI
TRANS I
STOR :NPN ,S I ,TO-92
STOR
,
TRANS I :PNP,SI TO-92
A1002715
AlORlOl
A10R102
A10R103
AlOR104
AlOR105
151-0190-00
313-1822-00
313-1822-00
313-1822-00
313-1822-00
313-1103-00
A10R106
A10R107
A10R108
AlORlll
A10R113
A10R114
-
313-1103-00
313-1103-00
313-1103-00
315-0620-00
313-1200-00
313-1100-00
OHc1,1%,0.2W1TC=TO
0tM15%,0.25W
OM15%,0.2W
OHc1,5%,0.2W
OM11%,O.2W,TC=TO
OM,5%,0.25W
2246A
Rep1aceabl e Electrical Parts
Carpanent No.
Tekkonix
PaFt No.
AlOR156
A10R157
AlOR158
A10R159
A10R160
A10R161
322-3284-00
322-321 7-00
322-3210-00
322-3085-00
322-3085-00
311-2224-00
-
2246A
Serial/Asmbly No.
Effectivr! lscont
m.
-
cock
Mr. PartNo.
RES,FXD,FILM:8.87K OtM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:1.78K OM,l%.O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:l.X OHM,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OtM,l?L,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,VAR,W:TRMR,20 M,20%,0.5W LINEAR
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TKl450
CRB20 FXE
CRB20 FXE
CRB20 FXE
CRB20 FXE
CRB20 FXE
GFW
RES,FXD,FILM:37.4 OF.M,l%,O.ZW.TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM:470 OHM,5%,0.N
80W)9
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
322-3056-00
TR20JE 470E
T U N E 200K
TREOJElOKO
TWOJE 04K7
TR20JE 04K7
57668
57668
57668
75042
57668
57668
TR20JElOKO
TR2OJE100E
TW0JE100E
BW-20-1R500K
CRB20 FXE lK00
CRB20 FXE lK00
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE lKOO
CRB20 FXE 1K00
CRB20 FXE 357E
CRB20 FXE 2K80
CRB20 FXE 357E
TRZOJElOEO
57668
57668
32997
57668
T 2 6 510E
RW8
TR2OJE 330E
3386R-EA5-502
TR2OJT68 510E
313-1243-00
CRB20 FXE 9K09
Nane & Description
RES,FXD,FILM:ZOOK,FA,O.ZW
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K OHM,Y?,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK ~,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM:357 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:2.8K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:357 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OHM,%,O.Zu
80009
57668
8K87
1K78
1K50
75E0
75E0
80009 313-1243-00
57668
57668
57668
57668
80009
CR820 FXE 9K09
TWOJE 04K7
TW0JE 02E7
TR20JE 04K7
322-3237-00
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOK OtM,5%,00.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:330 OHM,5%,0.N
RES,VAR,NONW:TRIMMER,SK W , l V L
RES,FXD,FILM:SlO OHM,S%,O.ZW
RES,FXD,FILM:24K OHM,FA,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:9,09K OtM,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
57668
57668
32997
57668
80009
57668
TR20JE100K
TR20JE 330E
3386R-EA5-502
TR20JT68 510E
313-1243-00
CRB20 FXE 9K09
RES,FXD,FILM:9.09K OI-M,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OfH,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:2,87K OtM,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES NTkKKFXDDFI:7,82
OHM,Z%,0.15W EACH
57668
57668
80009
11236
CRB20 FXE 9K09
TR203E 02E7
322-3237-00
750-81-R82
-
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Carwnent No.
AlOR251
A1OR254
A10R255
A1W 5 6
A1OR260
A10R261
Tektmnix
Part No.
307-0792-00
322-3318-00
322-3318-00
313-1103-00
311-2234-00
313-1243-00
Serial/Assdly No.
Effective Ibant
Nime & Description
.
M.
r
Cade
- 2246A
M . PsrtNa.
r
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:7,82 0Wf2%,0.15W EACH
RES,FXD,FILM:20K OtMf1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RESfFXD,FILM:20K OHMfl%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM: 10K 0t-Mf5%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NOW:TRMR,X OrlM,2O%,OO5WLINEAR
RES,FXDfFILM:24K OtMf5%,0.2W
11236
57668
57668
57668
TK1450
80009
750-81-R82
CRB20 FXE 20KO
CRB20 FXE 20KO
TR20JElOKD
G O U 5K
FGT
313-1243-00
RES,FXO,FILM: 71.5 OW, 1%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:71.5 OHM.1%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:71.5 OtM,1%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES, FXD, FILM: 71.5 OM, l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RESfFXD,FILM:3K 0tMf%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OtM.1%,0.2WfTC=TO
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
C W 0 FXE 71E5
CRB20 FXE 71E5
C W 0 FXE 71E5
CRB20 FXE 71E5
TR203E 03KO
CRB20 FXE 499E
RES, FXD, FILM:432 OM, 1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:432 OtMf1%,O.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OtM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:9.1K OWf5%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NO~:T~,2KOtM,20%,0.5WLlNEAR
RES, VAR, W:
TRMR, 500 OW, 20% 0.50 LINEAR
57668
57668
57668
57668
TKl450
TKl450
CRB2D FXE 432
CRB2D FXE 432
TR20JE 750E
TR20FXE9.1K
GFW2K
GFOGUT 500
RES.FXD,FILM:lO 0HMf%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NOW:TRMRf100W,20%,0.5W LINEAR
RESfFXD,FILM:1.62K OmflX,0.2W,TC=TO
RESfFXD,FILM:1.62K OtMf1%,0.2W,TC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:287 OtM,1%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:287 OHMf1%.0.2W,TC=TO
57668
TKl450
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JElOEO
GFOGLIT 100
CRB20 FXE 1K62
CRB20 FXE 1K62
CRB20 FXE 287E
CRB20 FXE 287E
RES,FXD,FILM:102 Otflfl%,0.2W,TC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:102 OtM,l%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:lO Ot.M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OtMf5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:39K 0tMf5%,0.2W
RES, FXD,FILM:39K OtMf5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 ME 102E
CRB20 FXE 102E
TR2WElOEO
TR20JElOEO
TRZWE 39K
TR20JE 39K
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OtMfl%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OtMf1%,0.2W,TC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:lK ~.1%,0.2W,TCtTO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OtM,1%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:187 M,l%,O.2WfTC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:187 OtM,lXf0.2W,TC=TO
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRBEO
CRB20
CRB20
CRB20
CRB20
CRB20
RESfFXD,FILM:7.5K OtMf5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:7.5K OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:EK OM,5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:3K 0HMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:162 Ot-Mf1%,O.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OHM,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JE 0 7 6
TR20JE 07K5
TR20JEOXO
TR20JE 03KO
CRB 20 FXE 162E
TR203ElOEO
RES,FXD,FILM:5. 1 OHMf5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:25.5K OlN,0.5%,0.2UfTCPT2
RESfFXD,FILM:20.5K O~,0.%,0.2W,TC=T2
RES,FXD,FILM: 10K OtM,l%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:47K OIt4,5%,0.2W
RES,FXDfFILM:6.19K OlNf0.2W,5%
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR2OJT68 05E1
CRB20 DYE 25K5
CRB20 DYE 20K5
CRB20 FXE l0KO
TR2WE 47K
CRB DYE 6U9
RES,FXD,FILM:lO 0~,5?~,0.2W
RES NTWK, FXD, F I :REF VOLTAGE DIVIDER
RES,FXD,FILM:28.7K Om,0.2Wf5??
RES,FXD,FILM:47 OtM,5%,0.2W
57668
80009
57668
57668
TR20JElOEO
307-2132-00
CRB20 DYE 28W
TR20JE 47E
WE
FXE
FXE
FXE
FXE
FXE
lOOE
lOOE
1K00
lKOO
187E
187E
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Tektronix
CoapanentNo.
PartNo.
A1OR316
A10R317
AlOR318
A10R319
A10R320
A10R321
313-1270-00
313-1101-00
313-1681-00
313-1562-00
313-1470-00
307-2133-00
- 2246A
Wr.
Serial/~lyWo.
Effective ascart
Code
Ufr. PartNo.
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
80009
TR20JT68 27E
TR20JE100E
TR20JE 680E
TR20JE 0 x 6
TR20JE 47E
307-2133-00
RES,FXD,FILM:ZK M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK Mf1 " A,0.2W.TC=T0
RES NNK,FXD,FI: (5)lK OHs1,1(7Xt0.7W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.% OtM15%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,l%,0.2WfTC=T0
57668
57668
57668
11236
19701
57668
TR20JE02KO
CRB20 FXE lKOO
CRB20 FXE lKOO
750-61-R1W
5043CXlMSOOJ
CRB20 FXE lKOO
RES,FXD,FILM:l.X 0m15%,0.2W
RES,FXDfFILM:100 OHM,%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:680 M.5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:E;.K OHM15%,0.2W
RES N ,
M FXD,FI: (5)lK OHs1,10%,0.7W
RES,FXD,FILM:560 OHM,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
11236
57668
TR20JEOlK5
TR20JE100E
TR20JE 680E
TR20JE 0 x 6
750-61 -RlKDHul
TR20JE 560E
b & Description
RES,FXD,FILM:27 O M 5%,0.2W
H
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:680 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM: 5.6K OtM,5%, 0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:47 QHM,5%,0.2W
EW R
R S N M , FXD, FI :RESISTOR N T O K
E
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OI.E1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 100 0HM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:3.9K OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:82 OtM15%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:12 OtMf5%,0.2V
RES,FXD,FILM:160 OHM,5%,0.2W
Replaceable Electrical Parts
CoAponent No.
A10R376
A10R377
A10R378
A10R379
A10R380
AlOR381
Tektmnix
Part No.
313-1332-00
322-3193-00
313-1820-00
322-3193-00
313-1820-00
313-1270-00
Serial/Assdly Ib.
Effective Dsant
WeAe & Oescriptian
RES,FXD,FILM:3.3K OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK W,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:82 M,%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM: 1K OW,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:82 M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:27 O 3,O.N
W
M.
r
Code
- 22-
Ufr. Partb.
TR2OJE 031C3
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE lKOO
TR2OJE 8 E
2
CRB20 FXE lKOO
TR2ChJE 82E
TWOJT68 27E
RES,FXD,FILM:lK M,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM: 160 M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:5.1K M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.K M,%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.K OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:82 M,%,O.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE lKOO
TR2AK160E
TR2OJE 5K1
TWOJT681K6
TWOJT681K6
TR2alE 82E
RES,FXD,FILM:82 OM,!5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lO Otf1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:510K OH.1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lO Mf1,5%,0.2W
RES, OD, FILM:470 OHM.5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:470 0M.5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JE 82E
TR20JE10EO
TR20JE 510K
TR2oJElOEO
TR2OJE 470E
TWAK 470E
RES,FXD,FILM:510 OW,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 100 OHM,Sk,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:510 OtM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD,FILM:270 OH.1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K Ott4,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JT68 510E
TR20JElOOE
TR20JE100E
TR20Jr68 510E
TR2OJE 270E
CRB20 FXE 7K87
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K OtM,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K M,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K OCfl,l%,O.ZW,TC..TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:270 0W,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
W 2 0 FXE 7K87
CRB20 FXE 7K87
CR820 FXE 7KS7
TR2OJE 75E
TRZoJE100E
TRZOJE 270E
57668
TWOJE 75E
RES, FXD, FILM: 1K OHM,%,O.ZW
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OH.1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:510 Mf1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO Mf1,Yk,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OlM,5k,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:510 OW,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:75 0H.1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:57.6 OHM,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOK Mf1,5?,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:620 Mf1,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:5.6K W,Yk,O.2W
RES, FXD, F1LM:S.K W,5%,0.2W
80009 322-3074-00
57668
57668
57668
57668
TW0JE100K
T R 2 U 620E
TWOJE 0 x 6
TR2OJE 09%
RES,FXD,FILM:560 OHM,Yk,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:SOl OHcl,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM:330 W,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:4.02K OtM,l%,O.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:3.9K OtM,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZOJE 560E
CRB20 R E 301E
TR2OJE 330E
CRB20 FXE lKOO
CRBZO FXE 4K02
TWOJE 03K9
RES,FXD,FILM:270 OH.1,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K M,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K OtM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K Om,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:7.87K OtM,l%.0,2W,TC=TO
RES,V R ,N O H:T M ,500 OM, 2PA, 0.50 LINEAR
A
RR
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TKl450
TR203E 270E
CRB20 FXE 7K87
CRB20 FXE 7K87
CRB20 FXE 7K87
CRB20 FXE 7K87
G F W 500
Rep1 aceabl e Electrical Parts
Tektranix
Carpa#ntNo.
PartNo.
A1OR463
A10R470
A10R471
AlOR472
A10R473
AlOR474
313-1120-00
313-1104-00
313-1621-00
313-1562-00
313-1562-00
313-1561-00
-
2246A
Serial/Ass & ly No.
Effectite kcant
Hfr.
Code
Hfr. Part No.
RES,FXD,FILM:12 M,5kf0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOK OtMf5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:620 OM.5%,0.2W
RES,FXDfFILM:5.6K OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:5.6K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:560 OtM,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR2OJElZEO
TR2OJE100K
TR2OJE 620E
TRZOJE 0 x 6
TR2OJE 0 x 6
TR2OJE 560E
RES,FXD,FILM:301 ~,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RESPFXD,FILM:3.9K 0Hlf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK M,1%,0.2W.TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM:4.02K OH, 1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:5.1 OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:5.1 OHM,%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE 301E
TR2OJE 03K9
CRB20 FXE lKOO
CRB20 FXE 4KO2
TR20JT68 05E1
TR20Jr68 05E1
RES,FXD,FILM:510 M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:510 M,5%,0.2W
R S NTWK, FXD, FI :1OK M,20%, (9)RES
E
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK Mf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK W,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM: 100 Wf5%,0.2W
57668
57668
11236
57668
57668
57668
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OMfS%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK M,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM: 10K Mf%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK Wf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OtMf1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK M,1Xf0.2W,TC=T0
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR2OJElOKO
TR2AIElOKO
TR20JElOKO
TR20JEOlKO
CRB20 FXE lKOO
CRB20 FXE lK00
RES,FXDfFILM:2.49K 0tM,1%,0.2WfTC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK 0tM,1%,0.2WfTC=T0
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OHulf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:51 OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 100 OtM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD,FILM:390 0Mf5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE 2K49
CRB20 FXE lK00
TR2OJElOKO
313-1510-00
TR20JE100E
TR2OJE 390E
Nane & Description
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO
RES,FXD,FILM:390
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO
RES,FXD,FILM:390
RES, FXD, FILM:470
RES,FXD,FILM:470
80009
57668
57668
Mf5%,0.2W
OtM,!3Af0.2W
OHMf%,0.2W
0tM,YAfO.2W
OHM,5%,0.2W
0tMf5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:470 Mf5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:820 0Mf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:820 0Hlf5%,0.2W
RES.FXDfFILM:820 OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:3K Wf%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:3K M,5%,0.2W
TWOJE 470E
TR20JE 820E
TWOJE 820E
TRZOJE 820E
TR20JE 03K0
TR20JE 03KO
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Te!ktmnix
C m t lb.
h m
NOR627
AlOR628
NOR630
AlOR631
AlOR636
ATOR637
Part No,
313-1390-00
307-0503-00
313-1103-00
313-1102-00
313-1273-00
313-1822-00
Serial/Ass & ly No.
Effective ascart
- 224611
fi.
Wane & Descriptian
RES,MD,FILM:39 OH.1,5%,0.2W
RES N M , FXD, FI :(9) 510 OtM,20.,O5l25W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK 0W,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK W,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:27K W,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:8.2K.M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:75K
RES,FXD,FILM:5.1K
RES,FXD,FILM:5.1K
RES, FXD, FILM:820
RES,FXD,FILM:820
RES,FXD,FILM:S.%
ufr. Part No.
57668
11236
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JE 39E
750-101-R510
TR2OJElOKO
TR2OJEOlKO
TR2OJE 27K
TR2OJE 08K2 '
57668
57668
57668
TK1450
57668
57668
T U N E 33K
CRB20 WE 2K21
TR203E O
m
GFOGUT 500
CRB20 FXE 75E0
CRB20 FXE 75E0
W,5%,0.2W
OHM,5%,0.2W
OHM,5%,0.2W
OHu1,5%,0,2W
OHu1,5%,0.2W
OHM,%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:33K OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:2.21K OtM,1%.0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:Z.ZK M,5%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NW:TM,500 M,2VA,0.50 LINEAR
RES,FXD,FILM:75 W,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OtM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES NTkK,FXD,FI:DUAL LOAD RESISTOR
RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 Om,%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:130K OHM FA,0.2W
RES,FxD,FILM:lO olt4,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK Ot.M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:130K W 5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 W,5%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NONW:TMR,5K M.2VA.O.5W
RES,FXD.FILM:lK otM,%.0.2W
LINEAR
Rep1 aceabl e fl ectrical Parts
Cas##nt No.
AlOR726
A10R727
A10R728
A10R729
AlOR730
A10R731
Tektmnix
Part No.
313-1103-00
313-1104-00
313-1824-00
313-1202-00
313-1102-00
313-1750-00
-
2246A
Serial/Asdly b.
Effecti*
lscart
Hfr.
Wane & Oescriptim
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,MD, FILM: lOOK OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:820K OHM,0.2W,5%
RES,FXD,FILM:ZK M,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHcl,%,O.ZV
RES,FXD,FILM:75 Ml%,0.2W
Co &
Mr. P a r t k .
57668
57668
80009
57668
57668
57668
TR20JElOKO
TR2OJElOoK
313-1824-00
TR20JE02KO
TR2OJEOlKO
TRZOJE 75E
RES,FXD,FILM:lOoK OW,YA,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.N M 5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:16.% OtM,l%,O.SW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OHcl,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD, F1LM:Z.M OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NW:TRMR,5K OHM,20%,0.5W LINEAR
57668
57668
75042
57668
57668
TKl450
TR20JE100K
TR2OJT681K8
CECTO-1652F
TR2OJE 7%
TR20JE 02K4
G O L 5K
F GI
T
RES,FXD,FILM:2.4K OHM,5%,0.ZW
RES,FXD,FILM:5.76K M,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:5.76K ~,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:430 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:5.6K OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOK OW,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZ0JE OX4
W 0 FXE W 6
CRBZO FXE $76
TR2OJE 430E
TR2OJE 054%
TRZOJE100K
RES,FXD,FILM:16.5K OtM,l%,O.SW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:75 OtM15%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:150K M,l%,O.N,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:150K OHM,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:5.62K M,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,VAR,NW:TRMR,500 Ott4,20%,0.50 LINEAR
CECTO-1652F
T 2 75E
RW
CRB20 FXE 1%
CRB20 FXE 150K
80009 322-3265-00
TK1450 GFOWT 500
RES,VAR,NONW:Tl@Ul,5K
OtM,20??,0.5W LINEAR
RES,VAR,NW:TRMR15K M,20%,0.W LINEAR
RES,VAR,NW:TRMR,250 Om,20%,0.9 LINEAR
RESlFXD,FILM:20K OtM,%,O.SW
RES,FXD,FILM:ZOK OHM,%,O.W
RES,FXD,FILM:374 OHM,l%.O,2W,TC=TO
TKl450
TK1450
TKl450
19701
19701
57668
G F W 5K
G O U 5K
FGT
GFOGUT 250
505XX20K00J
5053CX20KOOJ
CRB20 FXE 374E
57668
57668
57668
57668
19701
19701
TRZOJElOEO
TRZOJE 47E
TRZOJElOEO
TRZOJElOKO
5053CX750ROJ
5053CX75OROJ
57668
57668
57668
19701
19701
57668
TRZOJElOEO
CRB20 FXE 39E2
TR20JElOEO
5053CX2K2Ohl
5053U2K200J
TRZOJE 04K3
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE 5K49
CRB20 FXE 301E
TR2OJE12EO
TR20JE12EO
75042
57668
57668
57668
Replaceable Electrical Parts
cawlumt ND.
Tektmnix
hrt ND.
A10R908
A1OR909
A10R910
A1OR911
A10R915
A10R916
313-1 120-00
313-1101-00
313-1101-00
311-1239-00
322-3289-00
322-3289-00
M.
r
Serial/Assenbly No.
Effective
Dscont
-
& me & k c r i p t i a n
RES,FXD,FILM:12 0HMV%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OtM,5%,0.2W
RESVFXD,FILM:100OHMP5%,0.2W
RES,VAR,NW:TMP2.5K ~ , 0 . W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OtM.l%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:10K W,l%,0.2W,TC=TO
Coda
Hfr. Partb.
57668
57668
57668
32997
57668
57668
TR20JE12EO
TR2WE100E
TRZWE100E
3386X-T07-252
CRB20 FXE lOKO
CRB20 FXE lOKO
R E S V V A R , W : T ~ , 2 0 0 ~ , 2 f f ~ , 0 . 5 W L I N E A R1W450
R S N ,FXD, F I :PRECESION VOLTAGE DIVIDER
E
W
80009
RES, FXD,FILM: 10K OtMV5%,0.2W
57668
RESvFXD,FILM:10K OtM,5%,0.2W
57668
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OHM,YA,O.ZV
57668
RESvFXD,FILM:750 W,SA,O.2W
57668
GFOGUT 8200 @PI
307-2131-00
TWWElOKO
TRZOJElOKO
TRZOJElOKD
TRZOJE 750E
RES,FXD,FILM:lK 0tM,0.5%,0.2WeTC=T2
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K~,O.25%,0.2WeTC=T2
RESpFXD,FILM:2.7K WP5?A,0.2W
RES,FXD.FILM:l.X M,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 DYE lKDO
CRB20CYE3KOl
TRZWE 02W
TRZOJEOlK2
TR2OJE 2%
C W 0 DYE 3K52
80009
RES,R(DVFILM:22K,Otf1.5%,0.2W
RES,FXDeFILM:3.52K M,0.2WP5%
322-3126-02
313-1752-00
313-1152-00
313-1122-00
322-3232-00
322-3232-00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 0HM,0.5%,0.2WeTC=T2
RESvFXD,FILM:7.5K 0t4tv5%,0.2W
RES,FXDvFILM:1.5K WP%,0.2W
RESvFXDeFILM:1.2K Me5%,O.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:2.55K 0tMel%.O.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:2.55K OtM.l%,0.2W,TC=TO
57668
57668
57668
80009
80009
322-3126-02
TRZOJE 07K5
TRZWEOlK5
TRZOJEOlK2
322-3232-00
322-3232-00
RESeFXD,FILM:5.1K OtiM,5%,0.2W
RESpFXD,FILM:2.55K Olfl,l%,0.2WPTC=TO
RES,FXDvFILM:4.02K M,l%,0.2WPTC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:806 ~,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RESeFXD,FILM:4.02K 0 & l,l%,0.2WvTC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:806 Wel%,0.2W,TC=TO
AlOR937
A10R938
A10R939
A1OR940
AlORlOOl
A10R1002
57668
80009
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZOJE 5Kl
322-3232-00
CRB20 FXE 4W2
C W 0 FXE 806E
CRB20 FXE 4KO2
CRB20 FXE 806E
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR2a3E10KO
TR20JE1O O
K
TR2OJE 02W
TR2OJE 5K1
TRZOJE o
m
TRZOJE 5Kl
A10R1009
AlORlOlO
A10R1020
A10R1021
A10R1022
A10R1023
313-1 103-00
313-1 103-00
313-1272-00
313-1512-00
313-1272-00
313-1512-00
A10R1024
A10R1025
AlOR1026
A10R1027
A10R1028
AlORllOl
313-1272-00
313-1512-00
313-1100-00
313-1100-00
313-1102-00
313-1100-00
RES,FXD,FILM:2.7K 0tMV5%,0.2W
RES, FXD,FILM:5. 1K MV%,0.2W
RES, FXD, F1LM:lO OMl,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OHMP5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK M.5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 0tMV5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZOJE OK7
TWOJE 5Kl
TWOJElOEO
TR20JElOEO
TR2OJEOlKO
TR203ElOEO
A10R1102
A10R1103
AlOR1104
AlORlllO
AlORllll
A10R1112
313-1100-00
313-1102-00
313-1682-00
313-1682-00
313-1303-00
313-1302-00
RES,FXD,FILM:lO W,%,0.2W
RES,R(D,FILM:lK M,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:6.% 0M,S7,0.2W
RESPFXD,FILM:6.8K W,5%,0.2W
RESVFXD,FILM:3OK WV5%,O.2W
RES,FXDeFILM:3K 0l+le5?A,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZWElOEO
TRZOJEOlKO
T U N E 06K8
TRZOJE 0 6 0
TRZOJE 30K
TRZOJE 03KO
57668
57668
57668
57668
TWOJE 06K8
TRZOJE 3 M
TR20JE 03K0
TRZOJElOOE
2246A
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Canpanent No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
A10R1124
A10R1125
AlOR1126
A10R1127
A10R1128
A10R1131
313-1103-00
313-1682-00
313-1102-00
313-1162-00
313-1751-00
313-1472-00
- 22464
Serial/Assmbly Cb.
Effactiwe Dscart
Mr.
Gale
Mr.
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OHM,Ykf0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:6.8K OtN,5%,0.N
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.K OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OtM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K OHM,5%,,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZOJElOKO
TR2OJE 06K8
TR20JEOlKO
TRZOJT681K6
TR2OJE 750E
TR20JE O
W
RES,FXDfFILM:18K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXDfFILM:120K OM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXDfFILM:200K,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:ZOK 0Mf5%,O.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR2OJT68 18K
TR2OJE12M
TR20JE WK7
TRZOJE 200K
TRZOJE 200K
TR2OJE20K
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OHMfYk,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lO OMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:SK OHMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.X OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:1,5K Otbrl,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:143 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
80009
TR20JElOEO
TR20JElOEO
TRZOJE 03K0
TR2OJEOlK5
TR20JEOlK5
322-3112-00
RESfFXD,FILM:39K Off1,5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:8.45K 0~,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:499 (M,l%,O.n!,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lW OHM,Ykf0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OHMfl%,O.2U,TC=TO
57668
80009
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR2OJE 39K
322-3282-00
CRB20 FXE 499E
TREOJEOlKO
TRZOJEIOKO
CRB20 FXE lOKO
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK
RES, FXD, FILM:360
RES,FXDfFILM:33K
RES,FXD,FILM:33K
RES,FXD,FILM:33K
RES,FXD,FILM:33K
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE lOKO
TR2OJE 360E
TR2OJE 33K
TR2OJE 33K
T U N E 33K
TR2OJE 33K
RES,FXD,FILM:~OOK 0t~,5%,0.m
RES,FXD,FILM:33K OHMf5k,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:5.6K OHMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:75 DHMf5%,0.25W
RES,VAR,NONW:TllMR,20K OHM.20%,0.5W LINEAR
RES,FXD,FILM:20K 0HMf5%,0.25W
57668
57668
57668
57668
TK1450
57668
TR20JE100K
TR2OJE 33K
TWOJE 0%
NTR25J-E75EO
GFOGUT 2 M
NTR25J-E 20K
RES,FXDfFILM:4.7K 0HMf5%,O.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:240K OHM,%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:510 O~,Sk,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:6.2M OHM,5%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OHM,5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:1.62K OM, 1%,0.2W,TC=TO
57668
19701
19701
01121
57668
57668
TR20JE O
W
5043CX240KOJ
5043CX510ROJ
CB6255
TR20JElOOE
CRB20 FXE lK62
RES,FXD,FILM:20 (M,5%,0.2W
RES,fXD,FILM: 1.5K OM,l%,O.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK 0HM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 100 OtNf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:l.PK OHM,5%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:ZOK OHM,Yk.0.54/
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
19701
TR2OJE20E
CRB20 FXE 1K50
TRZOJEOlKO
TR20JE100E
NTR25J-E01K2
5053CX2OKOOJ
NaAe & Descriuticm
RES,FXDfFILM:200K,5%,0.n!
OHM,l%,O.ZW.TC=TO
OM,%,O.ZW
OHMf5%,0.2W
(M,5%,0.2W
OHMf5%,0.2W
OHM,5%,0.2W
Part No.
Replaceable flectrical Parts
Ccnponent No.
Tektmnix
Part I & .
A10R2741
A1OR2742
A10R2743
A10R2745
A10R2750
A10R2751
315-0472-00
315-0244-00
315-0122-00
315-0102-00
315-0511-00
315-0625-00
M.
r
Serial/Assdly ISo.
Effective
Dscant
- 2246A
lSaRe 81 Descriptim
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K OtM,5%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:240K OtM,5%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:l . X W,5%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK W,5%,0.2sw
RES,FXD,FILM:510 0m,5%,0.25U
RES,fl(D,FILM:6.2M 0m,5%,0.25W
RES,VAR,NW:PNL,5M OH%lO%,O.%
R S NTK. FXD. F I :HIGH VOLTKE, FINISHED
E
RES,FXD,FILM:887 W,l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OH.1,5%,0.2U
RES,VAR,NONWW:TM,lOK @N,20%,0.W LINEAR
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OtM,5%,0.2U
Code
Mr. PartWo.
80009 315-0472-00
19701 504XX240KOJ
57668 NTR2U-EOlK2
57668 NTR25JEOlKO
19701 504XX510ROJ
01121 C86255
01121
23M909
80009 307-2173-00
57668
57668
TKl450
57668
CRB20 FXE 887E
TRZOJE100E
G F W lOOK
TR20JEOlKO
RES, D(D, FILM:82K OfiM,%,O.N
57668
RES,FXD,FILM:36K Om,%,O.ZW
57668
RES,VAR,W:TFMR,lOOK Om,20%,0.W LINEAR TKl450
RES,FXD,FILM:lK M,5%,0.2W
57668
RES,FXD,FILM:6.04K OI-M,l%,0.2W,TGTO
57668
RES,FXD,FILM:lO W,5%,0.2U
57668
TR20JE 82K
TR2OJE 3%
G O U lOOK
FGT
TR203EOlKO
CRB20 FXE 6K04
TR20JElOEO
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:BUFFER AMPLIFIER
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:BUFFER AMPLIFIER
MICROCKT,DGTL:8 S G S F & S O E BUS R T
T H
TR
GR
MICROCKT,DGTL:8 S G S F & S O E BUS R T
T H
TR
GR
MICROCKT ,DGTL :8 S G SHS & S O E BUS & TR
T
TR
MICROCKT, LINEAR: 7 XSTR
80009
80009
02735
02735
02735
02735
MICROCKT, LINEAR:7 X T
SR
02735
MICROCKT,ffiTL:HCMOS,ANALOG W,TRIPLE
MICROCKT,DGTL:HCMOS,ANALOG MUX,TRIPLE
80009
MICWKT,LINEAR:~LWPWR,OPERATIW
AMPLIFIERS MU403,14 DIP,MI
QUICK CH1P:VERTICAL PRW,PACK & GE IC
QUICK CHIP:VERTICAL PREAMP, PACKAGE IC
QUICK CH1P:VERTICAL PREAMP,PACKAGE IC
QUICK CHIP: VERTICAL PREAMP, PACKAGE IC
MICROCKT,L1NEAR:OPNL AMPL ,CHECKED
M1CROCKT.LINEAR:DUAL INDEP DIFF AMPL
MICROCKT,ffiTL:HCMOS,/\NALOG MUX,TRIPLE
165-2232-00
165-2232-00
CD4094BF
CD4094BF
CD4094BF
CA3082-98
80009
80009
CA3082-98
156-2571-00
156-2571-00
156-2667-00
809
234-0238-20
80009
80009
234-0238-20
234-0238-20
234-0238-20
K174lCPlDS
CA3054-98
156-2571-00
80009
04713
02735
80009
TR
MICROCKT, DGTL: 8 S G S F & S O E BUS KTR
T H
MICROCKT ,DGTL:8 S G S F & S O E BUS R T
T H
TR
GR
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:DUAL BIFET,OP A P
ML
MICROCKT, DGTL: C O , DIFF 4CHANNEL MUX
MS
MICROCKT, DGTL:CMOS, DIFF 4CHANNEL MUX
MICROCKT, LINEAR:DUAL OPNL AWL, SCREENED
02735
02735
80009
02735
02735
01295
CD40948F
CD4094BF
156-2873-00
CD4052BF-98
CD4052BF-98
MC1458JG4
MICROCKT,DGTL:CMOS,DIFF 4CHC\NNEL M
U
MICROCKT,DGTL:CMOS,DIFF 4-CHANNEL MJD(
MICROCKT,LINEAR:DUAL INOEP DIFF A P
ML
MICROCKT,DGTL:ECL,TPL LINE RCVR
MICROCKT,DGTL: ECL,QMD D I E LINE RCVR
QUICK CHIP:TRIGGER, IC PACKAGE
02735
02735
02735
04713
04713
80009
CD4052BF-98
CD4052BF-98
CA3054-98
MClOH116(L O P)
R
MC10115L OR P
234-0239-20
QUICK CHIP: TRIGGER, IC PACKAGE
MICROCKT,DGTL:CMOS,HM INVERTER
MICROCKT,ffiTL:3-LINE T & LINE DECODER
O
MICROCKT, DGTL :BIDIRECT UNIV SR, SCREENED
MICROCKT, DGTL:QWDRUPLE S-R LATCH
MICROCKT,DGTL:CMOS,8ClWMEL MD
I(
80009
27014
01295
80009
04713
04713
234-0239-20
W4tC04N
SN74LS138N
156-0768-01
74LS279(N OR J)
MC14051BCL
MICROCKT ,DGTL:SEMI C S ,ST0 CELL, SO LGC
UT
LW
MICROCKT ,LINEAR :VOLTM C M A A O
O PRT R
MICROCK1,DGTL:ECL,SEMI CUSTOM, FAST LOGIC
80009
01295
80009
156-2655-00
LM311P
156-2654-00
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Tektmnix
Carponent No.
PartNo.
A10U603
A10U604
A10U606
A 10U701
A10U702
A10U801
156-0631 -00
156-0860-00
156-0140-00
155-0322-00
156-1 126-00
156-0158-07
-
E46A
Serial/~ly
No.
Effective
Ibcant
M . Part No.
r
Nane & kcription
MICROCKT, DGTL :ECL ,QUAD 2 INPUT OR/NOR GATE
MICROCKT, DGTL: ECL,TRIPLE LINE RECEIVER
MICROCKT, DGTL :TTL ,HEX BUFFEWDRIVER
MICROCKT,LINEAR:VERTICAL W T P N AMPLIFIER
MICROCKT ,LINEAR :VOLTAGE COMPARATOR
MICROCKT, LINEAR: DUAL OPNL AMPL, SCREENED
MC10101(L OR P)
MC10116L
SN7417N
155-0322-00
LM311P
K1458JG4
QUICK CH1P:GPS HORIZ PREAMP
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:DUAL OP AMP, HIGH OUTPUT CUR
MICROCKT ,LINEAR :DUAL OPNL AMPL. SCREENED
MICROCKT,DGTL :HCMOS ,ANALOG MUX, 8 C M N E L
MICROCKT,L1NEAR:VOLTAGE REFERENCE
MICROCKT. L1NEAR:OPNL AMPL
AlOUllOl
A10U1102
A10U1103
AlOUllW
A10U1106
AlOVWOl
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:DUAL BIFET,OP AMPL
MICROCKT,LINEAR :DUAL COMPARATOR
MICROCKT, DGTL:8 STG SHF & STORE BUS RGTR
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS. TRI PLE 3-CHAN MW
MICROCKT, DGTL :CMOS, TRI PLE 3-CH9N MUI(
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SIf8.2V,2 " '%,0.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI :ZEN,SI,8.2V,2%,O.4WfDO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI :ZEN,SI ,8.2V,2 " '%,0.4WfDO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZENfS1,8.2V,%,0.4W,W-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN.SI,7.5Vf5%.O.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,6.2Vf5%,0.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,6.2V,5%,0.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,12V,5%,0.4W,DO-763B
SEMICOND DVC,DI :ZEN,SI ,12V,5%,0.4W,DO-763B
SEMICOND DVC,DI :ZEN.SI ,15V,5%,0.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,0I:ZEN,SIf24V,5%,0.4W
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,9.lV,5%,0.4W,DO-7
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:25,27
AWG,6.4 L
WIRE SET, ELEC: SOCKET ASSY CRT
LEAD,ELECTRICAL:22 AWG,5.0 L,9-N
LEAD, ELECTRICAL:22 A%, 5.0 L,9-N
LEAD, ELECTRICAL :2 2 A%, 5.0 L ,9-N
LEAD, ELECTRICAL :2 2 A%, 5 . 0 L ,9-N
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DIMMY RES, 0.094 OD X 0.225 L
BUS, CONDUCTOR:M Y
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DlMMY
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DLMMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DlMMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DLMMY
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DLMMY
RES ,O. 0 9 4
RES ,0.094
RES ,O. 094
RES ,0.094
RES, 0.094
RES ,0.094
OD
OD
OD
OD
OD
OD
X
X
X
X
X
X
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
BUS,CONDKTOR: D M Y
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DLMMY
BUS, CONDUCTOR: DUMMY
BUS ,CONDUCTOR: D M Y
BUS, CONDUCTOR: DIMMY
BUS ,CONDUCTOR: DlMMY
RES, 0.094
RES, 0.094
RES ,O. 0 9 4
RES ,0.094
RES ,O. 094
RES ,0.094
OD
OD
OD
OD
OD
OD
X
X
X
X
X
X
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
BUS, CONDUCTOR: D M Y
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D W
BUS, CONDUCTOR: D M Y
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DIMMY
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DtMMY
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DlMMY
RES, 0.094
RES, 0.094
RES, 0.094
RES ,0 .a94
RES ,0.094
RES ,O. 0 9 4
OD
OD
OD
OD
OD
OD
X 0.225 L
X 0.225 L
X 0.225 L
X 0.225 L
X 0.225 L
X 0.225 L
BUS, CDNDUCT0R:DUYMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225 L
BUS, CONDUCTOR: DLMMY RES ,O. 0 9 4 OD X 0.225 L
BUS, CONDUCTOR:DUMMY RES ,0.094 OD X 0.225 L
OMA 0 7
OMA 07
OM4 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OM4 07
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Conwnent No.
A1O 4 4
W0
A1OW405
AlW406
A1O 4 7
W0
A1OW408
A1OW410
Tektmnix
Part No.
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
Serial/Assdly k.
Effective Dscant
tlaAle & Description
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DUMMY
BUS,CONWCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:WY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DM
RES,0.094
RES,0.094
RES,0.094
RES,0.094
RES,0.094
RES.0.094
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
C ASSY,SP,ELEC:18 COND,8.5 L,RIBBON
A
CA ASSY,SP, ELEC:12 COND.11.3 L,RIBBON
BUS, C N U T R:D M R S,0.094 OD X 0.225
O D CO
E
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D M Y RES.0.094 OD X 0.225
L
L
L
L
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS, C N U T R:D M Y
O D CO
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D M Y
UM
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
RES.0.094
R S,0.094
E
RES,0.094
RES,0.094
RES, 0.094
RES,0.094
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
OD X
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DU.MY RES,0.094 OD X
BUS,CONDUCTOR:WY RES.0.094 OD X
B S,CONDUCTOR: D M Y R S,O. (194 OD X
U
E
BUS,CONDUCTOR:~Y RES.O.094 OD X
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D M Y RES,0.094 OD X
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY RES.0.094 OD X
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DM
BUS,CONWCTOR: D M Y
BUS, C N U T R:D M Y
O D CO
BUS, C N U T R:D M Y
O D CO
BUS,CONWCTOR:WY
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D M Y
RES,0.094
R S ,0.094
E
R S ,0.094
E
R S,0.094
E
RES,0.094
RES, 0.094
OD
OD
OD
O
D
OD
X
X
X
X
X
OD X
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
BUS,CONDUCTOR:MMMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:WY
BUS, C N U T R:D M Y
O D CO U M
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:WY
RES,0.094
RES,O.094
RES.0.094
R S ,0.094
E
RES,0.094
RES.0.094
OD X
OD X
OD X
O X
D
OD X
OD X
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS,CONWCTOR:DLMMY
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS, C N U T R D M Y
O D CO :
BUS, C N U T R D M Y
O D CO :
BUS, C N U T R:W Y
O D CO
RES,0.094
RES,0.094
RES, 0.094
RES, 0.094
R S ,0.094
E
R S,O. 094
E
OD
OD
O
D
O
D
OD
00
BUS, C N U T R D M Y
O D CO :
BUS, C N U T R:D M Y
O D CO
BUS,CONDUCTOR: M Y
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D M
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY
BUS, C N U T R DM Y
O D CO : L M
RES, 0.094
R S,O. 094
E
RES. 0.094
RES, 0.094
RES,0.094
RES, 0.094
OD
OD
OD
OD
L
L
L
L
X 0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OD X
OD X
BUS, C N U T R:DMY R S ,O. 094 OD X 0.225 L
O D CO
E
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DMY RES.0.094 OD X 0.225 L
BUS, C N U T R DM Y R S ,O. 094 OD X 0.225 L
O D CO : L M E
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
W 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
(mA
- 2246A
Rep1aceable Electrical Parts
Carpanent No.
A1(341248
A10W1249
A10W1250
AlOW1251
A10W1252
A1OW1255
Tektrcmix
Part k.
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
-
2246A
Serial/Assenbly No.
Effective t)scart
)bne &
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DM Y
LM
B S ,CONDUCTOR: DM Y
U
LM
BUS,CONDUCTOR: D M Y
LM
BUS, C N U T R :DWY
O D CO
BUS, CONDUCTOR: D M Y
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DWY
RES, 0.094
RES, 0.094
RES, 0.094
R S ,O. 094
E
R S ,O. 094
E
R S ,0.094
E
wr.
Code
Dgcriptim
O X
D
O X
D
O X
D
O X
D
O X
D
O X
D
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
0.225
L
L
L
L
L
L
BUS, CONDUCTOR: DWY RES, 0.094 O X 0.225 L
D
BUS, C N U T R :DM Y R S ,O. 094 O X 0.225 L
O D CO L M E
D
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DIMMY R S .0.094 O X 0.225 L
E
D
RESONATOR,CER :1
OMHZ
Mr. Part No.
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
24546
OM4
OM4
OMA
OM4
OMA 07
07
07
07
07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
OMA 07
CSA 10: 00 MXll
~ ~ l a c e a b Electrical Parts
la
Carpanent No.
Tektmni x
Part No.
A12
A1252105
A12R2101
A12R2102
A12R2103
A12R2104
670-9402-01
131-3626-00
311-2343-00
311-2345-00
311-2343-00
3 11-2345-00
Serial/Assdly No.
Effectiw (bccint
Naine & DescriptCcm
CIRCUIT B A S :POTENTIOMETER
D SY
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:SIPSTRIPRCPT17POSITION
RES,VAR,NM:CKT BD,X M , 2 0 % , 0 . 9
RES,VAR,NW:CKT B 5K Om,20%,0.5W
D
RES,VAR,NW:CKT BD,5K OtM,20%,0.5W
RES,VAR,NW:CKT BD SK Om,20%,0.9
-
M.
r
Cde
W. PartWo.
80009
00779
32997
32997
32997
32997
670-9402-01
643649-1
91ZlAZ45EAO119
91ZlAZ45EAO117
91ZlAZ45EA0119
91ZlAZ45E40117
2246A
Rep1aceabl e E lect ri cal Parts
Carpanent No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
A14
A14C2001
A14CR2001
A14CR2002
A14CR2003
A14CR2004
670-9399-01
281-0909-00
152-0141-02
152-0141-02
152-0141-02
152-0141-02
- 2246A
Serial/kehly
Effktive
kt.
ascart
Nane & k c r i p t i a n
CIRCUIT BD ASSY :SWITCH
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI.30V,150M9,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC.DI :SW,SI,30Vf150MA,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC.DI:SW,SI,30V,15~,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
Mr. Part No.
670-9399-01
MAlW7RlH223M-T
W 5 2 7 (1N4152)
DA2527 ( 1N4152)
DA2527 ( 1N4152)
DA2527 (1N4152)
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,15M4,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI:SW,SI,30V,150M4,30V,DO-35
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
DA2527 (1N4152)
DA2527 (lN4152)
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMIllING
EMITTING
EMITTING
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
QLMP 1587
Q W 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
EMITTING
EMIllING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
DI0:GREEN
DI0:YELLW
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
DI0:GREEN
DI0:YELLW
DI0:YELLW
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QlMP 1587
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMIITING
EMITTING
D1O:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
LT
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
DI0:YELLW
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:GREEN
DI0:YELLW
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1487
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
LT
LT
LT
LT
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMITTING
EMIllING
DI0:GREEN
DI0:YELLOW
DI0:YELLW
DI0:YELLW
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
LT EMITTING DI0:GREEN
RES NTWKfFXD,FI:9,1K 0 W f 8 1 . 2 5 W
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:S,lK OHM,2%1.25W
MICROCKT ,DGTL :8 BIT SR,PRL LOAD,SCREENED
MICROCKT,ffiTL:8 BIT SR,PRL LOAD,SCREENED
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1487
QLMP 1587
QLMP 1587
750-101-R1K 01-M
750-101-R1K O
M
156-0789-02
156-0789-02
Rep1aceable flectri cal Parts
Ccnwnent No.
A15
A15C2601
A15C2602
A15C2603
A15C2604
A15C2605
Tektmix
Part No.
671-0247-00
281-0809-00
285-1300-01
285-1300-01
285-1300-01
285-1300-01
Serial/Assdly No.
Effective Ibcart
- 2246A
m. Part No.
Naae & Description
CIRCUIT BD ASSY :DAC SUBSYS
CAP, FXD,CER D I :ZOO PF,5%, 100V
CAP,FXD,MTLzD:O.lUF, 10 " k,63V
CAPfFXD,MTLZD:O.1UF,10%,63V
CAP,FXD,MTLzD:O.lUF, 10%,63V
CAP, FXD,MTLZD:O.lUF, 10%,63V
671-0247-00
MA1OlA201JA4
185/0.1/W63/ABA
185/0.1/W63/AM
185/0.1/W63/ABA
185/0.1/W63/AM
CAPfFXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,10%,63V
CAP.FXDfMTLZD:O.1UF.10%,63V
CAP, FXD.MTLZD:O.lUF. l0%.63V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:O.lUF, 10%,63V
CAP, FXDfMTLZD:O.1UF,10 " k,63V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf 20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022Wf20%,50V
CAP,FXD.CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022W,20 " Af50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :0.022UFf20%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :lUF,+80-20 " k, 25V
SKT,PL-IN,ELEK:12 POS,SIP,LOW PROFILE
RESfFXD,FILM:4.99K Mf1%,0.2W,TC=TO
MA1W7RlH223M-T
MAl2X7RlH223M-T
MA1W7RlH223M-T
SR302E105fAATR
136-0948-00
CRBZO FXE 41(99
RESfFXD,FILM:4.7K OHMf5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM: 2.49K M,1%,0.2W, TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,S%,0.2W
RES NM,FXDfFI:9,1K M,2%1.25U
RES NTUKfFXD,FI:9,1K 0tMf2%1.2Yrl
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OtM,%,O.ZW
TR20JE 04K7
CRB20 FXE 2K49
TR20JE100E
750-101-R1K O
M
750-101-R1K O
M
TRZOJEOlKO
MICROCKT, DGTL:8-BIT MICROCOMPUER
MICROCKT ,LINEAR: D/A CONVERTER, HIGH SPEED
MICROCKT,DGTL:QUAD 2-INP NAND GATE
MICROCKT ,DGTL: CMOS, 8-CHANNEL MllX
MICROCKT, DGTL :CMDS,8CHANNEL MUX
MICROCKT,LINEAR:OPERATIONAL AMP,QUAD BI-FET
MICROCKT,LINEAR:OPERATIONAL AMP,QUPD BI-FET
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:OPERATIONAL
MICROCKT,LINEAR:WAL BI-FET
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:25 COND,1.6
SKT, PL-IN ELEK:MICROCIRCUIT,
AMP,QUPD BI-FET
OPNL AMPL
L,RIBBON
28 DIP
Rep1aceabl e Electrical Parts
Crraponent No.
A1 6
A16BT2501
A16C2300
A1 6C2301
A16C2302 .
A16C2303
Tektmnix
Part No.
671-0314-00
146-0055-00
281-0759-00
285-1300-01
285-1300-01
285-1300-01
-
2246A
Serial/bs & ly
No.
Effectiw ascart
Mr.
GI &
80009
TKO510
04222
55112
55112
55112
PartNo.
671-0314-00
BR-2/3A-E2P
MAlOlA220KAA
185/0.1/W63/ABA
185/0.1/W63/ABA
185/0.1/W63/ABA
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UF,10 " A150V
54583
55112
55112
55112
TK1573
55112
MAlW7RltQ23M-T
185/0.1/W63/ABA
185/0.1/W63/ABA
1850.47K50ABB
ORDER BY DESCR
1850.47K50ABB
CAP, FXD,MTLZD:0.22UF,10%,63V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022W,20%.50V
CAP,D(D,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :O. 1UF12O%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :O. 1UF,20%, 50V
TK1573
54583
54583
54583
04222
04222
ORDER BY DESCR
MA12X7RlH223M-T
M412X7RllQ23M-T
MAlZX7RlH223M-T
SAlOSElOllMAA
SA105E104MAA
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,5OV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF120 " A,50V
CAP,FXD,CER D1 :ZOO PF,%,lOOV
CAP,FXD,CER Dl :0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:51PF,l%,lOW
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF, 20%, 50V
54583
54583
04222
54583
04222
54583
MAlW7RllQ23M-T
M41 W7R1@23M-T
MAlOlA201JAA
MA12X7RlH223M-T
MAlOlA510GAA
MAlZX7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI :51PF,I%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:51PF,1%,100V
CAP,R(D,MTLZD:O.lUF,10%,63V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF,20A,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,2W0,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
04222
04222
55112
54583
54583
54583
MAlOMlOGAA
MAlOMlOGAA
185/0.1/W63/ABA
MAlW7RlHZ23M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RllQ23M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF120%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF120 " k,50V
CAP,FXD,CER D1:0.022UFl20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF120%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0. 022UFl20 " k,
50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20 " /,,50V
54583
54583
54583
54583
54583
54583
MA1W 7 R 1 lQ23M-T
MAlW7RllQ23M-T
MA12X7RlH223M-T
MAlW7R1 & 23M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlZX7RlH223M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF,20A150V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:200 PF,5%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :200 PF,5%, 100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022UF.20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:51PF,l%,lOW
CAP,FXD,CER DI:51PF,1%,100V
54583
04222
04222
54583
04222
04222
MAlW7RllQ23M-T
MAlOlA201JAA
t44101A201JAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlOlA5106AA
MA1 01A510GAA
CAP,FXD,CER DI :51PF,I%,
100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:51PFl1%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :51PF,I%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,2VA,SOV
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF120%, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20%,50V
04222
04222
04222
54583
54583
54583
MAlOlA5106AA
MAlOlA510GAA
MAlOlA510GAA
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RllQ23M-T
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.O22UF,20 " A,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :0.022UF. 20 " A, 50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :22PF,10%, 100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI :22PF,lo%, 100V
54583
54583
04222
04222
MAlW7RlH223M-T
MAlW7RlH223M-T
M4lOlA220KAA
MAlOlA220KAA
N & Descripticm
t
m
CIRCUIT BD ASSY :PROCESSOR
BATTERY,DRY:3.0V.1200 MAH,LITHIW
CAP,FXD,CER DI :22PF,10%. 100V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:O.1UF110%.63V
CAP,FXD,MTUD:O.lUF, 10%,63V
CAP,FXD,MTUD:O.lUF,l0%,63V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.022W120 " k,50V
CAP,FXD.MTLZD:O.lUF.l0%,63V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:O.lUF, 10 " Al63V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD: 0.47UFlla, 50V
CAP,FXDlMTLU):0.22UF,10 " A,63V
)Ifr.
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Comment No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
A16C2516
A16C2517
A16C2518
A16C2521
A16C2522
A16632523
285-1301-01
281-0775-01
285-1301-01
281-0772-00
281-0772-00
281-0772-00
Serial/As & lyNo.
Effective Dscart
- 2246A
CHr.
Code
Mr. Partk.
55112
04222
55112
04222
04222
04222
1850.47K50A88
SAlO5E104MAA
1850.47K50ABB
MA201C47mBA
WOlC47mAA
MA201C47W
04222
04222
04222
54583
54583
54583
WOlC47mAA
MA201C472K.44
MA201C47mAA
MA12X7RlW23M-T
MA12X7RlW23M-T
MA12X7RlIQ23M-T
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 10UF,+50-20% 2 D
WC
CAP,FXD,CER DI:4700PFfl0%,l00V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :4700PF, lm,lOOV
CAP,FXD,CER D I :4700PF,10%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :4700PF, 10%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :4700PF, 1096,100V
54473
04222
04222
04222
04222
04222
ECE-BI EV100S
MA201C472KAA
MA201C472KAA
WOlC472KAA
MA201C47mAA
MA201C472KAA
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
D I :4700PF, 10%,100V
D I :4700PFf10%,100V
D I :4700PF, 10%, lOOV
DI:51PF,1%,100V
DI:51PFf1%,100V
D I :51PF, 1%, 100V
04222
04222
04222
04222
04222
04222
MA201C472KAA
MA201C472KAA
MA201C472KAA
M4101A510GAA
MAlOlA510GAA
MAlOlA510GAA
CAP, FXD,CER D l :51PF, 1%, 1OW
CAP, FXD,CER D I :51PF, 1%, 1
W
SEMICOND DVC,DI :SW,SI ,30V.150M9,3WfW-35
SEMICOND DVC DI:SI.SCHOTTKY,6Wf2.2PF
SEMICOND DVC,DI :SW,SI.3Wf150M9,30V,DO-35
SEMICOND DVC DI:SI,SCHOTTKY,60V,2.2PF
04222
04222
03508
50434
03508
50434
MAlOlA510GAA
MAlOlA510GAA
DA2527 (1N4152)
IN6263
DA2527 (lN4152)
IN6263
LT EMITTING DI0:YELLW
CONN ,RCPT, ELEC :S I P STRIP RCPT
SKT, PL-IN, ELEK: 1 8 POS, SIP, LOW
SKT, PL-IN, ELEK: 12 WS,SIP,LOW
CONN, RCPT, ELEC: SIP STRIP K P T
CONN ,RCPT, ELEC :S I P STRIP RCPT
50434
00779
QLMP 1487
643657-1
136-0949-00
136-0948-00
643652-1
643657-1
Nme & Descriptim
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UF,10%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O. lUF.2VL.50V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:0.47UFf 10%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:4700PFfl0%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :4700PF,@
,%' I
100V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:4700PF,l@k.l00V
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP, FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
.
D I :4700PF, 10%,100V
D I :4700PF, 10%,100V
D I :4700PFf10%,100V
D I :O. 022UFl20%, 50V
D I :0.022W.2@Af50V
DI:0.022UFf20%,50V
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S1, PWR
TRANSISTOR:NPN.SI,PWR
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,PWR
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,PWR
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI ,PWR
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S I ,PWR
2 5 POSITION
PROFILE
PROFILE
2 0 POSITION
25 POSITION
80009
80009
00779
00779
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
DARLINGTON, 1W
DARLINGTON,lW
DARLINGTON,lW
DARLINGTON,lW
DARLINGTON, 1W
DARLINGTON, 1W
80009
151-0716-01
151-0716-01
151-0716-01
151-0716-01
151-0716-01
151-0716-01
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S I ,TO-92
RES,FXDfFILM:4.99K OtM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RESfFXD,FILM:4.7K 0 ~ , 5 ~ , 0 . 2 W
RES1FXD,FILM:2.49K OtMf1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RESfFXD,FILM:20K 0HMf5%,O.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:20K OHMf596,0.2W
80009
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
151-0190-00
CRB20 FXE 4K99
TR20JE O
W
CRB2O FXE 2K49
TR203EZOK
TR2OJE20K
RESfFXD,FILM:4.7K OHMf5%,0.2W
RESrFXD,FILM:4.7K 0HMf5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:62O OtN,5kf0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:100 0Mf5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:4.7K 0tMf5%.0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:2.49K OtM,1%,0.2WlTC=TO
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JE 04W
TR20JE 04K7
TR20JE 620E
TR20JElOM
TR20JE 04K7
CRB20 FXE 2K49
RESfFXD,FILM:4.12K
RES1FXD,FILM:4.12K
RES,FXD,FILM:2.49K
RESfFXD,F1LM:2.94K
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20
CRB20
CRB20
CRB2O
Otfl1l%,0.2W,TC=TO
OtMfl%,0.2W,TC=TO
Ott4,1%,0.2W1TC=TO
0m,l%,0.2WfTC=TO
FXE
FXE
FXE
FXE
4K12
4Kl2
2K49
2K94
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Tektmnix
C m t No.
h m
Part h.
A16R2316
A16R2317
A16R2318
A16R2319
A16R2320
A16R2321
322-3231 -00
322-3231 -00
322-3238-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
- n6
4A
m.
Serial/~lyWo.
Effectiw
Ibarnt
Name & Descripticm
RES,FXD,FILM:2.49K OtM,l%,O.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:2.49K OtM,l%.0.2W,TC=TO
RES, FXD, FILM: 2.94K OW, l%,O.ZW,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K OHM.YA.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K 0HM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K Otf1,5%,0.2W
Code
m. Partb.
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE 2K49
CRB20 FXE 2K49
CRB20 FXE 2K94
TR2OJE OM7
TR2OJE 04K7
TR20JE 046'
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JE22E
TR2OJE22E
TR20JE22E
TRZOJE OM7
TRZOJE 04K7
TR20JE 04K7
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZOJE
TR20JE
W0JE
TR20JE
TR2OJE
TR2OJE
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TRZOJE
TRZ0JE
TR20JE
TR2OJE
TR20JE
TR20JE
57668
57668
57668
57668
CRB20 FXE 1K24
TR2OJEOlKO
CRB20 FXE 1K24
TR20JEOlKO
04K7
04K7
04K7
04K7
04K7
04K7
04K7
04K7
04K7
040
04K7
04K7
-
.
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Carpanart No.
A16R2417
A16R2418
A16R2419
A16R2420
A16R2421
A 6R2501
1
Tektmnix
Part No.
322-3202-00
322-3077-00
313-1101-00
313-1101-00
313-1621-00
313-1621-00
Serial/Ass & ly
Effectiw
No.
aswnt
Nam 81 Description
- 2246A
m.
Cale
RESfFXD,FILM:1.24K
W,l%,0.2WfTC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 Om,l%,O.2WfTC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM: 0tMf5%,0.2W
100
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO 0Wf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:620Mf5%,0.2W
RES;FXD,FILM:~ZOM,5%,0.2W
57668
80009
57668
57668
57668
57668
Mfr. Part No.
CRB20 FXE 1K24
322-3077-00
TR2OJE100E
TR2OJE100E
TRZOJE 620E
TR20JE 620E
RES,FXD,FILM:lKMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:1K 0HMf%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7K 0Wf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:4.7KOmf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:620OHM,%,O.ZW
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JEOlKO
TR20JEOlKO
TR20JEOlKO
TRZOJE W
TR2OJE W
TWOJE 620E
RES,FXD,FILM:620 0tMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:620 M,S%,O.ZW
RES,FXD,FILM:620 0Wf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lKMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:620OtMf5%,0.2W
RESfFXD,FILM:9,l00K
~,5%,0.125W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
11236
TR20JE 620E
TR20JE 620E
TR20JE 620E
TR20JEOlKO
TR20E 620E
750-101-NOOK
RES,FXD, FILM:620 W,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:620Mf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK~ , 5 % , 0 . ~
RES,FXD,FILM:lK0tM,5%,0.a
RES,FXD,FILM:lK Mf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lK Mf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOOHMf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:100 0Wf5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:100Mf5%,O.2W
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Tektranix
CarpanentNo.
PartMo.
A 16R2564
A16U2300
A16U2301
A16U2302
A16U2303
A16U2304
313-1101-00
156-1646-00
156-1646-00
156-1589-00
156-0513-00
156-1200-00
-
224%
Serial/Assskly No.
Effective Dsamt
M.
r
Cd
oe
Ufr. Part No.
RES,FXD,FILM:lOO OHM,5%,0.2W
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TY PE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TYPE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT ,LINEAR: D/A CONVERTER, HIGH SPEED
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, B-CWNNEL MUX
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:OPERATIONAL AMP,QUAD BI-FET
57668
TKO273
TKO273
06665
04713
01295
TR20JE100E
MD74tCT374RE
MD74KT374RE
DAC312FR
MC14051BCL
TL074CN
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:OPERATIONAL AMP,QUAD BI-FET
MICROCKT,LINEAR :VOLTAGE COMPARATOR
MICROCKT DGTL: CMOS, OCTAL D-TYPE EDGE TRIG
M ICROCKT ,DGTL :CMOS, B-CHANNEL MUX
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, 8-CHANNEL MIR:
MICROCKT DGTL :CMOS, TRI PLE 3-CHIN M U
01295
01295
TKO273
04713
04713
02735
TL074CN
LM311P
MD74tCT374RE
MC14051BCL
MC14051BCL
CD4053BF
MICROCKT, DGTL: CMOS, TRIPLE 3-CHQN MLD(
MICROCKT, DGTL:CMOS ,TRIPLE 3-CWVJ M U
MICROCKT ,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TY PE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:OPERATIONAL AMP, JFET I N W T
MICROCKT,DGTL :8 B I T MICROCOMPUTER, MASKED
MICROCKT, DGTL:CMOS ,OCTAL D-TYPE EDGE TRIG
02735
02735
TKO273
27014
CD4053BF
CD4053BF
MD74HCT374RE
LF351N/GLEA134
80009 160-3493-00
TKO273 MD74HCT374RE
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TYPE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT ,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TY PE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT,DGTL:SYN 4-BIT UP/DN CNTR,DUAL CLK
MICROCKT, DGTL: SYN 4-BIT UP/DN CNTR,MIAL CLK
MICROCKT,DGTL: NMOS, 2048 X 8 SRAM
MICROCKT,DGTL:DUAL 4 B I T B I N CNTR
TKO273
TKO273
80009
80009
TK1015
01295
MD74tCT374RE
MD74tCT374RE
156-0412-00
156-0412-00
W116P-3(DP-24)
SN74LS393N
MICROCKT, DGTL :NMOS, 4096 X 8 EPROM, PRGM
MICROCKT,DGTL:DUAL 4 B I T B I N CNTR
MICROCKT,DGTL:OCT 1 6 I N P REG AND/OR
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TY PE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT, LINEAR:D/A CONVERTER,8 B I T
MICROCKT, LINEAR:D/A CONVERTER,8 B I T
80009
01295
TK2051
TKO273
06665
06M5
160-5391-00
SN74LS393N
156-0442-00
MD74tCT374RE
DAC08-157Q
DAC08-157Q
MICROCKT, DGTL: CMOS, D I F F 4-CHANNEL MUX
MICROCKT, DGTL :CMOS, D I F F 4 - C W E L MUX
MICROCKT,L1NEAR:OPERATIONAL AMP ,QUAD B1-FET
MICROCKT, DGTL: QWO 2-INP NAND GATE
MICROCKT, DGTL:MOS,MICROPRC,8 BIT,8 MHZ
MICROCKT ,DGTL :RESET GENERATOR, 5V SUPPLY
02735
02735
01295
01295
34649
01295
CD4052BF-98
CD4052BF-98
TL074CN
SN74LSOO(N OR J)
C80188PC
TL7705 ACP
MICROCKT,DGTL:QW 2-INP OR GATE
MICROCKT,DGTL:QW 2-INP NAND GATE
MICROCKT ,ffiTL:OCTAL D TYPE TRANS LATCHES
MICROCKT,DGTL :OCTAL D TYPE TRANS LATCHES
MICROCKT, ffiTL:OCTAL BUS XCVR W/3 STATE OUT
MICROCKT. DGTL :OCTAL BUS XCVR W/3 STATE OUT
01295
01295
04713
04713
80009
80009
SN74LS32(N OR J)
SN74LSOO(N OR J )
SN74LS373 ND/JD
SN74LS373 ND/JD
156-1111-02
156-1111-02
MICROCKT, DGTL :3-LINE TO & LINE DECODER
MICROCKT,DGTL:3-LINE TO 8-LINE DECODER
MICROCKT,DGTL:l31072 X 8 B1T.W-EPROM,250NS
MICROCKT,DGTL:8192 X 8 CMOS,SRAM
MICROCKT,DGTL: CMOS, OCTAL D-TYPE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT,DGTL :CMOS, OCTAL D-TY PE EDGE TRIG
01295
01295
80009
TKO961
TKO273
TKO273
SN74LS138N
SN74LS138N
160-5063-00
uPD4464C-20
MD74KT374RE
MD74tCT374RE
MICROCKT, DGTL: STTL, OCTAL SCtMITT TRIGGER
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:17 COIJD,5.1 L,RIBBON
SKT, PL-IN ELEK:MICROCIRCUIT, 2 8 D I P
SKT, PL-IN ELEK: CHI P CARRIER, 68 CONTACTS
SKT,PL-IN ELEK:MICROCKT,32 P I N
RESONATOR: 16MHZ. CER
01295
80009
09922
19613
80009
80009
SN74S240J
174- 1040-00
D I LB28P-108
268-5400-00-1102
136-0963-00
119-2936-00
Nane 81 Description
.
.
Replaceable Electrical Parts
CaAmnent No.
Tektmix
Part No.
A18
A18C2201
A18C2202
A18C2203
A18C2204
A18C2206
670-9398-03
285-1 177-01
290-1118-00
290-0922-01
290-1151-00
281-0775-01
Serial/AsswblyNo.
Effective Dsant
- 2246A
Wwae & Descriptian
CIRCUIT BD ASSY :LV P M R SUPPLY ,A18
CAPfFXD,PLASTIC:1UF,10 " A,450V
CAP, FXD,ELCTLT :22WF, 20%, 400V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 1000UF,4100% -la, 0
5V
CAP, FXD. ELCTLT :lOOUFf20 " A, 63V
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O. lUF,20%,50V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :4.7UF. 20%. lOOV
CAP,FXD,CER D I :O.OlUF, 10%,100V
CAP, FXDfELCTLT:4.7UF,20%,l00V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O.OlUF, 10%,100V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :27PF,5%,100V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD: 1500PF,10 " k,250V
CAP,FXD,MTLZD: 150OPF,10%,250V
CAP, FXD, PLAST1C:O. 15W,10%,250VAC
CAP, FXD, PLAST1C:O. 15UF, 10%,25OVAC
CAP, FXD,MTLZD: 1500PFf10 " k,250V
CAP,FXD,CER D1:0.047UFf20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER D I :O.OIUF,l~kflOOV
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 100WF,+100%-lVA, 12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :1000UF,+lOVA-la, 12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :1000UF. +1WA-lVk, 12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :1000UF, +lWA-10%,12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: lOOOUF,+lWA-10%, 12V
04222
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 1000UF,+i00%-10%. 12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :100OUF,+100%-10%. 12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :1000UF,+100%-la, 12V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 470UF,+100%, 25V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :470UF,+100%, 25V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT:39UF,+100%-10%,150V
56289
ORDER BY DESCR
56289
56289
56289
56289
56289
ORDER
ORDER
ORDER
ORDER
ORDER
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT:39UF,+100%-10%,150V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 470UFf+100%, 25V
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT :470UF,+100 " Af 25V
CAPfFXD,ELCTLT:4.7UF,20%, lOOV
CAP,FXD,CER DI:O.lUF,20%,50V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :1000PF,20%, 100V
CAPfFXD,MTLZD:0.O1UF,20%,4KV
CAP,FXDfMTUD:0.01UF,20%,4KV
CAP, FXD, ELCTLT: 100UFf20%,63V
CAP, FXD,CER D I :O.OlUF, 10%,100V
SEMICOND DVC,DI:RECT,SI,600V,34
SEMICOND DVC,DI :RECT,SI ,400V, l A
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICONO
SEMICOND
DVCfDI:RECT,SI,400V,1A
DVC, D I :RECT,SI ,400V. l A
DVC,DI :RECT,SI , 2 W f 3 A
DVC,D1:RECT,SIf20V,3A
DVC,DI:RECT.SIf400V,1A
DVC,DI :RECT,SI ,400V,lA
SEMICOND DVC,DI :RECT,SI , 4 0 0 V 3
SEMICOND DVC,DI :RECT,SI ,400V,lA
SEMICOND DVCfDI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
SEMICOIJD DVC,DI:RECT,SIf400V,lA
SEMICOND DVC,DI :RECT,SI ,400V,lA
SEMICOND DVC,DI :RECT,SI ,400V.M
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
SEMICOND
DVCfDI:RECT,S1,400V.lA
DVC,DI :RECT,SI ,400V, 1A
DVC,DI:RECT,SI,2Wf1A,A59
DVC,DI :RECT.SI ,20V,lA,A59
MA201C103KAA
ORDER BY DESCR
ORDER BY DESCR
ORDER BY DESCR
ORDER BY DESCR
ORDER BY DESCR
BY
BY
BY
BY
BY
DESCR
DESCR
DESCR
DESCR
DESCR
56289 ORDER BY
DESCR
56289
m m BY DESCR
56289
80009
OER BY DESCR
290-1144-00
SAl05E104MAA
MA101C102MAA
04222
04222
Rep1aceabl e E l ectrical Parts - 2246A
Carpcnent No.
Tektmnix
Part No.
A18CR2227
A18CR2228
A18CR2231
A18CR2232
A18CR2233
A18CR2234
152-0400-00
152-0400-00
152-0040-00
152-0040-00
152-0040-00
152-0040-00
Serial/Asdly No.
Effective
[)scant
Hfr.
M . PartIJo.
r
Wane & Description
SEMICOND DVC, D I :RECT, S I ,400V, 1A
SEMICOND DVC, D I :RECT ,S I ,400V. 1A
SEMICOND DVC,DI:RECT,SI,GOOV,lA,W-41
SEMICOND DVC, D I :RECT,SI , W V , lA,DO-41
SEMICOM) DVC, D I :RECT,SI ,600V, 1A.W-41
SEMICOND DVC, D I :RECT, S I
,600V, l A , 00-41
04713
04713
80009
80009
80009
80009
SR1977K
SR1977K
152-0040-00
152-0040-00
152-0040-00
152-0040-00
SEMICOND DVC,DI:RECT,SI,400V,lA
SEMICOND DVC, D I :RECT, S I, W , 1A
4
SEMICOND DVC, D I :SW, S I ,30V, 1 5 H . 30V, DO-35
LAMP,GLOW:9OV MAX.0.3M4,AID-T,WIRE
LD
CONN,RCPT,ELEC:3 POSITION,O.Ol SPACING
CONN RCPT ,ELEC :HEADER, RTANG, 2 POS ,0.1 SP
04713
04713
03508
TKO213
80009
00779
SR1977K
SR1977K
DA2527 (1N4152)
JH005/3011 JA
131-3645-00
640452-2
TKl441
TKl441
80009
80009
.
COIL,RF: FXD,33UH, POWER
INDUCTOR, FIXED:33UH, 1 %18
0 .A
INDUCTOR, FIXED:33UH. 1Vk. 18
.4
INDUCTOR, FIXED:33UH, lVk, 1.8A
INWCTOR,FIXED:33W,10%,1.6A
INDUCTOR. FIXED: 150UH,O,.82A
COIL, RF: FXD, POWER
COIL,RF:FXD,POWER
CONN ,RCPT, ELEC: HEADER, 1 3 CIRCUIT, 0.156 SP
TRANS I
STOR :MOSFET ,N-CHAN ,TO-220
TRANS1STOR: NPN ,S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI ,TO-92
80009
86-343-2
86-343-2
131-3637-00
151-1245-00
151-0190-00
151-0188-00
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S I ,TO-92
THYRISTOR, SCR:8A, 200V, SENS GATE, TO-220
TRANSISTOR: NPN, S I ,TO-92
STOR :
TRANSI
TRANSI
STOR :PNP ,S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,TO-92
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
TKl016
151-0190-00
151-0565-00
151-0190-00
151-0852-00
151-0188-00
S1423-TPE2
TRANSISTOR: PNP, S I ,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:FET,MOS M,N-CHAN,TO-220
RES,FXD,WW:O.l OHM,5%,2W
RES,FXD,FILM:180K OHMt5%.0.5W
RES,FXD,FILM: 180K OHM,5%,0.5W
RES,FXD,FILM: lOOK OHM,5%,0.2W
TK1016
04713
75042
57668
57668
57668
S1423-TPE2
IRF533WLEADFORM
BWH-R100O.J
TR50J-E180K
TRWE180K
TR20JElOW
RES, FXD, FILM:100K O H , 5kVO.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO
RES,FXD,FILM:lK OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOOK 0MtYk,0.2W
RES,FXD,CMPSN:51K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:3.3K OHM,5%,0.2W
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
57668
TR20JE100K
CRB20 FXE 499E
TWOJEOlKO
TR20JE100K
TR20JE 51K
TR20JE 03K3
80009
Rep1 aceabl e flectri cal Parts
Canpanent No.
Tektronix
Part No.
A18R2231
A18R2232
A18R2233
A18R2236
A18R2237
A18R2238
Serial/Assmbly No.
315-0101-03
313-1102-00
313-1103-00
313-1104-00
313-1105-00
313-1753-00
Effectiw
- 2246A
Mr. Part No.
Dscont
CB1015
TR2OJEOlKO
TR20JElOKD
TR20JElOM
TR20JElM
TR20JE 7%
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK M,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD, FILM:20M,Y?,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:IOK
m,s%,o.m
RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 0W,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:2.7 OliM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM:lOK OliM,5%,0.2W
TR20JE 51K
CRB20 FXE 1
W
TR20JE 51K
EM065
GFNVJ 1 0 K O4
H
TRZOJE100E
SWITCH, PUSH: DPST, 4A, 250VAC
SWITCH,THRMSTC:NC,105 DEG C OP,80 DEG C CL
TRANSFORMER, RF :COUPLED INoUCToR
X M , PWR, STU: HIGH VOLTAGE
TRANSFORMER,RF: DRIVER SATURATING
X M , TRIGGER: LINE, 1:1 TURNS RATIO
MICROCKT, L1NEAR:BIPOLAR.M F SPLY,CONT
W
SEMICOND DVC,DI :
SEMICOND DVC,DI :ZEN,SI ,51V,Yk,0.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,6.2V,Y%,0.4W,DO-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI :ZEN,SI ,20V,5?,0.4W,W-7
RES, V SENSITIVE:250VAC, 20W,METAL OXIDE
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,6.2V,5%,0.4W,D0-7
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,30V,2%,4OOW
SEMICOND DVC,DI:ZEN,SI,20V,5%,0.4W,DO-7
LEAD, ELECTRICAL: 1 8 AGX;,3.3 L,8-9
LEAD, ELECTRICAL: 1 8 AWG.3.3 L, & O
LEAD, ELECTRICAL:26 AWG,2.6 L,9-N
LEAD, ELECTRICAL:26 A*, 2.6 L,9-N
BUS,CONDUCTOR:DIMMY RES, 0.094 OD X 0.225 L
Rep1aceabl e El ectrical Parts
-
22468
V1
Tektmnix
Seria1/Amably No.
Part No.
Effective asaxlt
119-2063-00
119-2118-01
159-0023-00
119-2055-00
131-0955-00
154-0905-00
W30
195-3990-00
Canpanent No.
825
DL21
F2201
FL2201
J16
Mr.
Cade
Mr.
FAN,TUBEAXIAL:12V,130).t9,19.4 C M
F
DELAY LINE, ELEC:
FUSE,CARTRIffiE:3AG,2A,ZSOV,SLOW BO
LW
FILTER, RFI :3A, 115-230V, 48-44M
C N ,RCPT ,ELEC :BNC ,FEMALE
ON
ELECTRON TUBE: C T
R
61529
80009
71400
05245
13511
80009
AlF891003
119-2118-01
MDX2
3EFlF
31-279
154-0905-00
LEAD, ELECTRICAL: 18 ACXj.4.5 L, 5-4
80009
195-3990-00
#ane & Description
Part
No.
Section 9 2 2 4 6 A Service
DIAGRAMS AND CIRCUIT BOARD ILLUSTRATIONS
Symbols
Y14.15, 1966
Y14.2, 1973
Y10.5, 1968
Graphic symbols and class designation letters are
based on ANSl Standard Y32.2-1975.
Logic symbology is based on ANSl Y32.14-1973 in
terms of positive logic. Logic symbols depict the logic
function performed and may differ from the manufacturer's data.
Drafting Practices.
Line Conventions and Lettering.
Letter Symbols for Quantities Used in
Electrical Science and Electrical
Engineering.
American National Standard Institute
1430 Broadway
New York, New York 10018
The overline on a signal name indicates that the signal
performs its intended function when it is in the low state.
Component Values
Electrical components shown on the diagrams are in
the following units unless noted otherwise:
Abbreviations are based on ANSl Y1 .l-1972.
Capacitors = Values one or greater are in picofarads (pF).
Values less than one are in microfarads
(PF).
Resistors = Ohms (n).
Other ANSI standards that are used in the preparation
of diagrams by Tektronix, Inc. are:
The information and special symbols below may appear in this manual..
Assembly Numbers and Grid Coordinates
The schematic diagram and circuit board component
location illustration have grids. A lookup table with the
grid coordinates is provided for ease of locating the
component. Only the components illustrated on the facing
diagram are listed in the lookup table. When more than
one schematic diagram is used t o illustratethe circuitry on
a circuit board, the circuit board illustration may only
appear opposite the first diagram on which it was illustrated; the lookup table will list the diagram number of
other diagrams that the circuitry of the circuit board
appears on.
Each assembly in the instrument is assigned an
assembly number (e.g., A20). The assembly number
appears on the circuit board outline on the diagram, in the
title for the circuit board component location illustration,
and in the lookup table for the schematic diagram and
corresponding component locator illustration. The
Replaceable Electrical Parts list is arranged by assemblies
in numerical sequence; the components are listed by
component number *(see following illustration for
constructing a component number).
Modified
Component
(Depicted in Grey, or With
Grey Outline) - See Parts List.
Function Block Title
Internal
Screwdriver
Adjustment
Strap or Link
Cam Switch
Closure Chart
(Dot indicates
switch closure)
Plug to E.C. Board
Etched Circuit Board
Outlined in Black
l ndicators
Refer to Waveform
Coaxial connectors:
male
female
Function Block
Outline
Plug Index; signifies pin No. 1
IC type
External Screwdriver Adj.
Test Voltage
Shielding
Heat Sink
Selected value, see Parts List
and Maintenance Section for
Selection Criteria
Board Name
P/O-Part of
circuit board
Assembly Number
Tektronix Part No. -/
,
for circuit boards
R330
/f
6 , ---_
* COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
X------_-
- - - --
9
=',
A
SYNC
Number iff
uSMJ
_
GENERATOR
1
-
Scam by ARTEK MEDlA = & gt;
- .
Decoupled or Filtered
Voltage
Refer t o Diagram Number
Schematic Name
and Number
L
-
METAL-FI L M
RESISTORS
@@ and @ - 1st. 2nd,
and 3rd significant figures
@ -temperature coefficient
@ -polarity and voltage rating
Figure 9-1. Color codes for resistors.
s a byARTEKMEDLQ = & gt;
cm
8
(2801, Q802, Q806, (2807
MOS FET
Q'i
FET
mc D8s
il
B
TO-92B
C B E
C E B
G
E
G
1
TO-92
METAL CASE
TRANSISTORS
TRANSISTOR
1
S
I
SCR
CATHODE
IS FLAT
G
SIDE WITH
SHORT LEAD
S
G
J
FLAT PACK
1
PLASTIC CASE
TRANSISTORS
FET
C
E
D
1
LED
IND
7
1
I
1
1
1
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
LEAD CONFIGURATIONS AND CASE STYLES ARE TYPICAL, BUT MAY VARY DUE TO VENDOR CHANGES OR
INSTRUMENT MODIFICATIONS.
Figure 9-2. Semiconductor lead configurations.
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
J
2246A Service
3. Locate the Component on the Schematic D
2. Determine the Circuit Number and Schematic Diagram.
1. Locate the Circuit Board Illustration.
a. Identify the Assembly Number of the circuit board that the component is
on by using the Circuit Board location illustration in this section or the
mechanical parts exploded views at the rear of this manual.
To identify any component mounted on
a circuit board and to locate that component in the schematic diagram.
a. Compare the circuit board with its illustration. Locate the component you
are looking for by area and shape on the illustrationto determine its Circuit
Number.
a. Locate the tabbed page that correspor
ber. Schematic diagram numbers and I
of the tabs (facing the front of the mar
b. In the manual, locate the tabbed foldout page that corresponds with the
Assembly Number of the circuit board. The circuit board assembly numbers and names are printed on the back side of the tabs (facing the rear of
the manual).
b. Scan the lookup table next to the Circuit Board illustration to find the
- Circuit Number of the component.
b. Locate the Assembly Number in the
next to the schematic diagram. Scan
that table to find the Circuit Number of
in the schematic.
c. Read the SCHEM NUMBER column next to the component's circuit number to find the Schematic Diagram number.
XY PLOTTER BOARD D I A G R A M 22
A20--XY PLOTTER BOARD
PULL-OUT
PAGE TABS
FOR
CIRCUIT BOARD
ILLUSTRATION
\
...,..
@,.
.,
Ikrlctr
I* Y l n , m m c e i.r,lon
ASSEMBLY NUMBER
SCHEMATIC
LOOKUP
TABLE
COMPONENT
LOCATION
TABLE
ILLUSTRATION FOR
INSTRUMENT
BOARD
LOCATION
1. Determine the Circuit Board Illustration and Component Location.
To identify any component in a schematic diagram and to locate that component on its respective circuit board.
a. From the schematic diagram, determine the Assembly Number of the circuit board that the component is on. The Assembly Number and Name is
boxed and located in a corner of the heavy line marking the circuit board
outline in the schematic diagram.
b. Find the Component Location table for the Assembly Number found on the
schematic. Scan the CIRCUIT NUMBER column to find the Circuit Number of the component.
NUMERAL AND LETTER AT SIGNAL LINES
TO OR FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES
THE GRID COORDINATES ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC
(FOR EXAMPLE: 8J)
2. Locate the Component on the Circuit Board.
a. In the manual, locate the tabbed page that corresponds to Assembly Number the component is on. Assembly numbers and names for circuit boards
are on the back side of the tabs.
b. Using the Circuit Number of the component and its given grid location, find
the component in the Circuit Board illustration.
c. From the small circuit board location illustration shown nexl
board, find the circuit board's location in the instrument.
d. Find the circuit board in the instrument. Compare it with thc
illustration in the manual to locate the component on the
itself.
c. Look in the BOARD LOCATION column next to the component number
and read its circuit board grid coordinates.
Figure 9-3. Locating components on schematic diagrams and circuit board illustrations.
2. Determine the Circuit Number and Schematic Diagram.
3. Locate the Component on the Schematic Diagram.
a. Compare the circuit board with its illustration. Locate the component you
are looking for by area and shape on the illustration to determine its Circuit
Number.
a. Locate the tabbed page that corresponds to the Schematic Diagram number. Schematic diaqram numbers and names are printed on the front side
of the tabs (facing ihe front of the manual).
b. Scan the lookup table next to the Circuit Board illustration to find the
Circuit Number of the component.
b. Locate the Assembly Number in the Component Location lookup table
next to the schematic diagram. Scan the CIRCUIT NUMBER column of
that table to find the Circuit Number of the component you are looking for
in the schematic.
f
C.
Read the SCHEM NUMBER column next to the component's circuit number to find the Schematic Diagram number.
c. In the SCHEM LOCATION column next to the component, read the grid
coordinates of the com~onent the schematic.
in
d. Using the grid coordinates given, find the component in the schematic
diagram.
I I
.
I
AZO-XY
PLOlTER BOARD
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SCHEMATIC
LOOKUP
TABLE
a:
I
.
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
.
I
I
1
I
I
I
;e
XY PLOTTER B O A R D D I A G R A M 22
COMPONENT
LOCATION
TABLE
@ Static
S e n s i t i v e Devices
See Halntenance Section
NUMERAL AND LETTER AT SIGNAL LINES
TO OR FROM OTHER DIAGRAMS INDICATES
THE GRID COORDINATES ON ANOTHER SCHEMATIC
(FOR EXAMPLE: 8J)
I !
2. Locate the Component on the Circuit Board.
a. In the manual, locate the tabbed page that corresponds to Assembly Number the component is on. Assembly numbers and names for circuit boards
are on the back side of the tabs.
b. Using the Circuit Number of the component and its given grid location, find
the component in the Circuit Board illustration.
c. From the small circuit board location illustration shown next to the circuit
board, find the circuit board's location in the instrument.
d. Find the circuit board in the instrument. Compare it with the circuit board
illustration in the manual to locate the component on the circuit board
itself.
Figure 9-3. Locating components on schematic diagrams and circuit board illustrations.
FOR
ASSEMBLY NUMBER
AND NAME
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAM NAME
AND NUMBER
SCHEMATIC
DIAGRAMS
0
U200. UBOlB.
1
L
-
L
-
L
AUX DATA
R FREEZE
O
PROCESSOR/INTERFACE
U501. U502. U503.
U606B. C F
,
R O
O
a
i3#
-
SRl CLOCK
b
6
A 8 B TRIGGERS
7
LEVEL SHIFTERS
U603A. 8. C. 0.
U604A, U6060, E,
0602-0607
w
o
I
R Q
O
-
3
-
10
1
L
\
A GATE T
4
,
.
4
,
1I
\I
$1
& gt;
-1
..i
x
0
0
d
o
TRIGGER CLK
Ki CONTROL
+ i7
w
A GATES
9
2
\
B GATES
J
7
d
7
L
A SWEEP
START
0300, 0309,
031 1, 0326.
0333
*
t 2 . 5 VREF--)
gC
5,'
CD '-' "
!
I
4'
A
A
-
-
HOLDOFF
OSCILLATOR
U601,
0600, 0601
x
2
'
4
J
U600, 0608,
Y600
SWEEP CONTROL
SWEEP CONTROL
LOGIC LINES
SHIFT REGISTERS
U302, U303
11
1
A B B
GATES
\
-
IItIf,
7,'
t
c
*
-
TIMING
DIVIDER
R313AO C, D,
8.
0301. U309B
HOLDOFF
-
-
r
:
1
2
I , ,
DELAY-TIME
SWITCHING
U301A. C
DELAY-TIME
COHMPARATOR
U313, U315A, C
A RAMP
0 RAMP
t
0 SWEEP TIMING
U3040,
U310, U311,
0320, 0331.
0318. 0329
I
-
k
!
=
'
[Kt=-
2
a )
,.
L
-C
-
-
L
P
A RAMP
0 RAMP
-
!
-=
li
I
*
INTENSITY GATES
I
11
A B
,
SWEEP-END
sup END
COMPARATORS t
U316A. 8. C, D
I
A INPUT
C
AND PRIMARY
POWER RECTIFIER
FL2201, RT2201.
VR2204. F220 1.
CR2231, CR2232,
CR2233, CR2234
.d
0 SWEEP
BUFFER
0323A, B,
0325
58
Ut=
/
11
,'2
-
-
HDO. HDi
\
I
g
& gt;
f
/
DLY END
0-1
4
4
L
DLY
SEL
& gt; A
A SWEEP
BUFFER
0310A. 8.
0312
7
fin
\YI
L
d + & gt; *
a
o
*
-
B SWEEP
START
0313, 0321,
0322. 0332
A SWEEP
TIMING
U307, U300,
U304A, 0307.
0330, 0320.
0305, 0306
-
?
BASELINE
STABALIZER
U309A. 0302,
0303, 0304,
0315. 0316,
0317
-
L
L
,' 3
1
PROCESSOR
CONTROL
-
-
L
-
VOLT CAL 0-2
L
\
0 .
- -b LINE
+44
TRIG@
v
1I
02201, T2203.
02202, 02203,
44.
@
Figure 9-4a. 2246A block diagram-part
THERMAL
CUTOUT
1.
,
CIR
Sans by = & gt; ARTEK M D
E*
@ 2003-2005
2246A Service
U1106A. U i i 0 3
A/D CONVERTER
-------
Z-AXIS FOCUS DRIVER
TO ALL CIRCUITS
HIGH VOLTAGE
Figure 9-4a. 2246A block diagram-part
1.
Scans by = & gt; ARTEK MEDU 02003-2005
FRONT PANEL
FRONT-PANEL
CONTROL MUX
MULTIPLEXERS
6081-22A
Figure 9-4b. 2246A block diagram-part
2.
2246A Service
-
2
m
LED AND SWITCH
COLUMN DRIVERS
02501-02506
ASO-AS5
A
CLK 8M
I
FRONT PANEL
LEOS
DS2001-DS204B
LED CATHODE
REGISTER
AND DRIVER
U2524. U2525
.
FRONT PANEL
SWITCHES
b
BSO-BS7
t
'
" 2
4
I
-
r1
A
m
x
ul
-
t
-
r
A
C
-
A
A
7
1
Y
J
0
5
9
0
R
I--
O
-
R
A
-
& lt; 5
ADO-AD7
-
CHARACTER
m~COUNTER
DOT
-
-
& gt;
.
READOUT
PROCESSOR
-
U2400
-
. I .
u
)
'
CHARACTER
POSITION
ADDRESS
COUNTER
U2404.
U2405
- POT7
MUX
& gt;
\
'
A8-A17
-
j
ALE
SYS RESET
& gt;
I
A'-@
-
ADDRESS
OECOOERS
U2517.
U25 1 8
nux
-
LATCH
FRONT-PANEL
CONTROL MUX
U23 13
POT MUX CLK
*
CHARACTER
CODES
RAM
U2406
NOTE:
FRONT-PANEL
CONTROLS
4
'
TR16 LEVEL
TRIG HOLDOFF
CHI VAR
CH2 POS
CH4 POS
TRACE SEP
-
LEVEL
COMPARATOR
CHI POS
U2306
-
4
U2308
U2309
*
I
REF CURSOR
DELTA CURSOR
h~
-
2
A
INPUT
DATA LATCHES
SAMPLE
b
HOLD
-kc
D/ A
CONVERTER
2,
A
-
POT MUX CLK
-
-
& gt;
00-07
OAC CLOCKS
P
w
1
-
*
U2519
U2521
-
MUXO-MUX5
REFRESH
PROCESSOR
U260 1
U2603A. B
6081-22A
Figure 9-4b.224649 block diagram-part
2.
8 REF TRIG LVL
B DELTA TRIG LVL
\
/
8 Y
DAC INTR
CLK4M
.
2
.
DELTA DELAY
A TRIG LVL
U
OACO-7
11
.
DIG HORIZ POS
REF DELAY
0
AO-A17
L
U2304
U2305
U2302
U2314
\I
4)
RO HORIZ
V & gt;
1
POT
(SEE NOTE)
AO-A~~
RO VERT
A 4A
I
-+-
-
)
CHO-CH7
0
ADO-AD7
2
READOUT
POSITION
MIXER
U2414.
U2415,
U2416A,B,C.D
AD COMP
w
FRONT-PANEL
CONTROLS
A
ADORESS
LATCHES
U2512.
U2513
4
READOUT +
OACS
U2412.
-C
U2413
SEC/OIV VAR
Ir
-
I
M)o-M)~ \'
SYS RESET
p
-
-f 2
3
FIELD
b MIXER
CONTROL
LATCH
RO-R6
-=
+I (DELTA-DELAY)
A
POT5
'PROBE
00-07
-
RO-R7
-
EOCH
CHARACTER
DOT
POSITION
RW
O
U2408
1
I
00-07
-
\
INTERRUPT
REQUEST
LATCH
U2717C. 0
-
-
A
,' 8
b
C
;(
-
& gt;
OOTO-DOT4
RO-R7
A
-
R
RO BUF RD
D
2,
-
DATA
BUFFERS
U2503A. 8.
U25060.
U2514. U2515
I
-
I
A
-
1
1
5
RO POS ENABLES
C
U2407A. B
COMMUNICATION
LATCHES
U240l.U2402
00-07
RO-R4)
U2403
RO BUF RO
w
,
& lt; & gt;
-
!I
-
RO POSITION
4
CLK 4M
RO INTR
00-07
*
NE
P S
O E
I
00-07
i
DOT
REFRESHER
U2410
Q EOCH
-
A
I
-
_1
EOCH
A
-
-
8
0
b
DOT CLOCKS
CLOCK
DIVIDER/COUNTER
U2409A. 8.
U2417B
SWITCH
SWITCH BOARD
DATA
SHIFT
l6 REGISTERS
U2001. U2002
'
.
Q
RO BLANK
! DACglf
.
A
V
-
8
D/A
--+-c
CONTROL
+
CONVERTER
MULTIPLEXERS
U2602
U2609B
U2604
U2605
SAMPLE
6
HOLD
U2606
U2607
U2608
RO INTEN
B INTEN
A INTEN
CH2 VAR
CHI VAR
' TIME VAR
HOLDOFF
CH4 POS
CH3 POS
- CH2 POS
CHI POS
,
TRACE SEP
12
4.
3
,
'
2246A Service
Table 9-1
SIGNAL LINE LOCATIONS
SIGNAL NAME
ORIGINATESa
DIAGICIR#(VIA)
GOES TO
DIAGICIR#(VIA)
A GATE
BEAM FIND
BTS 0
BTS 1
BTS 2
BW LIMIT
4lU603-11
4lU603-14
4lQ604
12lU2607-8(R2610)
4lU602-17
51Q312,Q328
4lU600-30
5lU316-15(R378)
3lU421-lO(R411)
11lU2304-8
11lU2306-7
81U2512-15(R2560)
8lU2512-6 (R2561)
8lU2512-16(R2562)
8lU2512-5(R2563)
4lU600-3 1
4lU600-32
4lU600-33
5lU303-9
11lU2305-1
4lU603-9
4lU603-15
12lU2607-7(R2609)
4lU602-18
5lQ325,Q329
11lU2304-7
4lU600-26
5lU316-2 (R380)
3lU431-lO(R415)
3lU431-11 (R416)
4lU503-7
4lU600-27
4lU600-28
4lU600-29
3lU1103-11
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
41U600-39
12lU2608-14(R2619)
1lR105
1lU172-4
1lU171-11
1lU112-8
2lU210-20
12lU2606-1 (R2612)
4lU600-38
1lU173-6
12lU2608-8(R2618)
5lVR302
5lVR301
9lU2410-9
7lU1001-12
7lQ1001
6lU802-3
3lU421-8(R493)
4lU602-8
4lU602-7
3lU42 1-24 (R448)
8lU2515-12(R2511)
41U501-1, U602-38 (R6 19) ,U600-4
4lU501-2,U602-39 (R618) ,U600-5
4lU501-3,U600-6
4lU502-1 O,U600-7
3lU421-13(R490)
3lU421-12(R491)
3lU421-g(R492)
3lU1103-2 (R1162)
3lU 1106-5
5lVR304
5lVR303
7lU1001-5
7lQ1004
6lU802-5
3lU1106-3
3lU431-8(R497)
4lU602-37
4lU602-34 (DL22+)
4lDL227/Q2706(R2705) ;2/U701-21;6/U802-14
3lU431-13 (R494)
3lU431-12(R495)
3lU431-9 (R496)
4/U502-4;2IU701-22;3/U441-ll,
U441-13
2lU210-11 (R213)
2lU203-3
7lU506-15
2lU210-1 (CR201)
2lU210-2 (CR202)
2lU210-7
3lU421-7,U431-7
2lU210-1 O(R225)
2111220-1 1 (R223)
2lU22O-12
2lU203-5
A
E
A GATE T
A INTEN
A INTEN GATE
A RAMP
A SLOPE
A SWP END
A TRIG
A TRIG LVL
AD COMP
ADDRO
ADDR1
ADDR2
ADDR3
ATS 0
ATS 1
ATS 2
AUX DATA
B DELTA TRIG LVL
B GATE
inZE
INTEN
INTEN GATE
RAMP
REF TRIG LVL
B SLOPE
B SWP END
B TRIG
B
B
B
B
B
G
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
EN
POS
PRB
PREAMP 0
PREAMP 1
PREAMP IN
TR +
VAR
EN
INVERT
POS
+
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
Table 9-1 (cont)
SIGNAL NAME
ORIGINATESa
DIAGICIR# (VIA)
GOES TO
DIAGICIR#(VIA)
SIGNAL 1
CH 2 PRB
CH 2 PREAMP 0
CH 2 PREAMP 1
CH 2 PREAMP IN +
CH 2 TR +
CH 2 VAR
CH 3 EN
CH 3 POS
CH 3 PRB
CH 3 PREAMP 1
CH 3 PREAMP IN +
CH 3 TR +
CH 4 EN
CH 4 POS
CH 4 PRB
CH 4 PREAMP 1
CH 4 PREAMP IN +
CH 4 TR +
CLK 1K
CLK 4M
CLK 8M
DACO
DACl
DAC2
DAC3
DAC4
DAC5
DAC6
DAC7
DAC BUF WR
DAC BLlF RD
DAC INTR
DAC MUX OUT
DAC MSB CLK
DATA BUS
1/R106,C121
1lU173-5
1lU173-4
1lU122-8
2lU220-20
12lU2607-14(R2611)
4lU600-37
12lU2608-7 (R2617)
1/R107,C131
1lU173-7
I/Ql31A(R139) ,Ql31B(R139)
2lU230-20
4lU6OO-36
12lU2608-1 (R2616)
1/R108,C151
1lU173-14
+ HORIZC
DELTA CURSOR
DELTA DELAY
DIG HORlZ POS
DLY END 0
DLY END 1
DLY SEL
FLlC WR
HDO
HD1
HOLDOFF
1 1lU2304-1
11lU2305-7
11lU2305-14
5lU3 15-1 5 (R388)
5lU315-2 (R387)
4lU600-25
8lU2518-11
4lU600-24
4lU600-23
12lU2606-14(R2615)
7lU506-12
2lU220-1
2lU220-2
2lU220-7
3lU421-5,U431-5
2lU220-1 O(R227)
2lU230-11 (R233)
2lU203-10
7lU506-1
2lU230-2
2lU230-7
3lU421-3, U431-3
2lU240-11 (R243)
2lU203-12
7lU506-5
2lU240-2
2lU240-7
3lU421-1 ,U431-1
4lU600-2
12lU2601-4
9lU2409-1
12lU2601-2O,U2602-12
12lU2601-21 ,U2602-11
12lU2601-22,U2602-10
12lU2601-23 ,U2602-9
12lU2601-24,U2602-8
12lU2601-25,U2602-7
12lU2601-26,U2602-6
12lU2601-27,U2602-5
12lU2603-1
11lU2301-1
8lU2515-16(R2554)
11lU2303-3
11lU2300-11
9lU2401 ,U2402; 1OlU2523, U2524;
1 1/U2300,U2301 ,U2307,U2313
9lU2414-2,U2415-2
5lU301-12 (R330) ,U313-6 (R330)
6lU301-3 (R369) ;2/U702-3 (R722)
4lU602-36
4lU602-35
5lU301-11;3/U1106-9
4lU602-40 (R647)
6lU802-8
6lU802-11
4lQ600 (R636)
I/Ql51A(R159),Ql51B(R159)
2lU240-20
7lU930-7 (R933, R934)
9lU2417-3
8lU2501-56
11lU2301-12
1 1lU2301-9
11lU2301-15
11lU2301-6
11lU2301-16
11lU2301-5
11lU2301-19
1 1lU2301-2
8lU2517-15
12lU2601-18
12lU2603-6
12lU2602-19 (U2609-7)
8lU2517-14
8lU2514
Scam by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
- HORIZC
1
IZ INTEN
LED AN01
LED CAT1
LINE TRIG
MAG
MAIN BD
MB CNTL
MB DATA
MB RETUl
MUXO
MUX1
MUX2
MUX3
POT5
POT6
POT7
POT MUX
REF CUR5
REF DELP
RO BLANt
RO BUF F
RO BUF V
RO CH 1
RO CH 2
RO CH 3
RO CM 4
RO FREE;
RO MORlZ
RO INTEN
RO INTEN
RO INTR
RO REQ
RO TR SE
RO VERT
RO VERT
SLlC RD
SLlC WR
SNAP CLk
SRO CLK
SR1 CLK
SR1 CLK
SR DATA
SW BD DI
SW BD S
F
Table 9-1 (cont)
SIGNAL NAME
ORIGINATES~
DIAGICIR#(VIA)
GOES TO
DIAGICIR#(VIA)
+ HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
5lQ805(R819) ,a806 (R819)
5lQ801 (R802) ,Q802 (R802)
4lU602-19
8lU2501-27
8lU2501-25
13lT2206
3lU1103-6
7lU506-3 (R503)
8lU2518-15(R2564)
8lU2515-11 (R2555)
4lU502-12
12lU2601-12
12lU2601-13
12lU2601-14
12lU2601-15
11lU2313-5
11lU2313-19
11lU2313-2
8lU2517-13
11lU2304-14
11lU2305-8
9lU2410-16(R2419)
8lU2501-29 (R2515)
8lU2501-28 (R2516)
9lU2403-19
9lU2403-2
9lU2403-5
9lU2403-6
1lU173-11
9lU2416-8
12lU2607-1 (R2608)
4lU602-20
9lU2417-11
9lU2410-14(R2420)
9lU2403-9
9lU2416-14
4lU503-4
8lU2503-8
8lU2518-12
8lU2517-12
4lU606-12
4lU606-4
4lU501-13
4lU606-6
1OlU2002-9
8lU2518-14
7lV1-R
7lV1 -L
7lQ1003
10IU2523-11 (R2528)
10lU2524-11 (R2529)
3lU1106-2
6lU802-6
11lU2309-12 (R2352)
4lU501-4
41U600-9,U602-12,U502-2
8lU2515-14 (R2509)
11lU2303-11
11lU2303-10
1 1lU2303-9
11lU2303-6
7lU506-11 (R508)
7lU506-10 (R510)
7lU506-9 (R512)
11lU2313-11
9lU2414-5,U2415-5
5lU301-13 (R329)
4lU600-12
9lU2402-1
9lU2417-9,U2401-11
2lU202-10
2lU202-11
2lU201-9
2lU201-10
41U502-5,U503-3
6lU802-1
7lU1001-10
7lQ1002
8lU2515-15 (R2508)
4lU503-2 ,U600-11
2lU201-11
2lU202-4 (R207, R205)
2lU202-9 (R215)
4lU600-8
4lU600-3
11lU2307-11
1lU171-3,U172-3,Q171 ,U173-3(R176)
5lU302-3, U303-3
3lU1103-3
1lQ171 B,U171-2;51U302-2
8lU2515-16 (R2510)
1OlU2001-1, U2002-1
- HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
IZ IIVTEN GATE
LED ANODE CLK
LED CATH CLK
LINE TRIG
MAG
MAIN BD MUX
MB CNTL WR
MB DATA
MB RETURN
MUXO
MUXl
MUX2
MUX3
POT5
POT6
POT7
POT MUX CLK
REF CURSOR
REF DELAY
RO BLANK
RO BUF RD
RO BLlF WR
RO CH 1 POS EN
RO CH 2 POS EN
RO CH 3 POS EN
RO CH 4 POS EN
RO FREEZE
RO HORlZ
RO INTEN
RO INTEN GATE
RO INTR
RO REQ
RO TR SEP EN
RO VERT
RO VERT EN
SLlC RD
SLlC WR
SNAP CLK
SRO CLK
SR1 CLK
SR1 CLK TTL
SR DATA
SW BD DATA
SW BD SR LOAD
MORE
Scans by ARTEK MEDLA = & gt;
0
Table 9-1 (cont)
GOES TO
DIAGICIR#(VIA)
SIGNAL NAME
SW BD SR SHIFT
SYS RESET
TB CAL
TIME VAR
TRACE SEP
TRACE SEP EN
TRIG CLK
VERT COMP
VERT COMP EN
+ VERTICAL OUTPUT
- VERTICAL OUTPUT
VOLT CAL
VOLT CAL 0
VOLT CAL 1
VOLT
- CAL 2
X Y
X AXIS
ZERO HYST
a~ignals
that begin and end on the same diagram are not listed in this table.
Scans by ARTEK MEDLQ r & gt;
WAVEFORMS
supply, first connect the power cord of the
2246A under test through an isolation transformer, then connect probe ground wire to
ground " . (rear side of R2256). See Figure
P "
9-1 2 to locate ground " P " .
Test waveforms are shown on a page just before the
schematic diagram to which they apply. Normal control settings for the test oscilloscope are given in the
readouts shown in each waveform illustration. Unless otherwise indicated near the waveform, setup
conditions for the oscilloscope under test are as
follows:
1. Set up the
follows:
2246A front-panel
VERTICAL MODE
CH 1 COLlPLlNG
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
VERTICAL POSITION Controls
SCOPE BW
HORIZONTAL MODE
AIB SELECT
SECIDIV
Trigger LEVEL
HOLDOFF
SLOPE
Trigger MOD,E
Trigger SOURCE
Trigger COUPLING
MEASUREMENTS
MENU Displays
A INTEN
READOUT
FOCUS
SCALE ILLUM
WARNING
To avoid electric shock and instrument damage, always connect the power cord of the
instrument under test through an isolation
transformer when viewing waveforms or
measuring voltages in the low-voltage power
supply
controls as
CH 1 (other
channels off)
DC
0.1 v
12 o'clock
0n
A
A
0.1 ms
12 o'clock
min (CCW)
1
AUTO LEVEL
VERT
DC
OFF
OFF
10 o'clock
12 o'clock
for well defined display
fully CCW
2. Connect the front panel PROBE ADJUST output
to the channel 1 input connector.
3. For all waveforms, except those obtained from
the Low-Voltage Power Supply, connect the test
oscilloscope probe ground wire to the chassis.
When obtaining waveforms from the power
DC VOLTAGES
Dc voltages shown the schematic diagrams are typical of a normally operating instrument. Voltages are
referenced to chassis ground, except in the isolated
portion of the Low Voltage Power Supply where they
are referenced to ground " P " (at R2256 as shown
in Figure 9-12). Make sure that the DMM leads are
floating (isolated from chassis ground) when
measuring voltages in this section.
TEST EQUIPMENT
The following test equipment is recommended for
obtaining waveforms and voltages from the 2246A
Oscilloscope. Other similar equipment types can
also be used.
1. Test
Oscilloscope
TEKTRONIX 2246A.
2.
with
Digital Voltdeter-TEKTRONIX
1O
X
probe(s)-
DM501A.
3. Power-Line Isolation Transformer-Tektronix Part
No. 006-5953-00.
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
2246A Service
OTHER PARTS
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
825
13
6N
FL2201
13
2A
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
J16
7
7A
P27
7
2L
P25
13
7
6N
1L
S2202
13
3E
P26
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
V1
SCHEM
NUMBER
7
SCHEM
LOCATION
1M
Scansby = & gt; ARTEK MEDq
@ 41 32 g
(0-m ~
2246A Service
F1
I
1
6
1
C
1
D
1
E
1
F
1
G
1
H
1
J
1
K
1
L
1
M
1
N
Static Sensitive Devices
See Ma~ntenanceSecbon
-I
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
I
Assembly
Number
I
Component Number
Number 11fused1
Subassembly
Number
I
Chassls mounted components have no Assembly Number
preflx-see end ol Replaceable Electrtcal Parts List
A10-MAIN
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
AT1 17
AT127
1
1
C1
C2
C10
C11
C20
C21
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
ClO8
Clll
C112
C113
C114
C121
C122
C123
C124
C125
C126
C131
C132
~133
C134
C135
C136
C137
C138
C139
C140
C151
C152
C153
C154
C155
C156
C157
C158
C159
C171
C172
C173
Cl80
Cl8l
C190
C191
C201
C202
C203
C204
C205
C206
C210
C211
C212
C213
C214
C215
C216
C217
C218
C219
C220
C221
C222
C223
C224
C225
C228
C229
C232
C233
C234
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
14
1
1
2
14
1
1
1
1
14
14
1
1
2
14
14
1
14
14
1
1
2
2
2
2
14
14
2
2
2
2
14
14
14
14
2
14
2
2
2
2
14
14
2
14
2
2
14
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C235
C238
C239
C242
C243
C244
C245
C248
C249
C258
C265
C268
C271
C272
C273
C274
C275
C282
C283
C287
C298
C301
C302
C303
C304
C305
C306
C307
C308
c309
C310
C311
C312
C313
C314
C315
C316
C317
C318
C319
C320
C321
C326
C329
C330
C337
C338
C339
C351
C421
C422
C423
C424
C425
C426
C432
C444
C445
C447
C451
C452
C453
C454
C455
C462
C463
C474
C475
C477
C481
C482
C483
C484
C485
C486
C487
C488
C489
C491
C492
SCHEM
NUMBER
14
2
14
2
2
14
14
2
14
2
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
14
14
14
5
5
5
14
5
5
5
5
14
5
5
5
5
5
5
14
14
14
6
14
5
5
5
5
14
14
14
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14
3
14
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C493
C494
C501
C502
C503
C505
C600
C601
C602
C603
C604
C605
C606
C607
C608
C609
C6lO
C611
C612
C613
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C706
C707
C708
C711
~712
CEO1
C802
C803
C804
C805
C806
C807
C808
CEO9
C8lO
C811
C814
C815
C816
C817
C8l8
C819
C901
C902
C903
C904
C910
C935
C l 001
C1002
C1003
C1004
C1005
C1006
CllOl
C1102
C1103
C1105
C1106
C1107
ClllO
Cllll
C1114
C1130
C1154
C1155
C1158
C1159
C2701
C2702
C2703
C2704
C2705
C2706
C2707
SCHEM
NUMBER
2
2
14
14
14
14
4
4
4
4
14
14
14
4
4
14
14
3
4
14
14
14
14
14
14
2
2
14
2
2
14
6
6
6
6
14
6
6
6
6
2
6
14
14
6
14
6
14
14
14
14
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
14
14
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14
14
14
14
7
7
7
7
7
BOARD
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C2708
C2709
C2710
C2711
C2712
C2713
C2715
C2716
C2717
C2719
C2720
C2721
C2723
C2724
C2758
C2759
C2783
C2784
C2785
SCHEM
NUMBER
7
14
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
CR131
CRl5l
CR171
CR201
CR202
CR260
CR261
CR301
CR432
~ ~ 4 6 2
CR603
CR801
CR802
CR819
CR935
CR936
CRlOOl
CR1002
CR1003
CR1004
CR1005
CR2701
CR2702
CR2703
CR2704
CR2705
CR2707
CR2713
CR2714
CR2715
CR2716
CR2717
CR2718
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
5
3
3
4
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
DL21
DL22
2
4
DS901
DS902
DS903
DS2701
DS2702
DS2703
DS2704
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
J927
J1204
1
1
1
1
7
7
14
KlOO
K101
K102
K103
K104
KlO5
K107
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ClRCUlT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
K108
K109
KllO
Kill
K112
1
1
1
1
1
L l 01
L102
L130
L140
I201
L216
L217
L426
L432
L445
L446
L462
L475
L476
L701
L702
L703
L704
14
14
1
1
14
14
14
3
3
14
14
3
14
14
2
2
2
2
P8
P9
PI7
PI8
PI^
P20
P2302
P2302
P2304
P2502
P2502
7
7
6
6
2
7
14
7
4
14
Q131
Q151
Q171
Q250
Q251
Q252
Q253
Q284
Q285
Q301
Q302
Q303
Q304
Q305
Q306
Q307
Q308
Q309
Q310
Q311
Q312
Q313
Q315
Q316
Q317
Q318
Q320
Q321
Q322
Q323
0325
Q326
Q328
0329
Q330
0331
Q332
0333
0440
Q444
Q470
a474
0480
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
a
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
Q600
Q601
Q602
Q603
Q604
Q605
Q606
Q607
Q608
Q701
Q702
0703
Q704
Q801
Q802
Q803
Q804
Q805
Q806
Q807
Q808
Q809
Q810
Q905
Q907
Q908
Q1001
Q1002
Q1003
01004
Q1005
QllOl
Q1102
Q1103
Q1104
Q1105
Q1106
Q2701
Q2702
Q2703
Q2704
Q2705
Q2706
Q2707
Q2708
Q2709
Q2711
Q2712
Q2713
Q2715
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
R12
R13
R22
R23
RlOl
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
R108
Rlll
R113
R114
R115
R121
R123
R124
R125
R131
R132
R133
R134
R135
R136
R137
R138
R139
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
MORE
S c m by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
0
A10-MAIN
ClRCUlT
NUMBER
R140
R141
R142
R151
R152
R153
R154
R155
R156
R157
R158
R159
R160
R161
R162
R171
R175
R176
R177
R178
R179
Rl8O
Rl8l
R182
R201
R202
R203
R204
R205
R206
R207
R208
R209
R210
R211
R212
R213
R214
R215
R218
R219
R220
R221
R222
R223
R224
R225
R226
R227
R228
R229
R230
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
R238
R240
R241
R242
R243
R244
R245
R248
R250
R251
R254
R255
R256
R260
R261
R262
R263
R264
R265
R266
R267
R268
R269
SCHEM
NUMBER
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R270
R271
R272
R273
R274
R275
R276
R277
R278
R279
R280
R281
R282
R283
R284
R285
R286
R287
R288
R289
R290
R291
R292
R293
R294
R295
R296
R297
R298
R301
R302
R303
R304
R305
R306
R307
R308
R309
R310
R311
R312
R313
R314
R315
R316
R317
R318
R319
R320
R321
R322
R323
R325
R326
R327
R328
R329
R330
R331
R332
R333
R334
R335
R336
R337
R338
R339
R340
R341
R342
R343
R344
R345
R346
R347
R348
R349
R350
R351
R352
SCHEM
NUMBER
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
14
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
14
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
14
5
5
5
5
5
14
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
R353
R354
R355
R356
R357
R358
R359
R360
R361
R362
R363
R364
R365
R366
R367
R369
R370
R371
R372
R373
R374
R375
R376
R377
R378
R379
R380
R381
R382
17383
R384
R385
R386
R387
R388
R390
R391
R392
R393
R394
R395
R396
R410
R411
R412
R413
R414
R415
R416
R417
R420
R421
R422
R423
R424
R425
R426
R430
R431
R432
R440
R441
R442
R443
R444
R445
R446
R447
R448
R449
R450
R451
R452
R453
R454
R455
6
5
5
5
5
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
5
5
5
5
14
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
14
5
14
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
R462
3
BOARD (cont)
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R463
R470
R471
R472
R473
R474
R475
R476
R477
R478
R481
R483
R484
R485
R486
R487
R490
R491
R492
R493
R494
R495
R496
R497
R498
R501
R502
R503
R504
R508
R510
R512
R601
R602
R603
R604
R605
R606
R607
R609
R610
R611
R612
R613
R614
R615
R616
R617
R618
R619
R620
R621
R622
R623
R624
R625
R626
R627
R628
R630
R631
R636
R637
R638
R639
R640
R641
R642
R643
R644
R645
R646
R647
R648
R649
R650
R65 1
R652
R653
R654
SCHEM
NUMBER
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
7
14
7
7
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R655
R656
R657
R658
R659
R662
R663
R664
R665
R666
R669
R670
R671
R672
R701
R702
R703
R706
R707
R708
R709
R710
R711
R712
R715
R716
R717
R718
R719
R720
R721
R722
R723
R724
R725
R726
R727
R728
R729
R730
R731
R732
R733
R734
RE01
RE02
R803
RE04
Re05
RE06
R807
RE08
RE09
Re10
Re1 1
RE12
RE13
RE14
RE15
RE16
RE19
RE20
RE21
RE22
R823
R825
RE26
R827
RE28
RE29
R836
R837
R840
R841
Re42
R843
Re44
R845
R846
R847
SCHEM
NUMBER
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
14
2
2
2
2
2
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
14
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
14
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R848
R849
R850
R851
R852
R853
R854
RE55
R856
RE57
RE58
R906
R907
R908
R909
R910
R911
R915
R916
R920
R921
R922
R923
R924
R930
R931
R932
R933
R934
R935
R936
R937
R938
R939
R940
R1001
R1002
R1003
R 1004
R 1005
R 1006
R 1007
R 1008
R 1009
RlOlO
R 1020
R1021
R1022
R1023
R1024
R1025
R1026
R1027
R1028
RllOl
R1102
R1103
R1104
RlllO
Rllll
R1112
R1113
R1114
R1115
Rlll6
R1117
Rlll8
R1120
R1121
R1122
R1123
R1124
R1125
R1126
R1127
R1128
R1131
R1132
R1133
R1134
SCHEM
NUMBER
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
14
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
14
7
14
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
MORE
Scans by ARlEK MEDIA
*
0
A10-MAIN
:HEM
MBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
14
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
14
7
14
14
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
R1135
R1136
R1142
R1143
R1144
R1145
R1150
R1154
Rll55
R1158
R1159
R1162
R1163
R1170
R2701
R2702
R2703
R2704
R2705
R2706
R2708
R2709
R2710
R2711
R2712
R2713
R2714
R2715
R2716
R2717
R2718
R2719
R2720
R2721
R2722
R2723
R2724
R2726
R2727
R2728
R2729
R2733
R2734
R2735
R2736
132737
R2738
-..
-
SCHEM
NUMBER
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
14
14
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
R2741
R2742
R2743
R2745
R2750
R2751
R2758
R2760
R2765
R2783
R2784
R2785
R2786
R2787
R2788
R2789
R2795
R2796
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
14
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
U112
U112
U122
U122
U171
U171
U172
U172
U173
U173
U174
U175
U201
U201
U202
U202
U203
U203
U210
U210
U220
U220
U230
U230
U240
U240
U260
U260
1
14
1
14
1
14
1
14
1
14
1
1
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
2
14
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
U301
U301
U302
U302
U303
U303
U304
U304
U307
U307
U308
U308
U309
U309
U310
U310
U311
U311
U313
U315
U315
U316
U316
U421
U421
U431
U431
U441
U441
U501
U501
U502
U502
U503
U503
U506
U506
U600
U600
U601
U601
U602
U602
U603
U603
U604
U604
SCHEM
NUMBER
6
14
5
14
5
14
5
14
5
14
5
14
5
14
5
14
5
14
5
5
14
5
14
3
14
3
14
3
14
4
14
4
14
4
14
7
14
4
14
4
14
4
14
4
14
4
14
BOARD (cont)
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
U701
U701
U702
U702
U801
U8Ol
U801
U802
U802
U901
U930
U930
U931
U931
U932
UlOOl
UlOOl
U l l 01
UllOl
UllOl
U1102
U1102
U1103
U1103
U1104
U1104
U1106
U1106
14
6
14
14
7
14
7
14
14
7
14
3
7
14
3
14
3
14
3
14
3
14
VR301
VR302
VR303
VR304
VR308
VR309
VR310
VR311
VR312
VR801
VR802
VR2701
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
7
W9
W11
W12
W13
W14
7
1
1
1
1
Scam by ARTEK MEDIA =-
2
14
2
14
2
6
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
W18
W19
W20
WlOO
W101
W102
W103
W 200
W201
W202
W203
W205
W206
W207
W208
W209
W210
W223
W231
W232
W235
W304
W305
W401
W403
W404
W405
W406
W407
W408
W410
W411
W412
W413
W414
W415
W416
W505
W510
W603
W604
W605
W610
W611
W612
WE02
WE05
SCHEM
NUMBER
6
2
2
1
1
1
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
14
5
6
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
We08
W81 0
W81 1
W815
W900
W908
WlOOO
WlOlO
WllOl
W1102
W1103
W1104
W1105
W1106
W1107
W1120
W1200
W1201
W 1202
W1204
W1205
W1209
W1210
W1216
W1217
W1218
W1221
W1222
W1223
W1231
W 1237
W1247
W1248
W1249
W1250
W1251
W1252
W1255
W1277
W1288
W2302
W2302
W2304
W2502
W2502
W2701
SCHEM
NUMBER
6
6
6
2
14
7
7
7
3
3
14
3
3
3
3
3
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
7
7
14
7
4
14
7
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDM = & gt;
Figure 9-6. Hybrid pin identifiers.
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
VERTICAL INPUTS D I A G R A M 1
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
AT00117
AT1 2 7
1J
3H
68
48
C1
C2
C10
C11
C20
C21
ClOl
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
ClOB
Clll
C112
C113
C114
C121
C122
C123
C124
C125
C126
C131
C132
C133
C134
C137
C138
C151
1K
4K
2H
2J
4H
5J
18
38
78
88
1F
2G
4F
5G
18
1F
1F
2J
38
4F
4F
4J
48
7F
78
7H
7J
7J
7L
7K
88
6C
4C
68
68
48
48
6A
4A
3A
1A
6A
5A
5A
4A
9C
6A
5A
5C
1OC
4A
3A
4C
1C
1D
10 8
2A
2A
28
2C
2C
1OC
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
C152
C153
C154
C157
C158
C173
C190
C191
8H
8J
8J
8L
8K
5C
7L
8L
1A
1A
18
1C
1C
38
2C
1C
CR131
CR151
CR171
6H
BH
58
28
18
38
J11
J12
J13
J14
1A
4A
7A
8A
6A
4A
3A
1A
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
KlOO
KlOl
K102
K103
K104
K105
K107
K108
K109
KllO
K111
K112
1F
1G
1G
1H
2L
2K
4F
4G
4G
4H
5L
5K
6A
5A
58
68
5D
5D
4A
4A
48
58
4D
4D
L130
L140
7L
EL
2C
1C
Partial A 10 also shown on diagrams 2, 3, 4, 5,
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
(1131A
(11318
(1151A
(11518
(1171
7K
7J
8K
8J
5C
28
28
18
18
28
R12
R13
R22
R23
RlOl
RlO2
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
R108
R111
R113
R114
R121
R123
R124
R131
R132
R133
R134
R135
R136
R137
R139
R141
R142
2K
2K
4K
4K
18
38
78
78
18
38
78
88
1A
1G
1F
3A
3G
3F
7A
6H
6H
7H
7J
7K
7K
7L
7J
7J
6C
6C
4C
4C
6A
7A
7A
7A
7A
7A
78
78
6A
5A
5A
4A
3A
3A
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
6. 7 and 14.
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
2A
2A
2A
2A
28
2C
2C
2C
28
28
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R151
R152
R153
R154
R155
R156
R157
R159
R161
R162
R171
R175
R176
R177
R178
R179
R180
R181
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
8A
8H
8H
8H
2A
8J
1A
1A
1A
18
1C
1C
1C
18
18
38
38
3C
2C
2C
3C
28
18
U112
U122
U171
U172
U173
U174
U175
1L
4L
4C
5D
6E
1E
4E
6C
4C
38
38
3C
3A
3C
W11
W12
W13
W14
WlOO
WlOl
W102
18
3A
7A
7A
4F
5G
5G
6A
4A
3A
1A
5C
5C
38
al
BK
8K
8L
al
al
58
58
6C
6C
6E
6E
6J
2246A Service
0
0
C1O CH 1 I W U T C
W Xi00
C l l CH 1 I W T C O W X I 0
CH 1 PREAMP 1 TO C R 2 0 2
CH I PREAMP 0 TO CR201) " @
M6'.
* k8lilmVmW.# R W W a r n n m Y B I = * ? & W W M n W X X
M
*R6ld*bWEQI 8d
- "
CH2 INPUT BUFFER AMPLIFIER{
6 1 X 2X 5 X ATTENUATORS
I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~CCCCCCQIQIQIQI~II~~I
rxspin,
an~t~~~xlldmmm~r8i
s,a*al*shd
Static Sensitive Devices
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 2
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF).
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF).
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF).
Q
-
-1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
VERTICAL PREAMPS AND OUTPUT AMPLIFIER DIAGRAM 2
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
C139
C159
C201
C202
C203
C204
C210
C211
C212
C213
C21B
C220
C221
C222
C223
C228
C232
C233
C238
C242
C243
C248
C258
C268
C271
C272
C273
C274
C275
C491
C492
C493
C494
C706
C707
C71 1
C712
C811
4C
5C
7C
7C
7C
BC
1C
2D
1E
2E
6B
3C
3D
3E
3E
78
4E
5E
78
5E
6E
8B
8C
7D
3H
3H
3H
3H
4G
2E
3E
4E
6E
3L
6L
3L
4L
8B
2C
1C
4G
4G
4H
5H
60
5E
5E
5E
9G
4D
4E
4E
4E
10G
2E
2E
10H
1E
1E
1OH
4H
9G
3F
4F
4F
4F
4F
2F
2F
2F
2F
1OH
9J
9J
10J
CR201
CR202
CR260
CR261
2C
1C
3J
4
1
5C
5C
4F
4F
DL21
DL2 1
3K
3K
3F
9J
L701
L702
L703
L704
5L
6L
3M
4M
9J
1OJ
9H
1OH
P19
P20
4N
3N
1OH
9H
0250
3G
4E
6J
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
0251
0252
0253
0284
a285
0701
0702
0703
0704
4G
3J
4J
6F
6F
3M
4M
2M
6K
4F
4E
4F
5E
5E
9H
1OH
9K
1OH
R115
A125
R138
R140
R158
R160
R201
R202
R203
R204
R205
R206
R207
A209
R210
R211
R212
R213
R214
R215
R218
R219
R220
R221
R222
R223
R224
R225
R227
13228
R229
R230
R231
R232
R233
17234
R235
A238
R240
R241
A242
R243
R244
R248
R250A
R2508
1D
20
4C
4D
5C
5D
6E
7E
BE
BE
7D
BE
7C
7C
1E
1E
2C
2C
2C
7C
2C
1C
2E
2E
3C
3C
3C
1C
2C
3C
1C
4E
4E
5C
5C
4C
5D
5C
5E
5E
6C
6C
6C
6D
2H
3H
5D
40
2C
2C
1C
1C
5G
5G
5G
5G
5G
5G
9G
5H
5E
5E
3L
4M
5H
6M
5E
5C
4E
4E
3M
4M
5H
8C
8C
4E
5D
3E
3E
3L
4M
5H
3E
2D
2E
2E
3M
4L
5H
2E
5E
5E
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
R250C
R250D
R250E
R250F
R250G
R251A
R2518
R251C
R251D
R251E
R251F
R251G
A254
17255
A256
R260
R261
R262
R263
R264
A265
R266
R267
13268
R269
R270
A271
R272
R273
A274
R275
R276
R277
R278
R279
R280
R281
R284
R285
A286
R287
R288
R289
R290
17291
17292
R293
R294
R295
R296
R702
R703
R706
17707
R708
R710
Parrjal A 10 also shown on diagrams 1. 3, 4, 5. 6,7 and 14.
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4 -- & gt;
5E
3E
2E
1E
5F
4H
5H
5E
4E
2E
1E
5F
3G
3G
2G
7G
7G
3F
4F
3F
4F
2G
2G
4J
2J
3J
4H
3H
3H
3J
3G
4G
3G
3J
4
1
3J
4J
6E
6G
7F
7F
7G
6G
7F
7F
BE
8F
8G
8G
7F
5K
5K
3K
4K
3M
1L
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
6F
5E
5E
5F
5F
5F
5F
4F
4F
5F
5F
4F
3F
4F
4F
3E
4E
4F
3F
3E
3F
3F
3F
6E
5E
5G
5F
6F
5F
5F
5F
5F
5F
4F
5F
5F
9J
1OJ
9K
1OK
QH
1OK
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
R711
R712
R715
R716
A71 7
A71 8
R719
R720
R721
R722
R724
R725
R726
R727
R728
R729
R730
R731
R732
3L
4L
1L
2L
2M
1M
3M
4M
1L
2L
4K
4K
6K
5K
5K
5K
5K
3M
4M
9J
1OJ
10K
9K
9K
9K
9H
1OH
9K
9K
9K
9K
1OJ
10J
1OH
1OH
9K
9H
1OH
U201
U202
U203A
U2038
U203C
U203D
U210
U220
U230
U240
U260
U280
U701
U702
UBOlB
8D
7D
68
78
78
8B
10
2D
3D
5D
2F
8F
2L
1M
8B
5H
5G
1CG
1%
1%
10G
5D
4D
3E
2E
5F
5F
9J
9K
7H
W19
W20
W200
W201
W202
W203
W205
W206
W207
W208
W209
W210
W223
W231
W232
W4 15A
W415B
W416A
W416B
W815
4M
3M
3C
2C
7E
7D
78
6B
78
88
8C
86
3C
4E
4E
1E
1E
3E
3E
88
1OH
9H
5G
5G
4G
5H
5G
5G
5G
5G
5G
10G
4D
2E
2E
4E
2F
3E
2E
8G
2246A Service
@ S t a t i c S e n s i t i v e Devices
See Maintenance S e c t i o n
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 3
CONNECT 4-DIVISION COMPOSITE
VlDEO SIGNAL.
CONNECT 4-DIVISIOON COMPOSITE
VlDEO SIGNAL. SET TRIGGER MODE
TO TV FIELD.
SET HORIZONTAL MODE TO ALT.
CONNECT 4-DIVISION COMPOSITE
VlDEO SIGNAL. SET TRIGGER MODE
TO TV FIELD.
CONNECT 4-DIVISION COMPOSITE
VlDEO SIGNAL. SET TRIGGER MODE
TO TV FIELD.
CONNECT 4-DIVISION COMPOSITE
VlDEO SIGNAL. SET TRIGGER MODE
TO TV FIELD.
MORE
DIAGNOSTIC EXERSIZE TIME REF AT 5 p s
0
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM DIAGRAM 3
r
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
C42 1
C422
C423
C424
C425
C426
C432
C444
C447
C451
C452
C453
C454
C455
C462
C463
C474
C477
C483
C484
C4B5
C486
C487
C488
C489
C61 1
C1103
C1105
C1106
C1107
C1110
C1111
C1114
C1130
C1154
C1155
1H
2H
2H
2H
2J
2E
1L
2L
3M
6H
7H
8H
7H
6J
6L
6L
6L
8M
38
48
8B
BB
3B
BB
48
2N
3A
3E
3H
3H
3E
3H
5E
4G
6F
6G
4G
4H
4G
4G
3G
2H
3H
3G
3G
2G
2H
2G
2G
2G
1H
1H
1G
1G
1F
3F
2F
2F
3F
2F
3F
3J
3J
2N
2L
2L
2M
1L
1N
2L
1M
2M
CR432
CR462
1L
6K
3H
1H
L426
L432
L462
2E
2L
6K
4H
3H
1H
0440
0444
0470
0474
0480
01101
1L
2L
5L
7L
8L
5E
3H
3G
1H
1G
1F
1M
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
01102
0 1 103
01104
01105
0 1 106
4F
5F
3E
3F
3F
1N
1N
2M
2N
2N
17410
R411
R412
R413
R414
R415
R416
R417
R420
R421
R422
R423
R424
R425
R426
R430
R431
R432
R440
R441
R442
R443
R444
R445
R446
R447
R448
R449
R450
R45 1
R452
R453
R454
R455
R456
R460
R461
R462
17463
R470
R471
R472
R473
R474
1M
1M
2M
2M
6M
6M
6M
6M
2E
1H
2H
2H
2H
2H
2E
2K
1K
2L
1L
1L
1L
1L
2L
2L
2M
3M
3L
2M
6E
7H
7H
8H
7H
6E
6F
6K
6K
6L
6L
6L
5L
5L
6K
6K
3F
4F
4F
4G
2F
2G
2F
2F
4G
4H
4H
4G
4G
4H
4H
3H
3H
3H
3H
3H
3H
2H
2H
3H
2G
3H
3H
3H
2G
2H
2H
2G
2F
2H
2H
2H
2H
1H
1H
2H
1H
2H
2H
1H
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R475
R476
R477
R478
R483
R484
R485
R486
R4B7
R490
R491
R492
R493
R494
R495
R496
R497
R49B
R607
R1103
R1104
RlllO
Rllll
A1112
R1113
R1114
R1115
R1116
R1117
R1118
R1120
R1121
R1122
R1123
R1124
R1125
R1126
R1127
R1128
R1131
R1132
R1133
R1134
R1135
R1136
R1142
R1143
R1144
R1145
R1150
PartlalA10 also shown on d~agrams1. 2, 4, 5. 6, 7 and 14
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
1
7L
8M
BM
8L
38
BL
BL
8L
8L
38
48
48
4B
7B
7B
8B
88
38
2N
30
3E
5E
4E
4E
4F
4F
4F
5F
4F
5F
3E
4E
3E
4F
4F
3F
3F
4F
3F
3G
3H
3H
3J
4G
4G
3H
4H
3J
3J
2D
1G
1F
2H
2H
1G
1F
1F
1F
1F
3J
3J
3J
3J
3J
2J
2J
2J
3J
3J
2M
2M
1N
1N
1N
1N
1N
1N
1N
1N
1N
2N
2M
2N
2M
2N
2N
2N
2N
2N
1L
2L
2L
1M
2M
1N
1L
1L
1M
1M
1M
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
R1154
R1155
R1162
R1163
R1170
6F
6G
5A
5A
3A
1M
1M
1K
2K
1K
U421A
U421B
U421 C
U431A
U431B
U431C
U441A
U441B
U441C
U441 D
U441E
U441F
UllOlA
UllOlB
U1102A
U1102B
U1103
U1104A
U1104B
U1104C
U1106A
U1106B
U1106C
1D
1K
1M
7D
6K
6M
4K
5K
7K
4K
2K
1K
2E
6G
3G
3H
58
3J
4G
4J
28
8J
6H
3G
3G
3G
2G
2G
2G
2H
2H
2H
2H
2H
2H
2M
2M
1L
1L
2K
2M
2M
ZM
2J
2J
2J
W401
W403
W404
W405
W406
W407
W408
W410
W411
W412
W413
W414
WllOl
W1102
W1104
W1105
W1106
W1107
W1120
2E
6J
6F
8L
2H
1J
1H
1J
2H
2J
1J
3J
2J
1J
3J
3J
2K
2K
1K
1K
2K
2K
2K
3J
3J
'
3J
3L
2E
2E
1M
2M
5C
3K
5A
4H
8J
4H
6H
2246A Ser
I
1-0
TO R726. U701-22 5K
@
U502-4 5C
@
0 TRIG BANDWIDTH
UN m m POllDl DISTRIKrrIW @
I
b
2246A
.
A
6555-52
k
A AND B T R I G G E R SYSTEM
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 4
SET SECIDIV TO 20 ~ s .
WAVEFORM
VARIES WITH SETTING OF TRIGGER
HOLDOFF CONTROL.
SET A & B SECIDIV TO 0.1 ms, READOUT
CONTROL CCW (OFF), AND HORIZONTAL
MODE TO ALT.
MORE
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
0
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 4 (cont)
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
DISPLAY A N D TRIGGER LOGIC A N D PROCESSOR INTERFACE D I A G R A M 4
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
C600
C601
C602
C603
C607
C608
C612
8
1
8J
1H
1H
6J
6K
2G
4K
5K
3K
2K
4L
4L
2K
CR603
5J
3J
DL22
DL22
2F
2F
2L
2G
P2502
P2502
2M
4A
1L
1L
(1600
(1601
(1602
(1603
(1604
(1605
(1606
(1607
(1608
81
8J
3K
3K
2K
2K
2K
2K
6K
5J
5K
4M
4M
4M
4M
4M
4M
4L
R501
R502
R601
R602
R603
6B
4E
7J
8K
7K
3M
5N
4J
5L
5L
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R604
R605
R606
R609
R610
R611
R612
R613
R614
R615
R616
R617
R618
R619
R620
R621
R622
R623
R624
R625
R626
R627
R628
R630
R631
R636
R637
R638
R639
R640
R641
PartfalA10 also shown on diagrams 1, 2, 3, 5,
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
7K
8L
8J
3K
3K
2K
2K
2K
3K
5F
6F
6F
6F
6F
5F
5G
6G
6G
4K
4K
1H
1H
4H
6L
4K
8H
8H
8J
1H
2H
5H
5L
5L
5K
4M
4M
4M
4M
4M
4M
4K
4K
4K
4K
4L
4K
4L
5K
5K
5N
5N
3L
2L
4N
5M
6N
5K
4
1
4
1
3N
3N
4
1
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
R642
R643
R644
R645
R646
R647
R648
R649
R650
R651
R652
R653
R654
R655
R656
R657
R658
R659
R662
R663
R664
R665
R666
R669
R670
R671
R672
5J
5H
5J
6H
4K
5F
5F
5G
6K
2L
2L
3F
4G
4F
5H
4
1
5H
5J
4K
6H
6J
5H
5J
3H
4J
6K
6J
4K
3J
2K
2K
5M
1K
2J
2J
4K
5M
5M
4N
5N
5N
4J
4K
4J
3K
4M
2K
2K
3J
3J
3M
5M
4L
4K
U501
U502
U503
3C
4D
3D
3N
3N
5N
6,7 and 14.
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4 = & gt;
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
U600
U601
U602
U603A
U603B
U603C
U603D
U604A
U604B
U604C
U606A
U606B
U606C
U606D
U606E
U606F
3L
8K
1G
2H
3H
1H
2H
4K
7F
8F
5E
30
4E
2L
2L
2D
4L
5K
3K
3M
3M
3M
3M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
5M
W505
W510
W603
W604
W605
W610
W611
W612
W2502
W2502
4E
4E
1H
4
1
5G
3L
3L
BH
2M
8A
5N
6M
3M
3L
3K
4M
5M
5K
1L
1L
Y600
6K
4L
2246A Service
0 TRIG
0 GATE
ATS 0 TO R490
ATS 1 TO R491
ATS 2 TO R492
0TS 2 TO R495
1
R496
0 SLOPE TO R497
*.i, " ,.
m *r
" ai
w
,.
w3Xhra,raRanx,nu*.s~, ,.Ica,i, " 't,,u.
ITRIGGER LOGIC(
. "
w ~ * ~ " ~ ~ M ~ ' M P , ~ S ~ ~ I I ~ I I ~6a,ihlnrs,
.a*flcw#a I ,
,
@ Static
Sensitive Devicee
See Maintenance Section
RO TR SEP EN TO U201-11 0C
@
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 5
SET A SECIDIV TO 2 ms.
HORlZ MODE A, A SECIDIV 2 ~ 9 ,
HOLDOFF MIN (CCW)
MORE
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
0
HORlZ MODE ALT, A SECIDIV 2ps,
B SEClDlV .5ps, HOLDOFF MIN,
DELAY-INTENSIFIED ZONE STARTS MIDSCREEN
Scans by ARTEK MEDU
*
A AND B SWEEPS AND DELAY COMPARATORS DIAGRAM 5
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
C301
C302
C303
C305
C306
C307A
C3078
C307C
C308
C310
C311
C312
C313
C314
C315
C321
C326
C329
C330
4D
7D
3D
48
4A
5J
5J
7J
4H
41
5C
3J
2J
5J
5J
7C
7H
7J
7J
8F
9F
7C
9D
7C
7E
7E
1O
F
7D
7E
7F
9E
9E
7F
7G
9F
10E
1OF
9G
CR301
3C
7C
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310A
03108
031 1
0312
0313
0315
0316
0 3 17
0318
0320
0321
0322
0323A
03238
0325
0326
3D
48
4C
4D
41
41
3H
5D
5C
5J
5J
5C
5K
8D
68
7C
7D
7J
6H
7D
7C
7J
8
.
J
7K
5D
7C
8E
8E
8F
7E
7D
8D
7F
7F
7E
7E
8F
7E
9F
9E
9E
9F
10E
9D
9F
9F
9E
9E
9E
7F
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
0328
0329
0330
0331
0332
0333
4K
6K
4H
6H
78
56
7E
9E
7E
9E
9F
8F
R301
R302
R303
R304
R305
R306
R307
R308
R309
R310
R311
R313A
R3138
R313C
R313D
R314
R315
R316
R317
R318
R319
17320
R321A
R32 18
R321C
R321D
R321E
R321F
R322
R323
R325
R326
17327
R328
R329
R330
R331
R332
6C
4J
4C
5C
5C
48
4A
4A
3C
3C
3D
4D
30
3D
3D
3D
8K
5D
48
4C
58
5K
6F
6F
6F
3F
3F
3F
5L
7L
4H
4J
7C
3M
3J
2J
3K
5C
9E
7E
8F
8F
7G
7C
7C
7C
9C
7C
8C
7C
7C
7C
7C
7C
1O
E
7F
8E
BE
8F
8E
8D
8D
8D
8D
8D
8D
7H
7G
7D
7D
9F
8E
9E
9E
8E
7G
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
3L
3L
2M
4L
6C
1L
2L
1L
4K
6K
5K
5L
5L
6M
7M
6L
5L
5E
6L
66
6C
78
1M
1M
3M
3M
2M
3M
6D
4C
7C
8C
7H
1A
2A
8C
8D
8D
8C
8K
7K
6L
5M
6L
6M
8F
8F
8E
8E
7G
9F
9E
9F
8E
8D
8E
8H
7G
7H
7H
7H
7H
8F
7G
9E
9E
9F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8F
8G
8F
9F
9G
10E
8C
8C
9G
9G
R335
R336
R337
R338
R340
R341
R342
R343
R344
R346
R347
R348
R349
R35OA
R3508
R350C
R350E
R351
R352
R354
R355
R356
R3578
R357C
R357D
R357E
R359
17360
R361
R362
R363
R364
R365
R366
R367
R370
R371
R372
R373
R375
17376
R377
R378
R379
R380
Partial A 10 also shown on diagrams 1. 2. 3, 4, 6, 7 and 14.
Scans by AR TEK MEDU = & gt;
9G
9G
10E
9E
8G
6J
7G
6J
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
R383
R384
R385
R386
R387
R388
R391
R393
R394
R395
R396
88
5E
1M
1M
1M
3M
5E
4H
6H
5J
7J
9G
8D
8F
9F
8F
8F
8D
10E
10E
7E
9E
U301A
U301 C
U302
U303
U304A
U3048
U307
U308
U309A
U309B
U310
U311
U313
U315A
U3158
U3 15C
U3 16A
U3168
U316C
U316D
1K
2K
18
2C
3H
6H
2F
2G
4A
3D
5F
5G
3M
1M
4M
2M
6M
6L
6L
6M
8D
8D
8C
9C
8D
80
7D
7D
7C
7C
9D
9D
8E
8F
8F
8F
7H
7H
7H
7H
VR301
VR302
VR303
VR304
VR308
VR309
VR310
VR311
VR312
60
50
80
78
7C
5C
8C
6K
8K
6G
6G
8G
8G
9F
6G
9G
8E
10E
W304
W802
7K
5K
8G
8G
6555-54
A AND B SWEEPS AND DELAY COMPARATORS
6 I
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 6
Scans by ARTEK M
. = & gt;
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER DIAGRAM 6
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C319
C802
C803
CB04
CB05
CB07
CBO8
C809
CBlO
CB14
CB17
C819
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
68
3K
3J
3G
4K
2H
58
5K
5J
7H
6C
7L
6F
7K
7J
BJ
8J
7J
9G
8K
8J
8J
6G
7J
CRBOl
CRB02
CRB19
48
3L
6L
9H
7K
8J
P17
P1 8
3M
5M
7K
BK
(1801
(1802
(1803
(1804
(1805
2K
3K
3H
3G
5K
7J
7J
7J
7J
8J
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
(1806
(1807
(1808
(1809
(1810
6K
5H
5H
5E
3E
8J
8J
R353
R358
R369
RBOl
RBOZ
R803
R804
R805
R806
RE07
R808
R809
R810
RBll
R81 2
RBI3
RBI4
RBI5
R816
6B
68
68
2K
3L
2J
2J
4H
2H
58
4D
4D
5E
7D
7D
6K
6J
6J
7H
8D
8D
8D
7K
7K
7J
7J
7J
7J
8J
8H
7H
9G
7H
8H
8H
7H
BH
8K
BJ
81
8J
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R819
R820
R821
RE22
RE23
A825
R826
R827
R828
R829
A836
R840
RE41
R842
RE43
R844
R845
R846
RE47
A848
R849
R850
R851
R852
R853
Parr~al 1 0 also shown on d~agrarns1, 2. 3. 4, 5, 7 and 14.
A
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
5L
7L
7L
7L
4C
7C
7C
4C
3K
6K
4C
2K
4F
3F
2G
2G
3H
4K
5G
5H
5H
5G
5H
5K
6J
BK
8K
7K
7K
8G
BH
7G
BH
7K
BK
8H
7J
7J
7J
7K
7K
7J
7J
8J
BK
BK
BJ
8J
BK
8J
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
8OARD
LOCATION LOCATION
RE54
R855
R856
RE57
R858
5E
4E
4E
4E
3K
8H
7H
BH
BH
7J
U3018
UBOlA
U802
68
7H
3C
8D
7H
8H
VRBOl
VRB02
4K
3G
8J
W17
W18
W305
WB05
W806
W807
W8OB
W810
WBll
3M
5M
68
58
5C
58
5C
48
48
7K
BK
1OD
6L
6K
6L
6K
5G
5H
81
2246A Service
A
1
B
7
C
D
7
I
E
v
F
G
v
7
H
v
J
v
K
v
L
,N
M
v
1
C
f
2
C
4
7
-HORIZONTAL
OUTPUT
TO V 1
3
0
3Y
D
f
4
& lt;
C
HDO ILSBI
5
ROUT
8
+HORIZONTAL
OUTPUT
TO V I
C
f
0
4H
6
& lt;
C
HORIZ
1X GAIN
RE26
5K
7
@ Static
Sensitive Devices
See Maintenance Section
C
8
-
FOR I ~ T E czmn -Y
O
awEcTIO#I *)ID PQER m
~
~
Y*W BWm
2246A
A
A
A
A
A
S
B
A
A
A
A
A
:
y
DISTRIBVTIDW
@
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
6555-55
A
-
A
@
Figure 9-8. A8-CRT
Control board.
Static Sensitive Devices
See Ma~ntenanceSectron
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 7
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF) AND
A INTEN CONTROL CW (FULLY ON).
Assembly
Circuit
Chassis mounted cornpanents have no hsembly Number
prefix-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts Lst-
A8-CRT
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R901
R902
SCHEM
NUMBER
7
7
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R903
R905
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
CONTROL BOARD
SCHEM
NUMBER
W900
7
7
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
W900
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
14
7
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF) AND
A INTEN CONTROL CW (FULLY ON).
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF) AND
A INTEN CONTROL CW (FULLY ON).
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF),
A INTEN CCW (OFF), B ENTEN CW (FULLY
ON), AND HORIZONTAL MODE TO ALT.
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF) AND
A INTEN CONTROL CW (FULLY ON).
Q
0v
0v
SET READOUT CONTROL CCW (OFF),
A INTEN CCW (OFF), B ENTEN CW (FULLY
ON), AND HORIZONTAL MODE TO ALT.
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA
*
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJUST and CONTROL MUX DIAGRAM 7
ASSEMBLY A 8
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R901
R902
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
5A
6A
1A
1C
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
R903
R905
6A
4A
1F
1H
W900
4A
4F
8L
7L
5K
6K
1OA
9N
9M
9M
9M
J15
J927
2K
2L
6A
106
P8
P9
P9
P2302
P2304
8A
3M
4M
1A
3A
1OM
8N
8N
1OD
1OD
(1905
(1907
(1908
(11001
(11 0 0 2
(11003
(11004
(11005
(12701
(12702
(12703
(12704
(12705
(12706
(12707
(12708
(12709
(1271 1
02712
0 2 7 13
02715
4E
4E
4F
5D
6D
6D
7D
80
7H
7H
7H
8H
7G
8F
7F
5E
5F
5G
5H
5H
7F
1OA
10A
1OA
3K
3K
3L
3K
7L
7N
7M
6M
6N
6M
7M
6M
6L
6L
1OL
1OL
1OL
6M
R503
R508
R510
R512
R906
R907
R908
R909
R910
R911
R920
R921
R922
R923
R924
28
28
28
3B
4E
4E
4F
5D
2L
2L
3G
3G
3H
3H
2H
1OC
1O
C
1OC
1OC
1OB
1OA
1OA
8B
106
8A
8B
8B
9C
9C
9C
R930
R931
R932
R933
R934
R935
R936
R937
R938
R939
R940
RlOOl
R1002
R1003
R1004
R1005
R1006
R1007
RlOO8
R1009
RlOlO
R1020
R1021
R1022
R1023
R1024
R1025
R102B
172701
R2702
R2703
R2704
R2705
R2706
R2708
R2709
R2710
R2711
R2712
R2713
R2714
R2715
R2716
R2717
R2718
R2719
R2720
R2721
R2722
R2723
R2724
R2726
1H
1H
1H
1H
2G
2H
1J
2J
1G
2G
2J
5C
6C
6C
7C
5C
6D
7D
7D
8C
8B
58
58
6B
66
78
78
5D
7E
7E
6E
6E
7F
7F
6G
6G
BG
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
6G
6H
7J
7J
7J
7K
7K
7K
7K
5E
8A
7A
7A
78
78
78
7A
7A
78
78
7A
3K
3K
3L
3K
7L
7L
BL
7L
7K
7K
7L
7L
7L
7L
7L
7L
4K
6L
6L
7L
7L
7L
7M
7M
7M
6M
6N
6M
7M
7M
7M
7M
7M
7M
7N
8N
9N
6L
9M
9M
V1
1M
CHASSIS
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
R2727
R2728
R2729
R2733
R2734
R2735
172736
R2737
R2738
R2739
R2740
R2741
R2742
R2743
R2745
R2750
R2751
R2758
R2760
R2765
R2784
R2785
R2786
R2787
R2788
R2789
R2795
R2796
5E
5E
6E
6F
6F
5G
5G
5G
5G
4H
6K
6L
6L
7F
3L
3L
4L
5L
5L
5L
7E
6F
7L
6L
7L
9L
9L
9L
1OL
1OK
1OL
1OL
1OL
BM
8L
8L
7N
8M
9M
9L
1OM
7M
7N
8N
6N
6N
6N
8N
7L
6M
U506
U930A
U9308
U931
UlOOlB
UlOOlC
UlOOlD
UllOlA
2E
1H
2H
3H
6B
6B
58
78
9C
78
7B
98
7L
7L
7L
2M
VR2701
7G
6M
W9
W9
W9
W16
W906
WlOOO
WlOlO
W1288
W2302
W2304
W2701
3M
EL4
8M
EL4
1H
5D
7D
RJ
8N
1OM
8N
7K
7A
3L
4K
6J
1OD
1OD
5K
1E
DS903
DS2701
DS2702
082703
DS2704
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
Partial A8 also shown on diagram 14.
ASSEMBLY A1 0
C910
C935
C l 001
C1002
C1003
C1004
C2703
C2704
C2705
C2706
C2707
C2708
C2710
C2711
C2712
C2713
C2715
C2716
C2717
C2719
C2720
C2721
C2723
C2724
C2758
C2759
C2783
C2784
C2785
2L
2H
5C
6C
6C
7C
7G
6G
7G
7H
7H
6H
7J
7K
7K
8K
6G
5H
5H
6J
6E
8K
6K
7F
3L
5L
5L
106
7A
7L
7M
BM
7L
6M
7M
7N
6N
7M
7N
7N
8M
8N
6N
1OL
1OL
1OL
1OM
8L
6K
7L
8M
1OL
7M
8N
6N
8N
CR935
CR936
CRlOOl
CR1002
CR1003
CR1004
CR1005
CR2701
CR2702
CR2703
CR2704
CR2705
CR2707
CR2713
CR2714
CR2715
CR2716
CR2717
CR2718
2J
2J
5D
7D
8C
7C
5D
7K
8K
7K
7K
8G
7F
6H
5H
5J
5K
6K
5J
7A
7A
4K
4K
7L
7L
5M
9M
9M
8N
6N
6M
7L
1OL
1OL
9L
BM
9M
8L
DS901
DS902
4E
4F
8A
9A
5J
6J
6L
Parf1alA10 also shown on dragrams 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6 and 14.
OTHER PARTS
J16
A
CHASSIS
P26
P27
1L
2L
CHASSIS
CHASSIS
Scam by AR TEK MEDLQ = & gt;
5J
5J
6J
6H
7J
6
J
3A
4
4
.
7E
ARTEK MEDIA
Digitally signed by ARTEK MEDIA
DN: cn=ARTEK MEDIA, c=US, o=DC Henderson
Date: 2005.10.22 09:37:32 -05'00'
@ Static
Sensitive Devices
See Maintenance SectJon
FOR
CH 1 POS
T C218 U203-3 66
O
IhTEsRITEO CIRCUIT S U P R Y
2246A Service
Static Sensitive Devices
See Ma~ntenanceSect~on
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
Chassis mounted components have no Assembly Numbel
prellx-see end of Replaceable Electr~calParts Llst
A16-PROCESSOR
Figure 9-9. A16-Processor
board.
BOARD
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR DIAGRAM 8
ASSEMBLY A 1 6
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
BT02501
5K
8D
C25 1 4
C2515
C2516
C25 17
C2518
C2551
C2552
C2553
C2554
C2555
66
6B
5J
8A
BA
4M
6H
6H
CR2501
CR2502
CR2504
CR2505
DS2501
BOARD
LOCATION
J2502
J2502
16
3M
3J
3J
(12507
7F
7J
R2501
A2502
A2503
R2504
R2505
R2506
A2508
R2509
R2510
A251 1
A2512
R2513
R2514
2D
1D
7E
66
8D
5K
2B
16
26
16
1E
1D
3D
4G
4H
5J
5J
5F
7C
3D
5J
8J
8C
4H
4G
5F
A2515
R2516
8D
7D
6G
6G
8J
6J
8J
5M
4F
4F
4F
4F
4J
4
1
4K
8E
7F
7J
7J
6J
7J
8E
61
1 ii
SCHEM
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
R2517
R251B
R2519
R2520
R2521
R2522
R2523
R2524
R2526
R2527
R2554
R2555
R2560
R2561
R2562
R2563
R2564
8F
8F
6J
5H
5E
3H
7A
8B
7D
7D
28
18
3M
3M
3M
4M
5M
6J
6J
6J
41
51
61
6J
6J
6F
6F
2A
4G
4F
4F
4F
4F
4J
U2503A
U2503B
U2503C
U2503D
U2506A
U2506B
U2506C
U2506D
U2512
U2513
U2514
U2515
U2517
U251B
U2519
U2521
2F
20
8G
IF
7D
7D
7B
2E
3J
3G
2G
1E
4L
5L
6L
7J
4H
4H
4H
4H
5J
5J
5J
5J
4F
41
5H
4H
5F
4J
61
51
Y2501
6B
6H
U2501
U2502
1C
7A
6G
6J
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
Parrial A 16 also shown on diagrams 9, 10, 1 1 and 15.
Scans by AR TEK MEDU
2246A Service
$
0~
;
$
!
,
I
nnsse
/
100
ADO
Us DT & gt;
A%
A
-
MEASUREMENT
PROCESSOR
[PARTIAL
A 1 b PROCESSOR BOARD I
2246A
V
"
I
w
w
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR
5555-57
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
I;
m
s by = & gt; AREKMED*
@* ~ - Z O O ~
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 9
STOREIRECALL MENU ON FACTORY
RECALL #1 SELECTED
STOREIRECALL MENU
ON FACTORY RECALL #1 SELECTED
STOREIRECALL MENU
ONFACTORYRECALL#l SELECTED
FACTORY SETUP #1 MENU OFF.
MORE
0
READOUT SYSTEM DIAGRAM 9
ASSEMBLY A 1 6
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
C2411
C2412
C2416
C2417
C2418
C24 1 9
C2420
6J
4
1
2H
2J
2J
2J
2K
5E
5C
10
10
10
18
18
J2302
J 2 502
J2502
3M
1A
1M
80
3J
3J
R2400
R2401
R2402
R2404
R2405
R2406
R2407
R2408
20
2M
2F
1G
4G
5K
5K
3K
2A
2A
20
1D
5D
6D
6E
6C
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
R2409
R2410
R2411
R2413
R2414
R2415
R2416
R2417
R2418
R2419
R2420
R2421
3K
5M
3M
5J
6J
4J
4J
4M
4M
2M
2M
1A
6C
7C
7C
5E
5E
5D
5C
7C
7C
2C
2A
20
U2400
U2401
U2402
U2403
U2404
U2405
U2406
2C
4B
6B
1G
5E
6F
5G
3C
5F
5F
1C
48
30
4C
Partial A 16 also shown on diagrams 8, 10, 7 1 and 15.
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
U2407A
U24070
U2408
U2409A
U24090
U2410
U2411
U2412
U2413
U2414
U2415
U2416A
U24160
U2416C
U2416D
U2417A
U2417B
U2417C
U2417D
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
4F
3F
4G
10
1D
2E
7F
4
1
3J
4L
3L
5L
3L
3M
5M
10
1C
20
3B
5E
5E
5C
38
38
28
40
5D
5C
6D
6C
7D
7D
7D
7D
1A
1A
1A
1A
RO CH I POS EN\
RO CH 2 POS EN
RO CH 3 POS EN
20
20
20
16
16
24
20
10
14
U2416
10
10
10
0
0
12
7
4
S t a t i c S e n s i t i v e Devices
2246A Service
I
A14-SWITCH
I
BOARD
I
I
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
DS2010
DS2011
DS2012
DS2013
DS2014
DS2015
DS2020
DS2021
DS2022
DS2023
DS2025
DS2026
052027
DS2028
DS2029
DS2030
DS2031
DS2032
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
DS2033
DS2034
DS2035
DS2036
DS2037
052038
DS2039
DS2041
DS2042
DS2043
DS2044
DS2045
DS2046
DS2047
DS2048
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
P2501
P2501
10
15
C2001
15
CR2001
CR2002
CR2003
CR2004
CR2005
CR2006
10
10
10
10
10
10
DS2001
DS2002
DS2003
DS2004
DS2005
DS2006
DS2007
DS2008
DS2009
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
R2001
R2002
10
10
S2001
S2002
S2003
S2004
S2005
S2006
52007
S2006
S2009
S2010
S2011
S2012
52013
S2014
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
5201 5
S2016
52017
S2018
S2019
S2020
S2021
52022
52024
S2026
S2028
S2030
S2031
S2033
I
608137
Figure 9-10. A14-Switch
board.
BOARD
Static Sensitive Devices
See Marntenance Sectron
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
I
Assembly
Number
I
_i Subassembly L
1
Number (rl used)
c'rCu't
I
I
Chassis mounted comwnents have no Assembly Number
pellx-see end of Replaceable Electr~calParts List
SCHEM
NUMBER
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
52038
S2039
S2040
S2041
S2042
52043
52045
S2046
S2047
S2048
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
U2001
U2001
U2002
10
15
10
SWITCH BOARD AND INTERFACE DIAGRAM 10
ASSEMBLY A 1 4
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CR02001
CR2002
CR2003
CR2004
CR2005
CR2006
3G
3G
3H
3J
3J
3K
3F
2F
4E
3D
3C
3A
DS2001
DS2002
DS2003
DS2004
DS2005
DS2006
DS2007
DS2008
DS2009
DSZOlO
DS2011
DS2012
DS2013
DS2014
DS2015
DS2020
DS2021
DS2022
DS2023
3F
3F
4F
5F
6F
6F
7F
8F
3F
3F
4F
5F
6F
6F
7F
5E
6E
6E
7E
2A
28
28
2C
3D
3D
30
3D
4A
48
48
38
4C
4C
4C
2C
2C
2D
2E
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
DS2025
DS2026
DS2027
DS2028
DS2029
DS2030
DS2031
DS2032
DS2033
DS2034
DS2035
DS2036
DS2037
DS2038
DS2039
DS2041
DS2042
DS2043
DS2044
DS2045
DS2046
DS2047
DS2048
3D
3D
4D
5D
5D
6D
7D
8E
3D
3D
4D
5D
6D
6D
7D
3C
3C
4C
5C
6C
6C
7C
8C
2F
2F
2F
3F
3F
3F
3F
4E
2F
2F
2F
3F
3F
3F
3F
2F
2F
2F
3F
3F
3F
3F
4F
P2501
P2501
2F
3C
18
18
C2550
88
BI
J2501
J2501
2F
3C
81
81
02501
02502
02503
02504
02505
(32506
2G
2H
1H
1J
1K
1K
71
71
7H
7H
7H
7H
R2528
2A
6H
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
R2001
R2002
7L
4L
48
3E
52001
52002
S2003
S2004
S2005
S2006
S2007
S2008
S2009
S2010
S2011
S2012
S2013
S2014
S2015
S2016
S2017
S2018
S2019
S2020
S2021
S2022
S2024
BJ
8J
7J
7J
7J
6J
6J
6J
5J
5J
4J
4J
4J
3J
3J
3J
8H
8H
7H
7H
7H
6H
6H
1A
2A
3A
4A
3A
18
48
3C
4C
1C
4D
1D
4E
4F
4F
4F
1A
2A
3A
4A
38
18
3C
R2529
R2531
R2532
R2533
R2534
R2535
R2536
R2537
R2538
R2539
R2540
R2541
R2542
4A
1C
2F
1C
1G
1D
1H
1D
1J
ID
1J
1E
1K
6H
71
71
7H
7H
7H
7H
7H
7H
7H
7H
7G
7G
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
S2026
S2028
S2030
52031
S2033
S2034
S2035
S2036
S2037
52038
S2039
SZO40
S2041
S2042
S2043
S2045
S2046
S2047
52048
5H
4H
3H
3H
8G
8G
8G
7G
7G
6G
6G
6G
5G
5G
5G
4G
3G
3G
3G
1C
2D
2E
2F
1B
2A
3A
48
38
1C
4C
3C
4C
1D
3D
4F
3F
3F
3F
U2001
U2002
2M
5M
28
48
W2501
W2501
2N
8C
1B
1B
R2546
R2547
R2548
R2549
R2550
R2551
R2552
R2553
38
4C
4C
5B
68
78
78
8B
71
71
71
7J
7J
7J
7J
8J
U2523
U2524
U2525
1A
3A
38
7H
61
71
Partial A 14 also shown on diagram 75.
ASSEMBLY A 1 6
C2521
C2522
C2523
C2524
C2525
C2526
C2543
C2544
C2545
C2546
C2547
C2548
C2549
2F
1G
1H
1J
1J
1K
3C
4C
4C
58
68
76
78
71
71
7H
7H
7H
7H
71
71
71
71
7J
7J
7J
Partial A 16 also shown on diagrams 8, 9. 1 1 and 15
224649 Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 10
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
==.
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 11
Static Sensitive Devices
See Marntenance Secbon
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
6555-73
I
Componen! Number
I
'A23 A2 ~ 1 2 3 4 '
Arrembiv J
Number
I
T
'
~
Subassembly
Number 01 used)
S
Drcu~l
~
I
~
N~~~~~
I
ChasS16 mounted components have no Assembly Number
prellx-see end of Replaceable Electrical Parts Llst
A15-DAC SUBSYSTEM
BOARD
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
~
~
~
~
~
---
I
t
0 - m Pmhl
NOQ
mloa i ~ w w
- -
U2602
N N N
NNN
L T L T ~U L T L L
gzz
A1S-DAC
C2601
C2602
C2603
C2604
C2605
C2606
C2607
C2606
C2609
C2610
SCHEM
NUMBER
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
ClRCUlT
NUMBER
C2611
C2612
C2613
C2614
C2615
C2616
C2617
C2616
C2619
C2620
SCHEM
NUMBER
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
NN
000
(Dww
%
Figure 9-11. A15-DAC
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
-LB
zz
U2606
C2604
C2602
C2603 c 2 6 0 5
i
!
I
i
Subsystem board.
SLIBSYSTEM BOARD
SCHEM
NUMBER
C2630
12
J2604
12
P2601
12
R2601
R2602
R2603
R2604
12
12
12
12
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R2606
R2607
R2606
R2609
R2610
R2611
R2612
R2613
R2614
R2615
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
12
12
12
12
R2616
132617
R2616
R2619
R2620
12
12
12
12
11
U2605
U2606
U2607
U2606
U2609
12
U2601
U2602
U2603
U2604
12
12
12
12
W2601
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4 = & gt;
SCHEM
NUMBER
12
12
12
12
ADC, D A C SYSTEM DIAGRAM 11
ASSEMBLY A 1 2
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
J2105
48
1B
R2101
R2102
R2103
6A
8A
7A
3A
2A
3B
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
R2104
R2105
R2 106
A21 0 7
R2108
6A
7A
3A
4A
8A
28
4C
1D
3D
4D
R2109
R2110
R2111A
R2111B
R2112
6A
5A
3A
38
5A
4F
1E
2C
20
1F
R2113A
R2113B
48
4A
2D
2E
R2303
R2304
R2305
A2306
R2307
R2308
R2310
R2311
R2312
R2313
R2314
R2315
R2316
R2317
R2318
R2319
A2320
R2321
R2322
R2323
R2324
R2325
R2326
R2327
R2328
2J
3L
4L
6K
5K
5K
2C
6F
6F
7E
7E
7F
7F
7E
7E
1K
1J
1J
1J
6K
6C
7A
78
7C
7C
7C
2A
7F
7E
7E
7E
7E
7E
7E
7E
4A
3A
5A
5A
7E
R2329
R2330
R2331
R2337
R2338
R2339
R2340
R2341
R2342
R2343
R2344
R2345
R2346
R2347
R2348
R2349
R2350
R2351
R2352
R2353
R2354
R2355
R2356
R2357
2F
2G
2G
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
5H
4H
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5H
5H
6L
7L
7L
BL
BL
8L
6A
6A
6A
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
70
7E
7E
7D
70
70
U2300
U2301
U2302
U2303
U2304A
U2304B
U2304C
U2304D
U2305A
U2305B
U2305C
U2305D
U2306
U2307
U2308
U2309
U2310
U2311
U2312
U2313
U2314
20
1E
3J
1K
4L
2M
3L
3L
5M
4M
3M
2L
5K
50
5J
6G
5G
7G
3G
2J
5B
5B
6B
7A
78
78
76
78
78
78
78
7B
7C
6E
7G
7G
7F
7F
7E
6E
78
58
BG
Partial A 12 also shown on d~agram15.
ASSEMBLY A 1 6
C2300
C2301
C2302
C2303
C2305
C2306
C2307
C230B
C2309
C2310
C23 18
C2320
C2322
C2323
C2324
3H
3L
4L
3L
2L
2M
3L
3M
4L
4M
6K
5M
5M
5L
5M
78
7C
78
78
78
78
7A
7A
7A
78
7C
7D
70
7D
7A
J2302
J2304
J2601
J2601
2M
6M
1C
1M
8B
8E
P2105
R2301
R2302
::
3H
~
I
2A
2A
8G
7A
7A
Partial A 16 also shown on diagrams 8,
:
:
7K
7K
2F
L1
7E
7E
6A
9. TO and 15
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4
-
W2105
J
.
6
--
-
2246A Service
7@
0 -
FROM U 2 5 0 6
D I G H O R I Z POS
08
IOUT
0 REF T R I G LVL
@ Static Sensitive Devices
See Maintenance S e c t ~ o n
i
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 12
TRIGGER MODE SGL SEQ
KEEP READOUT ON IN SGL SEQ? NO
(IN SERVICE CONFIGURE MENU)
Scans by ARTEK MEDU ..r & gt;
D A C SUBSYSTEM DIAGRAM 12
ASSEMBLY A 1 5
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
C2601
C2602
C2603
C2604
C2605
C2606
C2607
C260B
C2609
C2610
C2611
C2612
C2613
C2614
C2615
C2616
C26 17
C261B
C2619
C2620
C2630
3G
4K
4K
5K
5K
6K
6K
6K
2K
2K
3K
3K
7K
5C
5C
5C
6F
66
78
78
66
38
3C
3C
3C
30
2C
2C
2C
4C
4C
4D
4C
2D
2A
3A
1B
3C
1D
1C
3A
38
J2604
2M
40
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
P2601
P2601
1B
7M
1C
1C
R2601
R2602
R2603
R2604
R2606
R2607A
R2607B
R2607C
R2607D
R2607E
R2607F
R2607G
R2607H
R26071
R2608
R2609
R2610
R2611
R2612
R2613
2G
3G
2H
6F
38
38
3C
38
18
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
1B
18
1B
4C
4C
4D
40
3C
3C
I
3C
3C
lC
3G
3C
3G
3G
3G
3G
3G
2L
2L
3L
3L
4L
4L
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
R2614
R2615
R2616
R2617
R261B
R2619
R2620
5L
5L
5L
6L
6L
7L
66
3D
3D
1C
1C
1D
ID
38
U2601
U2601
U2602
U2602
U2603A
U2603B
U2603C
U2603D
U2603
U2604
U2604
U2605
U2605
U2606A
U2606B
2E
5D
1G
7F
3D
4D
4C
4C
5C
1J
7F
5J
7F
4L
4L
28
28
3A
3A
1B
1B
1B
lB
1B
3C
3C
2C
2C
3C
3C
a
Scans by AR TEK MEDU = & gt;
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
U2606C
U2606D
U2606
U2607A
U2607B
U2607C
U2607D
U2607
U2608.4
U260BB
U2608C
U260BD
U260B
U2609A
U2609B
U2609
4L
5L
7D
2L
2L
3L
3L
70
5L
6L
6L
7L
7D
6C
2H
7E
3C
3C
3C
4C
4C
4C
4C
4C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
3C
3C
3C
W2601
W2601
BB
BM
1B
1B
2246A Service
R INTEN
O
+5V TO R2606-I
-15V TO C260i
2246A
A
DAC SUBSYSTEM
6555-61
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
\
l
Service
Static Sensitive Devices
See Ma~ntenanceSechon
COMPONENT NUMBER EXAMPLE
Component Number
R1234
Number
(if
used)
Cntrus mointea c o m m n m s h l n no b & =c
smbr
wet #-see end of Red~ccaUeDCCnlml P t R I L I
E
SUPPLY
A18-POWER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C2201
C2202
C2203
C2204
C2206
C2207
C2208
C2209
C2210
C2211
C2212
C2213
C2214
C2215
C2216
C2217
C2218
C2219
C2221
C2222
C2223
C2224
C2225
C2226
C2227
C2228
C2229
C2230
C2232
C2233
C2234
C2238
SCHEM
NUMBER
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
SUPPLY BOARD
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
C2238
C2239
C2243
C2244
C2245
C2248
C2249
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
CR2235
CR2236
CR2237
13
13
13
0221 2
02213
02214
13
13
13
DS2201
13
F2201
13
CR2201
CR2202
CR2204
CR2205
CR2206
CR2207
CR2208
CR2209
CR2210
CR2211
CR2212
CR2213
CR2214
CR2215
CR2216
CR2218
CR2219
CR2220
CR2227
CR2228
CR2231
CR2232
CR2233
CR2234
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
52208
52225
J2726
13
13
13
L2201
L2202
L2203
L2204
L2205
I2206
I2207
L2208
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
P2204
13
02201
02202
02203
02204
02206
02208
02209
02210
0221 1
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
R2201
R2203
R2204
R2205
R2206
R2207
R2208
R2209
R2210
R2211
R2212
R2215
R2216
R2218
R2219
R2220
R2221
R2222
R2223
R2224
R2225
R2226
R2227
R2228
R2229
R2230
R2231
R2232
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R2233
R2236
R2237
R2238
R2239
R2240
R2241
R2242
R2243
R2245
R2246
R2247
R2248
R2250
R2252
R2253
R2254
R2255
R2256
R2257
R2259
R2260
R2265
R2266
R2267
R2268
R2270
R2271
R2272
R2273
R2274
R2275
Scam by ARTEK M6DL4 =. & gt;
SCHEM
NUMBER
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
R2276
13
RT2201
13
S2201
13
T2203
T2204
T2205
T2206
13
13
13
13
U2201
U2230
13
13
VR2201
VR2202
VR2203
VR2204
VR2205
VR2206
VR2207
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
W28
W29
W31
W32
W2201
13
13
13
13
13
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 13
FACTORY SETUP # 1 STOREIRECALL
MENU DISPLAYED
Q
-2.5 V
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
FACTORY SETUP #1 STOREIRECALL
MENU DISPLAYED
2246A Service
WAVEFORMS FOR DIAGRAM 13 (cont)
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA
POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAM 13
ASSEMBLY A 1 8
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
C2201
C2202
C2203
C2204
C2206
C2207
C2208
C2209
C2210
C2211
C2212
C2213
C2214
C2215
C2216
C2217
C2218
C2219
C2221
C2222
C2223
C2224
C2225
C2226
C2227
C2228
C2229
C2230
C2232
C2233
C2234
C2236
C2238
C2239
C2243
C2244
C2245
C2248
C2249
3H
2D
5H
3D
4G
3E
3E
4E
6K
4E
4G
26
16
26
26
2C
8H
6J
2M
2M
3M
3M
5M
5M
5M
5M
4M
4M
3M
4M
5L
6M
6E
4E
2E
7M
7L
6J
4G
5D
3D
2E
2D
4E
3D
30
2E
1G
2D
3E
56
5A
48
16
36
2F
1E
3F
4G
3F
4G
5F
4H
4G
4H
4F
4H
4J
4J
5G
5G
2D
2D
1C
1J
2J
2G
4D
CR2209
CR2210
CR2211
CR2212
CR2213
CR2214
CR2215
CR2216
CR2218
CR2219
CR2220
CR2227
CR2228
CR2231
CR2232
CR2233
CR2234
CR2235
CR2236
CR2237
5L
5L
5L
4L
4L
4L
4M
4M
3M
3L
3L
7J
7K
2C
1C
1C
2C
4L
6J
4G
3H
3H
3H
3H
3H
3J
3H
3J
3J
3H
3G
1G
1G
36
26
36
36
4H
1G
3E
DS2201
EM
2K
CR2201
CR2202
CR2204
CR2205
CR2206
CR2207
CR2208
4H
2G
6J
6J
2L
2L
6L
4E
2C
1F
1F
4G
4G
3H
FL2201
F2201
2A
2A
J2208
J2225
J2726
7M
6M
6M
2K
5H
4K
L2201
L2202
L2203
L2204
L2205
L2206
L2207
L2208
2M
3M
5M
4M
4M
6K
16
26
3G
5G
5H
5H
5G
1J
46
36
P2204
1M
4F
02201
02202
02203
02204
02206
02208
02209
4H
3G
4G
3E
6F
6E
7J
4E
3D
3E
1D
1D
20
1F
2A
CHASSIS
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
7K
2E
6G
6H
02210
0221 1
02212
02213
02214
8J
1E
ID
2E
2E
2F
R2201
R2203
172204
R2205
R2206
R2207
R2208
R2209
R2210.
R2211
R2212
R2215
R2216
R2218
R2219
R2220
R2221
R2222
R2223
R2224
R2225
R2226
R2227
R2228
R2229
R2230
R2231
R2232
R2233
R2236
R2237
R2238
172239
R2240
R2241
R2242
R2243
R2245
R2246
R2247
R2248
5H
2D
2D
6E
40
50
5E
5E
4E
4E
4D
4E
4F
3E
30
3E
2E
2E
3D
6F
6F
2A
16
26
1C
1C
7M
6J
6G
8G
6E
6H
5H
6E
5H
7J
7K
4F
6E
5D
3E
3E
2D
2D
2D
3D
3E
3E
3D
3D
3D
2E
3D
3E
2D
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1D
1D
26
4A
26
4C
4C
1J
1F
1E
2F
1D
1E
1E
2D
1E
1G
1G
3E
2D
3E
3D
P25
6N
CHASSIS
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
R2250
R2252
R2253
R2254
R2255
R2256
R2257
R2259
R2260
R2265
R2266
R2267
R2268
R2270
R2271
R2272
R2273
R2274
R2275
R2276
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
1A
6H
4G
7J
6K
2D
6M
8M
16
2D
8M
8M
6J
8G
4F
7K
6J
6G
5E
6J
1C
1E
4E
1G
1G
2C
5G
3K
4A
2C
2K
2K
1F
2E
3E
1G
1G
2E
1D
1G
RT2201
1A
16
52201
1C
46
T2203
T2204
T2205
T2206
2H
2K
6K
1C
5C
2H
1H
5E
U2201
U2230
5F
7L
3E
3K
VR2201
VR2202
VR2203
VR2204
VR2205
VR2206
VR2207
5F
3E
4H
2A
5G
3D
8J
1D
1C
4E
1A
1E
2C
2F
W28
W29
W31
W32
W2201
2A
1A
2E
3E
7J
2C
2C
3D
4D
1F
52202
3E
CHASSIS
CHASSIS MOUNTED PARTS
625
6N
CHASSIS
2246A Service
@ S t a t i c S e n s i t i v e Devices
See Maintenance S e c t i o n
M A I N BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM 14
ASSEMBLY A 8
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
W900
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
5M
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
BOARD
SCHEM
LOCATION LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
1E
Parrial A 8 also shown on diagram 7.
ASSEMBLY A 1 0
C135
C136
C140
C155
C156
C171
C172
C180
C181
C205
C206
C214
C215
C216
C217
C219
C224
C225
C229
C234
C235
C239
C244
C245
C249
C265
C282
C283
C297
C29B
C304
C309
C316
C317
C318
C320
C337
C33B
C339
C35 1
C445
C475
C481
C482
C501
C502
C503
C505
C604
C605
C606
C609
C610
7D
8E
BD
7E
8E
5A
1A
8D
7A
3H
3H
78
7B
28
1B
7B
78
7B
7B
7C
7C
7C
70
7C
7D
5B
38
68
3C
38
5D
2H
5C
1K
J6
.
1H
50
@A
8B
5F
1C
1C
2C
2D
1E
1E
3E
2M
2F
1F
1F
1G
2F
2B
28
1C
1B
1B
2B
3C
6D
6D
1OH
1OH
4D
5D
5G
4H
5D
3D
3D
3D
20
2D
2D
ID
ID
1D
5F
4F
6F
5F
3F
7D
6H
8E
8E
9E
BF
9E
8G
9G'
7C
3G
1G
3G
2G
2N
2N
5N
9C
5M
4L
2J
3M
5N
C613
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C708
CEO1
C806
C815
C816
C818
C901
C902
C903
C904
C1005
C1006
CllOl
C1102
C1158
C1159
C2701
C2702
C2709
2E
3H
3J
3J
3J
4A
3H
4A
5G
6J
7J
48
5K
5K
5M
5M
7F
7F
6G
8G
1L
3M
5H
8G
4E
4K
10K
9J
1OK
9K
9G
9J
8K
8H
7H
8H
7K
9A
7A
8A
9B
7M
8L
1M
2M
2K
2J
7L
6L
7M
J1204
1A
5J
LlOl
L102
L201
L21 6
L217
L445
L44 6
L47 5
L476
5A
8D
6A
2B
1B
1C
2C
1C
2D
2C
2C
6E
4H
5H
3H
4H
1J
2H
P2 302
P2502
8M
1N
10D
1L
R182
R208
R226
R245
R282
R283
R297
R298
R312
R339
R345
R3 74
80
3H
7B
7C
3B
6B
3C
38
50
8J
5C
5D
6D
1OH
6E
3D
3F
6F
6F
3F
7C
8E
8E
10E
R390
R392
R481
R504
R701
R709
R723
R733
R734
R837
R915
R916
R1026
R1027
RllOl
R1102
R1158
R1159
R2783
1K
8F
1C
1M
3H
3J
5H
3J
4B
7J
5L
5L
8F
6F
6G
8G
1L
3M
4D
8F
7C
2G
9C
9J
9H
9J
1OK
9G
8K
9A
9A
7M
8L
1J
1J
2J
2J
7N
U112
U122
U171
U172
U173
U201
U202
U203
U210
U220
U230
U240
U260
U301
U302
U303
U304
U307
U308
U309
U310
U311
U315
U316
U421
U431
U441
U501
U502
U503
U506
U600
U601
7D
7D
5A
6A
1A
1B
1B
3H
7B
7B
7C
7C
5B
1K
5E
5E
5F
5E
5E
5F
5E
5E
1H
2H
2C
2C
1D
1E
2E
3E
2M
1E
2E
6C
4C
3B
3B
3C
5H
5G
10G
5D
4D
3E
2E
5F
8D
8C
9C
8D
7D
70
7C
9D
9D
8F
7H
3G
2G
2H
3N
3N
5N
9C
4L
5K
Partial A 1 0 also shown on diagrams 1, 2, 3. 4, 5. 6 and 7
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
U602
U603
U604
U606
U701
U702
U8Ol
U802
U901A
U901 B
U901
U930
U931
U932
Ul00l
UllOl
U1102
U1103
U1104
U1106
1F
1G
2F
2F
3J
3J
5G
6J
5K
5L
5J
5J
3L
5K
7F
7H
7H
1L
2L
2M
3K
3M
5M
5M
9J
9K
7H
8H
9A
9A
9A
7B
9B
7A
7L
2M
1L
2K
2M
2J
W103
W235
W900
W1103
W1200
W1201
W1202
W1204
W1205
W 1209
W1210
W1216
W1217
W1218
W1221
W1222
W1223
W1231
W1237
W 1247
W1248
W 1249
W1250
W1251
W1252
W1255
W1277
W2302
W2502
6A
7E
5M
2L
1H
3L
2H
1H
2E
1E
1E
3L
3G
3G
3B
8B
3K
6F
8F
5C
5G
5G
5H
BA
6D
5D
9B
1K
6F
8C
9H
7G
4N
2J
4K
8C
6H
5H
4H
6D
6D
8K
6K
6D
6H
5H
7K
6H
5H
6F
8K
1OD
1L
@A
5B
4D
BM
1M
2246A Service
PROCESSOR BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM 15
ASSEMBLY A 1 2
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
J2105
3L
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
P2501
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
1L
1B
C2504
C2505
C2506
C2507
C2508
C2509
C2510
C2511
C2530
C2531
C2532
C2541
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
2C
1B
5G
5J
5H
4G
4G
6F
61
4H
6H
6H
7H
6J
J2302
J2501
J2502
J2601
38
1L
1B
5L
BB
81
3J
2A
P2 105
3L
8G
R2309
R2412
6G
6H
7C
7D
U2300
1E
58
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
U2001
U2002
1L
1L
28
48
W2501
1L
1B
U2301
U2302
U2303
U2304
U2305
U2306
U2307
U2308
U2309
U2310
U2311
U2312
U2313
U2314
U2400
U2401
U2402
U2403
U2404
U2405
U2406
U2407
U240B
U2409
1E
1H
6G
6C
7C
6E
1E
6F
7F
7F
7F
7F
1E
6C
1G
2E
2E
2E
1F
1F
1D
1F
ID
1F
58
6B
7A
78
78
7C
6E
7G
7G
7F
7F
7E
6E
7B
3C
5F
5F
1C
48
38
4C
5E
5C
38
U2410
U2411
U2412
U2413
U2414
U2415
U2416
U2417
U2501
U2502
U2503
U2506
U2512
U2513
U2514
U2515
U2517
U2518
U2519
U2523
U2524
U2525
2E
2E
7G
6H
7H
7C
IF
1C
1G
1F
2F
2E
2E
2E
2E
1F
1F
ID
2E
2E
2E
28
48
5D
5C
6D
6C
7D
1A
6G
6J
4H
5J
4F
41
5H
4H
5F
4
1
61
7H
61
71
W 2 105
3L
BG
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
BOARD
LOCATION LOCATION
1B
Part~al 12 also shown on diagram 1 1
A
ASSEMBLY A 1 4
C2001
1M
28
Partial A 14 also shown on diagram 10
ASSEMBLY A1 6
C2304
C2311
C2312
C2313
C2314
C2315
C2316
C2317
C2319
C2321
C2401
C2402
C2403
C2404
C2405
C2406
C2407
C2408
C2409
C2410
C2415
C2501
C2502
C2503
38
1C
1C
1C
6B
7B
1.J
6G
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
2C
2C
2C
2C
6H
2C
2C
2C
8A
58
58
6B
8A
7B
78
7C
6F
6F
38
48
1C
5E
2A
4A
4D
5D
3D
28
7D
4J
4F
4F
.
Partial A 16 also shown on diagrams 8, 9, 10 and 1 1
Scam by ARTEK MEDLQ = & gt;
6G
2246A Service
Jll
J12
Ji3
J14
1 EXT
Z AXIS 1 J i 6
-HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
tHORIZONTAL OUTPUT
RO CH 3 POS EN
RO CH 4 POS EN
RO TR SEP EN
-VERTICAL OUTPUT
tVERTICAL OUTPUT
suTTsTm
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
DELAY LINE
HF COMP
R231
CH 3 GAIN
CH 2
GAIN
READOUT
VERTICAL
CENTERING
R241
CH 4 GAIN
CH 1
GAIN
' R275
A 20 nS
TIMING
I
C274
B 2 0 nS
TIMING
C273
R272
HORIZ 1X
GAIN
(TIMING)
Figure 9-13. AlO-Main
R273
*
READOUT
HORlZ
GAIN
R455
B TRIG BANDWIDTH
X GAlN
board adjustment locations.
VERTICAL
OUTPUT
GAIN
HORlZ XI0
GAIN (TIMING)
READOUT
JITTER
-ion
10 - Service
REPLACEABLE
MECHANICAL PARTS
PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION
INDENTATION SYSTEM
Replacement parts are available from or through your local Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or representative.
This mechanical parts list is indented to indicate item relationships. Fdlowing is an example of the indentation system used in the description column.
Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made
to accommodate improved components as they become
available, and to give you the benefit of the latest circuit improvements developed in our engineering department. It is
therefore important, when ordering parts, to include the following information in your order: Part number, instrument
type or number, serial number, and modification number if
applicable.
If a part you have ordered has been replaced with a new
or improved part, your local Tektronix, Inc. Field Office or
representative will contact you concerning any change in
part number.
1 2 3 4 5
Ass~mbly
and/or Compw?6nt
Attaching parts for Assembly aWor Component
END ATACHING PARTS
Detail Part of AssemBy andlor Component
Attaching parts for Detail Part
END ATACHING PARTS
Parts of Detail Part
Attaching parts for Parts of Detail Part
Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this
manual.
ITEM NAME
In the Parts List, an item Name is separated from the
description by a colon(:). Because of space limitations, an
ltem Name may sometimes appear as incomplete. For further Item Name identiication, the U.S. Federal Cataloging
Handbook H6-1 can be utilized where possible.
Name & Description
END ATACHING PARTS
Attaching Parts always appear in the same indentation
as the item it mounts, while the detail parts are indented to
the right. Indented items are part of, and included with, the
next higher indentation.
Attmchlng pa- murt be purchased separately, unless othemise specified.
FIGURE AND INDEX NUMBERS
ABBREVIATIONS
Items in this section are referenced by figure and index
numbers to the illustrations.
Abbreviations conform to American National Standards
Institute YI.1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
R e p l a c e a b l e Mechanical P a r t s
-
2246A
CROSS INDEX
llanufacturer
- MFR. CODE NUMBER TO MANUFAC'TURER
Wdress
PANWIT CORP
R I C K 0 PLASTIC CO
NELSON NAME PLATE CO
FREEWAY CORP
T H E M L L O Y CO INC
17301 RIDGELANO
5825 N TRIPP AVE
3191 CASITAS
9301 ALLEN DR
2021 W VALLFY VIEW LN
W BOX 810839
2040 15TH AVE WEST
G M NAMEPLATE INC
W E A L MFG CORP
4737 DARRAH
2100 EARLYMX)D DR
SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC
m BOX 547
HEYCO MOLDED PRODUCTS
7 5 0 BOULEVARD
P 0 BOX 1 6 0
P 0 BOX 6 7 3 1
S. K. F. INDUSTRIES, INC.
CWPER BELDEN ELECTRONICS WIRE AND C 2000 S BATAVIA AVE
SUB OF CWPER INDUSTRIES IK
114 OLD STATE RD
BUSWN
OIV OF COOPER INDUSTRIES IK
W BOX 14460
8 0 0 E NORTMJEST MJY
LITTELFUSE TRACTOR INC
SUB TRACTOR INC
SAINT W L E S RD
SWWPRWF
D I V OF ILLINOIS TOOL KIRKS
ST CHARLES ROAD
I L L I N O I S T W L WORKS INC
SHAKEPROOF D I V
TEKTRONIX INC
14150 SW KARL B R A N DR
W BOX 5 0 0 MS 53-111
9 0 0 S RICHFIELD RD
HARTWELL CORP
3221 w BIG B w v m RD
MICRODOT MFG 1NC
GREER-CENTRAL D I V
1 4 9 EMERALD ST
MICRODOT MFG INC
CENTRAL SCREW-GENE OIV
6 0 0 18TH AVE
TEXTRON INC
CAMCAR D I V
3 5 5 TESCONI CIRCLE
FELLER ASA ADOLF AG
C/O PANEL COMPONENTS CORP
2015 SECOND STREET
SCHLATER AG H
C/O PANEL COMPONENTS CORP
1 6 2 0 NE ARGYLE
BADGLEY MFG CO
STAUFFER SUPPLY CO
1 0 5 SE TAYLOR
1812 16-TH AVE
MORELLIS Q & 0 PLASTICS
10156 TORINO
PATELEC-CM (ITALY)
1 9 5 ALU)NQUIN RD
FASTEX
37399 CENTRAL MONT PLACE
GALU)N INDUSTRIES
3 0 0 0 LEWIS AND CLARK MJY
TRI-QUEST CORP
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
City. State. Zip
Code
TINLEY PAW( I L 07094-2917
CHICAU) I L 60646-6013
LOS ANGELES CA 90039-2410
CLEVELAND OH 44125-4632
M L L A S TX 75381
SEATTLE WA 98119-2728
RIILAOELPHIA PA 19124-2705
FRANKLIN I N 46131
RIILADELPHIA, PA 19132
GENEVA I L 60134-3325
ST LOUIS MD 63178
DES PLAINES I L 60016-3049
ELGIN I L 60120
ELGIN I L 60120
BEAVERTON OR 97077
PLACENTIA CA 92670-6732
TROY M I 48098
KEENE NH 03431-3628
SANTA ROSA CA 95401
BERKELEY CA 94170
FORTLAND OR 9 7 2 1 1
FORTLAND OR 97214
FOREST GROVE OR 97116
VAICENTALLO 62145s ITALY
DES PLAINES I L 60016
FREHONT CA 94536
VANCOWER WA 9 8 6 6 1-2999
Replaceable llechsnical P a r t s
- 2246A
Fig. &
Serial/Assatbly No.
E f f e c t i v e IBcont
IM.
Index
No.
Tektmnix
P a r t No.
1-1
-2
334-7080-00
367-0289-00
1
1
-3
212-0144-00
2
-4
200-3233-02
1
-5
211-0691-00
4
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
334-6707-00
334-6708-00
348-0919-00
390-0980-00
213-0882-00
348-0659-00
1
1
2
1
1
2
M
v
12345
Nne
& Description
MKER. 1DENT:MARKED 2246A.HANDLE
H9NDLE.CARRYING: 13.855. SST
ATTACHING PARTS
SCR,TK,TF:8-16 X 0.562 L.PLASTITE,SPCL HD
END ATTACHING PARTS
COVER.REAR: PLASTIC W/LABELS
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,HACHINE:6-32 X 0.625, PMi. STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
MKER.IDENT:MKDCWTION
WRKER, 1DENT:MKD REAR PANEL Z-AXIS
FOOT,CABINET:BLACK POLYIRETHANE
CABINET,OSC:GPSB
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE,f'NH,STL
FDOT,CABINET:BLACK WLYLRETHANE
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
Code
Mr. P r No.
at
80009 334-7080-00
80009 367-0289-00
93907 225-38131-012
80009 200-3233-02
93907 ORDER BY DESCR
80009 334-6707-00
80009
80009
80009
83385
80009
334-6708-00
348-0919-00
390-0980-00
ORDER BY DESCR
348-0659-00
2246A SERVICE
Replaceable lCechanics1 Parts - 224M
Fig. &
Index
Tektmnix
2-1
-2
334-7081-00
426-1765-02
-3
211-0690-01
-4
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
337-2775-00
333-3290-00
351-0752-00
348-0660-00
366-2089-00
366-2093-00
366-1510-00
366-2090-00
366-2089-00
333-3558-00
386-3339-00
-15
213-0882-00
No.
-Part No.
Serial/AsmblyNo.
Effective
Dsant
12345
Nne & Descriptim
MRKER, 1DENT:MKED 22464.BEZEL
mAME,CRT:POLYCARBONATE,GRAY
ATTACH1NG PARTS
SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.875 PNH,SST
EN0 ATTACHING PARTS
SHLO, IMPLOSION:FILTER,BWE
PANEL, FRONl :
WIOE,LIGHT:ACRYLIC GRATICULE
CUSHION,CRT: POLYURETHANE
KNOB:GRAY.PUSH ON,0.185 X 0.392 X 0.495
KN0B:WVE GRAY.0.235 X 0.36 X 0.495
KN0B:WVE GRAY.VAR.O.127 X 0.392 X 0.466
KNO8:CAAY.VAR.O.Z I D X 0.546 OD X 0.69 H
KNOB:GRAY,PUSH ON,0.185 X 0.392 X 0.495
PANEL, FRONl :
SUBPANEL, FRONT:
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREWVTPG.TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE.PNH.STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
FILTER, RFI : (SEE FL2201 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE.PNH.STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
MNN, RCPT,ELEC:BNC (SEE J 1 6 REPL)
CHASSIS,REAR:GPSB
AllACHING PARTS
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE,PNH.STL
END AllACHING PARTS
CLAMP.CAt3LE:O.ES ID,NYLON
LEAJI, ELECTRICAL: (SEE W0 REPL)
3
AllACHING PARTS
NUT, PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312,STL CD PL
WASHER, LOCK:#6 INTL.0.018 THK,STL
END AllACHING PARTS
SPRING.GRWNO:CRT SHIELD
CAP ,CRT SOCKET: NATLRAL LEXAN
WT,RESILIENT:CRT.REAR
WIRE SET, ELEC:SOCm ASSY CRT (SEE A I M )
SHIELD, ELEC:CRT,STEEL
SUPPORT.SHIELD:CRT.FRONT, PLASTIC
MARKER. IDENT :MKD WARNING.CRT VOLTAGES
MARKER, 1DENT:MKD H I VACUM
DELAY LINE.ELEC: (SEE DL21 REPL)
STRAP,TIEWWN.E:0.091 W X 4.0 L,ZYTEL
CHAS RJR SUPPLY: GPSB
FAN,T@€AXIAL: (SEE 825 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,TPG,TC:6-32 X 1.25 L,TYPE T,PNH.STL
END AllACHING PARTS
CLP,WIRE SADDLE:0.437 ID,NYLON
GROmET. PLASTIC:BWK.ROUND.O.625
ID
CLIP,ELECTRICAL:ANODE,0.72 0D.NYLON
CHASSIS,MAIN:
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE,PNH.STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
GRILLE,AIR DUCT:ALIMINIM
A . PIV0T:POWER SWITCH
M
MTENSION SHAFT:6.25 L X 0.285 OD,NYLON
MTENSION SHAFT: 12.2 L X 0.285 OD,NYLON
SPACER,CABLE:SILICONE
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DAC SLlBSYS (SEE A15 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.25 TYPE TT,FILH.STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
BRACKET.CKr BD:ALIMINLM
ATTACHING PARTS
.
Scam by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
86113 ORDER BY DESCR
80009
80009
80009
80009
8M)09
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
80009
337-2775-00
333-3290-00
351-0752-00
348-0660-00
366-2089-00
366-2093-00
366-1510-00
366-2090-00
366-2089-00
333-3558-00
386-3339-00
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
80009 441-1721-00
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
23740
80009
22670
07416
C-2059
386-4443-00
ORDER BY DESCR
ORDER BY DESCR
06383 PLTlM
80009 441-1720-00
TKO858 ORDER BY DESCR
06915
28520
TK2165
80009
US-1N
SB-750-10
ORDER BY DESCR
441-1719-01
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
80009 407-3671-00
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Fig. &
Index
No.
2-49
Tektmix
Part No.
213-0882-00
-
Z46A
Serial/Assdly No.
Effective I)scont
M.
r
Qty
1
12345
N m & Description
a
SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE, PNH,STL
€ND ATTACHING PARTS
Scans by ARTEK MEDLA ..r & gt;
COB
Mr. Part No.
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
Replaceable llechanical P a r t s
-
Fig. 8
Index
No.
3-1
Tektmix
Part No.
----- -----
Seria1/Assenbl y No.
Effective
Dsomt
Otv
lZ345
h e 8 Descriptim
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: POTENTI@!RER
(SEE A12)
ATTACHING PARTS
LATCH. PLUNGER:BLACK
GROFMET,FSTNR:O. 187 DIA.BLACK
END ATTACHING PARTS
CWPLER, SH4FT: 2.260 X 0.132. PDLYMRBWTE
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:SWITCH (SEE A14 REPL)
SWITCH. PUSH:42 BUllON. 2 POLE
PUSH BUTTffl:GRAY,0.172 SQ X 0.3 H
K T R SWITCH AS:W/CONTACT
SPRING,FLAT:0.7 X 0.125,CU BE GRN CLR
MLL.BEARING:0.125 DIA,SST.UW)E 100
PUSH BUTTffl:CLEAR.0.312 D I A X 0.3 H
HOUSING, SWITCH: WLYCARBONATE
CIRCUIT BO ASSY: PROCESSOR (SEE A16 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,Tffi,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE, PNH,STL
SCREW,MACHINE:€-32
X 0.625,PNH,STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
CONTACT, ELEC :GROUND1NG, CU BE CD PL
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,Tffi,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE.PNH.STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
SHIELD, ELEC:TOP.W/J/CAIITIffl LABEL
MRKER. 1DENT:MKD CALITION
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:LVPS (SEE A18 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
SCREW,TFG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE,PNH.STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
LVPS BOARD INCLUDES:
.BODY, FUSMOLDER:3% & 5 X 2 M FUSES
.CAP. FUSEWLDER:%AG FUSES
.HEAT SK.XSTR :RJR SPLY ,GOLD W/CHRWITE PL
.SWITCH,TtRMSTC: (SEE A18S2202 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
.SCREW,Tffi,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE.PNH,STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
.TRANSISTOR: (SEE AlBQ2201 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
.SCREW,TPG.TR:€-32
X 0.437 TAPTITE,PNH,STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
.TRANSISTOR: (SEE A1842214 REPL)
ATTACHING PARTS
.SCREW,Tffi.TR:€-32
X 0.437 TAPTITE. PNH,STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
.CLIP,COIL SPRT:l X 1.46.POLYCARBONATE
INSUL, F R SPLY: POLYCARWTE
U
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MAIN (SEE A10 REPL)
1NSULATOR.DISK:TRANSISTOR.NYLON
.SHIELD, ELEC :HIGH VOLTAGE, 2246
.SHIELD.ATTEN:FRONT,MAIN BD
ATTACHING PARTS
.SCREW,MACHINE:6-32 X 0.875 PNH.SST
END ATTACHING PARTS
.SHIELD,ATTEN:ALlMINlM
ATTACHING PARTS
.SCREW,TPG,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE. PNH,STL
END ATTACHING PARTS
.CLIP,ELECTRICAL:FUSE,SR BRS
.CMP,LOOP:0.25 ID,PLASTIC
ATTACHING PARTS
.SCREW,Tffi,TR:6-32 X 0.437 TAPTITE. PNH.STL
.WASHER,FLAT:0.141 I D X 0.5 OD X 0.062.BRS
END ATTACHING PARTS
.BRACKET ATTEN :BRASS
.CONTPCT ,ELEC:BRASS
.CONN.RCPT, ELEC:BNC.MALE
.(SEE A l O J l l ,J12, J13, J14)
.
Scons by ARTEK MEDIA . r
.,
NO09
80009
80009
80009
52676
80009
80009
260-2271-00
366-2088-00
105-0984-01
214-1126-01
DRDER BY DESCR
366-2091-00
380-0767-00
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
93907 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
80009 337-3290-01
07416 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 DRDER BY DESCR
S3629 TYPEFAU031.3573
S3629 FEK MI 1666
80009 214-3821-00
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
TKl319 ORDER BY DESCR
80009 342-0781-00
86113 ORDER BY DESCR
TKl938 ORDER BY DESCR
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
75915 102074
W 1 5 E4 CLEAR ROUND
83385 ORDER BY DESCR
12327 ORDER BY DESCR
2246A
Rep1aceabl e k h a n i c a l Parts
- 224M
Fig. &
Index
No.
3-44
-45
Tektmix
Part Wo.
Serial/Asserbly k.
t
Effective Dscont
WY 12345
Wane & Descriptim
ATTACHING PARTS
.NUT,PLAIN.HM:0.5-28 X 0.562 HEX.BRS CD PL
.WASHER,LOCK:O.521 ID,INT,0.025 THK.SST
END ATTACHING PARTS
.HEAT SINK.XSTR:TO-5,ALIMINUM
.BUSHING,SNAP:O.25 X 0.234,NYL.0.375
.EXTENSION SMFI:9.97 L X 0.25,WLYMIDE
.CIRCUIT BD ASSY :CRT CONTROL (SEE A8 REPL)
..BUSHING,SNAP:0.25 X 0.234,NYL,0.375
.EXTENSION SHAFT:0.918 L X 0.218 DD.PLASTIC
.
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 a
80009 220-0497-00
24931 ORDER BY DESCR
Replaceable Wechanical Parts
-
Fig. &
Index
No.
Tektrmix
Part No.
Serial/Assaibly No.
Effectiw Iscnnt
MY 12345
IM.
IAI~!~
Hme & Oescriptim
mi-.
Part
No.
4STANCARD ACCESSORIES
CABLE ASSY,RJR,:3,18 AWG,92.0 L
CLAMP,RJR C0RD:POLYMIDE
COMPONENT KIT: EUROPEAN
.RTNR,CA TO CA:U/W 0.25 OD CABLES
.CABLE ASSY,RJR.:3 X 0 . 7 M SQ.220V,98.0
.(OPTION A1 - EUROPEAN)
COMPONENT K1T:VJITED KINGMm
.RTNR,CA TO CA:U/W 0.25 O CABLES
D
.CABLE ASSY,M,:3 X 0 . 7 M SQ.240V,98.0
.(OPTION A2 - WITEO KINGMm)
COMPONENT K1T:AUSTRALIAN
.RTNR,CA TO CA:U/W 0.25 O CABLES
D
.CABLE ASSY,PWR, :3.18 AKV24W,98.0 L
.(OPTION A3 - AUSTRALIAN)
COMPONENT K1T:NORTH AHERICAN
.RTNR.CA TO CA:U/W 0.25 O CABLES
D
.CABLE ASSY,RJR,:3,18 AK.24011.98.0 L
.(OPTION A4 - NORTH AHERICAN)
COMPONENT K1T:SWISS
.RTNR.CA TO CA:U/W 0.25 OD CABLES
.CABLE ASSY,PWR,:3.0 X 0.75,64,240VV2.5M
.(OPTION A5 - SWISS)
ACCESSORY P K G : M P6109 OPT 01 PROBES W/
CESSORIES
M4NUAL. TECH: OPERATORS. 2246A
CARD, INFO :REFERENCE, 22464
FUSE,CARTRIffiE:3AG,2A, 250V,SLCU BLCU
SHLD, IMPLOSION:
L
80009 161-0230-01
80009 343-1213-00
80009 020-0859-00
80009 343-0170-00
S3109 ORDER BY DESCR
L
80009 020-0861-00
80009 343-0170-00
S3109 ORDER BY DESCR
80009 020-0862-00
80009 343-0170-00
70903 ORDER BY DESCR
L
80009 020-0863-00
80009 343-0170-00
S3109 ORDER BY DESCR
A
C
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
VISOR,CRT:FOLDING
ADAPTER WOO:
VISOR.CRT:
COVER, PR0T:WATERPROOF VINYL
ACCESSORY POUCH: W/PLATE ,2246
MANUAL,TECH:SERVICE, 2246A
COVER, FRONT :
STRAP ,CARRY 1NG:MKD TEKTRDNIX
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
TK2165
80009
TK2165
80009
TKO174
80009
80009
80009
ORDER BY DESCR
016-0359-01
ORDER BY DESCR
016-0848-00
ORDER BY DESCR
070-6555-00
200-3232-00
346-0199-00
2246A
2246A SERVICE
2246A SERVICE
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
At Tektronix, we continually strive to keep up with latest electronicdevelopments
by adding circuit and component improvements to our instruments as soon as they
are developed and tested.
Sometimes, due to printing and shipping requirements, we can't get these
changes immediately into printed manuals. Hence, your manual may contain new
change information on following pages.
A single change may affect several sections. Sincethe change information sheets
are carried in the manual until all changes are permanently entered, some
duplication may occur. If no such change pages appear following this page, your
manual is correct as printed.
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
l & tronmk
COMMITEO
Product:
TO EXCELLENCE
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
6-8-88
Change Reference:
C110688
Date:
Manual Part No.:
2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
Page 1-4
Table 1-1
Change the Performance Requirements for the lnput Characteristics, Resistance to:
lnput Characteristics
Resistance
1 MR
+1
.OO/O.~
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
~ T D U I C E L ~ P ~ C E
product:
Date:
6-8-88
Change Reference:
Manual Part No.:
2246~
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
C210688
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
Page 6-14
Table 6-5
Replace the " Actions " for each of the following Menu Items:
EXERCISE POTS
EXERCISE LEDS
EXERCISE SWITCHES
EXERCISE POTS
Shows the name of the latest digitized potentiometer moved, along with its hexadecimal
value (from FF to 00). Starts by showing the HORlZ POSITION and its value until
another pot is adjusted. The FOCUS and SCALE ILLUMINATION controls are not
digitized and therefore are not checked with this exercise. Pressing END exits the
exerciser.
EXERCISE LEDS
Uses the delay control to check for adjacent-row or adjacent-column shorts in the front
panel board and for inoperative LEDs. The exercise will display the circuit number and
illuminate each LED as the control is rotated. Circuit numbers DS2016, DS2017,
DS2018, DS2019, DS2024, DS2040, and DS2049 do not correspond to any LEDs on
the front panel. Pressing END exits the exerciser.
EXERCISE SWITCHES
Shows the circuit number of the latest momentary-contact button pressed, or the name
and position of the latest rotary switch turned. Pressing END exits the exerciser
program and pressing CLEAR MEAS'MT will terminate the Service Program.
Page 1 of 1
Scam by AR TEK MEDLQ = & gt;
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
D
COMM~TOUPCELLEM
product:
~
~ 6-29-88
~ :
2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
C3/0688
Manual Parl No.:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
SEE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A10
671-0387-02
8010505
CKT BOARD ASSY: MAIN
M66133
A1 0J927
131-2921-00
8010505
CONN,RCPT,ELEC: HEADER,l X 2,O.l SPACING
M66133
A1OW415
174-0733-01
8011240
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC: 4.26 AWG,4.5L,RIBBON,W/STRAIN
RELIEFS
M66066
A1OW416
174-0732-01
801 1240
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC: 4,26 AWG,3.0L,RIBBON,W/STRAlN
RELIEFS
M66066
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
ADD:
3-
214-4042-00
8010305
2
HT SK,MICROCKT: TO-220
A1 8Q2209 & A18Q2210
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK M E N = & gt;
M66135
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE
Product:
10-17-88
2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
C411088
Manual P a r t Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
SPECIFICATION CHANGES
Page 1-3
Table 1-1
Change the Characteristics and Performance Requirements for the Frequency Response to:
Frequency Response
(-3 dB bandwidth)
-10°C to 35°C
5 mVldiv to 5 Vldiv
Dc to 100 MHz (at the input BNC and at the probe tip).
2 mVIdiv
Dc to 90 MHz (at the input BNC and at the probe tip).
35°C to 55°C
Page 1-5
Dc to 90 MHz (at the input BNC and at the probe tip).
Table 1-1
Replace the Performance Requirements for the CH 3 and CH 4 Frequency Response to:
Frequency Response
(-3 dB bandwidth)
-10°C to 35°C
35°C to 55°C
Page 1-7
Dc to 100 MHz (at the input BNC and at the probe tip).
Dc to 90 MHz (at the input BNC and at the probe tip).
Table 1-1
Add the following note to the Performance Requirements for the Sweep Linearity.
Sweep Linearity
(relative to center two displayed divisions)
+
5%.
Sweep Linearity applies over the center eight divisions. Excludes the first
114 division or 25 ns from the start of the magnified sweep and anything
beyond the 100th magnified division.
Page 1 of 8
Scans by ARTEK MEDLQ
-
Date:
10-17-88
Change R e f e r e n c e :
C411088
DESCRIPTION
Page 1-8
Table 1-1
Change the Performance Requirements for the Sensitivity of the LF REJECT to the following:
0.35 division from 100 kHz to 25 MHz, increasing to 1.0 division at
150 MHz (100 MHz in AUTO LEVEL); attenuates signals below the lower
-3 dB cutoff frequency of 20 Hz.
LF REJECT
Replace the AUTO LEVEL and AUTO MODE Trigger Low-Frequency Limit entirely with the following:
Free Run Enable Frequency
AUTO and AUTO LEVEL
1
The sweep will free run if trigger source frequency is less than 10 Hz.
In AUTO LEVEL, if the trigger source frequency is ~ 2 Hz, the range of
5
the Trigger LEVEL control may be reduced.
Table 1-1
Change the Performance Requirements for the VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS, DC VOLTS, Accuracy to:
DC VOLTS
Accuracy
1
1
& (0.5% of reading
+ 2% of VOLTSlDlV setting + 250 pV).
I
Add the following note to the Characteristics for the VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS, PLUS or MINUS Peak,Accuracy-Full
Bandwidth, Greater Than 25 MHz to 100 MHz:
(90 MHz at 35°C to 55°C)
I
page 1-10
Table 1-1
I
Add the following note to the Characteristics for the VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS, PK-PK, Accuracy-Full
Greater Than 25 MHz to 100 MHz:
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
Bandwidth,
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
10-17-88
Change Reference:
C411088
DESCRIPTION
Page 1-10
Table 1-1
Change the Performance Requirements tor the CURSOR FUNCTIONS, I+
VOLTS +Iand rh VOLTS, Accuracy to:
I+ VOLTS +I (manually
positioned cursors)
Accuracy
21% of reading
display errors).
VOLTS -I (manually
(positioned cursor)
2 1% of reading
dis~lav
errors).
Accuracy
Page 1-12
+
2% of the VOLTSIDIV setting
+
high-frequency
+
2% of the VOLTSIDIV setting
+
high-frequency
Table 1-1
Change the Performance Requirements tor the Deflection Factors, Accuracy, X Axis, - 10°C to 15°C and 35°C to
55 C to the tollowing:
-10°C to 15°C and 35°C
to 55°C
Page 1-13
1
within 4%'
Table 1-1
Change the Performance Requirements tor the Nominal Accelerating Voltage with the tollowing:
Nominal Accelerating Voltage
1
16kV.a
Page 3 ot 8
Scans by ARTEK MEDU = & gt;
L
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
10-17-88
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
PROCEDURECHANGES
Page 4-15
Step 4. 150 MHz Trigger Sensitivity
Replace part c. with the following.
c.
CHECK-that the display is stably triggered in DC, LF
REJ, and AC Trigger CPLG.
Replace part e. with the following.
e.
CHECK-that using the Trigger LEVEL control the
display is stably triggered in DC, LF REJ, and AC
Trigger CPLG.
Page 4-16
Step 4. 150 MHz Trigger Sensitivity
After part o. add the following two steps before continuing to part p.
Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a 0.5 division display amplitude at 100 MHz.
CHECK-that the d~splayis not triggered in NOISE
REJ Trigger CPLG.
Page 4 of 8
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
C411088
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
10-17-88
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
Pages 4-20 and 4-21
- 22
Replace Steps 5 and 6 (Timing and Linearity Checks) with the following procedures.
5. A and El Timing Accuracy and Linearity
a.
Set A SECIDIV to 20 ns.
b.
Set time-mark generator for 20 ns time marks.
c.
Position the time marker peaks vertically to the center
horizontal graticule line (allows use of the minor
division graticule markings as an aid in making the
accuracy checks).
NOTE
For the fastest sweep speeds, where the time
marker peaks are rounded and not well defined,
greater resolution can be achieved by vertically
centering the display and using the point where
the rising edge of the time marks cross the
center horizontal graticule line as a reference.
d.
Position the second time marker to the second vertical
graticule line.
e.
CHECK-that the tenth time marker is within 0.16
divisions (left or right) of the tenth graticule line.
f.
CHECK-that the spacing of time markers over any
two division interval within the center eight divisions
does not deviate from the value measured at the
center two division by more than 0.1 division.
g.
Repeat the procedure for all other A SECIDIV
settings. Use the SECIDIV and Time Mark Generator
settings in the column labeled Normal (XI) given in
Table 4-3, Settings for Timing Accuracy Checks.
h.
Set SECIDIV to 20 ns.
i.
Set time-mark generator for 20 ns time marks.
j.
Set:
Horizontal MODE
B INTEN
k.
B
For a viewable
display
Repeat the CHECK procedures for all the B SECIDIV
settings.
Page 5 of 8
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
C411088
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
10-17-88
Change Reference:
C411088
DESCRIPTION
6. A and B Magnified Timing Accuracy and
Linearity
a.
Set time-mark generator for 5 ns time marks.
b.
Set:
Horizontal MODE
A SECIDIV
Horizontal
B SECIDIV
XI0 MAG
A
20 ns
B
20 ns
On (for 2 nsldiv
sweep speed)
0.5 V (use 0.2 V
for the 5 ns time
markers if
necessary)
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
c.
h.
Set the Horizontal POSI-I'lON control to 12 o'clock,
and then align the rising edge of the nearest time
marker to the second vertical graticule line (center the
display vertically).
CHECK-that
the tenth displayed time marker is
within 0.24 division (left or right) of the tenth graticule
line.
i.
CHECK-that the spacing of time markers over any
two division interval within the center eight divisions
does not deviate from the value measured at the
center two divisions by more than 0.1 division.
Exclude the first 114 division or 25 ns and any portion
of the sweep past the 100th magnified division.
j.
Repeat the timing and linearity checks for all SECIDIV
settings between 10 ns and 50 ms. Use the SECIDIV
and Time Mark Generator XI0 MAG settings given in
Table 4-3.
k.
Set:
Horizontal MODE
SECIDIV
NOTE
For the fastest sweep speeds, where the time
marker peaks are rounded and not well defined,
greater resolution can be achieved by vertically
centering the display and using the point where
the rising edge of the time marks cross the
center horizontal graticuh? line as a reference.
d,
Set SECIDIV to 5 ns.
g.
m. Repeat the magnified accuracy and linearity checks
for the A Sweep at all SECIDIV settings.
CHECK-that the spacing of the time markers over
any 2.5 division interval within the center eight
divisions does not deviate from the value measured at
the center 2.5 divisions by more than 0.12 division.
Use the fifth vertical graticule line as a starting point
for the measurement at the center 2.5 divisions.
Exclude the first 114 division or 25 ns and any portion
of the sweep past the 100th magnified division.
f.
Set time-mark generator for 5 ns time marks.
CHECK-that the rising edge of the fourth displayed
time marker crosses the center horizontal graticule
line at between 8.27 divisions and 8.73 divisions.
e.
I.
A
2 ns (with XI0
MAG on)
Set the Horizontal POSITION control to 12 o'clock,
and then align the nearest time marker to the second
vertical graticule line.
Page 6 of 8
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
-,
'
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
10-17-88
Change Reference:
C411088
DESCRIPTION
Page 4-25
Steps 3 and 4
Replace step 3, part f with the following check:
f.
CHECK-that
0.507 V.
the readout is between 0.493 V and
Replace step 4, part c with the following check:
c.
CHECK-that the readout is between 0.493 V and
0.507 V, and none of the cursors move when the
I+ OR DELAY control is rotated.
Page 4-29
Step 1. Check External 2-Axis Input
Replace part d with the following check:
d.
CHECK-waveform display intensity starts decreasing
at 1.8 V or less and is extremely modulated at 3.8 V.
Page 5-12
Step 3.
Replace Step 3 with the following step:
Step 3. Readout Horizontal Gain (R823) and MAG
Registration (R809)
a.
Set:
XI0 MAG
SECIDIV
A INTEN
f.
Off
1 ms
CCW (off)
Set:
SECIDIV
A INTEN
XI0 MAG
b.
Select TlME cursors. Press the TlME button and
select I- SEC +I from the menu.
c.
Rotate the I+-OR DELAY control counterclockwise
and the +I control clockwise until cursors stop moving.
d.
ADJUST-MAG REG (R809) and RO HORlZ GAIN
(R823) alternately until the reference cursor lines up
exactly with the left graticule line and the delta cursor
lines up exactly with the right graticule line.
20 ps
10 o'clock
On
Set time mark generator for 0.1 ms time marks.
h.
Position rising edge of middle time mark exactly on
the center vertical graticule line.
i.
e.
g.
Set XI0 MAG to off.
j.
CHECK-for less than 0.5 division shift of time mark
rising edge between MAG on and MAG off. If no
within 0.5 division, recheck the accuracy of R809 and
R823 adjustments; readjust if necessary.
Remove the cursors from screen by pressing the
CLEAR DISPLAY button twice.
Page 7 of 8
Scans by ARTEK MEDLA = & gt;
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
10-17-88
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
Page 5-14
Add the following note to the Self Cal Measurements section:
NOTE
To avoid the possibility of any erroneous
error messages appearing when prefotming the SELF CAL MEASUREMENTS, set
the TRIGGER HOLDOFF control to MIN
(CC W).
Page 8 of 8
Scans by ARmK MEDL4 = & gt;
C411088
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMM~DTO
MCELLENCE
3-1-89
Change Reference:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
C510389
070-6555-00
Product Group
46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
TEXT CHANGES
Page 4-24
Measurement Cursors
Step 1.
It S E C d
and rc- 1/SEC+ Cursor Accuracy
Replace parts g through o of Step 1 with the following procedure:
g.
Position the reference cursor to the second time
marker and the delta cursor to the tenth time
marker.
h.
CHECK-that
8.060 ms.
i.
Press the TlME button to display the TlME menu.
j.
Set I c l / S E C + on.
k.
CHECK-that
Page 5-1 2
the
readout
is 7.940
ms to
the readout is 124 Hz to 126 Hz.
Horizontal
Step 3.
Readout Horizontal Gain (R823) and MAG
Registration (R809)
Replace Step 3 entirely with the following procedure:
3. Readout Horizontal Gain (R823) and MAG
Registration (R809)
a.
Set time mark generator for 0.5 ms time marks.
b. Position the middle time marker to the center
vertical graticule line using the Horizontal
POSITION control.
c.
Set X I 0 MAG to Off.
d. ADJUST-MAG REG (R809) to position the middle time marker to the center vertical graticule
line.
e.
Set X I 0 MAG to On.
f.
CHECK-for
marker.
no horizontal shift in the time
Page 1 of 2
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
k
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
3-1-89
DESCRIPTION
3. Readout Horizontal Gain (R809) and MAG
Registration (R823) (continued)
g.
Repeat parts b through f until no shift is noted.
h.
Set:
X I 0 MAG
SEC/DIV
A INTEN
Off
50 ps
CCW (off)
i.
Select Time CURSORS. Press the TIME MEASUREMENT button and select It SEC -4 from the
menu.
j.
Rotate the It OR DELAY control to align the
cursor to the second graticule line.
k.
Rotate the
400.0 ps.
I.
ADJUST-both the I+ OR DELAY control and
R823 so that the cursors are aligned exactly on
the second and tenth graticule line.
-4
control so that the reading is
m. Set A INTEN to 10 o'clock.
Page 2 of 2
Scans by ARTEK MEDLQ = & gt;
Change Reference:
C510389
Product Group
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
C O M Mm EXCELLENCE
~
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
C610389
070-6555-00
Product Group
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B016000 AND ABOVE
The A1 0 MAlN board and A1 6 PROCESSOR board have been replaced with new
versions at the serial number listed above.
This insert contains the following information to support these changes:
PARTS LIST CHANGES, ADDITIONS, REMOVALS
NEW A10 MAlN BOARD and PARTS LOCATOR CHART
MISCELLANEOUS DIAGRAM CHANGES
NEW A & B TRIGGER SYSTEM ClRCLllT (DIAGRAM
0)
NEW HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER CIRCUIT (DIAGRAM
@)
NEW MAlN BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION (DIAGRAM
Cover Page
Scans by ARTEK MEDLQ
*
0
14 )
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246 A SERVICE
Date:
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
3-20-89
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
TEXT CHANGES
Page 5-5
Step 6
Z-Axis Response (C2704)
This step in no longer necessary.
Capacitor C2704 is no longer adjustable.
Skip this step and continue with Step 7.
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A10
671-0387-04
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: MAIN
A10C447
A10C477
A10C484
A10C485
A10C803
A10C804
A10C807
A10C814
A10C1102
A10C2704
281-0765-00
281-0872-00
281-0861-00
281-0861-00
281-0909-00
283-0057-00
281-0214-00
281-0214-00
281-0909-00
283-0348-00
CAP.FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP.FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,VAR,CER
CAP,VAR,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
A10J927
131-4546-00
CONN,RCPT,ELEC: HEADER,3 POS W10.025 SQ
A10Q801
A10Q802
A10Q803
A10Q804
A10Q805
A10Q806
A10R211
A10R221
A10R231
A10R241
A10R410
A1OR411
A10R412
A1OR413
A10R414
A10R415
A10R416
A10R417
A1OR447
A1OR448
A1OR477
A1OR478
A10R801
A10R803
151-0270-00
151-0274-00
151-0190-00
151-0190-00
151-0270-00
151-0274-00
311-2454-00
311-2454-00
311-2454-00
311-2454-00
313-1331-00
313-1 151-00
313-1151-00
313-1331-00
313-1331-00
313-1151-00
313-1151-00
313-1331-00
322-3285-00
322-3333-02
322-3284-00
322-3232-00
313-1681-00
313-1272-00
TRANSISTOR: PNP,SI,TO-39
TRANSISTOR: NPN.SI,TO-5
TRANSISTOR: NPN,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: NPN,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR: PNP,SI,TO-39
TRANSISTOR: NPN,SI,TO-5
RES,VAR,NONWW: TRIMMER,5K,20%.0.5W
RES,VAR,NONWW: TRIMMER,5K,20%,0.5W
RES,VAR,NONWW: TRIMMER,5K,20%,0.5W
RES,VAR,NONWW: TRIMMER,5K,20%,0.5W
RES,FXD.FILM: 330 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 150 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 150 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 330 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 330 OHM,1%,09W
RES,FXD,FILM: 150 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 150 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 330 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 9.09K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC =TO
RES,FXD,FILM: 28.7K OHM,0.5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 8.87K OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.55K OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 680 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
Dl: 100PF,5%,100V
Dl: 91 PF,5%,100V
Dl: 270 PF,5%,50V
Dl: 270 PF,5%,50V
Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
Dl: 0.1 UF, 80-20%,200V
Dl: 0.6-3PF,400V
Dl: 0.6-3PF,400V
Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
Dl: 0.5PF, 1-0.1 PF.100V
Page 1 of 19
Scans by AR TEE MEDLQ = & gt;
+
+
C610389
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246 A SERVICE
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES (cont)
CHANGE TO (cont):
A10R804
A10R805
A10R811
A10R812
A10R813
A10R814
A10R828
A1OR829
A10R1132
A10R1133
A10R1142
313-1273-00
313- 1273-00
322-3265-00
322-3265-00
313-1272-00
313-1272-00
313-1133-00
313-1133-00
313-1223-00
313-1 104-00
313-1223-00
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD.FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
A10U421
A10U431
234-0239-30
234-0239-30
QUICK CHIP: TRIGGER IC PACKAGE
QUICK CHIP: TRIGGER IC PACKAGE
AlOVR801
152-0055-00
SEMICOND DVC,DI: ZEN,SI,l lV,5%,0.4W.D0-7
A 16C2320
A16C2322
A16C2323
A16C2416
A16C2417
A16C2418
A16C2419
A16C2420
A16C2551
A16C2552
A 16C2553
A16C2554
A16C2555
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
281-0763-00
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
A10C322
A1Om42
A10C476
A10C478
A10C480
A10C614
A10C820
A10C821
A10C822
A10C860
A10C870
A10C880
A1OC1104
A10C1160
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0819-00
281-0864-00
281-0909-00
281-0776-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0765-00
281-0816-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
281-0909-00
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022LIF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 33PF,5%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 430PF,5%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 120PF,5%,100V
CAP,FXD.CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP.FXD,CER Dl: 100PF,5%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 82PF,5%,100V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.022UF,20%,50V
A10Q811
A10Q812
151-0190-00
151-0220-00
TRANSISTOR:NPN,SI,TO-92
TRANSISTOR:PNP,SI
27K OHM,5%,0.2W
27K OHM,5%,0.2W
5.62K OHM,1%,0.2W
5.62K OHM,1%,02W
2.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
2.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
13K OHM,1%,0.2W
13K OHM,1%,0.2W
22K OHM,5%,0.2W
l00K OHM,5%,0.2W
22K OHM,5%,0.2W
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%.100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
Dl: 47PF,10%,100V
ADD:
Page 2 of 19
_I
Scam by ARTEK MEDLQ
*
C610389
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246 A SERVICE
SN 801 6000 AND ABOVE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES (cont)
ADD (cont):
A10R403
A10R475
A10R480
A10R673
A1OR674
A10R686
A10R687
A10R688
A10R689
A10R690
A10R691
A10R692
A10R693
A10R694
A10R830
A10R831
A10R860
A10R861
A10R862
A1OR863
A10R871
A10R872
A10R873
A10R891
A10R892
A10R893
A10R894
A1OR896
A10R897
A10R898
A10R1105
A10R1106
A10R1160
313-1511-00
322-3328-02
313-1051-00
313-1331 -00
313-1201 -00
313-1511-00
313-151 1-00
313-1511-00
313-1750-00
313-1750-00
313-1750-00
313-1750-00
313-1750-00
313-1750-00
313-1133-00
313- 1133-00
313-1103-00
313- 1272-00
322-3077-00
313-1271-00
313-1103-00
313-1510-00
313-1271-00
313-1681-00
313-1750-00
313-1391-00
313-1100-00
323-0310-00
313-1100-00
313-1100-00
313-1511-00
313-1511-00
313-1100-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 510 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 25.5K OHM,0.5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 5.1 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 330 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 200 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 510 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 510 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 510 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM.5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 13K OHM,1%,02W
RES,FXD,FILM: 13K OHM,l%,O.ZW
RES,FXD,FILM: 10K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 61.9 OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 270 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 51 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 270 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 680 OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 390 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 16.5K OHM,1%,0.5W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 510 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 510 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
A10U442
156-1640-00
MICROCKT,DGTL: ECL,TPL LINE RCVR 10H116
A10W501
A10W502
A10W503
A10W504
A1OW506
A1OW507
A1OW606
A1OW607
A10W820
A10W821
A10W1203
A10W1108
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
A10X421
A10X431
136-1005-00
136-1005-00
SKT,PL-IN,ELEC: 28 PIN
SKT,PL-IN,ELEC: 28 PIN
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DLIMMY RES0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DLIMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
Page 3 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
-,
'
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
C610389
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product:
2246 A SERVICE
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES (cont)
REMOVE:
A10C486
A10C488
A10C810
A10C2758
281-0765-00
281-0765-00
281-0707-00
285-1184-01
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
CAP,FXD,CER
Dl:
Dl:
Dl:
Dl:
100PF,5%,100V
100PF,5%,100V
1500PF,10%,200V
0.01UF,20%,4KV
A10CR819
152-0061-00
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW,SI,175V,O.lA,DO-35
A10L446
A10L476
108-1339-00
108-1339-00
COIL,RF: FXD,330NH
COIL,RF: FXD,330NH
A10Q808
151-0711-00
TRANSlST0R:N PN,SI,TO-92B
A10R402
A10R607
A1OR815
A10R816
A10R819
A10R840
A10R841
A1OR842
A10R843
A10R844
A10R845
A10R846
A10R847
A1OR848
A10R849
A1OR850
A1OR851
A10R852
A10R853
A10R858
313-1101-00
313-1510-00
313-1104-00
323-0310-00
313-1750-00
313-1470-00
313-1100-00
313-1103-00
313-1751-00
313-1751-00
313-1100-00
322-3058-00
313-1100-00
301-0222-00
301-0222-00
313-1392-00
313-1 100-00
322-3074-00
313-1470-00
322-3143-00
RES.FXD,FILM:
RES.FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES.FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
RES,FXD,FILM:
A10VR802
152-0265-00
SEMICOND DVC,DI: ZEN,S1,24V,5%,0.4W
A10W103
A1OW403
A10W404
A10W405
A10W407
A10W408
A10W410
A10W411
A10W412
AlOWlOlO
A10W1104
A10W1105
A10W1107
AlOWl120
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
BUS,CONDUCTOR:
100 OHM,5%,0.2W
51 OHM,5%,0.2W
l00K OHM.5%,0.2W
16.5K OHM,1%,0.5W
75 OHM,5%,0.2W
47 OHM,5%,0.2W
10 OHM,5%,0.2W
10K OHM,5%,0.2W
750 OHM,5%,0.2W
750 OHM,5%,0.2W
10 OHM,5%,0.2W
39.2 OHM,1%.0.2W,TC =TO
10 OHM,5%,0.2W
2.2K OHM,5%,0.2W
2.2K OHM,5%,0.2W
3.9K OHM,5%,0.2W
10 OHM,5%,0.2W
57.6 OHM,1%,02W,TC = TO
47 OHM,5%,0.2W
301 OHM,1%,02W,TC =TO
DLIMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DLIMMY RES0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DLIMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES0.094 OD X 0.225
DLIMMY RES0.094 OD X 0.225
DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225
Page 4 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
C610389
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246 A SERVICE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
C610389
I
DESCRIPTION
SN 8 0 16000 AND ABOVE
DIAGRAM CHANGES
NOTE
The power supply distribution for the A10 Main Board has been revised.
Please refer to the new A10 MAIN BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION (Diagram 14)
to verify the power supply designations.
DIAGRAM
@ DISPLAY & TRIGGER LOGIC & PROCESSOR INTERFACE
At location 6L, remove U606D and R652 from the circuit.
DIAGRAM
@ Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJ, & CONTROL MUX
Change Capacitor C2704 (location 6G) to a fixed value of 0.5 pF.
Remove Capacitor C2758 (location 6K) from the circuit.
Remove wire jumper W1010 (location 7D) from the circuit. This is now a solid circuit board run.
DIAGRAM
@ MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR
Change the following list of capacitors to 47pF:
C2551 (location 4M)
C2552 (location 4M)
C2553 (location 4M)
DIAGRAM
C2554 (location 3M)
C2555 (location 5M)
@ READOUT SYSTEM
Change the following list of capacitors to 47pF:
C2416 (location 2H)
C2417 (location 2J)
C2418 (location 2.J)
DIAGRAM
C2419 (location 2.J)
C2420 (location2K)
0
11
ADC AND DAC SYSTEM
Change the following list of capacitors to 47pF:
C2320 (location 5M)
C2322 (location 5M)
C2323 (location 5L)
Page 5 of 1 9
Scans by ARTEK MEDLA
-
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
C610389
DESCRIPTION
SN 801 6000 AND ABOVE
DIAGRAM CHANGES (cont)
DIAGRAM
@ A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM
This diagram has been replaced. See page 15 of thls Insert.
DIAGRAM
@ DISPLAY & TRIGGER LOGIC & PROCESSOR INTERFACE
Replace the PROCESSOR INTERFACE portion of this schematic with the circuit shown on page 13 of this insert.
DIAGRAM
@ HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
This diagram has been replaced. See page 17 of thls Insert.
DIAGRAM
0
14
MAIN BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION
This diagram has been replaced. See page 19 of this insert.
Page 6 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Page 7 of 19
Scans by AR TEE MEDIA *
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
C610389
DESCRIPTION
SN 601 6000 AND ABOVE
A10 MAIN BOARD (cont)
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
01516
0171
0181
0182
0250
0251
0252
0253
0284
0285
0301
0302
0303
0304
0305
0308
0307
0308
0308
03 10A
03108
0311
0312
0313
0315
0316
0317
0318
0320
0321
0322
0323A
03238
0325
0326
0328
0320
0330
0331
0332
0333
0440
CR2713
CR2714
CR2715
CR2716
CR2717
CR2718
7
7
7
7
7
7
10L
1O
L
BL
BM
BM
BL
DL21
DL21
DL22
DL22
2
2
3
3
3F
K
1O
3K
2H
DSQOl
DSQO2
DS903
DS2701
DS2702
DS2703
DS2704
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8A
1O
A
BN
BM
BM
BM
J11
J12
J13
J14
J15
JeO1
JB27
Jlm4
1
1
1
1
7
4
7
15
6A
4A
3A
1A
7A
2K
108
5J
K100
K101
K102
K103
K104
K105
K107
KlOB
K109
K110
K111
K112
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6A
5A
58
6B
5D
6D
4A
4A
48
58
4D
4D
L101
L102
L130
L140
L201
K16
K17
L445
L475
L426
L432
L462
L701
L702
L703
L704
15
15
1
1
15
15
15
15
15
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
X
X
X
1C
BE
4H
5H
P8
7
7
7
6
6
2
2
15
7
7
15
4
4
1O
N
BN
1O
N
7K
8K
1O
H
BH
10D
10D
1O
D
1L
1L
1L
1
1
1
28
28
18
Pg
Pg
PI7
PI8
P IB
P20
P2302
P2302
P2304
P2502
P2502
P2502
0131A
01318
0151A
BA
0444
1G
W70
W74
W80
08a7
0801
0802
0603
0604
0805
0606
0607
W
OM)B
1W
BH
1O
H
0701
0702
0703
0704
0801
0802
0803
0804
3J
1J
3H
2G
00
85
0806
0807
0809
0810
081 1
0812
0805
0807
0908
01001
0 1002
0 1003
SCHEM
NUMBER
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
BOARD
LOCATBW
lB
28
6D
3D
4E
4F
4E
4F
6F
SF
7C
BE
BF
8F
7E
7E
8D
8F
8F
8E
B
E
8F
BE
BF
BE
BF
BF
10E
BE
9F
9F
BE
BE
10E
7F
BE
BE
8F
9F
BF
8F
2H
2F
1H
IF
1F
2N
2N
2K
2K
3K
3K
2K
2K
2M
W
1W
9K
1W
7K
7K
7J
7J
B
K
8K
81
8H
7H
7J
BJ
1O
A
10A
10A
4L
4L
4L
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
7
7
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
01004
01005
01 101
01102
01103
01104
01105
01106
02701
02702
02703
02704
02705
02706
02707
02708
02709
02711
02712
027 13
02715
7
7
7
R12
R13
R22
R23
R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
RIM
R111
R113
R114
R115
R121
R123
R124
R125
R131
R132
R133
R134
R135
R138
R137
R138
R130
R140
R141
R142
R151
R152
R153
R154
R155
RIM
R157
R158
R158
RleO
Rl6l
R162
R171
R175
R176
R177
R178
R170
Rl8O
RIB1
R182
R185
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
1
7
Page8of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDLP = & gt;
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
4L
7L
5J
5J
5J
5J
5J
5J
7N
7N
7N
6N
BM
7M
BM
6L
6L
1OL
1O
L
1O
L
6M
R188
R201
R202
R203
R2W
R205
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BC
BC
5C
4C
78
78
7A
7A
7A
78
78
78
6A
5A
5A
5D
4A
4A
3A
4D
2A
2A
2A
2A
28
X
X
X
X
X
28
28
1A
2A
1A
1A
1B
1C
1C
1C
1C
1C
1B
1B
38
38
3C
X
X
3C
28
18
6D
6D
RXY)
R207
R208
R208
R210
R211
R212
R213
R214
R215
R218
R210
R220
R221
R222
R223
R224
R225
R228
R227
R228
R2ZB
R230
R231
R232
R233
R234
R235
R238
R240
R241
R242
R243
R244
R245
R248
R250A
R250B
R250C
R250D
R250E
R250F
R2500
R251A
R251B
R251C
R251D
R251E
R251F
R251G
R254
R255
R2M
R280
R281
R282
I7263
R264
R285
R288
R287
R288
FEW
R270
R271
R272
R273
R274
R275
R276
2
15
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BOARD
LOCATDN
3D
5G
50
50
50
6H
50
80
1OH
1M
BE
BE
2L
1M
6H
5N
5E
50
4E
4E
2L
1M
6H
8C
BE
8C
4E
5D
3E
3E
1L
1M
5H
3E
2D
2E
2E
1L
1M
5H
3D
2E
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
5F
5F
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
SF
6F
5E
5E
5F
S
F
SF
SF
4F
4F
SF
SF
4F
4F
4F
40
3E
4F
4F
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
C610389
DESCRIPTION
SN 801 6000 AND ABOVE
A1 0 MAIN BOARD (cont)
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
SCHEM
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
BOARD
LOCATION
ClRCUrr
NUMBER
U702
U8OlB
U8Ol
U802
U901A
UBOlB
UW1
U930A
U830B
U930
U931
U932
U931
UlOOlA
UlOOlB
UlOOlC
UlOOlD
UlOOl
UllOlA
UllOlB
UllOl
U1102A
U1102B
U1102
U1103
U1103
U1104A
U1104B
U1104C
U1104
U1106A
U1106B
U1106C
U1106
15
2
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
15
15
15
7
7
7
7
7
15
3
3
15
3
3
15
3
15
3
3
3
15
3
3
3
15
BK
7H
7H
8H
QA
8A
8A
80
80
80
80
8A
80
7L
7L
7L
7L
7L
4G
4G
4G
4G
4G
4G
5K
5K
4H
4H
4H
4H
5L
5L
5L
5L
VR308
VR309
VR310
VR311
VR312
VR8Ol
VR2701
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
QF
7G
5
5
5
5
6G
6G
8G
8G
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
7
6
6
2
2
1
1
1
13
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
15
5
8N
1ON
1ON
6A
5A
3A
2A
7L
7K
8K
1OH
QH
SC
SC
30
30
6G
6G
5G
6H
6G
VR301
VR302
VR303
VR3M
W9
W9
W9
W11
W12
W13
W14
W16
W17
W18
W18
Wm
WlW
WlOl
W102
W103
W2M)
WZ31
W202
~ 2 0 3
~ 2 0 5
W206
W207
W208
W209
W210
W223
W231
W232
W235
W3M
ClRCUrr
NUMBER
BOARD
LOCATION
9G
BE
10E
@
J
6M
6G
6G
6G
6G
1OH
5E
2E
2E
5E
8G
ClRCUrr
NUMBER
W305
W401
W406
W413
W414
W415A
W415B
W416A
W416B
W501
W502
W503
W5a4
W505
W506
W507
W510
We03
W604
W605
W606
W607
W610
We11
W802
W805
WE06
W807
We08
WE10
W8l 1
W815
W8m
W821
WBOO
WlOOO
WllOl
W1102
W1103
Page 11 of 19
Scans by AR TEK MEDLQ = & gt;
SCHEM
NUMBER
6
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
15
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
15
15
4
4
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
2
6
6
15
7
3
3
3
BOARD
LOCATION
10E
4H
3H
3J
3J
5E
3F
3E
3E
1M
3M
3M
3M
3N
3N
5N
6M
4M
3L
5L
1K
5M
3N
3N
8G
6M
7K
6M
7K
6H
5H
8G
5K
4M
80
3L
5K
3J
5K
ClRCUrr
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
BOARD
LOCATION
W1106
Wll08
W12M)
Wlm1
~1202
WlZ33
W1204
W1m5
W1209
W1210
W1216
W1217
W1218
W1221
W 1222
W1223
W1231
W1237
W1247
W1248
W1248
W1250
W1251
W1252
W1255
W1277
W1288
W2302
W2302
W2502
W2304
W2502
W2502
W2701
3
3
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
7
7
15
15
7
4
4
7
5L
5L
6F
6€
BH
1J
7G
Y600
4
3M
2.J
41
2.J
BC
6H
5H
1J
6D
7D
8K
7L
70
6H
5H
8K
6H
5H
6F
8K
6J
1OD
10 0
10 0
10 0
1L
1L
6M
& ans by = & gt; ARTEK MEDa 02003-2005
3-20-89
224EA SERVICE
CGiO389
A1 0 MAIN BOARD
801 6000 AND ABOVE
Page 12 of 19
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
Date:
3-20-89
DESCRIPTION
Partial Diagram 4
PROCESSOR I N T E R F A C E
7 ~ @
R
O FRO. U173-ll
E
TRIGGER L O G I C
Y2502
Page 13 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDLP
-
Change Reference:
C610389
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
C610389
DESCRIPTION
SN 8016000 AND ABOVE
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM DIAGRAM 3
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
ASSEMBLY A1 0
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
C421
C422
C423
C424
C425
C426
C432
C444
C447
C451
C452
C453
C454
C455
C462
C463
C474
C476
C477
C478
C483
C484
C485
C487
C489
C1103
C1105
C1106
C1107
ClllO
C1111
C1114
C113U
C1154
C1155
1H
2H
2H
2H
2J
2D
1L
2L
3L
6G
7H
8G
7G
6H
6L
6L
6K
7K
7L
8K
38
48
88
38
48
3A
3E
3H
3H
3D
3H
5E
4G
6F
6G
2G
3H
2G
3G
2G
3H
CR432
CR462
1K
6K
2G
1G
DL22
DL22
6M
6M
2K
2H
L426
L432
L462
2D
2L
6K
3H
2G
1G
0440
0444
0470
0474
1L
2L
5K
7K
2H
2F
1H
IF
X
2F
2F
1G
2H
1G
1G
1G
1G
IF
IF
IF
IF
1E
2F
3G
2H
3F
3G
41
5K
4G
4G
3G
4G
41
4G
4G
4G
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
0480
01101
01102
01103
01104
01105
01106
R401
R402
R403
R410
R411
R412
R413
R414
R415
R416
R417
R420
R421
R422
R423
R424
R425
R426
R430
R431
R432
R440
R44 1
R442
R443
R444
R445
R446
R447
R448
R449
R450
R451
R452
R453
R454
R455
R456
R460
R461
R462
R463
SCHEM
LOCATION
8L
5E
4E
5F
3E
3E
3F
2C
2C
3L
1M
1M
2M
2M
6M
6L
6L
6M
2E
1H
2H
2H
2H
2H
2D
2K
1K
2L
1L
1L
1K
1K
2K
2L
2M
3L
3L
2M
6E
7G
7G
8H
7H
6D
6F
6K
6K
6L
6L
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
IF
R470
R471
R472
R473
R474
R475
R476
R477
R478
R479
R483
R484
R485
R486
R487
R490
R481
R492
R493
R494
R495
R496
R497
R498
R1103
RllM
R1105
R1106
R1110
R1111
R1112
R1113
R1114
R1115
R1116
R1117
Rlll8
R1120
R1121
R1122
R1123
R1124
R1125
R1126
R1127
R1128
R1131
R1132
R1133
R1134
5
J
5
J
5
J
5
J
5
J
5
J
3F
3F
3
J
3G
3G
3G
3G
3H
X
X
2H
X
2G
X
3G
3G
X
2H
2G
2F
X
X
2H
2H
2H
3H
2F
3F
2F
2F
3F
1G
1G
1G
2G
X
1H
1G
1G
1G
1G
IF
SCHEM
LOCATION
Partel A10 also shown on diagrams 1. 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 14.
Page 14 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDiA = & gt;
EL
5K
5K
BK
BK
BK
BL
8L
7L
7L
38
8K
8L
8L
8L
38
48
48
48
78
78
88
88
38
3D
3D
BJ
BJ
5E
4E
4E
4E
4F
4F
5F
4F
5F
3E
4E
3E
4E
4F
3F
3F
4F
3F
3G
3H
3H
3
J
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
1G
1H
1H
1H
1H
IF
IF
IF
1F
IF
3F
1E
IF
1E
IF
R1135
R1136
R1142
R1143
R1144
R1145
R1150
R1154
R1155
R1162
R1163
R1170
21
3
J
3
J
21
21
21
21
2
1
35
3
'
2
4G
5K
5K
4K
5K
4K
5K
5K
41
41
3
J
41
5K
5K
5K
5K
5K
5
J
5
J
3
J
5
J
4G
4G
4H
4H
U421A
U421B
U421C
U431A
U431B
U431C
U441A
U441B
U441C
U441D
U441E
U441F
U442A
U442B
U442C
UllOlA
UllOlB
U1102A
Ull02B
U1103
U1104A
U1104B
U1104C
U1106A
U1106B
UllOM:
W401
W406
W413
W414
WllOl
W1102
W1103
W1106
W1108
SCHEM
LOCATION
4F
4F
3G
4G
3H
3H
2D
6F
BOARD
LOCATION
4H
4H
4G
4H
4H
4H
3G
5A
5A
4G
4G
5K
5K
3A
41
1C
1K
1L
7D
3F
3F
3F
2F
61
2F
6L
4K
5K
7K
4K
2K
1K
6M
4K
1M
2E
6G
2F
1H
1H
1H
1H
1H
1H
2H
2H
2H
4G
4G
4G
4G
SK
4H
4H
4H
5L
5L
5L
ff
3G
3H
58
35
4G
8H
28
BJ
4
)
2D
3
J
1M
2M
5C
3D
6C
8
.
J
3K
4H
3H
3
J
3
J
5K
3
J
5K
5L
5K
2246A SERVICE
C610389
I
5,($
%
=
K
v FROM USOO-19
--1 T G R 7 2 b 11701-22 6 K
U502-4
6C
@
S R I CLK r T L
U501. 1 3
*-T V F I E L D SEL
--
COMPARATOR 6
MEASUREMENT
0 T R I G BANDUIDTH
fl451
7.87K
AH & lt;
,, ;rs,l-',
,,
----@ Static
Sensitive Devices
See n a j n t e n d n c e S e c t J o n
SN 8016000 AND ABOVE
L
4
A AND B T R I G G E R SYSTEM
2
~
_ . . .L . .
.
*
Page 1
L
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
3-X)-89
Change Reference:
C610389
DESCRIPTION
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER DIAGRAM 6
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
ASSEMBLY A10
ClRCUrr
NUMBER
C31Q
C802
C803
C804
C805
C807
C808
C809
C814
C817
C81Q
C820
C8M)
C870
C880
SCHEM
LOCATION
78
3J
41
4.J
4E
2J
58
61
61
6C
7L
5H
BOARD
LOCATION
ClRCUrr
NUMBER
7F
7J
7K
8K
8H
7J
QG
W
W
0804
0805
0806
0807
0809
0810
0811
0812
4H
5K
5J
5H
5F
3F
30
6G
R353
R358
R36Q
R8Ol
R802
RE03
RE04
RE05
RE06
RE07
RE08
Re09
R8lO
R8ll
RE12
R813
8B
68
8B
3K
3L
3G
5G
7J
W
7J
W
40
W
CR801
CR802
58
68
5K
4M
PI7
PI 8
3M
5M
7K
8K
0801
0802
0803
3K
3J
7K
7K
7J
3H
SCHEM
LOCATION
5G
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUK
NUMBER
7J
8K
8K
W
8H
7H
7J
W
R814
RE20
RE21
RE22
RE23
RE25
RE26
RE27
Re28
RE28
R830
R831
R836
RE54
R855
R856
R857
RE60
RE61
R862
R863
R871
R872
R873
RE91
ZJ
48
4D
4D
50
70
70
QD
QD
8D
8K
7K
8K
8K
a
!
7J
QG
7H
8H
8H
7H
8H
3G
W
41
41
41
SCHEM
LOCATION
PaR1alA10
also shorn, on diagram 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7and 14.
Page 16 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 ==-
3G
7L
7L
7L
4C
7C
7C
4C
3K
3K
5K
5K
4C
5F
4F
4E
4E
5C
3F
3G
4F
5F
5G
5F
EK
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUK
NUMBER
W
W
R8Q2
R8Q3
R894
RE86
R8Q7
R8Q8
5L
5H
5H
61
5J
U301B
U8OlA
UB02
68
7H
3C
O
D
7H
Bn
VR801
4H
8.l
W17
W18
W305
WE05
We06
W807
WE08
WE10
WE1 1
WE20
W821
3M
5M
68
58
5C
58
5C
48
48
5C
68
7K
8K
10D
6M
EK
8M
7K
7J
7K
80
8H
80
O
H
7J
7K
8K
8.l
8H
8H
7H
8H
8H
8H
7J
7J
7J
W
W
W
8K
SCHEM
LOCATION
4.J
BDARD
LOCATION
8K
8.l
8.l
BJ
8K
7K
W
5H
5K
4M
Swns by = & gt; ARTEKNED-
-
-
3-20 tl9
@ 2003-2005
-
-
-
2216A SERVICE
C610389
-
--.
--- -
- --
- ---
-
1
-
-
PI8
M'
i
--j ~ H O R I Z O N T A L
OUTPUT
TO
@ Static
V l
Sensitive Devices
See N a l n t e n a n c e Section
i
FW IHTEBRlTED CIRCUIT W P L Y
U W H E C T I O N S UIO WWR S W L Y
LECOIPLIH6 NEWOMS SEE:
WIN
SN 8016000 AND ABOVE
BOAFID WYER
OISTRIBIITIOU
HORlZONTAL OUTPUT A M P L I F I E R
6
13
I
Page 17 of 19
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Date:
3-20-89
Change Reference:
C610389
DESCRIPTION
SN 801 6000 AND ABOVE
MAIN BOARD POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM 14
SN B016000 AND ABOVE
ASSEMBLY A8
ClRCUlT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
We00
5M
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
ClRCUlT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
1E
Partial A8 also s h o w on diagram 7.
ASSEMBLY A10
C135
C136
C140
C155
C156
C171
C172
C180
C181
C205
C206
C214
C215
C216
C217
C218
C224
C225
C229
C234
C235
C239
C244
C245
C249
C265
C282
C283
C287
C288
C304
C308
C316
C317
C318
C320
C322
C337
C338
C339
C351
C442
C445
C475
C480
C481
C482
C501
C502
C503
C505
C6M
C605
C606
C609
7D
8E
8D
7E
8E
5A
1A
8D
7A
3J
3J
78
78
28
18
78
78
78
78
7C
7C
7C
7D
7C
7D
58
38
68
3C
3B
5D
2J
5c
1L
6J
1J
2M
5D
8A
88
5F
3G
1B
ID
2D
2C
2D
3E
3E
3E
2M
3F
1H
1E
2H
28
28
X
28
18
28
3C
3D
6D
1O
H
1O
H
4E
5D
5G
5G
5D
3D
3D
4D
2D
2D
2D
1D
ID
2D
5F
4F
6G
5F
3F
7D
7H
8E
8E
BE
BG
O
D
9E
8G
BG
BC
2H
3F
IF
1J
3F
2F
4M
4N
4N
X
3M
2M
3L
2J
C610
C613
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C708
C801
C806
C815
C816
C61B
C621
C822
CeOl
C902
CB03
C W
C1005
C1006
CllOl
C1102
C1104
C1158
C1159
CllW
C2701
C2702
C270B
2H
1H
4E
88
8A
8A
08
7M
8L
3H
4G
4H
5L
5L
5K
7M
6L
7M
J1204
1A
5J
LlOl
L102
K O1
I216
I217
L445
L475
5A
8D
6A
28
1B
18
1D
X
2C
6E
4H
5H
P2302
P2502
6M
1N
1OD
1L
8D
6D
10H
6E
3D
3F
6G
6F
3F
7D
BE
BE
R182
R208
R226
R245
R282
R283
R297
R298
R312
R339
R345
35
3K
3K
3L
4A
3J
4A
5H
6H
7H
48
5H
6E
5K
5K
5M
5M
7F
Ki
6H
8G
X
1F
X
6K
6H
8G
3J
78
7C
38
68
3C
38
5D
81
5C
2L
IN
1(U
BJ
1O
K
BK
BG
BJ
8K
8H
7H
8H
6J
7J
6J
3J
1J
R374
R390
R392
R480
R481
R504
R701
R709
R723
R733
R734
R837
R915
R916
R1026
R1027
RllOl
R1102
R1158
R1159
R1160
R2783
5D
1L
8F
28
2D
1M
10E
8F
7C
4F
1J
BC
3J
BJ
BJ
BJ
U112
U122
U171
U172
U173
U201
U202
U203
U210
U220
U230
U240
U260
U301
U302
U303
U304
U307
U308
U309
U310
U311
U315
U316
U421
U431
U441
U442
U501
U502
U503
U506
7D
7D
5A
6A
1A
18
1B
BC
4C
36
38
3
J
loG
5E
4E
3E
2E
5F
BD
8C
BC
BD
7D
7D
7C
1OD
1O
D
8F
7H
3F
2F
1H
2H
5M
4N
5N
10C
Partial A10 also s h o w on dragrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
Page 18 of 19
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
2K
5H
3K
48
7H
5L
5L
8F
6F
6H
8G
IF
2G
6K
4D
78
78
7C
7C
58
1L
5E
5E
5F
5E
5E
5F
5E
5E
1J
2
1
28
2D
1D
3G
3E
3E
3E
2M
1O
K
BH
BK
8A
8A
7M
8L
3J
41
4L
5J
5J
7N
3C
5H
5G
UeOO
U601
U602
U603
U604
UeOe
U701
U702
U801
U802
UWlA
UeOlB
UeOl
U830
U931
U932
UlOOl
U1101
U1102
U1103
U1104
U1106
X
W235
W501
W606
W607
we00
W1200
W1201
W1202
W1203
W1204
W1205
W1209
W1210
W1216
W1217
W1218
W1221
W1222
W1223
W1231
W1237
W1247
W1248
W1248
W1250
W1251
W1252
W 1255
W1277
W2302
W2502
7E
1H
1E
2E
5M
1J
3M
5E
1M
1K
5M
88
6F
21
O
H
1J
7G
21
2H
1E
X
2H
3F
3K
3K
5H
6H
5K
5L
5
J
5
J
3M
5K
7F
7H
7H
2F
X
X
1G
1J
X
1E
3G
3M
3G
3G
3E
88
3L
6F
BF
5c
5H
5H
5H
8A
8A
58
4D
8M
1M
2M
1N
3K
2K
2L
3M
1(U
BK
7H
8~
BA
BA
BA
88
88
8A
7L
4G
4G
5K
4H
5L
9C
41
21
BC
6H
5H
1J
6D
6D
8K
6L
6D
6H
5H
8K
6H
5H
6F
8K
1O
D
1L
Scans by = & gt; ARTEK NED-
O 2003-2005
2236A SERVICE
C610389
--
Page 1 9 of 19
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMM~DTD
DQPLENCE
Date:
5-25-89
Change Reference:
Manual Part Number:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
C710589
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B016000
OPTION 15
THIS INSERTCONTAINSALL INFORMATION REGARDING OPTION 15 (CH2
SIGNAL OUT AND A GATE OUT'). THE AlTACHED PAGES (1 6) CONTAIN
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
-
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION CHECK
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
REPLACEABLE PARTS LISTS
CH 2 SIGNAL OUT BOARD
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Cover Page
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
*
Option 15-2246A
OPTION 15
DESCRIPTION
Option 15 adds two additional outputs to the rear panel
of the instrument, CH 2 Signal Out and A GATE Out.
This document contains the Description, Specification,
Performance Check, Adjustment Procedure, and
Replaceable Parts information for Option 15. The
schematic illustration of each circuit is also included
with this document.
CH2 Signal Output
representation of the Channel 2 input signal. The output
amplitude into a 1 Mi2 load is approximately 20 mV per
division of input signal. lnto a 50-a load, the output
amplitude is approximately 10 mV per division of input
signal.
A GATE Output
The A GATE OUT Connector located on the rear-panel
provides a TTL and CMOS Compatible, positive-going
gate signal that is HI during the A Sweep and LO when
the A Sweep is not running.
The CH 2 SIGNAL OUT Connector located on the
rear-panel provides an output signal that is a normalized
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Characteristics
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
CHARACTERISTICS
CH 2 SIGNAL OUT
Temperature Range
-10 to 55O C.
Dynamic Range
f 7 divisions.
Deflection Factor
Into 50 a
10mVIdiv f 10%.
+
into 1 M a
3dB Bandwidth
20mVIdiv 10%.
DC to 25 MHz.
DC Offset (Adjusted)
& lt; 0.5 div (measured at 2 mvldiv).
A GATE OUTPUT
Output Voltage
3.5 V to 5.25 V positive-going pulse starting at 0 V to 0.7 V.
Output Drive
Will supply 4 mA during HI state, will sink 20 mA during LO state.a
a Performance Requirement not checked In manual.
Page 1 of 6
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
Option 15 -2246A
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION CHECK
Equipment Requlred
Leveled Sine-Wave Generator
Calibration Generator
Test Oscilloscope
50-R BNC Precision Coaxial Cable
50-R BNC Coaxial Cable
50-R BNC Termination
m. CHECK- Display amplitude is 4.5 to 5.5 divisions
(neglect trace width).
1. CH 2 Signal Output
a. Set:
VERTICAL MODE
BW LIMIT
VOLTSIDIV
lnput Coupling
CH 1 and CH 2
A and B SECIDIV
TRIGGER MODE
SOURCE
COUPLING
n. Set CH 2 VOLTSIDIV to .1 V.
CH 1 and CH 2
(CH 3 and CH 4 Off)
Off
2 mV
o. Connect a 50 kHz signal from the Leveled
Sine-Wave Generator to the CH 2 input connector via a
precision 50-R BNC cable and a 50-R Termination.
GND
1ms
AUTO LVL
VERT
NOISE RW
p. Adjust the generator output level to produce a
6-division CH 1 display.
q. Increase the generator frequency to 25 MHz.
b. Push the CH 2 VERTICAL MODE button so that
light is off.
r. CHECK-Display amplitude is 4.24 divisions or
greater.
s. Disconnect the test setup.
c. Connect the CH 2 signal from the rear-panel CH 2
SIGNAL OUT connector to the CH 1 OR X input
connector via a 50-R BNC cable.
2. A GATE Output
d. Align the CH 1 trace to the center graticule line.
a. Set:
e. Set CH 1 lnput Coupling to DC.
SECIDIV
'TRIGGER MODE
HOLDOFF
f. CHECK- Displayed trace is within 0.5 division of
the ground reference set above (neglect trace width). If it
is not, refer to the " Adjustment " procedure.
g. Connect a 1 kHz, 10 mV standard-amplitude
signal from the Calibration Generator to the CH 2 lnput
Connector via a 50-R BNC cable.
0.1 ms
Auto
Minimum (CCW)
b. Connect a test oscilloscope to the A GATE OUT
Connector from the rear-panel via a 50-R BNC cable.
c. CHECK-Test oscilloscope displays a signal with
a high level between 2 V and 5.25 V and a low level
between 0 V and 0.7 V.
h. Set CH 2 lnput Coupling to DC.
d. CHECK- Duration of the high level is greater than
or equal to 0.2 ms.
i. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 20 mV.
j. CHECK- Display amplitude is 4.5 to 5.5 divisions
(neglect trace width).
k. Connect a 50-R terminator to the CH 1 Input.
I. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 10 mV.
e. Set HOLDOFF Control to maximum (CW).
f. CHECK- Duration of the high level is greater than
or equal to 2 ms.
g. Disconnect the test setup.
Page 2 of 6
Option 15-2246A
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
c. Set CH 1 VOLTSIDIV to 2 mV.
1. CH 2 Signal Output
d. Set CH 1 Input Coupling to GND and align the
trace with the center graticule line.
NOTE
The CH 1 and CH 2 STEP BALANCE Adjustment
Procedures (located in the Service Manuals
Adjustment Procedure Section) must be
completed before continuing with this procedure.
e. Set CH 1 Input Coupling to DC.
f. Adjust R1508 until the displayed trace is aligned
with the reference set above (neglect trace width).
a. Set CH 2 lnput Coupling to GND.
b. Connect the CH 2 signal from the rear-panel CH 2
SIGNAL OUT Connector to the CH 1 OR X input
Connector via a 50-R BNC cable.
2. A GATE output
There are no adjustments for the A GATE Output.
MAINTENANCE
A1 0 - Main Board Replacement
When replacing the AlO-Main Board with a new
board,two diodes will need to be removed from the old
Main Board and added to the new board. These diode
are CR601 and CR602. Refer to the AlO-Main Board
figure in this manual for location of these two diodes.
Page 3 of 6
Scans by ARTEK MEDCQ = & gt;
Option 15-2246A
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LlST
Component
No.
Tektronlx
Part No.
Name & Description
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: CH 2 OUT OPT
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW,SI,30V.150MA,30V.DO-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW,S1,30V,150MA,30V,DO-35
CORE,EM: TOROID,FERRITE 0.5 OD X 0.281 ID X 0.2
TERMINAL, PIN: 0.71 L X .025 SQ PH BRZ,GLD PL
TERMINAL, PIN: 0.71 L X .025 SQ PH BRZ,GLD PL
TERMINAL, PIN: 0.71 L X .025 SQ PH BRZ,GLD PL
SOCKET,PIN TERM: UM10.019 DIA PINS
CONN,RCPT,ELEC: BNC,FEMALE
MICROCKT,LINEAR: 5 XSTR ARRAY,CA3046,14 DIP,MI
CABLE ASSY,RF: 50 OHM COAX,16.0 L,W/HARMONICA,9-3
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW,S1,30V,150MA,30V
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW,S1,30V,l50MA,30V
CHASSIS PARTS
LEAD,ELECTRICAL: 22 AWG,6.O L,9-N,W/STRAIN RELIEF
CONN.RCPT,ELEC: BNC,FEMALE
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LlST
Tektronlx
Part No.
361-1535-00
211-0690-01
210-0255-00
334-7498-00
Q~Y
1
1
2
1
Name & Description
SPACER,SLENE: 0.45 L X 0.313 OD,AL
SCREW,MACHINE: 6-32 X 0.875,PNH,SST,TORX
TERMINAL,LUG: 0.391 ID,LOCKING,BRS CD PL
MARKER,IDENT: MKD Z AXIS,REAR PANEL A GATE OUT CH 2 OUT
Page 4 of 6
Scans by ARlEK MEDL4 = & gt;
Option 15 -2246A
A25
CH 2 Slgnal Out Board.
Page 5 of 6
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4 = & gt;
Option 15-2246A
+ 7.5v
+ 7.5v
O
R1502
MAlN BOARD
A25 CH 2 SIGNAL OUT BOARD (OPTION 15)
CH 2 Signal Out Diagram.
FROM U606E-10
CR601
& gt;
I
W1503
a
2L
PARTIAL A10 MAlN BOARD
A Gate Out Diagram.
Page 6 of 6
Scans by ARTEK MEDLQ = & gt;
J I M
I
A GATE OUT
I
lkkkronk
c o ~ ~ r r TD U~~LLENCE
rm
product:
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
6-30-88
Change Reference:
M65925
Date:
Manual Part No.:
2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 8012517
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A1 8C2202
290-1206-00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: 270UF,450V
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
13
POWER SUPPLY
Change the value of capacitor C2202 (location 2D) to 270 pF.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARlEK M E m = & gt;
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
Wctronbc
COMMITTEO
Product:
TO EXCELLENCE
MF~NUF~L
CHF~NGEINFORMF~TION
Date:
9-13-88
2246A SERVICE
Change R e f e r e n c e :
Manual P a r t Number:
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B010180
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A1 6
671-0314-00
CKT BD ASSY: PROCESSOR
(WITHOUT U2519)
A1 6
672-0229-00
CKT BD ASSY: PROCESSOR
(WITH U2519)
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
M66134
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
MFINUFIL CHFINGE INFORMFITION
Date:
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE
Product:
9-12-88
Change R e f e r e n c e :
Manual P a r t Number:
2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
M66136
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
SEE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A1 8
670-9398-04
8012720
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: LV PWR SPLY
A1 8Q2201
A1 8Q2209
A18Q221O
151-1214-00
151-0476-03
151-0476-03
8011825
B011825
B011825
TRANSISTOR: MOSFET,SI,TO-220,IRF830
TRANSISTOR: POWER,W/LEAD FORM,TO-220,SELECTED,TIP31
C
TRANSISTOR: POWER,W/LEAD FORM,TO-220,SELECrED,TIP31C
A1 8S2201
260-2443-00
6012975
SWITCH,PUSH: POWER,DPST,6A,250VAC
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
3-
214-3796-00 B012720
2
HEAT SINK,XSTR: ALUMINUM,TO-220
A1 8Q2209 & A1 8Q2210
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDIA = & gt;
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
product:
Date:
8-2-88
2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M66636(REV)
Manual Part No.:
~ ~ U C E L L P * X
070-6555-00
DESCRIPTION
Product Group 46
EFFEC'TIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 9012670
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A10
671-0387-03
CKT BOARD ASSY: MAIN
A1 0C421
A10C451
281-0775-01
281-0775-01
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.1UF,20%.50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.1 UF,20°/o,50V
A10R334
A1 OR362
A1 OR363
A1 OR383
313-1 151-00
313-1392-00
313-1332-00
313-1151-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 150 OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 3.9K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 3.3K OHM,5%.0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 150 OHM.5°/o,0.2W
A1OR625
A1OR636
A10R656
A10R657
A1 OR658
A1 OR659
A1 OR671
313-1201-00
313-1303-00
313-1201-00
313-1201-00
313-1821-00
313-1821-00
313-1200-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 200 OHM,5O/o,0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 30K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 200 OHM.5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 200 OHMT5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 820 OHM.5%,0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 820 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 20 OHM,~O/O,O.~W
A1 OR702
322-3226-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.21 K OHM,1°/o,0.2W
A10R805
A1OR808
A10R810
A1 OR850
A1 OR852
A10R856
A10R857
313-1 162-00
313-1272-00
313-1272-00
313-1392-00
322-3074-00
322-3289-00
322-3265-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 1.6K OHM,5O/o,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.7K OHM,50/070.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.7K OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 3.9K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 57.6 OHM,l%,O.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10.OK OHM,1°/o,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM: 5.62K OHM,l%,O.ZW
A1 OR935
313-1243-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 24K OHM,5O/o,0.2W
A1 OR1 132
A10R1133
A1 OR1 142
A10R1144
313-1223-00
313-1104-00
313-1223-00
313-1753-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 22K OHM,~O/O,O.~W
RES.FXD,FILM: lOOK OHM,5O/o,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 22K OHM750/o,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75K OHM,5%,0.2W
A10R2710
A1 OR2745
A1 OR2786
A1 OR2787
313-1331-00
315-0122-00
313-1753-00
313-1333-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 330 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 1.2K OHM,5%,0.25W
RES,FXD,FILM: 75K OHM,5O/o,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 33K OHM,5%,0.2W
A10VR308
152-0437-00
SEMICOND DVC,DI: ZEN,SI,~.~V,~O/O,O.~W
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
Replace the heatsinks (PIN 214-0973-00) used on FETs A10Q131 and A10Q151 each with approximately
0.35 inches of heat shrink tubing (PIN 162-0533-00)
Page 1 of 3
Scam by AR TEK MEDL4 = & gt;
.
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
8-2-88
Change Reference:
M66636(REV)
DESCRIPTION
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
2
VERTICAL PREAMPS & OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
Change the value of resistor R702 (location 5K) to 2.21 K Q.
DIAGRAM
0
3
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
DIAGRAM
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
capacitor C421 (location 'I H) to 0.1 pF.
capacitor C451 (location 6H) to 0.1 pF.
resistor R1132 (location 3H) to 22K Q.
resistor R1133 (location 3H) to 100K R.
resistor R1142 (location 3H) to 22K Q.
resistor R1144 (location 3J) to 75K Q.
0
4
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
Change the
DIAGRAM
A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM
DISPLAY & TRIGGER LOGIC & PROCESSOR INTERFACE
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
value of
resistor R625 (location 4K) to 200 Q.
resistor R636 (location 8H) to 30K Q.
resistor R656 (location 5H) to 200 Q.
resistor R657 (location 4J) to 200 Q.
resistor R658 (location 5H) to 820 Q.
resistor R659 (location 5J) to 820 Q.
resistor R671 (location 6K) to 20 Q.
0
5
A AND B SWEEPS & DELAY COMPARATORS
Change the value of resistor R334 (location 5B) to 150 Q.
Change the value of resistor R362 (location 4C) to 3.9K Q.
Change the value of resistor R363 (location 7C) to 3.3K R.
Change the value of resistor R383 (location 8B) to 150 Q.
Change the voltage of zener diode VR308 (location 7C) to 8.2 V.
Page 2 of 3
A
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
Product:
2246A SERVICE
~
~
t8-2-88
~
:
Change Reference:
M66636(REV)
DESCRIPTION
DIAGRAM CHANGES (cont)
DIAGRAM
0
6
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
DIAGRAM
resistor R805 (location 4H) to 1.6K R.
resistor R808 (location 4D) to 2.7K R.
resistor R810 (location 5E) to 2.7K R.
resistor R850 (location 5G) to 3.9K R.
resistor R852 (location 5K) to 57.6 R.
resistor R856 (location 4E) to 10.OK R.
resistor R857 (location 4E) to 5.62K R.
0
7
Z-AXIS, CRT, PROBE ADJ, & CONTROL MUX
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
Change the value of
resistor R935 (location 2H) to 24K $2.
resistor R2710 (location 8G) to 330 $2.
resistor R2745 (location 7J) to 1.2K R.
resistor R2786 (location 4L) to 75K R.
resistor R2787 (location 5L) to 33K R.
Page 3 of 3
Scans by AR TEK MEDM = & gt;
I
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMMITTEDTD~NCE
Product:
6-8-88
Change Retemnce:
Manual PaR NO.:
2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
M66836
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: Boll758
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
671-0314-01
A16
CKT BOARD ASSY: PROCESSOR
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
9
READOUT SYSTEM
Reconnect the NAND Gate (U2417A, pin 3) to U2400 pin 4 as illustrated with the partial schematic below.
Schematic location is 1B.
R O BUF YR
F R O M R2516
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDU = & gt;
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMMITTED TO EMXUEM
Date:
5-25-88
2246A SERVICE
Product:
M66837
Change Reference:
070-6555-00
Manual Part No.:
DESCRIPTION
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 6011785
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
ADD:
A1 OR401
A1 OR402
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
3
A AND 6 TRIGGER SYSTEM
Add resistors R401 and R402 (100 0 each) to pins 7 and 5 of U421A (location 2C) as shown below.
U421A
Y376-004
A3
19
R426
100
OFR " , " u idPk+-3,
-
L426
x AXIS
TO W091
40
3E O "
F &
,
2wJP6'-39
4E O
H
@
3
::
~ E O F F I E : :f 0
2:2
-
,E
. l
1
0
I
1
U I4i,96A
6
9
I
I
SOURCE
R1103
1K
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDU
-
R1150
1
K
G2 HUX
4
W412
@
R420
270
-sVp
*
-
MCINUCIL CHCINGE INFORMCITION
Wetronk
Date:
ConnITTEO TO EXCELLENCE
Product:
9-12-88
Change R e f e r e n c e :
Manual P a r t Number:
2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 8012975
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
2-19
441-1791-00
1
CHASSIS: REAR
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDU = & gt;
M66953
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
WMMITEDTD
EXCELLENCE
Date:
3-1 0-89
Change Reference:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
M67048
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B014151
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A16U2406
156-2016-00
MICROCKT,DGTL: NMOS,2048 X 8 SRAM,100NS
Page 1 of 1
Scans by A R Z K MEDL4
*
46
MRNURL CHRNGE INFORMRTION
COMMITTEO TO EXCELLENCE
Product:
Date: 11-28-88
2246A SERVICE
Change R e f e r e n c e :
Manual P a r t Number:
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 8013264
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A16
671-0947-00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: PROCESSOR
(WITHOUT U2519)
A16
672-0229-01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: PROCESSOR
(WITH U2519)
A1 6R2312
A16R2313
A16R2510
322-3252-00
322-3252-00
313-1511-00
RES.FXD,FILM: 4.12K OHM,1%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.12K OHM,1%,0.2W
RES,FXD.FILM: 510 OHM.5%.0.2W
A16J2503
131-4529-00
CONNECTOR,RECEPTACLE: 10 PIN
A1 6R2361
A1 6R2362
A16R2363
A16R2364
A16R2365
A1 6R2525
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1621-00
RES,FXD.FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 4.7K OHM.5%.0.2W
RES,FXD.FILM: 620 OHM,5%.0.2W
A1 6R2323
A1 6R2326
A1 6R2327
A16R2353
A16R2354
A16R2531
A16R2533
A1 6R2535
A1 6R2537
A16R2539
A16R2541
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1472-00
313-1102-00
313-1102-00
313-1102-00
313-1102-00
313-1102-00
313-1102-00
RES,FXD.FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD.FILM: 4.7K OHM.5%.0.2W
RES,FXD.FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 4.7K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 1K OHM.5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 1K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 1K OHM,5%.0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 1K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES.FXD,FILM: 1K OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 1K OHM,5%,0.2W
A1 6U2307
A16U2310
A16U2311
A16U2312
156-1646-00
156-0515-00
156-0515-00
156-0515-00
MICROCKT.DGTL: CMOS,OCTAL D-TYPE EDGE TRIG
MICROCKT,DGTL: CMOS,TRIPLE 3-CHAN MUX
MICROCKT,DGTL: CMOS,'rRIPLE 3-CHAN MUX
MICROCKT,DGTL: CMOS,TRIPLE 3-CHAN MUX
ADD:
DELETE:
Page 1 of 7
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
M67127
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
Product:
Date: 11-28-88
2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M67127
DESCRIPTION
FIGURE CHANGES
The A16 Processor Board has been replaced with a new version. Please refer to the Processor Board
contained in this insert.
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
8
MEASUREMENT PROCESSOR
Change the value of resistor R2510 (location 2B) to 510 R.
DIAGRAM
0
10
SWITCH BOARD & INTERFACE
The following changes are illustrated with a partial schematic of Diagram 10 contained in this insert.
Remove the following list of 1K R resistors from the output of U2523. Locations are 1C through 1E.
R2531
R2533
R2535
R2537
R2539
R2541
Add connector J2503 and resistor R2525 (620 R).
DIAGRAM
0
11
ADC AND DAC SYSTEM
Diagram 11 is replaced with a new version of the schematic. Please refer to the new Diagram 11 contained in this insert.
Page 2 of 7
Scans by ARTEK MDLQ +
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
11-28-88
Change Reference:
M67127
DESCRIPTION
A16-PROCESSOR
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
BT2501
BT2502
8
8
C2300
C2301
C2302
C2303
C2304
C2305
C2306
C2307
C2308
C2309
C2310
C2311
C2312
C2313
C2314
C2315
C2316
C2317
C2318
C2319
C2320
C2321
C2322
C2323
C2324
C2401
C2402
C2403
C2404
C2405
C2406
C2407
C2408
C2409
C2410
C2411
C2412
C24 15
C2416
C24 17
C2418
C24 19
C2420
C2501
C2502
C2503
C2504
C2505
C2506
C2507
C2508
C2509
C2510
C2511
11
11
11
11
14
11
11
11
11
11
11
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
11
14
11
14
11
11
11
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
9
9
14
9
9
9
9
9
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C2514
C2515
C2516
C2517
C2518
C2521
C2522
C2523
C2524
C2525
C2526
C2530
C2531
C2532
C2541
C2543
C2544
C2545
C2546
C2547
C2548
C2549
C2550
C2551
C2552
C2553
C2554
C2555
SCHEM
NUMBER
8
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
14
14
14
14
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
8
CR2501
CR2502
CR2504
CR2505
8
8
B
8
DS2501
8
J2302
J2302
J2302
J2304
J2501
J2501
J2502
J2502
J2502
J2503
J2601
J2601
9
11
14
11
10
14
8
9
14
10
11
14
P2105
P2105
11
14
02501
02502
02503
02504
02505
10
10
10
10
10
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
02506
02507
10
8
R2301
R2302
R2303
R2304
R2305
R2306
R2307
R2308
R2309
R2310
R2311
R2312
R2313
R2314
R2315
R2316
R2317
R2318
R2319
R2320
R2321
R2322
R2324
R2325
R2328
R2329
R2330
R2331
R2332
R2333
R2334
R2335
R2336
R2337
R2338
R2339
R2340
R2341
R2342
R2343
R2344
R2345
R2346
R2347
R2348
R2349
R2350
R2351
R2352
R2355
R2356
R2357
R2361
R2362
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
14
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
BOARD
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
R2363
R2364
R2365
R2400
R2401
R2402
R2404
R2405
R2406
R2407
R2408
R2409
R2410
R2411
R2412
R2413
R2414
R2415
R2416
R2417
R2418
R2419
R2420
R2421
R2501
R2502
R2503
R2504
R2505
R2506
R2507
R2508
R2509
R2510
R2511
R2512
R2513
R2514
R2515
R25 16
R2517
R2518
R25 19
R2520
R2521
R2522
R2523
R2524
R2525
R2526
R2527
R2528
R2529
R2532
R2534
R2536
R2538
11
11
11
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
14
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
10
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
Page 3 of 7
Scans by ARTEK MEDU
*
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
R2540
R2542
R2546
R2547
R2548
R2549
R2550
R2551
R2552
R2553
R2554
R2555
R2560
R2561
R2562
R2563
R2564
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
U2300
U2300
U2301
U2301
U2302
U2302
U2303
U2303
U2304
U2304
U2305
U2305
U2306
U2306
U2308
U2308
U2309
U2309
U2313
U2313
U2314
U2314
U2400
U2400
U2401
U2401
U2402
U2402
U2403
U2403
U2404
U2404
U2405
U2405
U2406
U2406
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
11
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
U2407
9
U2407
U2408
14
9
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
SCHEM
NUMBER
U2408
U2409
U2409
U2410
U2410
U2411
U2411
U2412
U2412
U2413
U2413
U2414
U2414
U2415
U2415
U2416
U2416
U2417
U2417
U2501
U2501
U2502
U2502
U2503
U2503
U2506
U2506
U2512
U2512
U2513
U2513
U2514
U2514
U2515
U2515
U2517
U25 17
U2518
U25 18
U2519
U2519
U2521
LJZ523
U2523
U2524
U2524
U2525
U2525
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
9
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
14
8
10
14
10
14
10
14
W2105
W2105
11
14
Y2501
8
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date:
11-28-88
Change R e f e r e n c e :
-
M67127
DESCRIPTION
ADC, DAC SYSTEM DIAGRAM 11
ASSEMBLY A12
CIRCUK
NUMBER
J2105
R2101
R2102
R2103
SCHEM
LOCATION
48
6A
BA
7A
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
1B
R2104
R2105
WID5
R2107
3A
2A
SCHEM
LOCATW
6A
7A
3A
4A
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
2B
4C
1D
3D
R2108
I32109
R2110
RZlllA
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUK
NUMBER
6C
7A
78
7C
7C
7C
2A
7F
7E
7E
7E
7E
7E
7E
7E
4A
3A
5A
5A
58
BG
6A
R2332
R2333
R2334
R2335
R2336
R2337
R2338
R2339
R2340
R2341
R2342
R2343
R2344
R2345
R2346
R2347
R234B
R2349
R2350
R2351
R2352
R2355
R2356
R2357
R2361
SCHEM
LOCATION
8A
6A
5A
3A
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
40
4F
1E
X
R21118
R2112
R2113A
R2113B
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
5A
5A
5A
R2362
R2363
R2284
R2365
6K
7L
6K
7L
7F
7F
7F
BE
U2300
U2301
U2302
U2303
U23WA
U2304B
U23WC
U2304D
U2305A
U2305B
U2305C
U2305D
U2306
U2308
U2309
U2313
U2314
2D
1E
3J
1K
4L
2M
3L
3L
5M
4M
3M
2L
5K
5J
2
)
58
5B
6B
7A
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
7C
7G
7G
6E
78
W2105
58
BG
38
5A
48
4A
2D
1F
2D
2E
38
Panlal A12 also s h a m on dlagrarn 14
ASSEMBLY A16
URCUK
NUMBER
SCHEM
LOCATION
BOARD
LOCATION
CIRCUIT
NUMBER
C2300
C2301
C2302
C2303
C2305
C2C2307
C2308
C2309
C2310
C2318
C2320
C2322
C2323
C2324
3H
3L
4L
3L
2L
2M
3L
3M
4L
4M
6K
5M
5M
5L
5M
78
7C
78
78
78
78
7A
7A
7A
78
7C
7D
7D
7D
7A
J2302
J2304
J2601
J2601
2M
6M
1C
1M
BB
BE
2A
P2105
48
BG
R2303
R23W
R2305
R2308
R2307
R2308
R2310
R2311
R2312
R2313
R2314
R2315
R2316
R2317
R2318
R2319
R2320
R2321
R2322
R2324
R2325
R2328
R2329
R2330
R233 1
R2301
R2302
3H
3H
ZA
7A
7A
SCHEM
LocAnoN
21
3L
4L
6K
5K
5K
X
6F
6F
7E
7E
7F
7F
7E
7E
1K
1J
1J
1J
1C
4E
2F
2F
X
X
6A
6A
6A
SCHEM
LOCATION
2H
X
2F
2F
2K
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
4F
5H
4H
5E
5E
5E
5E
5E
5H
5H
6L
BL
BL
BL
7K
Panlal A16 also shown on dlagrams 8.8. 10 and 14
Page 4 of 7
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
5A
78
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7G
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7F
7D
70
7D
7D
BF
SCHEM
LOCATION
6J
3G
BOARD
LOCATION
Scans by = & gt; ARTEK MEDIA
02003-2005
2246A SERVICE
M67127
1 1-28-88
A
1
B
1
C
1
D
1
OAT1
FROH
BUS
eZKE D
L
ANODE AND
SWITCH REGISTER
E
1
-
F
G
1
H
v
J
v
K
.L
--
L
Y
M
N
L E D 6 S W I T C H COLUMN D R I V E R S
U2523
,p$7
74HCT374
12
9
\02u
15
-
.
6
.D4
17
------- 16
5
+5v*
1 5 ~
19
?_
L
& iN
I ,
LED ANODE C L K
U 2FROH2 7
501-
0
7D
Partial Diagram
@
Page 6 of 7
Scans by = & gt; ARTEK MEDIA
02003-2005
2246A SERVICE
(
.
1
0
b
b2
V
1
;
'05
J2601
w
- 15
INPUT D A T A
LATCHES
O
'.S
.7
0
'
6
16
5
19
2
4
18
3
I
1
1
I
oac nux' our
-
I
I
I
I
M JX2
1
1
I
I
& gt;
FOR INTEGPATED C I R C U I T W Y
R
CCUNECTIONS AND POYER SUPPLY
M C W F L I N G HETYOflKS SEE:
PROCESSOR BOARD POYER D I S T R I B U T I M i
UNUSED
@
I
4
/
1 4- 2246A
ADC.
7062-24
Diagram
9
D A C SYSTEM
B INTEN
I 1
I
Page 7 of 7
MRNURL CHRNGE INFORMRTION
CWITTEO T EXCELLENCE
O
Product:
Date: 11-28-88
Change R e f e r e n c e :
2 2 4 6 A SERVICE
M67629
M a n u a l P a r t Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
P r o d u c t Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 8013366
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS L I S T CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
AlOATl17
AlOAT127
307-2135-0 1
307-2135-01
RES NTWK. FXD. F I :
RES NTWK. FXD. F I :
ATTENUATOR D I P PKG
ATTENUATOR D I P PKG
AlOU112
AlOU122
165-2232-01
165-2232-01
MICROCKT. LINEAR:
MICROCKT.LINEAR:
BUFFER A M P L I F I E R
BUFFER A M P L I F I E R
Page 1 o f 1
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4
*
MRNURL CHRNGE INFORMRTION
I
I Product:
I
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE
Date:
9-19-80
2246A SERVICE
Change R e f e r e n c e :
M a n u a l P a r t Number:
DESCRIPTION
M67630
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B012811
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
REMOVE:
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
5
A AND B SWEEPS & DELAY COMPARATORS
Remove resistors R351 and R391 (510K R 8 1.5M R respectively) from the circuit. Schematic location is 5D.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
MANUFlL CHClNGE INFORMFlTION
Date:
COMMITTEO TO EXCELLENCE
Product:
9-19-86
Change Reference:
Manual P a r t Number:
2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
REMOVE:
131-0566-00
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225 L
152-0141-02
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW.S1.30V.l50MA,30V
313-1 104-00
RES,FXD,FILM: lOOK OHM,5%,0.2W
ADD:
A10CR612
CHANGE TO:
A1OR638
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
4
DISPLAY & TRIGGER LOGIC & PROCESSOR INTERFACE
Change resistor R638 (location 8J) to lOOK R.
Replace wire jumper W612 (location 8H) with diode CR612. See partial schemat~c
below.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 6012975
A10W612
M67731
*
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMM~TED EXCELLENE
TO
Date:
3-1 4-89
Change Reference:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
M68519
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B016108
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A18R2215
313-1222-00
RES,FXD,FILM: 2.2K OHM,5%,0.2W
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
13
POWER SUPPLY
Change the value of resistor R2215 (location 4E) to 2.2 K n .
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDU
*
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
C O M M ~ TO MCEUTN~
D
Date:
6-1 5-89
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M69142
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B020138
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
ADD:
A10C666
281-0819-00
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 33PF,5%,50V
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
@ DIAPLAY & TRIGGER LOGIC
& PROCESSOR INTERFACE
Add capacitor C666 (33 pF) in parallel with R666, grid location 5J.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
.
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
CXMM~TOMCEUMCE
6-21 -89
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M69448
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
SEE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A10
671-0387-05
8016284
CKT BOARD ASSY: MAIN
A10C425
A10C455
AlOC1101
A10C1102
281-0861 -00
281-0861-00
290-0183-00
290-0183-00
8016284
8016284
8020162
8020162
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 270 PF,5%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 270 PF,5%,50V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: 1UF,10%,35V
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: 1UF,10%,35V
313-1100-00
313-1100-00
8020162
8020162
RES,FXD.FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
AlOC1108
A10C1143
290-0183-00
281-0770-00
8020162
8020162
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT: 1UF,10%,35V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 1000 PF,20%,100V
A10R1108
313-1100-00
8020162
RES,FXD,FILM: 10 OHM,5%,0.2W
A10W1104
A10W1105
131-0566-00
131-0566-00
8020162
8020162
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225 L
BUS,CONDUCTOR: DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225 L
REMOVE:
AlOR1101
A10R1102
ADD:
Page 1 of 2
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
46
7
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Product:
2246A SERVICE
Date: 6-21 -89
Change Reference:
DESCRIPTION
M69448
Product Group
46
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
@ A AND B TRIGGER
SYSTEM
Change the value of capacitor -25
Change the value of capacitor -55
DIAGRAM
(grid location 25) to 270 pF.
(grid location 6J) to 270 pF.
@ DISTRIBUTIONPOWER
MAIN BOARD
The following list of changes to schematic 13 are illustrated with the partial schematic below.
Change the value of capacitor C1101 to 1 pF.
Change the value of capacitor C1101 to 1 pF.
Replace resistor R1101 with 0 R wire jumper W1104.
Replace resistor R1102 with 0 R wire jumper W1105.
Add capacitor C1108 (1 pF).
Add capacitor C1143 (1000 pF).
Add resistor R1108 (10 R).
n11(IO
10
*+7.5V~
TW
R1134
R1131
R11m
C818
,022
UlWl-LU24
11
H I)
M37
io
I
~ l l O ~ Y O ~ UIl l O W 0 9 3
C1160
.On$
+7.5V6Ta R1111
R1113
R1115
R1120
n1126
1 0
0
4
RllOll
10
CllW
' " %
em02
14
-7. avo
ra ~ s s e
:
:
@ U313-s
.
- & ?::$
,m
it= t S . 7 . N
-
a
is'
1
I,I
lo=
,-7.5v
)-I "
Inma
Page 2 of 2
Scans by ARTEK MEDLQ = & gt;
L
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMMITTED TO D(CELLENU
Date:
8-21 -89
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M70350
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B016352
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
ADD:
A25E1502
276-0635-00
CORE,EM: TORIOD,FERRITE 0.5 OD X 0.281 ID X 0.2
(OPTION 15)
DIAGRAM CHANGES
Add Toriod El502 to cable W1502 of the Channel 2 Signal Out Board (Option 15). All information regarding
Option 15 is contained in the insert C710589 in the Change Section of this manual. Refer to page 6 of
C710589 for the schematic diagram showing cable W1502.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDIA *
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
10-23-89
Product: 2246A SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
Change Reference:
C811089
Manual Part Number:
~ ~ M ~ ~ D ( M L E N C E
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
TEXT CHANGES
Page 1-7
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Replace the Characterlstlcs and Performance Requirement for " Sweep Linearity " with the following:
Sweep Linearity
0.5 sldiv to 5 nsldiv
2 nsldiv
+ 5%
+ 15%
Sweep Linearity applies over the center eight divisions. Excludes the
first 114 division or 25 ns from the start of the magnified sweep and
anything beyond the 100th magnified division.
Page 1 of 1
L
Scans by AR TEK MEDLQ = & gt;
lkktronk
a 3 ~ ~ r l TO MCEUENCE
-m~
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
11-08-89
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
C911189
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
TEXT CHANGES
Page 1-5
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Change:
Delay Match (CH 1 or CH 2 to
CH 3 or CH 4)
1 400 ps difference.
Page 4-10
Step 14. CH 1 to CH 4 Signal Delay Match
d. CHECK-that the leading edges of the two waveforms have s 0.2 horizontal divisions
separation at the center graticule line excluding trace width.
Page 1 of 1
Scam by AR TEK MEDL4 = .
=
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMM~ITEDTOEXCELLENU
Date:
11-1 3-89
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M69535
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
SEE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
Effective Serial Numbers:
B021073
CHANGE TO:
A18
670-9398-04
CKT BOARD ASSY: POWER SUPPLY
A18L2206
108-1319-00
INDUCTOR, 33 pH
DIAGRAM CHANGES
Effective Serial Numbers:
DIAGRAM
B021073
@ POWER SUPPLY
Change the value of inductor L2206 (grid location 6K) to 33 pH.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE
Date:
11-1 3-89
Change Reference:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
M68517
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
SEE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
Effective Serial Numbers:
B020259
CHANGE TO:
FIGURE 2
-22
CHASSIS, REAR
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
C O M M ~ TO DOCELLENCE
D
01-27-90
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M69143
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
SEE BELOW FOR EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS:
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A10
CKT BOARD ASSY: MAIN
A10U421
234-0239-31
8020862
QUICK CHIP:TRIGGER, IC PACKAGE
A10U431
234-0239-31
8020862
QUICK CHIP:TRIGGER, IC PACKAGE
A10C496
281-0864-00
8016066
CAF! FXD, CER Dl: 430 pF, 5% 100V (this capacitor
will need to be added to the backside of the board
from U421 pin 10 to U431 pin 13).
A10X421
136-1065-00
8020862
SKT, PL-IN ELEK: MICROKT, 28PIN LOW PROFILE
A1OX431
136- 1065-00
8020862
SKT, PL-IN ELEK: MICROKT, 28PIN LOW PROFILE
ADD:
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
@ A AND B TRIGGER SYSTEM
ADD:
C496 between pin 10 of U431 and pin 13 of U431.
Page 1 of 1
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
C O M M ~ TO DQCELLENCE
D
Date:
01-15- 90
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS :
Section 4
PERFORMANCE CHECK PROCEDURE
Change Step 6. Trigger LEVEL Control Range page
4-16 item c to read as follows:
c.
Increase leveled sine-wave generator output level until
a stably triggered display is just obtainable.
Change Step 2. PROBE ADJUST Output.
2.
PROBE ADJUST Output
Following item c. add this note.
NOTE
Remember to take in to account the oscilloscope
and probe specifications when determining the
accuracy of the PROBE ADJUST square wave signal.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDU = & gt;
C10/0190
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
03-1 3-90
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M68805
Manual Part Number:
I
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS: B020100
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LlST CHANGE
A1 6 Processor board CHANGE:
A16U2519
160-6501-00
MICROCKT, DGTL: NMOS, EPROM, PRGM
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LlST CHANGE
FIG. 2 CHASSIS CHANGE:
Item
2-1 3
333-3746-00
PANEL, FRONT
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
COMMIlTEDTDMICaLENn
Date:
Change Reference:
03-1 4-90
Product: 2246A SERVICE
M71374
Manual Part Number:
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS: B021137
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGE
A1 0 Maln board:
Add:
CR803
152-0141-02
CR807
152-0141-02
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW, SI, 30V,
150MA, 30V,D0-35
SEMICOND DVC,DI: SW, SI, 30V,
150MA, 30V,DO-35
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
@
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
The following list of changes to schematic 6 are illustratedwith the partial schematic below.
Added diode CR803 grid location 3G.
Added diode CR807 grid location 4G.
-
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA
*
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
C O M M ~ ~ ETO EXCELLENCE
D
Date:
03-1 6-90
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS: B021421
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGE
A1 6 Processor board CHANGE:
A16U2519
160-6501-04
MICROCKT, DGTL: NMOS, EPROM, PRGM
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4 *
M71945
070-6555-00
Product Group
46
L
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE
03-1 6-90
Change Reference
Product. 2246A SERVICE
M71784
Manual Part Number:
070-6555-00
Product Group
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBERS: B021440
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGE
A1 0 Main board
Change:
A10R932
A10R460
322-3237-00
313-1681-00
RES,FXD, FILM. 2 87K OHM,1%,0 2W,TC =TO.
RES,FXD, FILM: 680 OHM,5%, 0 2W
A10R941
31 1-2229-00
RES,VAR,NONWW TRMR,2500HM,20%
0 5W LINEAR
A10W906
131-0566-00
BUS,CONNECTOR DUMMY RES, 0 094 OD
X 223L WJWIRELEADS
O
Add:
Delete:
DIAGRAM
@
DIAGRAM CHANGES
A & B TRIGGER SYSTEM
Change R460 to 680 ohm g r ~ d
locallon 6K
DIAGRAM
0
Z-AXIS, CRT. PROBE ADJ, & CONTROL MUX
The following l~st changes to schemat~c are ~llustrated ~ t h part~al
of
7
w the
schemat~c
below
Change value of R932 to 2 87K g r ~ d
locallon 1H
Add R941 250 ohm tr~mmer r ~ d
g
locat~on H
1
Remove W906 g r ~ d
locat~on
1H
G
H
AJ -
7
--
Rq30
U930k
210
R934
U030B
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4
*
ADJ
46
lkktronk
COMMITTED TO EXCELLENCE
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
3-1 8-90
Product: 2246A SERVICE MANUAL
Change Reference:
M68361
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B020327
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHASSIS PARTS
CHANGE TO:
825
119-3564-00
FAN,TUBE,AXIAL: 12VDC,2.6W,3200 RPM,36 CFM
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
C O M M ~ D WELLENCE
TO
6-1 3-90
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NMMBER: B021509
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
A1 0 Main board
CHANGE TO:
A10C216
A10C217
DIAGRAM
281 -0775-01
281-0775-01
CAFFXD,CER Dl: 0.1 UF,20%,50V
CAP,FXD,CER Dl: 0.1 UF,20%,50V
@ DISTRIBUTIONPOWER
MAIN BOARD
Change the value of capacitor C216 to 0.1 LIF (grid location Bl).
Change the value of capacitor C217 to 0.1 LIF (grid location Bl).
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA *
M72115
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMM~TED TD EXCELLENCY?
11-26-90
Change Reference:
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Manual Part Number:
C11/1190
070-6555-00
Product Group
DESCRIPTION
46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
Page 4-1 5
Step 4. 150 MHz Trigger Sensitivity
Replace Step 4 entirely with the following procedure.
j.
150 MHz Trigger Sensitivity
Repeat the procedure for CH 3 and CH 4 (turn on the
appropriate VERTICAL MODE and move the test signal as required).
k.
Move test signal to the CH 1 input.
I.
4.
Set VERTICAL MODE to CH 1 (others off).
a. Set TRIGGER CPLG to DC.
b. Set leveled sine-wave generator to produce a 1.0
division display at 150 MHz.
c.
CHECK- that the display is stably triggered in DC,
LF REJ, and AC Trigger CPLG.
m. Remove the W BNC attenuator from the test signal
path.
d. Set:
Horizontal MODE
A/B SELECT
n. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a 2.2 division display amplitude at 100 MHz.
B
B Trigger
o.
e.
CHECK-that, using the Trigger LEVEL control, the
display can be stably triggered in DC, LF REJ, and
AC Trigger CPLG.
CHECK-that the display is stably triggered with
NOISE REJ Trigger CPLG.
p. Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a 0.5 division display amplitude at 100 MHz.
f.
Set:
Horizontal MODE
VERTICAL MODE
CH2, CH 3, and CH 4
VOLTSIDIV
A/B SELECT
TRIGGER CPLG
A
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
q. CHECK-that the display is not triggered in NOISE
REJ Trigger CPLG.
r.
Set leveled sine-wave generator output for a 1.0 division display amplitude at 100 MHz.
s.
CHECK-that the display is not triggered in HF REJ
Trigger CPLG.
t.
0.1 V
A Trigger
DC
Set:
g. Move test signal from CH 1 to the CH 2 input.
h.
i.
Set leveled sine-wave generator output to produce
a 1.0 division display amplitude at 150 MHz.
CHECK-that a stable display can be obtained.
Crhe Trigger LEVEL control may be adjusted to
improve the display stability.)
TRIGGER CPLG
Horizontal MODE
A/B SELECT
u.
DC
B
B Trigger
Repeat parts n through u for the B Trigger.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDL4
*
L
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
C O M M ~ TO D~CELLENCE
D
Date:
4-9-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M70911
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B021631
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A18RT2201
307-1551-00
RES, THERMAL, 20 OHM, lo%, NTC
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
@ POWER SUPPLY
Change the value of resistor RT2201 (location 1A) to 20 a.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMMITED TO EXCELLENCE
4-26-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE MANUAL
Change Reference:
M72728
Manual Part Number:
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
DESCRIPTION
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B021669
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
Fig &
Index
No.
Part No.
Qty
NAME & DESCRIPTION
CHANGE TO:
1-5
3-14
3-40
213-0942-00
213-0942-00
213-0942-00
REMOVE:
3-41
210-0949-00
Page 1 of 1
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4
*
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMMITTED TO DQCELLENCX
5-2-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE MANUAL
Change Reference:
M71065
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
AlOA1'117
AlOAT117
307-2135-02
307-2135-03
8020944
8021682
8021681
AlTENUAT0R:lM OHM AlTENUATOR NETWORK
AlTENUAT0R:lM OHM AlTENUATOR NETWORK
A10AT127
A10AT127
307-2135-02
307-2135-03
8020944
8021682
8021681
AlTENUAT0R:lM OHM AlTENUATOR NETWORK
AlTENUAT0R:lM OHM AlTENUATOR NEMlORK
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 6021527
REPLACEABLE MECHANICAL PARTS LlST CHANGES
Fig &
Index
No.
Part No.
Qty
NAME & DESCRIPTION
CHANGE TO:
3-34
337-3358-02
1
SHIELD,AlTEN:FRONT,MAIN BD
AlTACHING PARTS
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDU = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
W M M ~ D ~ELLENCE
TO
Date:
5-1 3-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE MANUAL
Change Reference:
M73903
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B026033
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A10R113
A10R123
313-1750-00
313-1750-00
RES, FXD FILM:75 OHM,5%,0.2W
RES, FXD FILM:75 OHM.5%,0.2W
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
0
VERTICAL INPUTS
Change the value of resistor R113 (location 1G) to 75 fl.
Change the value of resistor R123 (location 3G) to 75 fl.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDIA = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
~ M ~ ~ D ~ C E U E N C E
Date:
5-9-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE
Change Reference:
M73905
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: 6026033
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
AlOR461
322-3143-00
RES,FXD,FILM:301 OHM,1%,0.2W
DIAGRAM CHANGES
DIAGRAM
@ A AND 6 TRIGGER
SYSTEM
Change the value of resistor R461 (location 6K) to 301 a.
Page 1 of 1
Scans by ARTEK MEDU = & gt;
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
COMMITTEOTD EXCELLENCE
5-1 5-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE MANUAL
Change Reference:
M74062
Manual Part Number:
DESCRIPTION
070-6555-00
Product Group
(In reference to Change Reference: C710589)
EFFECTIVE SERIAL NUMBER: B026032
REPLACEABLE ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST CHANGES
CHANGE TO:
A25
A25W1502
671 -1 153-01
174- 1649-01
CIRCUIT BD ASSYCHANNEL 2 OUT
CABLE ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,21.25 L,W/HARMONICA
ADD:
A25J1502
131-0590-00
Page 1 of 1
Scans by AR TEK MEDL4 = & gt;
46
MANUAL CHANGE INFORMATION
Date:
Change Reference:
5-24-91
Product: 2246A SERVICE
C1a059 1
Manual Part Number:
COMM~TTED DQELLENQ
TO
070-6555-00
DESCRIPTION
Product Group 46
EFFECTIVE ALL SERIAL NUMBERS
Page 4-1 0
Step 16. CH 1 and CH 2 Vertical Bandwidth
Replace Step 16 with the following procedure.
e. CHECK-that the displayed signal amplitude is 4.2
divisions or more.
16. CH 1 and CH 2 Vertlcal Bandwldth
a. Set:
XI0 MAG
Vertical MODE
SECIDIV
CH 1 VOLTSIDIV
CH 1 and CH 2 Input
COUPLING
Trigger SOURCE
Horizontal POSITION
Off
CH 1 (CH 3 and
CH 4 off)
0.1 ms
2 mV
f.
Set the generator Frequency Range and Frequency
Variable controls to create a 100-MHz output signal.
g. Set the VOLTSIDIV switch to 5 mV.
h. CHECK-that the displayed signal amplitude is 4.2
divisions or more. Repeat this check for all the
VOLTSIDIV settings of 5 mV through 1 V
.
DC
VERT
12 o'clock
1.
b. Connect the leveled sine-wave generator (SG 503)
output to the CH 1 input using a 50 fi precision BNC
coaxial cable and a 50 fi BNC termination.
Move the test signal to the CH 2 input.
j.
Set:
Vertical MODE
d. Set the generator Frequency Range and Frequency
Variable controls to create a 90-MHz output signal.
CH 2 (CH 1 off)
CH 2 VOLTSIDIV
c. Set the leveled sine-wave generator output for a
six-division signal amplitude at 50 kHz.
2mV
-
k. Repeat the complete Bandwidth check procedure
fcr Channel 2.
Page 1 of 1
1
Scam by ARTEK MEDL4 = & gt;